/ y?
DEPARTMENT: OF THEE INTERIOR.
UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY.
F. V. HAYDEN, U. S. GEOLOGIST-IN-CHARGE.
MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS.-No. 7.
ETHNOGRAPHY AND PHILOLOGY
OF THE
HIDATSA INDIANS.
BY
WASHINGTON  MATTHEWS,
ASSIST4ANT SURGEON UNITED STATES ARMY.
WASHINGTON: >
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE.
1877.
t
-.44ap. 0 
— I
7~'
. I 
PREFATORY NOTE.
UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL AND
GEOGRAPHICAL SURVEY OF TIlE TERRITORIES,
Washington, D. C., June 10, 1877.
During the year 1854, while engaged in exploring the then almost
unknown country along the Upper Missouri and its tributaries, the
writer of this note commenced the work of collecting vocabularies of the
languages and other ethnological data respecting the Indians of the
Northwest. Ile continued this work at intervals during a period of
about six years, and the materials thus accumulated were finally published
in 1862 in the "Transactions" of the American Philosophical Society
of Philadelphia, under the title of "Contributions to the Ethnography
and Phirology of the Indian Tribes of the Missouri Valley". A brief
sketch of the llidatsa Indians, and an incomplete vocabulary of their
language, was included in that work.
The author of the present volume, Dr. Washington Matthews, assistant surgeon United States Army, spent some years among these Indians while stationed at a military post in performance of his official duties as a medical officer of the Army. During this period he paid great
attention to the same subject, observing the manners, customs, and
other characteristics of these Indians, and making a close and careful
study of their language.  In this way were secured the materials upon
which, elaborated with the utmost care and with conspicuous ability,
the present important memoir is based.
Dr. Matthews's earlier studies of the suibject resulted in a HlidatsaEnglish and English-Hidatsa vocabulary, prefaced by anl essay on the
grammatical structure of the language.  A small edition (100 copies) was
printed by Mr. J. G. Shea as one of his series of American Linguaistics.
At the request of the writer,-who earnestly desired to push to completion the work he had long since undertaken, but was compelled by pressure of other engagements to suspend, Dr. Matthews spent much time
in entirely remodeling and greatly enlarging the scope of his paper, to
include the ethnography as well as the philology of the tribe.  His final
result is herewith presented.
Besides revising and addling much new matter to the vocabularies, Dr.
Matthews has here made those other important additions, without which
the article could hardly have been considered monograplhic. The whole
of the "'ethnography " and " philology " are new.  The manner in which
the work has been accomplished reflects great credit upon the author
and upon the Medical corps of the Army, whose capacity for scientific
work Dr. Matthews honorably illustrates in his own person. Of the
value of the work as a contribution to American Ethnology, little need
III
A, ,.- 11, V-, (7     
PREFATORY NOTE.
be said; I regard it as the most important memoir on our aboriginal
Indian languages which has appeared since the Dakota grammar and
dictionary, by Rev. S. R. Riggs, was published by the Smithsonian Institution.
It was originally intended to publish this treatise as a portion of a
general work on Indian ethnography now in course of preparation by
the undersigned. The delay in its appearance which such course would
entail, and the great merit of the work here accomplished, render it desirable, in justice both to the author and to the subject, that it should
appear as a separate publication.
As circumstances rendered it impossible for the author to attend personally to the work during its passage through the press, the duty of
superintending its publication devolved upon Dr. Elliott Coues, U. S.
A., to whom the thanks of the Survey are due for the careful manner in
which he has accomplished the task.
F. V. HAYDEN,
United States Geologist.
IV 
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
-ETH NOGRAPHY.
PART I.
age.
.1
1
1
$
8
9
9
10
11
12
15
16
17
18
23
27
28
VILLAGE AT FORT BERTHOLD.........................................-....
Location....................................................................
Dwellings...................................................................
Drying frames-......................................................
Caches -.........................................................-..
Cemetery; burial-......-........................................
Places of worship... —-------------------------------------------—.
Fortifications-...........,..........................................0
Farms and farming...................................................
Inhabitants of the village_..................................................
Amahami..........................-..............................
Population........................................................
Conversation................................................................
Arts-....................................................................
Food, etc...................................................................
Inter-tribal trade.....................................................
Intercourse with whites.....................................................
PART II.
THE HIDATSA TRIBE -...........................................-........33
Names of the tribe-................................................33
History.-........................................................3.
Character............................................. —.................
Appearance........................4........................................
Ceremonies-......................................... —...........4.
Mythology and superstitions..........................................47
Marriage, etc-......................................................2
Names............................................................
Relationship ----------------------------------------------------------------
Hunting -.......................................................-.........
Warfare-.........................................................60
Stories......................................................................
Divisions of time-.......................................7.
PHILOLOGY.
Classification of the Hidatsa language-.....-. —..-.... —....-...................
Relations of Dakota to Hidatsa.. - -...... —........-......... — -..-.........
Relations of Crow to Hidatsa..................................................
Some difficulties in the study of the Hidatsa.. - - -....-.-... —................
Sonant character..-. —... —...-.-.-.. —-....-...- -..-.-... ——... — -.4.......
V
33
33
36
40
42
45
47
52
54
55
57
60
62
70
75
75
77
80
84 
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Page.
HIDATSA GRAMMAR:
LETTERS.................................................................... 89
Essential letters........................................................... 89
Non-essential letters...............e.,.,,,.................         90
Remarks.................................................................. 90
SYLLABLES ------—.. —----------------— 91
WORDS.................................................................. -------------- -- 92
Nouns.................................................................... 92
Noun8 -   -------------------------— 92
Primitive nouns......,.....-              -......,',,,92
Derivative nouns........................................................ 93
Diminutives.....................................................-.-. -------— 95
Compound nouns..................................... 95
Properties of nouns...................................................... 95
Proper nouns..............,,.,,.,,.,,...,,,...,,,,,,,...........,,,97
Syntax of nouns...................                                98
Pronouns —-------------------------------—............ —-98
Personal pronouns...................................................... 98
Relative pronouns............................... 101
Interrogative  pronouns..................................................  101
Demonstrative pronouns................................................. 101
Syntax of pronouns...................................................... 100
Vebs.....................................................................    102
Verbal roots............................................................ 103
Prefixes and suffixes.....................................................   103
Properties of verbs...................................................... 106
Conjugation of verbs......-...-..........                          108
Unconjugated verbs —--------......... —.......,..........,115
Irrengulrandectied verbs.............................................................. 115
Irregular and defective verbs —--------.                          115
Compound verbs ------—...... —..... —116
Syntax of verbs......................................................... 116
Adjecth,es.......... -.... -.   -. —.....-.-......-.......-.116
Numerals...-...... 116
Syntax of adjectives................. —----------------------------------------—. 118
Adverbs.......................... 119
Prepositions.............................................................. 120
CosjUnCtions —--------------------— 121
CoInterjeunctions............................................................... 121
Interjections............................................................... 121
HIDATSA DICTIONARY. 125
LOCAL NAMES.............................................................. 210
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY........-.................... 215
VI 
ETHN()GRANP -fil.
-1 
0 
ETHNOGRAPH Ye
PART I.
THE VILLAGE AT FORT BERTHOLD, AND ITS INHABITANTS.
~ 1. The Hidatsa, MAinnetaree, or Grosventre Indians,
are one of the three tribes which at present inhabit the pernmanent village at Fort Berthold, Dakota Territory, and hunt
on the waters of the Upper Missouri and Yellowstone Rivers,
in Northwestern Dakota and Eastern Montana.
The history of this tribe is so intimately connected with
that of the politically-allied tribes of the Aricarees and Mandans that we cannot well give an account of one without
making some mention of the others.  In this first part of the
Ethnography, all the tribes are included.
~ 2. LOCATION.-An arid prairie-terrace, some four miles
wide, stretching southward to the Missouri from the base of
bluffs which form the edge of a higher plain, becomes gradually narrower as it approaches the river, and terminates in a
steep bluff of soft rock and lignite which overhangs the river.
On the southern extremity of this terrace, near the brow of
the bluff, stand the Indian village, and what remains, since a
recent fire, of the old trading-post of Fort Berthold.  This is
on the left bank of the Missouri, in latitude 47~ 34' north, and
longitude 101~ 48' west, nearly. About five years ago, a large
reservation was declared for them  in Dakota and Montana,
along the Missouri and Yellowstone Rivers. Fort Berthold is
in the northeast corner of this reservation.
~ 3. DWELLINGS. -The village consists of a number of 
ETHINOGRAPIIY OF THE  IIDADATSA INDIANSF.
houses* built very closely together, without any attempt at
regularity of position. The doors face in every possible direction; and there is great uniformity in the appearance of the
lodges; so it is a very difficult matter to find one's way among
them.
Oldi-style lodges.-Most of the houses of the village were
in 1865 peculiar, large, earth-covered lodges, such as were
built by various tribes of Indians of the plains, in the valley
of the Missouri, and so often, with varying accurac, described
by travelers.+  Eachl one of these lodges consists of a wooden
frame, covered with willows, hay, and earth.  A  hole in the
top, which lets in the light and lets out the smoke, and a doorway on one side, are the only apertures in the building.  The
door is made of raw-hide stretched on a frame, or of puncheons,
and it is protected by a narrow shed or entry from six to ten feet
long.  Over the smoke-holes of many of the lodges are placed
frames of wicker-work, on which skins are spread to the windward in stormy weather to keep the lodges fromi getting smoky.
Sometimes bull-boats are used for this purpose. On the site
of a proposed lodge, they often dig down a foot or more, in
order to find earth compact enough to form a good floor; so,
in some l odgles, the floors are lower than the general surface of
the ground on which'the village stands.   The floor is of earth
III the fall of 1872, Dr. C. E. McCllesniey, tlihenii physician at the Bertlholl
agency, counted; with great care, th b,ihlilgs in the village, anxl, ii a letter, gave
iiie the following results: —
Old-style (round) lodges of Rees........................................ 43
Log-cabins of Rees......................................... 28
Total   number   of  houses  of  Rees.........................................  71
Oh1l-style lodges of Grosventres and Mandans................. 35
Log-cabins of Grosveiitres and Manda-s -------------—................................ 69
Total number of houses of Gi'osventres anlga Maiidans -. —------------- ---
Total number of houses of Gi-osventres and Maiidans -......... -                                 104
Total of houses in village............................................ 175
He remarks:-" I could not separate the Grosventres frol[I the Mnda')d-s, owing to the
stupidity of the interpreter.  If anything, this number is under, certainly not over;
l)ut it does not vary more than ten."-Soine five or six houses, occupied by white men
wi,h Indianl families, were probably not included in this enumeration.
t Lewis and Clarke, pp. 73, 78.-Gass, pp. 72, 73.-Maximili-an, p. 343.-De
Smnet, pp. 76-77, and others.-Comnpare with descriptions of Kanzas, Omaha,  and
Pawnee lodg_es in Long'l expedition, pp. 120, 200, 436.
4 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HI])ATSA INDIANS.
and has in its center a circular depression, for a fire-place,
about a foot deep, and three or four feet wide, with an edging
of flat rocks.  These dwellings, being from thirty to forty feet
in diaenuter, from ten to fifteen feet high in the center, and from
five to seven feet high at the e aves, are quite commodious.   The
labor of constructing them is performed mostly by the women;
but, in lifting and setting the heavier beams, the men assist. If,
with the aid of steel axes obtained from the whites, the task of
building such a house is no easy one at. this day, how difficult
it must have been a century ago, when the stone ax was their
best implement, and when the larger logs had to be burned
through in order that pieces of suitable length might be obtaimed!
The frame of a lodge is thus made:  A number of stout
posts, from ten to fifteen, according, to the size of the lodge,
and rising to the height of about five feet above the surface of
the earth, are set about ten feet apart in a circle.  On the tops
of thems posts, soli bl zns are laid, extending from one to
another.  Then, toward the center of the lodge, four more
posts are erected, of much greater diameter than the outer posts,
and rising to the height of ten or more feet above the ground.
These four posts stand in the corners of a square of about
fifteen feet, and their tops are connected with four heavy logs
or beams laid horizontally.  From the four central beams to the
smaller external beams, long poles, as rafters, are stretched at
an angcle of about 30~ with the horizon; and from the outer
beams to the earth a number of shorter poles are laid at an
angle of about 45~.  Finally, a number of saplings or rails
are laid horizontally to cover the space between the four central beams, leaving only a hole for the combined skylight and
chimney.  This frame is then covered withl willows, hay, and
earth, as before mentioned; the covering being of equal depth
over all parts of the frame.  Earlier writers speak of the suppDrting-posts of the lodge as being forked.  Nowadays, they
seldom take the trouble to obtain forked sticks for this purpose.
From the above description, it will be seen that the outline
of a vertical section, or of the elevation of such a lodge, is necessarily an irregular hexagon, while that of its ~round-plan is
5. 
ETHNOGRAPIHY OF TIlE IIIDATSA INDIANS.
polygonal, the angles being equal in number to the shorter
uprights. Prince Maximilian's artist usually sketches the lodge
very correctly; but Mr. Catlin invariably gives an incorrect
representation of its exterior.  Wherever he depicts a Mandan,
Arickaree, or Minnetaree lodge, he makes it appear as an almost
exact hemisphere, and always omits the entry.  It would seem
that, in filling in his sketches, he adopted the hemisphere as a
convenient symbol for a lodge.  The authors referred toby
name in the foot-note on page- speak of the entry or passage.*
A partition of puncheons, poles, or hurdles is often raised
between the fire-place and the door, particularly in cold weather,
to shelter the group around the fire-place when the door is
opened. Mats, hurdles, hair-pillows, and buffalo-robes laid on the
ground constitute the seats.  Curtained bedsteads are arranged
around the circumference of the lodge, between the shorter
uprights.   Arms, implements, household-utensils, medicinebags, etc., are hung from pegs on the various suLpporting-posts
of the lodge. A wooden mortar, wherein corn and mneat are
pounded, is set in the earthen floor. The space between the
outer row of supporting-posts and the outer wall is called
'atuti', or bottom of the lodge, and in it stored bull-boats, skinlodges and various other articles; here, too, we usually find the
sudatory. ValuLable horses are often housed at night in these
lodges, in a pen near the door; but the residents of the loghouses, to be described hereafter, keep horses in separate sheds
outside.
Log-houses.-Every winter, until 1866, the Indians left
their permanent village, and, moving some distance up the Missouri Valley, built temporary quarters, usually in the center of
heavy forests and in the neighborhood of buffalo.  The chief
objects of this movement were that they might have fuel c(,nvenient, and not exhaust the supply of wood in the neighborhood of the permanent village. It was also advisable that,
during a portion of the year at least, they should inot harass
the game near home. The houses of the winter-villages resem
* Perhaps it would be well to illustrate this with a copy of plate 47, vol. 1, of
Catlin, and a copy of the figure on p. 343 of Maximilian.
6 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
bled much the log-cabins of our own western pioneers. They
were neatly built, very warm, had regular fire-places and
chimneys built of sticks and mud, and square holes in the roofs
for the admission of light.  Ten years ago, there were some
cabins of this description in the permanent village at Fort Berthold; every year since, they are becoming gradually more numerous and threaten to eventually supplant the original earthcovered lodges. By reference to th6 note on page 4, it will be
seen that, in 1872, the former outnumbered the latter by about
nineteen.
Skin-lodges.-The practice of building winter-quarters is
now abandoned.  As game has recently become very scarce
in their country, they are obliged to travel immense distances,
and almost constantly, when they go out on their winter-hunts.
Requiring, therefore, movable habitations, they take with- them,
onl their journeys, the ordinary skin-lodges, or "4tepees", such as
are used by the Dakotas, Assiniboines, and other nomadic tribes
in this region. Such lodges, too, they have always used on
their summer-hunts, and on all long journeys except with warparties.  The skin-lodges of the prairie Indians have been so
often described and depicted that any further reference to them
in this paper would be unnecessary. It is enough to say that
the tribes here considered, construct them in the same manner
as do their neighbors, often ornamenting them with paintings,
quill-embroideries, and other decorations.
Itiunting-lodyes.- In one of his "Solitary Rambles", Palliser
found, on the Turtle Mountain, four days journey from Fort
Berthold, in the spring of 1858, a Minnetaree hunting-lodge of
which he says:-"They had built a triangular lodge of long
wooden poles, like hop-poles, piling them in the shape of a
cone, and so closely as to render the hut bullet-proof, a necessary precaution, as they could never venture there save in fear
of their lives, the position lying in the regular pass of the Sioux,
when they go to war with either them or the Crows. We took
possession of the hut, not sorry to feel ourselves in a bulletproof shelter, in a place where, I must admit, we ran some risk
of being surprised by an Indian war-party."*
*p.266.
7 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
In the winter of 1871, while hunting with a party of In dians from the Berthold village, in the bad-lands of the Little
Missouri, I spent three nights in a lodge of exactly the same
kind, which was quite old, and had often served as the tempo rary shelter of Hidatsa hunting-parties.  It stood in an excel lent but dangerous game-region, some four or five days journey
from Fort Berthold, and was built for the convenience of parties composed only of men who found it advisable to visit that
neighborhood without tellnts or other incumbrances. There are
probably other lodges of this kind in the country around Berthold, but I have seen only this one.
4. DRYING-FRAMES, corn-scaffolds, or, as some call them,
"gridirons", stand in various parts of the village, and arequite
numerous. They must resemble much the drying-frames of
the agricultural tribes of the far east and south, if we are to
judge by the descriptions given. They seem to differ in shape
from those of the Omahas-of which the writer has seen photographs, but not the originals-by having the supporting-posts
longer, and rising above the floor.  They are made by setting
in the ground some six or eight saplings, which rise to the
height of twelve or fifteen feet. To these, at the height of
seven or eight feet, cross-pieces are lashed; and on the latter
a floor of poles or willow hurdles is laid; smaller poles are
lashed to the tops of thie upright supports.  Corn and other
vegetables, meat, robes, etc., are dried on these frames; and
-the labor of preparing and cleaning corn is done on the hurdlefloor, or on the ground underneath.
5. CACHES.  The numerous caches, or pits, for storing
grain, are noteworthy objects in the village. In sumlnmer, when
they are not in use, they are often left open, or are carelessly
covered, and may entrap the unwary stroller. When these Indians
have harvested their crops, and before they start on their winterhunt, they dig their caches, or clear' out those dug in previous
years.  A cache is a cellar, usually round, with a small opening above, barely large enough to allow a person to descend;
when finished, it looks much like an ordinary round cistern.
Reserving a small portion of corn, dried squash, etc., for winter
use, they deposit the remainder in these subterranean store
8 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
houses, along with household-utensils  and other articles of
value which they wish to leave behind.  They then fill up the
orifices with earth, which they trample down and rake over;
thus obliterating every trace of the excavation. Some caches
are made under the floors of the houses, others outside, in
various parts of the village-grounds; in each case, the distance
and direction from  some door, post, bedstead, fire-place, or
other object is noted, so that the stores may be found on the
return of the owners in the spring.  Should  an enemy enter
the village while it is temporarily deserted, the goods are safe
from fire and theft. This method of secreting property has
long been in use among many tribes, has been adopted by
whites living on the plains, and is referred to in the works of
many travelers.
~ 6. CEMETIERY.-BURIALS.-On the prairie, a shlort distance
behind the village, are scattered around'the scaffolds and
the graves whereon  and wherein  are deposited  the dead.
Formerly, all who died in the village were placed on scaffolds,
as is the custom with most of the Missouri Valley tribes; but
the practice of burying in the ground, after the manner of the
Europeans and Arickarees, is gradually becoming more common; and every year the scaffolds decrease, and the graves
increase in number. When at a distance from their village
on their hunts, if encamped in the neighborhood of timber,
they lay the corpses in the branches of the trees instead of
building scaffolds.
~ 7. PLACEs OF wonsuIP.-There are, in the village, two
open spaces, which, although of irregular shape, may b~e called
squares; one of these is in the Mandan, the other in the
Arickaree quarter.  Beside each square stands a large round
"medicine-lodge ", or temple, built as described in the second
paragraph of ~ 3, which is used for purposes that, in a general
way, are called religious.
In the center of the Mandan square is a small circular
palisade, about six feet high and four feet in diameter, made of
neatly-hewn puncheons set closely together. It has somewhat
the appearance of a large barrel, and is emblematic of the ark
in which, according to Mandan mythology, the sole survivor
9 
ETItNOGRAPHY OF THE IIIDATSA INDIANS.
of the Deluge was saved. The square, the medicine-lodge,
with its four poles in front, surmounted by sacrificial effigies,
and the ark, as they may be seen at Fort Berthold to-day,
seem to be the almost exact counterparts of those which were
seen in the old Mandan village at Fort Clarke, in 1832 and 1833,
by George Catlin and the Prince of New-Wied, if we are to
judge by the drawings they have given us. Within the temple
and around the ark, the Mandans still perform the ceremony of
the Okeepa, which Catlin so accurately describes.  The awful
severities of the rite have, however, been somewhat mitigated
since his day.
The medicine-lodge of the Arickarees is larger than that
of the Mandans, and is used for,a greater variety of ceremonies.  Some  of these performances, consisting of ingenious
tricks of jugglery and dances, representative of various hunts,
we might be inclined to call theatrical rather than religious.
Probably these Indians consider them both worshipful and entertaining.  It is often hard to tell how much of a religious
ceremony is intended to propitiate the unknown powers, and
how much to please the spectators.
The Grosventres, or Hidatsas, have no house especially
devoted to their "medicine".  Some of their minor rites are
performed in ordinary dwellings, in temporary houses, or in
the open air. Their most important ceremony is conducted in
a structure of willows erected for the occasion around a tall
forked log.  After the ceremony (described in S 22), the log, or
pole, is left standing until the forces of nature throw it down.
Several of these logs, in various stages of decay, may be seen
on the prairie between the village and the cemetery.
8.  FORTIFICATIONS.-Many  travelers have  described
their towns as being fortified,* sometimes with walls, but
usually with ditches and stockades, or with stockades alone.
The latter system of defense was in use at the village of Fort
Berthold until the winter of 1865, when they cut down the
palisades for fire-wood; and they have never since restored
them. The presence of United States troops in their neigh    * Lewis and Claike, pp.69, 70, 72, 73, 74, 85, 84, etc.-Maximilian, p. 342.-Catlin,
N. A. Indians, pp. 73, 204.
10 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
borhood, and the growsing weakness of the Dakotas, were probably the causes which led them to discontinue their fortifications.
~ 9. FARMS AND FARMING.-From the base of the prairieterrace described in ~ 2, the bottomlands of the Missouri
extend to the east and to the west, up and down the river. In
the neighborhood of the village, they are covered partly with
forest-trees, willows, and low brush, but chiefly with the little
fields or gardens of these tribes.
Five years ago, all the land cultivated around the village
consisted of little patches, irregular in form and of various
sizes, which were cleared out among the willows. The patches
were sometimes separated from one another by trifling willowfences;  but the boundaries were more commonly made by
leaving the weeds and willows uncut, or small strips of ground
uncultivated, between the fields.   Every w6man in the village
capable of working had her own piece of ground, which she
cultivated with a hoe; but some of the more enterprising paid
the traders in buffalo-robes to plow their land. They raised
the plants which nearly all the agricultural tribes of the temperate regions cultivated *at the time of the discovery of
Anierica-corn, squashes, beans, and tobacco. They also improved the growth of the wild sunflower, the seeds of which
they eat. Their system of tillage was rude. They knew
nothing of the value of manuring the soil, changing the seed,
or alternating the crops.  Perhaps they had little need of such
knowledge; for when the soil was worn out, they abandoned
it; and there was no stint of land in the wilderness.  Sometimes, after a few years of rest, they would resume the cultivation of a worn field that was quite near the village, for
proximity lent some value to the land; but they had no regular system of fallowing.  They often planted a dozen grains
of corn or more to the hill, and did not hoe very thoroughly.
Withini the last few years, there has been an improvement
in their farming.  The bottom to the west of the village is still
divided up and cultivated in the old way; but the bottom to
the east and a part of the upland have been broken up by
the Indian agency, fenced, and converted into a large field. A
11 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
portion of this field is cultivated (chiefly by hired Indians) for
the benefit of tile agency, and the rest'has been divided into
si1all tracts each to be cultivated by a separate family foriits
own benefit.  Potatoes, turnips, and other  vegetables have
been introduced.  Thie men apply themselves willingly to the
labors of the field; and the number of working men is constantly increasing.
The Arickarees and Mandans have doubtlessly tilled the
sail for many centuries.  Their accounts of the origin of corn
are mminled with their earliest nmyths and traditions.  There
are somua reasons for believing that the Arickarees represent
an older race of farmers than the Mandans; for their religiouts
ceremonnies connected with planting are the more numerous,
and they honor the corn with a species of worship.   In every
Arickaree lodge, there is a large ear of corn, which has lasted
for generations, sticking out of the mouth of a medicine-bag.
At their feasts, they make offerings to the corn by rubbing a
piece of meat on it, while they pray to it for plentiful harvests,
and address it by the name of "mother".  The Hidatsas claimn
to have had no knowleldge of corn until they first ate it firom
thie trench-ers of the Mandans;  ana they have no important
ceremonies connected with the harvesting, yet they cultivated
it loni-  before the advent of the white man.
In favorable years, they had good harvests, and were able
to sell corn to other Indians and to their traders, besides keeping all they wanted for their own use.  But they are not
always thus fortunate for the soil of their country, even that
on the Missouri bottoms, is not very rich; the summer season
is short, with early and late frosts; the climate is dry; long
droughts often prevail, to guard aga,inst which they have no
systemn of irrigationi; and, lastly, the grasshoppers-the plague
of the Missouri Valley farmer  have often devoured the crops
that had escaped all other enemies, and left the Indian with
little more tllan seed enough for the coming spring..
~ 10. INHABITAN'rS OF THE VILLAGE.-W[hen Lewis and
Clarlke ascended the Missouri, in 1804, they found four tribes of
agricultural Indians, numerous and prosperous, inhabiting the
Upper Missouri Valley, west of the Dakota nation.  They had
12 
ETIINOGRAPHY OF THE IIIDATSA INDIANS.
eight permanently inhabited towns, others which they lived in
only temporarily, and a number more which they had abandoned
and allowed to go to ruin.  They are spoken of in Lewis and
Clarke's journal as the "Ricaras," "Mandans," "Minnetarees,"
and "Ahnahaways."  All that are left of the four tribes are
now gathered together in this one village, at Fort Berthold,
which does not probably number 2,500 souls. The remains,
now nearly obliterated, of their old towns, may be traced on
nearly every prairie-terrace adjacent to the Missouri, along six
hundred miles of its course, from the mouth of the Lower
White-Earth to the mouth of the Little Missouri. The Indians
at Fort Berthold are, however, now generally referred to as
"the three tribes"; for one of the nations spoken of by Captain Lewis-that which he calls Alinahaways is no10 longer an
organized tribe, but has been merged into the Minnetarees.
(See ~ 11.)
Arickarees.-The first-mentioned tribe is known by the
various names of Arikaras, Ricaras, Arickarees, and Rees, all
of which are from their Mandan name, Arlkara.  They are
related to the Pawnees of the Platte Valley, from whom they
separated more than a century ago.  In 1804, they were found
living farther down the Missouri than the Hidatsa and Mandan
tribes, and were at war with the latter. They made peace
in the course of time, and gradually followed the other
tribes up the Missouri, building  new villages  and abandoning  old ones as they went.   In August,  1862, they
moved to Fort Berthold, and began to erect houses there
beside those of the Mandans and MAinnetarees.  These three
tribes have ever since occupied the same permanent village.
Descriptions of the Arickarees, as they were seen at different
periods, may be found in the works of Lewis and Clarke,
Catlin, Maximilian, and Hayden. Lewis and Clarke give
accounts of many of their early migrations, and the lastnamed three authors furnish vocabularies of their language.
The Mandans, about a hundred years ago, lived in several
villages near the imouth of Heart River. From this neighborhood, they moved up the Missouri, stopping and building
villages at different localities.* In 1804, they were found
* For an account of these muovemnents, see Lewis and Clarke, pp. 83-85.
1 3 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
dwelling in two towns about four miles below the mouth of
Knife River. One of these towns was named Md'tutahanke,
Mitutahankish, or, as Maximilian writes it, "Mih-tutta-hangkusch," meaning Lower Village.  The other was called Ruptari
or Nuptadi.  They were almost exterminated by the smallpox in 1837, after which, for a time, they occupied only one
village. In 1845, when the Hidatsas moved away from Knife
River, some of the Mandans went with them, and others followed at different times afterward.  For  a short time, it
appears that a few Mandan families occupied the old Amahami
village.- We have an account of some moving up to the village at Fort Berthold as late as 1858, and of others still
remaining at the mouth of Knife River at the same time.*
The word Mandan seems to be a corruption of the Dakota
name Matani or Mawatani.  Previous to 1837, they called
themiselves simply Numakaki, i. e., People, Men.  They sometimes  spoke of themselves  and  the Minnetarees together
as Nu'weta, Ourselves. A large band of their tribe was called
Siposka-numakaki, Prairie-hen People, or Grouse Men.t This
name, Mr. Catlin, in his first work, renders "People of the
pheasants",: and, in his last work, presents in the shape of
"Nu-mah-ka'-kee (pheasants)",~ and then, from this translation,
leaves us to draw the "important inference" that the Mandans
once lived in the Ohio Valley.   They now often call themselves Metutahanke, after their old village below Knife
River.
Captains Lewis and Clarke, Mr. Catlin, the Prince of Neuwied, and Dr. Hayden have written very full accounts of this
tribe, and all but the first-named explorers present vocabularies of their language.  The work of Prince Maximilian
contains the most accurate and extensive information regarding their customs and manners. Notwithstanding the great
changes in the tribe since 1834, the majority of his notes
might be used without alteration in describing the Mandans of
Boller, pp. 35,36.
t The Mandan name Siposka (Hidatsa, sitska or tsitska) is applied to the Tetrao
phasianellus (Linn.) or Sharp-tailed Grouse, the prairie-hen of the Upper Missouri.
J N. A. Indians, vol. i, pp. 80, 178; vol. ii, p. 260.
O-kee-pa, pp. 5, 44.
14 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF IlHE HIDATSA INDIANS.
to-day. In a few cases, however, I believe that the deductions
which he drew from his observations were incorrect.*
Minnetarees.-Since the other one of the three tribes, the
Hidatsas or Minnetarees, forms the principal subject of this
essay, it is spoken of at length; the description forming the
second part of this sketch.
11. AMAHAMI.-The people who, by Lewis and Clarke,
are generally called Ahnahaways, and, ii this dictionary, Ama ami, were closely allied to the Hidatsa, and spoke a language
differing but slightly from that of the latter; yet they occupied
a separate village and long maintained a distinct tribal organization. Their village, in 1804, was at the mouth of Knife River,
and was one of three villages which for many years stood on
the banks of that stream. (See ~ 19.) In 1804, they were estimnated as numbering about fifty warriors.t In 1833-'34, their
village was said to contain eighteen houses.t  These estimates
indicate that there was no material change in their nuinbers
during the intervening thirty years. After the epidemic of
1837, the whole or the greater part of the survivors joined the
Hidatsa, and, as before stated, merged into the latter. In what
year this fiusion took place, I was unable to determine; it may
have been gradual.  A few of the Amahamis perhaps identified themselves with the Mqndans. In 1858, after the Hidatsa
had left Knife River, Boller saw some persons occupying a few
huts at the mouth of Knife River, probably the old Amaliami
village.  He says, however, that the occupants were Mandans.~
Lewis and Clarke evidently regarded these people as distinct from the dwellers in the other two villages on Knife River; 
but Catlin seemed to think that thie Amaliami village was merely
one of the Minnetaree villages, for he says that the Minnetarees
occupied the three villages on Knife River; ~ and the Prince
of Neuwied seems to agree with Mr. Catlin.** Perhaps in the
* Thus, in speaking of the custom of carrying small bundles of sticks (p. 356), which
then existed, and still to some extent exists, among the young men of the Mandans and
Minnetarees, he says," They do not meet with many coy beauties."  If such were the
case, why should they display tokens of their success? Why boast of a deed which was
no great achievement?
t Lewis and Clarke, p. 96.                   t Maximilian, p. 178.
p. 36.            p. p. 89, 95, 97.           ~ p. 185.            p. 178.
15 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE IIIDATRSA INDIANS.
days of these latter travelers, the Amahamis may have submitted to tile authority of the Minnetaree chief
In one instance, Lewis and Clarke spell the name of this
tribe "Arwacah::,-as.".*  In 1834, their village stood on the
same ground that it occupied in 1804; at both of these dates it
bore the same Indian names, t and the people bore the same
French name; I yet Maximilian, aided by his interpreter, failed
to recognize the resemblance between the name of the tribe as
written by Lewis and Clarke and "Awachlawi", as he, according to German orthography, so correctly spells it. Such, at
least, is tihe impression produced by the perusal of the foot-note
on page 335 of his work. In this note, too, Maximilian, in
criticising Lewis and Clarke's spelling, does not make due allowance for the fact that the American travelers wrote in a language whose alphabet is less suited to express the Indian words
than that of the language in which he wrote.
The descendants of the An) ahamis, among the Hidatsa, are
now known friom the rest of this tribe by their preference for
certain words and dialectic forms, which are not in common use
among those of unmixed Hidatsa blood, and did not originally
belong to the language of the latter.
; 12. POPULATION.-  The population of the village is not
known.  It is said that the inhabitahts of some of the old villages allowed a census to be taken immediately before the epidemic which proved so fatal to them. They believed that their
calamity resulted fromt the census, and have since resisted all
efforts to ascertain their numbers.  Many ingenious plans have
been devised for counting them without their knowledge, but
they have suspected and thwarted them all.  In the Reports of
the Commtissioners of Indian Affairs, various estimates of their
strength may be found, but they are all conjectural.  In the
-Report of 1862, it is stated~ that the Grosventres and Mandans, in that year, numbered 1,120, and the Arickarees (then
in a separate but neighboring village) 1,000,-total 2,120.  In
t Lewis and Clarke, p. 89," Mahawha ".-Maximilian, p. 335, "Machacha ".
$ Lewis and Clarke, p. 96, "called by the French Soulier Noir, or Shoe Indians.'
-Maximilian, p. 178, "Le village des Soulliers."
~ Pages 1i93 and 195, in Report of Agent S. N. Latta to the Commissioner.
16 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
the Report of 1866 are the following "approximate numbers":*
Arickarees, 1,500;  Mandans, 400;  Grosventres, 400;-total
2,300.  In the Report of 1871, the population is thus given:t
Arickarees, 1,650;  Grosventres, 600;  Mantans; 450;-total
"about" 2,700. In these estimates, which vary greatly, the
first gives the population of the Grosventres and Mandans to gether as more than the Rees; while, in the second and third
estimates, the Rees are represented as about twice as numerous
as the other two tribes together. In this respect, I believe the
first quoted estimate to be nearest the truth; for the houses
occupied by the Grosventres and Mandans number more than
those occupied by the Rees.;  In the estimate of 1866, it will
be seen that the Grosventres and Mandans are represented as
equal to one another. I have many reasons for believing this
representation to be incorrect. The conjecture of the writer,
based upon all ascertainable data, is that, within the past ten
years, the proper population of the'village has never been more
than 2,500, and that, at present, it is much less. It is pretty
certain, too, that of the three tribes the Arickarees stand first in
numerical strength, the Hidatsa second, and the Mandans third.
However, if a perfect census of the village was taken any
day, when no hunting-parties were out, it would not show the
strength of these tribes; for the scouts who are enlisted at distant posts, their families, and the Minnetarees, who, of late
years, have gone to live with the Crows, constituting in all a
large proportion of this people, could not be included.
~ 13. CONVERSATION.-To the philologist, it is an interesting fact that this trio of savage clans, although now'living in
the same village, and having been next-door neighbors to each
other for more than a hundred years, on terms of peace and
intimacy, and to a great extent intermarried, speak, nevertheless, totally distinct languages, which show no perceptible inclination to coalesce.  The Mandan and Grosventre (or Minnetaree) languages are somewhat alike, and probably of a very
distant common origin; but no resemblance has yet been discovered between either of these and the Arickaree ("Ricara").
Page 175, in Report of the Northwestern Treaty Commnissioners.
t Page 520, in Report of Agent J. E. Tappan.
t See note on p. 4.
2
17 
ETHINOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
Almost every member of each tribe understands the languages
of the other tribes, yet he speaks his own most fluently; so it
is not an uncommon thing to hear a dialogue carried on in two
languages, one person, for instance, questioning in Mandan, and
the other answering back in Grosventre, and vice versa.  Many
of them understand the Dakota tongue, and use it as a means
of intercommunication, and all understand the sign-language.
So, after all, they have no trouble in mnaking themselves understood by one another.   These Indians must have excellent
memories and "good capacity for study"; for it is not uncommnon to find persons among them, some even under twenty
years of age, who can speak fluently four or five different languages.
. 14. ARTS'.-Besides their agriculture and architecture,
which have been already alluded to, they had the knowledge
of many other useful arts, still practiced by them, which were
entirely of native origin.  They manufactured pottery; built
boats of buffalo-hide; made mats and baskets of various descriptions, and wooden bowls so durable that they last for many
generations; and formed spoons and ladles out of the horns of
the buffalo and Rocky Mountain sheep. Their hair-brushes they
made sometimes out of porcupine-qutills, but more commonly
of grass-the long, tough awns of the Stipa juncea.  They fasliioned whistles of the bones of large birds, and fifes and other
wind-instruments out of wood; some of these were for musical
purposes; others were to imitate, for the hunter's benefit, the
bleat of the antelope or the whistle of the elk. They garnished
their clothing with porcupine-quills, which they colored brilliantly with dye-stuffs of Indian discovery. They had flint and
horn arrow-heads, and horn wedges with which they split wood.
They knew something of the manufacture of glass, and made
rude beads and pendants out of it; they possessed various pigments, and with them recorded the events of their day in symbolic pictures; and, in the manufacture and use of the various
appliances of war and the chase, they had no superiors on the
plains. Their arms were the same as those of the Dakotas and
other western tribes; and they have been so often described
that I feel there is little left for me to say concerning them.
18 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
For cleaning the village-grounds, they had rakes made of
a few osiers tied together-the ends curved and spreading. Their
most important agricultural implement was the hoe. Before
they obtained iron utensils of the white traders, their only hoes
were made of the shoulder-blades of elk or buffalo, attached
to wooden handles of suitable length. Maximilian, in 1833,*
considered the bone hoe as a thing of the past only; yet, as
late as 1867, I saw a great number in use at Fort Berthold,
and purchased two or three, one of which was sent to Washington, and, I presume, is now on exhibition in the museum of
the Smithsonian Institution.t
They now make saddle-trees in somewhat the same way
as we do, of wood or of part wood and part horn, covered with
raw-hide. They also make neat pad-saddles of tanned elk-skin,
stuffed with antelope-hair, and often handsomely embroidered,
as well as other horse-equipments. They probably learned
the art of making these articles some time during the last century, from the Indians of the south, of whom they first obtained
horses.
For their children, they make toys, which, as with us, indicate for each sex t[ie occupations of adult years. When the
children are old enough, they make some of their own toys.
They have pop-guns, the art of making which, as far as I could
discover, was not learned from the whites. The boys make
representations of hunts by fashioning out of mud, with much
skill, little figures of the horse, the mounted hunter, and the
flying buffalo.
Glass.-The articles of glass spoken of above are chiefly
of two kinds: first, large, globular, or ellipsoidal beads;  and,
second, flat, irregularly triangular plates or pendants, which are
glazed only on one side, and have a hole at the apex. The
art of making these deserves more than a mere mention, since
it is commonly believed that the aboriginal Americans, even
the most civilized races, knew nothing of the manufacture of
glass at the time of the Columbian discovery. The very earliest
ethnographical account we have of the Arickarees and Man     p. 347..~
t See Smithsonian Report for 1869, p. 36, where the specimen is erroneously attributed to the Yanktonnais.
19 
ENHNOGRAPHY OF THE IIIDATSA INDIANS.
dans shows that they knew how to make glass beads; and
these is no doubt that the process employed in 1804 was
essentially the same as that employed to-day.  The following
is the account of this given by Lewis and Clarke:-"A Mr. Garrow, a Frenchman, who has resided a long time among the
Ricaras and Miandans, explained to us the mode in which they
make their large beads, an art which they are said to have
derived from some prisoners of the Snake Indian nation, and
the knowledge of which is a secret, even now confined to a
few among the Mandans and Ricaras. T'ihe process is as follows:
glass of different colors is first pounded fine, and washed, till
each kind, which is kept separate, ceases to stain the water
thrown over it; some well-seasoned clay, mixed with a sufficient quantity of sand to prevent it becoming very hard when
exposed to the heat, and reduced by water to the consistency
of dough, is then rolled on the palm of the hand till it becomes
of the thickness wanted for the hole in the bead; these sticks
of clay are placed upright, each on a little pedestal or ball of
the same material, about an ounce in weight, and distributed
over a small earthen platter, which is laid on the fire for a few
minutes, when they are taken off to cool; with a little paddle
or shovel, three or four inches long and sharpened at the end
of the handle, the wet pounded glass is placed in the palm of
the hand; the beads are made of an oblong form, wrapped in
a cylindrical form round the stick of clay, which is laid crosswise over it, and gently rolled backward and forward until
it becomes perfectly smooth. If it be desired to introduce any
other color, the surface of the bead is perforated with the
pointed end of the paddle, and the cavity filled with pounded
glass of that color; the sticks, with the string of beads, are
then placed on tlleir pedestals, and the platter deposited on
burning coals or hot embers; over the platter an earthen pot,
containing about three gallons, with a mouth large enough to
cover the platter, is reversed, being completely closed, except
a small aperture in the top, through which are watched the
beads; a quantity of old dried wood, formed into a sort of
dough orepaste, is placed round the pot so as almost to cover
it, and afterward set on fire; the manufacturer then looks
20 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
through the small hole in the pot till he sees the beads assume
a deep-red color, to which succeeds a paler or whitish red, or
they become pointed at the upper extremity, on which the fire
is removed and the pot is suffered to cool gradually; at length
it is removed, the beads taken out, the clay in the hollow of
them picked out with an awl or needle, and it is then fit for
use.  The beads thus formed are in great demand among the
Indians, and used as pendants to their ears and hair, and sometimes worn round the neck."*  This art is now only occasionally practiced in the village, and is mostly confined to the
making of the flat, triangular pendants. I have heard the process described in'much the same way as in the above quotation. From this quotation, however, which is in part ambiguous, the inference might be drawn that the ornaments, when
completed, consist entirely of glass. Such is not the case in
those I have seen; on the contrary, they consist of a core of
baked earth covered with a thin shell of glass; and they have
the appearance of having been perforated before heat was
applied. But, in the matter of making the holes, the process
may have been changed, or there may have been two ways of
doing it.
The existence of this art among the Indians evidently
greatly astonished Catlin, who gives it as one of the reasons
on which he founds his theory of the Cymric origin of the Mandans.  He says, speaking of the Mandans:-"In addition to
this art," [pottery,] "which I am  sure belongs to no other
tribe on the continent, these people have also, as a secret with
themselves, the extraordinary art of manufacturing a very
beautiful and lasting kind of blue glass beads, which they wear
on their necks in great quantities, and decidedly value above
all others that are brought among them by the fur-traders.'
" This secret is not only one that the traders did not introduce
among them, but one which they cannot learn from them;
and at the same time, beyond a doubt, an art that has been
introduced among them by some civilized people, as it is as
yet unknown to other Indian tribes in that vicinity or elsewhere. Of this interesting fact, Lewis and Clarke gave
* pp. 125-126.
21 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF TIlE IIIDATSA INDIANS.
an account thirty-three years ago, at a time when no traders
or other white people had been among the Mandans to have
taught them so curious an art."*  It is surprising that Mr
Catlin, after reading the above-cited passages from Lewis and
Clarke (and he leaves us to infer that he has read them), could
state that the art of making these beads was confined to the
Mandans; that it was unknown to the traders; that it was
beyond doubt introduced by civilized people; and that no traders
or other whites had been among these Indians before the time
of Lewis and Clarke's visit.
The art of making these ornaments would appear to be old;
yet the process as it existed in 1804 was evidently in part
recent, since the Indians obtained the glass which they used
from the whites. I have been informed by the Indians that in
old days the art flourished among the Arickarees as well as
among the Mandans; and certainly at the present day the
Arickaree women understand it. I had two of the triangular
pendants made to order in 1870, by an Arickaree woman, to
whom I furnished the blue glass necessary. When I gave
instriuctions to have the articles madl I was invited to witness
the process, but circumstances prevented me from doing so.
One of these pendants was sent to the Smithsonian Institution.
It is strange, if true, that these Indians shlould have obtained
their knowledge of this art from the Snake Indians, a ruder
and equally remote tribe. It is also strange, and undoubtedly
true, that in 1804, as well as now, they did not make their
glass, but obtained it ready-made, and merely fused it for their
purposes, obtaining it, doubtlessly, from the whites. It is
strange that within a few years after glass beads of European
manufacture were first introduced among them, and when such
beads must have commanded a high price, they should pulverize them and use the powder in making ruder and more unsightly articles after their own design. But it is not probable
that- they should have learned such an art from civilized people
prior to l804, when they had as yet seen but few whites, and
when the whites they had seen were mostly rude Canadian
frontiersmen, among whom it is not reasonable to suppose
North Amnerican Indians vol. ii, p. 201.
22 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
there were any persons versed in glass-making. I have heard
Indians say, with uncertainty, that in former times they found
glass in the hills, and pounded it for their beads; meaning
perhaps that they used natural glass, which may be found
where lignite beds have taken fire, and elsewhere on the Upper Missouri.  In view of all these facts, I have conjectured
that they had the art of making glazed earthen ornaments
before the whites came among them; and that when they saw
the brilliantly-colored beads of the traders, they conceived the
idea of.improving their art by using these beads.  If they
ever possessed the art of making glass de novo, there is no
record, tradition, or other.evidence of it that I have been able
to find.
One of many reasons, though perhaps an insufficient
reason, for believing the art to be of no recent origin among
them, is that they used the triangular pendants, not as ornaments' only, but as evidences of betrothal, as long ago as the
oldest men can remember. When a girl was promised in
marriage in her infancy by her parents, as was not infrequently done, one of thee pendants was tied to her forelock
so as to hang down over her forehead. When the promise was
fulfilled, the husband removed the pendant and threw it away.
~ 15. FooD, ETC.-Since the introduction of various articles
of European food, their diet has been somewhat changed, yet
they still largely adhere to their original dietary.
Their chief food, until within the last eight or ten years,
was the meat of the buffalo, or bison, which, when fresh, was
cooked by roasting before an open fire, by broiling on the
coals or on an extemporized wooden broiler, or by boiling.
Their meat was boiled in earthen pots before brass and iron
pots were introduced by the whites. They knew the different
effects produced by putting the meat down in hot and in cold
water, and employed the former method when they did not want
soup. On hunts, they sometimes boiled the meat in skins,
heating the water with hot stones, after the method employed
by the Assinniboines, which has given the latter tribe its
name of Stone-cookers. Sometimes they chopped the fresh
meat fine, put it in a piece of bowel, and thus made a sort of
Q
23 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
sausage, which was usually boiled. For preservation, meat is
cut into thin sheets or into long strips and dried in the sun.  I
have seen dried meat three years old perfectly sweet. Some times it becomes worm-eaten without becoming rancid. In
rainy weather, they often hang meat up in the smoke of the
lodge to preserve it. The dried meat is sometimes eaten raw,
but more frequently it is boiled or broiled; or it is broiled,
pounded fine, and mixed with fat to make pemmican.  They
sometimes add sugar and berries to small quantities of pem mican. The meat of the elk and the deer is cooked and prepared in the same way as buffalo-meat, and of late, since the
buffalo have so greatly decreased in number, is more used
than the latter.
When game is abundant, they only use choice parts of an
animal; but, when it is scarce, they discard nothing. They then
pound the bones into small fragments, and subject them to prolonged boiling to make soup.  During one winter of great
scarcity, I knew of some Arickarees, who, not having horses,
could not go out on the winter-hunt, to cut up and boil their
bull-boats and the raw-hide doors A their houses for food.
When hungry hunters kill an animal, they often eat the liver,
the kidneys, and the hoofs of the fcetus, should there be one,
raw. Raw liver is said to have a saccharine taste which is not
unpleasant. Occasionally they eat other parts raw, but this is
only when the quarry is little, the mouths many, and the prospect of a fire distant or doubtful.
Fat porcupine, bear, and beaver meat are esteemed, particularly the tail of the latter. They are fond of marrow and
fat.  Birds of prey, foxes, and wolves are eaten, but only when
food is scarce. Turtles and fish are used as food; but I have
never heard of any such use being made of snakes.  The
Grosventres have but recently learned to eat dog-flesh, and
they still eat horse-flesh only under pressing necessity; but the
Arickarees seem to have less prejudice to such food.  Among
many belonging to these tribes, a young, fat pup is considered
a great delicacy. Insects, with one exception, and worms are
never eaten, and few can now be persuaded to eat oysters.
When a gravid buffalo, elk, or deer is killed, the liquor arenil
24 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
is generally preserved and boiled for soup, the fcetus being
cooked in it.
Formerly, they lived largely upon meat. When out on
their hunts and war-parties, they often lived exclusively on it.
There were many nomadic tribes around them who seldom
tasted vegetable matter, often living for seven or eight months
in the year exclusively on meat, and preserving perfect health.
I have seen white men who had lived for years among the
Indians, and during such residence, for six nmonths of every
year, lived on nothing but meat (and water of course), "Buffalo straight," as they expressed it, and who, in the summers
only, occasionally varied their diet with a mess of roots or
berries-not seeking such vegetable food with any particular
longing or avidity. In various books of western travel, these
statements are corroborated; yet there are modern physiologists who would try to persuade us that an animal diet is inadequate to the sustaining of human life in a healthy condition.
When subsisting for the most part on fresh meat, these Indians
had the soundest gums and teeth; and no flesh when wounded
healed more rapidly than theirs. Lately, however, since the
increase in the consumption of bacon and flour among them,
and the destruction of their game, there have been many cases
of scurvy, a disease which was particularly fatal to them in
the winter of 1868-'69; and a tendency to abscesses, to suppurative terminations of diseases, and to a sluggish' condition
of wounds, manifests itself. The quantities of fresh meat they
are able to consume are enormous. Sometimes, after a day's
hunt, the hunters will sit up all night cooking and eating.
Their principal vegetable diet was the corn they raised
themselves. Flour, issued by the agency, is now, to a great
extent, taking its place.  They eat some of the corn when it
is green, but the greater part they allow to ripen. When ripe,
they prepare it in various ways. They pound it in a wooden
mortar with water, and boil the moist meal thus made into a
hasty pudding, or cook it in cakes.  Trhey frequently parch
the corn, and then reduce it to powder, which is often eaten
without preparation. A portion of their corn they boil when
nearly ripe; they then dry and shell it, and lay it by for winJ
25 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
ter use; when boiled again, it tastes like green corn. (See
Madas'kihe in Dictionary.) This is often boiled with dried beans
to make a succotash. Their beans are not usually eaten until
ripe. Squashes are cut in thin slices and dried; the dried
squash is usually cooked by boiling. Sunflower-seeds are dried,
slightly scorched in pots or paus over the fire, and then powdered.  The meal is boiled or made into cakes with grease.  The
sunflower-cakes are often taken on war-parties, and are said,
when eaten even sparingly, to sustain the consumer against
fatigue more than any other food. They gather all manner of
wild roots and berries that are eaten by the nomadic tribes of
the same region; but they do not consume them to the extent
that the wilder tribes do. The only nuts that grow in their
hunting-grounds are the acorns.  I have never known them to
collect or eat these.
I believe that they have always understood the value of
salt and knew where to procure it. (See Matamahota in Dictionary.)  They used it sparingly, however, and to season their
vegetable messes only. Lately, since they can obtain salt so
cheaply and plentifully from the traders and agency, they
rarely hunt for it, and use it to a greater extent than they
formerly did. In 1820, Major Long's Expedition met an
Arickaree returning from the distant valley of the Arkansas,
with about thirty pounds of pure salt, which " had evidently
been formed by the -evaporation of water in some pond or
basin."*
In the earliest accounts that we have of these Indians, we
find they cultivated a species of tobaccot (Nicotiana quadrivalvis). Sergeant Gass, who tried it ill 1804, and who, we
may presume, was a good judge of the weed, says that "it
answers for smoking but not for chewing";t and, in my time,
I have heard similar opinions passed concerning it by tobaccousers. Lately, the cultivation of this tobacco has been greatly
neglected, as the Indians obtain an article from the whites
which they prefer. It is but recently that any of them have
*Long, vol. i, p. 449.
t Lewis and Clarke say "two different species of tobacco ", p. 76.
t p. 73.
26 
ETHNOGRAPIIY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
learned to chew tobacco.  All the men smoke; but the use of
the pipe is very rare among the women. These Indians seldom use tobacco alone, but mix it with the dried inner bark of
one or more species of dogwood, Cornus stotonifera and C.
sericea. (See Ope and Opehas'a, in Dictionary). They also mix
with it the leaves of the Eleagnas arqentea, which grows in
Northern Dakota, and the leaves of a variety of Arctostaphylos
uva-ursi.  Sometimes they smoke the. dogwood-bark alone,
without any mixture of tobacco. Often they put a fragment
of castoreum on top of the tobacco before lighting the pipe.
The various points of ceremony and etiquette connected
with smoking are the same with these tribes as with other
western Indians;  and they have been described by many
observers.
16. INTER-TRIBAL TRADE.-In former days, there was a
trade carried on between these tribes and their Indian neighbors. Of late years, it has greatly diminished, but it still exists
to some extent.
With the. nomadic tribes around, they exchanged their
agricultural produce for horses, and, recently, for robes. When
the Dakotas saw a certain flower (Liatris punctata) blooming
on the prairie, they knew that the corn was ripe, and went to
the villages of the farming Indians to trade. From the time
they came in sight of the village to the time they disappeared,
there was a truce. When they had passed beyond the bluffs,
they might steal an unguarded pony or lift a scalp, and were
in turn liable to be attacked.
The straight, slender spruce-poles, which form the frames
of their skin-lodges, are not obtained in the immediate neighborhood of the Missouri, but are cut in and near' the Black
Hills, many days journey from Fort Berthold, and in the country of the inimical Teton-Dakotas.   The Berthold Indians,
consequently, purchase them of the Dakotas, giving a good
buffalo-horse, or its equivalent, for the number sufficient for a
lodge, about a dozen.
To tribes less skilled than were they in catching wareagles, they traded the tail-feathers of these birds; a single
tail being worth a buffalo-horse. Their principal standard of
27 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
value was a buffalo-hlorse, i. e., a horse swift enough to outrun
a young adult buffalo in the fall.
It appears probable that they once carried on a trade
indirectly with the tribes of the Pacific coast, for they had
Dentainurm shells similar to those obtained on the Pacific, and
they prized them so highly that the white traders found it
advisable to obtain them for the trade. As late as 1866, ten of
these shells, of inferior size, costing the traders only a cent
apiece, would buy a superior buffalo robe, and formerly only
two or three of the same quality were paid for a robe. Modern
traders, with whom the writer has  conversed, obtain their
shells from eastern importers, and know nothing of the original
source of supply.  They suppose them to come from  the
Atlantic coast or the Great Lakes, and call them "Iroquois
shells", which is probably their corruption of the Chinook
"hyakwa"; but it is possible the reverse is the case.
They also used, and still use, as ornaments, fragments of
the Abalone shells (one or more species of Haliotis) of the
Pacific.  These are now supplied to the trade under the name
of California shells.  Ten years ago, one of these shells, unpolishled, sold for a good robe.  There is little doubt that they
used Abalone, JDe(ntaliun, and other sea-shells before the traders
brought them.  Old traders and old Indians say so. Even as
late as 1833, it would seem that they had not yet become a
regular part of a trader's outfit; for Maximilian says of thile
MAandans:-"They do not disfigure the bodies; only they
make some apertures in the outer rim of the ear, in which they
hang strings of beads, brass or iron rings of different sizes, or
shells, the last of which they obtain from other Indian tribes.
If they are questioned respecting these shells, they answer
that they were brought from the sea."*
1 7. INTERCOURSE WITH WHITES.-In a recent little work
entitled O-kee-pa, George Catlin says:-" Two exploring parties
had long before visited the Mfandans, but without in any way
affecting their manners. The first of these, in 1738, under the
lead of the brothers Verendrye, Frenchmen,  who afterward
ascended the Missouri and Saskatchewan to the Rocky Mount            *p.:37. See also p. 338, "White dentalium shells."
28 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS\
ains; and the other, under Lewis and Clarke, about sixty years
afterward."*  He does not tell us where the account of the
expedition of 1738 is to be found; he gives us no further evidence on this point; and, as no other mention of the journey
has ever been seen by me, it will receive no further consideration in this essay.
In aletter published in Schooleraft's Infornation respectin#...
the Indian Tribes, the writer, D. D. Mitchell, says, speaking of
the MIandans:-" The early portion of their history I gather from
the narration of Mr. Mackintosh, who, it seems, belonged to, or
was in some way connected with, the French trading company
as far back as 1772.  According to his narration, he set out from
Montreal in the summer of 1773, crossed over the country to
the Missouri River, and arrived at one of the M,andan villages
on Christmas day.'t  I have never seen Mackintosh's account,
nor have I seen any more extensive notice of it than the one
given by Mr. Mitchell; and from this, it does not appear that
Mackintosh visited any of these agricultural Indians except the
Mandans.
There is every probability that some of these tribes
received occasional visits from white traders and adventurers a
century or more ago. It may be safely stated that every one
of the bands represented in the Berthold village were visited
by whites at least eighty years ago, and that they have been
in constant communication with representatives of civilized
races ever since.  In 1804, British traders and French or Canadian interpreters were found in their camps; and the travelers
of that year speak of "those who visited them in 1796'".: Prince
Maximilian, writing in 1833, says of "Charbonneau, who was
interpreter for the Manitari language", that he "had lived thirty
seven years in this part of the country";~ that, at his first arrival,
the Knife River villages stood precisely where they were in
1833; and that Charbonneau "immediately took up his residence in the central one".[I From these statements we must
conclude that Charbonneau settled among the Hidatsas about
seventy-nine years ago; and old men of the tribe say that he
* p. 4.    t Part third, p. 253.   t Lewis and Clarke, p. 96.
p. 318.                       I1p. 321.
29 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
was not the first white man to come to their towns, yet that
few preceded him.
It is likely that all the Europeans who came to these tribes
in the early days were from the Hudson Bay Territory, and
that they were mostly traders; but, in 1804, it seems that there
were some whites sojourning in their country, as hunters and
trappers. The British fur-companies held the trade of these Indians until 1807,* when Manuel Lisa, who afterward founded
the Missouri Fur Company, ascended the river in keel-boats to
the Mandan villages and beyond.   Until 1832, goods were
brought up the Missouri chiefly in keel-boats or Mackinawboats, which were cordeled or towed by men, with great labor,
against the rapid current of the river. Two summers, at least,
were always occupied in dragging a boat from Saint Louis to the
head of navigation; the crew sustaining thierhselves chiefly by
hunting. In 1832, the first steamer reached the Mandan villages, and after that, for about thirty years, but one or two
steamers a year went thus far up the river.
Although these Indians have so long known the whites, it is
only within the last twelve or thirteen years that our intercourse
with them has been sufficiently extensive to materially modify
their customs and ideas. Previously, excepting two or three small
military expeditions and an occasional traveler, the only whites
they saw were the few connected with the fur-trade; and these
persons, as a rule, sought to produce no change in the Indian,
but, on the other hand, learned the Indian languages, adopted
Indian customs, and endeavored to assimilate themselves to the
Indians as much as possible, often vying with one another in
their efforts to become amateur savages. Before the period to
which I refer, we had traded to them woven fabrics and many
trinkets of little value, had taught them the use of fire-arms and
iron tools, had given them an opportunity for acquiring a taste
for coffee and ardent spirits, but, in other respects, had wrought
little change in their minds or manners. Eight years ago, they
knew nothing of the use of money, and nothing of the English
language except a few oaths and vulgar expressions, which the
"He set off in the spring following the return of Lewis and Clarke" (Bcrkea
ridge, p. 90).
30 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE IIIDATSA INDIANS.
more docile had learned. The conservatives were still much
the same as their grandfathers were.
In 1863, and during the two following years, in consequence of the Sioux outbreak of 1862, large military expeditions visited Fort Berthold, passing through the country of these
Indians, and strong garrisons were established in their neighborhood, which are still retained. About this time too (1863),
the emigration to the Montana gold-mines by way of the Missouri River began; and, instead of one steamer a year ascending the river as in the old days, they came up by dozens, some
making two and three trips during the season of navigation.
The Indians were thus brought into more intimate contact with
the Americans, the seclusioni of their country was ended, and
a change more general and rapid in their affairs initiated. Since
then, their game has been killed off, they have grown weaker,
poorer, and more dependent, and, in many other respects, they
have altered for the worse. As yet, no sustained effort has been
made to Christianize them;  and but little has been done to
advance them in civilization. On the other hand, they have,
according to some standards of excellence, bettered in many
respects. They have of necessity given increased attention to
the cultivation of the soil. The men, as before stated, have
learned to perform labor, which, in earlier days, they deemed
degrading. Many of their savage customs and ideas have been
abandoned; and many of their ceremonies have been simplified
or have fallen into disuse.  They are generally less superstitious than they were ten years ago, and more skeptical with
regard to their old myths.
Since 1866, a large number of their men have enlisted as
scouts in the military service of the United States, and have
been improved by the discipline of the camp. They have
learned the responsibilities, and have done splendidly in the
capacity of soldiers; many of them having heroically laid down
their lives in our service.
During A short period of their history, the Arickarees were
at war with the Americans; but for'many years they have
strictly maintained peace, and have fought with us ard against
our enemies. The Mandans and Minnetarees claim never to
31 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
have shed a white man's blood, although some of their number
have been killed by whites. For their fidelity they have been
repaid in starvation and neglect.   Many of these  friendly
Indians, particularly among the Arickarees, have, during the
past ten years, died of actual hunger or the diseases incident
to a state of famine. Within the past three years there seem
to be some evidences of increased legislative interest in them,
but the benefits arising therefrom are by no means equal to
their needs or their deserts.
32 
PART II.
THE  HI])ATSA TRIBE.
18. NAMES OF THE TRIBE. Grosventre.-The peoplewhose
language is discussed in the accompanying grammar are commonly called, on maps, in official reports, and by white men in
the Indian country, Grosventres.  This was a name given to
them by the early French and Canadian adventurers. The
same name was applied also to a tribe, totally distinct from
these in language and origin, which lives some hundreds of
miles west of Fort Berthold; and the two nations are now distinguished firom one another as Grosventres of the Missouri and
Grosventres of the Prairie, names which would lead a stranger
to suppose that they were merely separate divisions of one
tribe.
In the account of Edward Umfreville, who traded on the
Saskatchewan River from 1784 to 1787, we find mention of a
tribe of Indians who lived near the falls of the south branch
of the Saskatchewan, and whom he calls "Fall Indians".  But
he remarks:- " In this people, another instance occurs of the
impropriety with which the Canadian French name Indians.
They call them Grosventres, or Big-Bellies; and without any
reason, as they are as comely and as well made as any tribe
whatever, and are very far from being remarkable for their
corpulency."*  The tribe to which he refers is doubtless that
which is now known as the Atsinas, or Grosventres of the Prairie.
The similarity of the Canadian misnomers in all probability
led Captain Lewis, in 1804, to speak of the MAlinnetarees on the
Missouri as "part of the great nation called Fall Indians". t
Comparing our Hidatsa words with their synonymes in Umfreville's Fall Vocabulary, or Dr.  Hayden's later Atsinra Yocabulary, we can discover no affinity between the Fall and
Hidatsa tongues.
Unifreville's remarks concerning the impropriety of the
p. 197.                                tp. 97.
3 
ETHNOGRAPIIY OF TIlE IlIDATsA INDIANS.
iiame Grosventre would app)ly as well to those "of the Missoutri"
as to those "of the Prairie".  Maximilian says of the Hidatsa:
"The French give them the singular name of Grosventres,
which is no more appropriate to them than to any other of the
Indian tribes." * Palliser remarks:-" They are most absurdly
termed Grosventries by the French traders, there being not the
slightest foundation for branding them with that epithet."t
Various writers who hlave visited this tribe concur in these
opinions.
Minnetarees.-In the works of many travelers they are called
"Minnetarees", a name which is spelled in various ways; thus
Captain Lewis writes it "Minnetarees"; Catlin, "Minatarees";
De Smet, "Minataries"; Palliser, "Minitarees"; while in the
accompanying Dictionary it is spelled Minitari, or Mliditadi.
This, although a Hidatsa word, is the name applied to them,
not by themselves, but by the Mandans; it signifies to cross
the water, or they crossed the water.  The  name  may allude to
the Hidatsa tradition of their own origin, or to their account
that they came originally from the northeast, and had to cross
the Missouri before reaching the old Mandan villages, which
were on the west bank of the river, or the name may have
originated from some other cause; but the story, be it true or
false, which is now given by both tribes concerned, to account
for its origin, is this: When  the wandering  Mlinnetarees first
reached the Missouri and stood on the bank opposite to one of
the villages of the Mandans, the latter cried out, "Who are
you?" The strangers, not understanding what was said, but
supposing that the Mandans (who were provided with boats)
asked them what they wanted shouted in return, "Minitari,"
to cross the water, or "Minitari mihats," we will cross the water.
The Mandans supposed that in this reply the visitors gave them
their name, and called them MIinitari ever after.
The name, as above intimated, will be found in this dictionary written'Miditadi' or'Minitari,' and its component parts,
'midi,' water, and'tadi,' to cross over. The reason for this
varying orthography will be discovered by consulting the
grammar, paragraphs 19 to 23 inclusive, where it is shown
p. 395.                                t p. 198.
34 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INI)IANS.
that d, 1, n, and r, are interchangeable consonants. Prince
Maximilian writes the word MAIanitari (adding a plural ending),
which represents a way in which the Mandans often pronounce
it-the Mandan word for water being maui.
Hidatsa was the namre of the village on Knife River farthest
from the Missouri, the village of those whom Lewis and Clarke
considered the Minnetarees proper.* It is probable that after
the epidemic of 1837 the survivors of the other villages moved
thither, or that the majority of all the survivors came from
Hidatsa, which then lent its name to the whole tribe a name
now generally used by this people to designate themselves, and
for which reason the one most frequently employed in this
essay.
Tile origin of the word Hidatsa is obscure. It is said bv
some to mean willows; but I know of no species of willow that
bears this name.   By a few of the tribe it is pronounced
Hidaa'tsa, and in this form bears a slight resemblance to the
word midaha'dsa, the present Minnetaree generic name for all
shrub willows.  It may possibly be  an old form of the latter
word; but, according to my present knowledge of the formation
and phonetic changes of this language, I have no reason for
believing it to be so.
There is little doubt that the tribe, or a portion of it, was
once called Willows; and this may be the reason why some
suppose Hidatsa to mean willows.  But it is evident that even
in former days travelers or their interpreters were uncertain
with regard to the application of the name Willows, and later
inquiries on the part of the writer have done little toward clearing the difficulty. In Lewis and Clarke's journal (1804), we
find the inhabitants of Amatiha, the first village on Knife River
above its mouth, spoken of as "Minnetwees Metaharta, that
is, Minnetarees of the Willows";t while Prince Maximilian
(1834) says that Hidatsa, or the village on Knife River farthest
from the Missouri (above Amatiha), was called  " Elalh-sa (the
village of the great willows).": It is plain that "Ela'h-sa" is
but a form of Hidatsa, for the aspirate is often pronounced or
heard indistinctly; d and  I are interchangeable with one
p.96.             t p.97.             + p.178.
35 
ETHNOGRAPIIY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
another in this language (see Grammar, ~~f 20, 22), and s is
often used for ts, (see ~ 17).  "Metaharta" represents possibly
an old or dialectic form of "midahadsa", willow, which was
mispronounced by the interpreter, and spelled from his mispronunciation by Captains Lewis and Clarke in an ill-devised way.
Other names.-Hewaktokto, the name of this tribe in the
Dakota language, I have heard translated D)wvellers on a Ridye;
but I think the correctness of this translation may be questioned.  Some of the Hidatsa believe that the appellation belonged originally only to the Amahamis, whose name signifies
mountain.
In the Arickaree language, the Hidatsa are called Witetsaan. I have heard this rendered in two ways, viz, Welldressed People and People at the Water; the latter said to refer
to their old residence at the ford of Knife River.
By the Crows, they are called Ama.si, signifying earthen
houses or "dirt lodges", as the Upper  Missouri  interpreters
would say.
~ 19. HISTORY.-These Indians relate of themselves as follows: They originally dwelt beneath the surface of a great
body of water, situated to the northeast of their present home.
From this subaqueous residence some persons found their way
out, and, discovering a country much better than that in which
they resided, returned and gave to their people such glowing
accounts of their discoveries that the whole people determined
to come out. Owing to the breaking of a tree, on which they
were climbing out of the lake, a great part of the tribe had to
remain behind in the water, and are there yet. After coming
from the water, they began to wander over the prairies, and
sent out couriers to explore the country around.  Those who
were sent to the south returned after a time with tidings of a
great river and a fertile valley, of a nation who dwelt in houses
and tilled the soil. Tlhey brought back with them, too, corn
and other products of the country. Toward this promised
land the tribe now directed its steps, and, guided by the
couriers, they reached in due time the Mandan villages on the
Missouri. When they arrived, however, lInstead of putting to
death the newly-found people, they encamped quietly beside
36 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE IIIDATSA INDIANS.
them, learned of them the arts of peace, and have ever since
dwelt near them.
From the descriptions of their life previous to rising from
the lake, it would seem as if their tradition originally mentioned an insular home or a home  beyond some great body of
water.  The story of their coming up out of the lake, and of
the breaking of the tree by which they rose, resembles so
much the Mandan tradition as to lead us to believe that one
nation borrowed its legend of the other, or that the two legends
sprung, at no very remote time, from a common source.  Some
of the modern story-tellers say that the Minnewakan, or Devil's
Lake, in Northern Dakota is the natal lake of the tribe. The
Hidatsa call- it Midihopa, which, like the Dakota name, signifies sacred, or mysterious water.
This account of their origin they tell usually as one story;
but they have, besides, a voluminous account of what happened to them during their long wanderings on the prairie,
from the time they left the lake until they reached the Mandan
village, which account is embodied in a separate tale the
almost interminable legend of Itamapi'sa, the proper recital
whereof, by an old story-teller, occupies three or four long
winter-evenings.  In this tale, it is said that they were often
on the eve of death by starvation, but were rescued by a
miraculous supply of buffalo-meat.  Stones, they say, were
strewn upon the prairie obedient to a divine order, and from
them sprang to life the buffalo which they slaughtered. It
was during these years of wandering, as the legend relates,
that the spirit of the sun took a woman of this tribe up into
the sky.  In the course of time, she had a son, who descended
to the earth, and, utinder the name of Itamapisa, or Grandchild
became the great prophet of his mother's people.
It might be more proper to introduce such tales elsewhere
than under the head of history, but, perhaps, a scrap of historical truth may be picked from them,'which is, that the
Hidatsa were once a tribe of nomadic hunters, alternately
starving and feasting as game was scarce or abundant, and
that, since a comparatively recent date, they have settled in
the neighborhood of the Missouri and become farmers by in
37 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
tercourse with tribes who previously tilled the soil. There are
many circumstances which seem to corroborate this. It may
be remarked, too, that the stories from which the above items
are taken are believed by these Indians to be true, while many
other tales, just as plausible as these, they declare to be purely
fictional.
There are two affluents of the Missouri, named Knife River.
One of these enters from the north, above Fort Berthold; the
other from the west, below Fort Berthold. It was upon the
banks of the latter stream that the former homes of this people
stood. At least as early as A. D. 1796, there were three villages on Knife River. The first and largest, named Hidatsa,
was on the north bank, about three -miles from the Missouri,
and was the home of a people whom Captains Lewis and
Clarke, for some reason, regarded as the Minnetarees proper.
The second village, named Amattia, half a mile above the
mouth of Knife River, and on the south bank of the stream,
was the home of a people very closely allied to the inhabitants
of Hidatsa, who spoke a language nearly but not exactly the
same as that of the former, and had a separate chief, who
seemed to acknowledge to some extent the authority of the
chief of the upper village.  The third village, named Amahami
or Mahaha, was at the mouth of Knife River, on the south
side, and was occupied, as before mentioned, by the Amahiamis
(see ~11), a people allied to those of Hidatsa, but more remotely than the dwellers in Amatihia. The present Hidatsa or
Minnetaree tribe of Fort Berthold consists of the survivors of
these three villages and their descendants, with, perhaps, representatives of some small wand(lering bands of allied Indians
which no longer exist as organized tribes.  Lewis and Clarke
seem to speak very positively of wandering  MAinnetarees
hunting in the neighborhood of Knife River,* and not considered as part of the Crow nation.  In 179 6, the Mandans were
near neighbors of the Minnetarees, living some four miles south
of the latter, in three villages, which in 1804 were fe,und
reduced to two.
Some forty years before the coming of Lewis and Clarke,
*p. 110.
38 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE IIIDATSA INDIANS.
i.e., about the year 1761, the Amahamis and the people of
Amatiha dwelt farther south, in the neighborlhood of Heart
River, along with the Rees and Mandans; and it is likely that
the people of Hidatsa lived there at the same time, or at an
earlier date.
At one time, the Crows and the Hidatsa (under which term
I will now include all the bands represented in the present
tribe) lived in close proximity to one another, and constituted
one nation; not, probably, one consolidated tribe under a
single chief, but independent and allied bands, making common cause against other races, and speaking slightly different
dialects, like the various bands of the Dakota nation to-day.
In the course of time, the Crows' in two bands, separated from
the Hidatsa, and moved farther to the south and west, becoming estranged from the latter but not inimical to them.  This
separation took place, doubtlessly, more than one hundred,
and probably not less than two hundred, years ago.
The Hidatsa and Crow legends agree closely concerning
the secession of the Crows, and their story is essentially as follows: During a season of scarcity, while portions of both peoples
were encamped together, a single buffalo came in the neighborhood of the camp and was killed by some of the Hidatsa, who
offered the paunch to the Crows. The latter, considering the
offer illiberal refused it, and a misunderstanding ensued, which
resulted in separation. The Hlidatsa have ever since called
the Crows by the name of Kihliatsa, or they (who) refused the
paunch.  (See kiPiatsa in Dictionary.)  It may reasonably be
doubted that such an incident as this, of itself, and without
previous disagreements, would have been sufficient to have
alienated these bands fromn one another; yet it is not improbable, if, as some say, there was, among the party of slighted
Crows, a very proud and powerful chief, who regarded the
action of the Hidatsa hunters as a personal insult..  It is more
likely, however, that they parted in consequence of some
general misunderstanding concerning the division of game
(and other matters perhaps), which may have culminated in
some particular quarrel. There is no good reason for supposing the legend to be without foundation in fact.  Laws con
39 
ETRHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
cerning the distribution of game are often unlike in different
bands. Cases sometimes arise, too, which their laws do not
cover, and grave disputes occur in consequence. The legend
and the name Kiliatsa seem to have some allusion to the
Hidatsa manner of dividing game. When two members of
this tribe kill a buffalo, one takes the hind quarters and hump,
and is said to "take the back"; the other takes the rest of the
forequarters and the entrails, and is said to "take the paunch".
During the years 1804, 1832, 1833, and 1834, we have
the evidence of travelers that the three Knife River villages
remained just where they stood in 1796, and it is said by the
Indians that there was no change until some time after the
epidemic of 1837, when the survivors of the three villages
formed  themselves  in one on Knife  River.   There they
remained until 1845, when the Hidatsa (and about the same
time the Mandans-see ~ 10) moved up the Missouri, and established themselves where their permanent village now stands,
some thirty miles by land and sixty by river from their old
home. Here, as before stated, they were joined by the Arickarees in 1862.
It may be well here to give some account of the tradingpost, which has lent its name to the village and the locality.
In 1845, soon after the Hidatsa settled here, the American Fur
Company began, with the assistance of the Indians, to build a
stockaded post, which they called Fort Berthold, in honor of
a Mr. Berthold of Saint Louis. In 1859, an opposition trading
company erected in the village some inclosed buildings, which
theyT named Fort Atkinson. In 1862, the opposition ceased,
and the American Fur Company obtained possession of Fort
Atkinson, which they then occupied, transferring to it the
name of Fort Berthold. They abandoned the old stockade,
which was afterward (December 24, 1862) burned by a warparty of Sioux, who attacked the village.   One side of the
newer fort still stands, and is occupied by the Indian agency;
the other three sides having been burned down October 12,
1874.
~ 20. CHARACTER.-To illustrate the character of the
Hidatsa, I present, first, a few extracts from thl writings of
40 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDAT'SA INDIANS.
other observers, placing them in chronological order of observation.. Some of the quoted writers visited this tribe in the
most prosperous period of their history, others in later and
unhappy days;  yet their opinions are not at variance with
one another.
1832.-" There is no tribe in the western wilds, perhaps,
who are better entitled to the style of warlike than the Minatarees; for they, unlike the Mandans, are continually carrying
war into their enemies' country; oftentimes drawing the poor
Mandans into unnecessary broils, and suffering so much themselves in their desperate war-excursions that I find the proportion of women to the number of men as two or three to
one through the tribe."-Catlin, N. A. In)dians, vol. I, p. 187.
"This day's ramble showed us all the inhabitants of this
little tribe, except a portion of their warriors, who are out on a
war-excursion against the Riccarees; and I have been exceedingly pleased with their general behavior and looks, as well
as with their numerous games and amusements, in many of
which I have given them great pleasure by taking a part."Ilb., p. 199.
1834.-" The MIandans and Manitaries are proud and have
a high sense of honor."-Maximilian, p. 353.
1848. "'The Minataries are a noble, interesting people."Palliser, p. 198.
1851. "Some days after, we stopped at Fort Bertliold,
to land some goods'at the great village of the Minataries, or
Osier tribe, nicknamed the Grosventres of the Missouri."
*      *      *      *       "The great chief of the latter village, called Four Bears, is the most civil and affable Indian
that I met on the Missouri." —De Sntet, pp. 76-77.
1854.- "The Grosventres have a large village of mud
houses, very unsightly outside, but within warm and comfortable. These Indians are fine specimens of the red man.  They
are industrious, and raise corn enough to supply many of their
neighbors with bread. They are well disposed toward the
whites."  Report of Commissioner of Indian Affairs for 1854.*
1858.-" I shall ever look back upon the years spent in
I Extract from report of Lieutenant Saxton to Gov. I. I. Stevens.
41 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
the Indian country as among the pleasantest of my life; and
if in all my dealings with white men I had found the same
sense of honor that characterized.iy'savage' firiends, my appreciation of human nature would be much higher."*-Boller,
p. vii.
"During the whole time that I lived among the Grosventres, I never missed a single article, althoughl I took no
trouble to keep my things out of sight. My house would often
be crowded with Indians; sometimes only one or two would
be present; yet if called away I felt satisfied that on my return
I would find everything just as I left it."-Ib., pp. 239, 240.
1862.-" They  [Grosventres and Mandans] are a good
people; peaceable, reliable, and honest.  They keep as far as
is possible the treaty made at Laramie."-Report of Commnissioner of Indian Affairs for 1862, p. 194.t
I can indorse the above opinions, and can say that the
Hidatsa are to-day, for Indians, examples in industry, general
morality, forethought, and thrift.
21. APPEARANCE.-More than forty years ago we find
the general appearance of these Indians thus described by a
careful observer:-" The Manitaries are in fact the tallest and
best-formed Indians on the Missouri, and, in this respect, as
well as in'the elegance of their costume, the Crows only
approach them, whom they perhaps even surpass in the latter
particular.":  "The Manitaries do not differ much in personal
appearance from the Mandans; but it strikes the stranger that
they are in general taller.  Most of the men  are well-formned
and stout; many of them are very tall, broad-shouldered, and
muscular; the latter may, indeed, be said of the greater proportion of the men.  Their noses are more or less arched and
sometimes straight.     *     *     *    The  women are much
like the Mandans; many of them are tall and stout, but most
of them short and corpulent.  There are some pretty faces
among them, which, according to the Indian standard of beauty,
may be called handsome."~
i From preface. These remarks seem to recfer more 1)arti(,cularly to the Grosventres and Mandctans, with whom the author spenlt the greater part of the tiIime that
he lived "among the Indiians".
tReport of Agent, S. N. L:itta to thie Commnissioner.
t Maximilian, p. 179.                       lb., pp. 395, 39h.
4 2 
ETRHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
At the present day, it can hardly be said that they are of
finer physique than the Tetons and other roving bands of the
Upper Missouri, who have suffered less, of late, from epidemic
disease and hunger, but thley still take greater pride in their
dress and personal appearance than'most of their neighbors.
The frequent intermarriages of the Mandans and Hidatsa tend
constantly to assimilate thlem more and more to one another in
appearance; yet those claiming pure Hidatsa blood are generally taller and of more prominent features than those who
consider themselves pure Mandans.  We  do not see as many
faces among the Minnetarees pitted with small-pox as among
the Arickarees and Mandans.  Among all the tribes in the village, there are many disfigured by goiter and opacities of the
cornea. All of the Hidatsa men bear on their bodies unsightly
cicatrices resulting from the tortures of the Nahlipike.
Tattooing may be spoken of in this connection.  A few only
of the old men are tattooed. The marks consist of numerous
parallel bands on one side, or over the entire of the chest and
throat, and over one or both arms. I have never seen tattooed
marks on any of this tribe elsewhere, or in any other shape.
The middle-aged nmen, the young men, the women, and the
children are not tattooed. I believe that these marks on the
old men were put on for something more than mere ornament,
and had some forgotten significance. In Arickaree picturewritings, Grisventres are sometimes represented by a rude
symbol of a man having the upper part covered with parallel
stripes. As far as I can learn, this particular style of tattooing
is peculiar to the Minnetarees.
Complexio. -The majority of the Hidatsa have the ordinary dusky Indian complexion, which is, however, not of a
uniform shade, as far as I have seen, in any tribe. There are
none of this nation that would be considered dark for Indians.
Among various tribes of western Indians may be found individuals, claiming pure aboriginal blood, who possess complexions much fairer than the average Indian, with light-colored
hair and eyes.  Such individuals are more common amlong the
Mandans and Minnetarees than they are among most of the
neighboring tribes. A natural or inherited clearness of com
43 
ETIHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
plexion, too, is more easily discernible among members of the
village tribes than among members of roving bands who are
more exposed to the weather. The presence of pale Indians
in these tribes was noted by travelers in early days, before
intermnarriages with whites were  common  enough to have
accounted for it.
Lewis and Clarke* and Gasst notice this fairness when
speaking of the Mandans, only, but their remarks are general.
Catlin speaks of the fairness of the Mandans only, and supposes
this peculiarity to arise fromn some pre-Columbian infusion of
European blood. I The Prince of New Wied, who visited these
tribes but one year later than Mr. Catlin, denies that the Mandans
are of fairer complexion than their neighbors, ~ while he asserts,
at the same time, that, "after a thorough ablution, the skin of
some of them appears almost white." [  I have heard old Mandans say that when the Miinnetarees, including the Crows, first
came among them, the strangers were a fairer race than they.
Of the Crows, who, as before shown, once formed one nation with
the Hidatsa, Colonel Raynolds, in his Report of the E.xploration
of the Yellowstone (1859), p. 48, says:- "The Crows are fairer
than the Sioux, many of the mountain band beiiing sallow and
hardly a shade darker than whites who undergo similar exposure. This fact was so marked that the first seen were supposed to be half-breeds, but we were assured that they were of
pure Indian descent."
It ig-not necessary to suppose an intermixture of European
blood in order to account for lightness of color in an Indian.
There is no reason why marked varieties of color should not
arise in the Red Race as it has done in other races of men, and
as it has so often done, under cultivation, within specific limits
in the lower animals.  I have seen full-blooded Indians who
were whiter than some half-breeds and whiter than the darkest
representatives of the Aryan Race. An increase of hairiness is
a more reliable sign of Caucasian blood in an Indian than a
diminution of color in the skin; and I never could discover
that those fair Indians, claiming pure blood, were more hairy
than others. The fairness of which I speak is not albinism,
* p. 89.  t p. 83.  -t Okeep~, pp. 5, 49.    ~ p. 3)4.   1I p. 337.
44 
ETHINOGRAPHY OF THE  IID)ATSA INDIANS.
for the eyesight of the fair Indians is as perfect as that of the
dark; they have no unusual appearance of the pupil, and exposure to sunlight darkens their skins. I have never seen an
albino Indian.
Among various western tribes, individuals may be found
who are characterized, even in childhood, by having coarse
gray hair.  From all I could see and learn, I should think that
such persons are more numerous among the Minnetarees and
Mandans than in any other tribe; and they are perhaps the
most numerous among the Mandans.
~ 22. CEREMONIES.-Their most important ceremony is that
of the )Dahpike or Nahpike, which fomnerly took place regularly
once a year, but is now celebrated every second or third year
only. On the' day when it is determined to commnence this
ceremony, some men of the Hidatsa tribe, dressed and mounted
as for a war-party, proceed to the woods.  Here they select a
tall, forked cottonwood, which thley fell, trim, and bark; to this
they tie their lariats,, and, bv the aid of their horses, drag it
toward the village. In the procession, the man who has most
distinguished himself in battle, mounted on the horse on whose
back he has done his bravest deeds, takes the lead; others follow in the order of their military distinction; as they drag the
log along, they fire their guns at it, strike it with their sticks,
and shout and sing songs of victory.  The log, they say, is
symbolical of a conquered enemy, whose body they are bringing into the camp in triumph.  When the log is set up, they
again go to the woods to procure a quantity of willows.   A
temporary lodge of green willows is then built around the log,
as the medicine-lodge, wherein the ceremony is performed.
The participants fast four days with food in sight, and, on
the fourth day, submit to tortures which vary according to
the whim of the sufferer or the advice of the medicine-men.
Some have long strips of skin separated from different parts of
their bodies, but not completely detached. Others have large
pieces of the integument entirely removed, leaving the muscles
exposed. Others have incisions made in their flesh, in which
raw-hide strings are inserted; they then attach buffalo skulls to
the strings and run round with these until the strings become
45 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
disengaged by tearing their way out of the flesh.  Others,
again, have skewers inserted in their breasts, which skewers
are secured by raw-hide cords to the central pole, as in the
Dakota sun-dance; the sufferer then throws himself back until
he is released by the skewers tearing outi of the flesh. Many
other ingenious tortures are devised.'  In the narrative of Long's
Expedition to the Rocky Mountains, we find an account of the
latter part of this ceremony,* prepared probably from the
statements of Mr. Dougherty or Mr. Lisa, as the expedition
did not go.near the Minnetaree country.  All of the torments
there described, and more, are inflicted to this day.  Among
them is the following:  "Anothler Minnetaree, ill compliance
with a vow he had made, caused a hole to be perforated through
the muscles'of each shoulder; through these holes cords were
passed, which were, at the opposite ends, attached by way of
a bridle to a horse, that had been penned up three or four days
without food or water.  In this manner he led the horse to the
margin of the river. The horse, of coursb, endeavored to drink,
but it was the province of the Indian to prevent him, and that
only by straining at the cords with the muscles of the shoulder,
without resorting to the assistance of his hands. And notwithstanding all the exertions of the horse to drink, his master succeeded in preventing him, and returned with hini to his lodge,
having accomplished his painful task."t
In describing the Minnetarees, Prince Maximilian says that
they have the Mandan ceremony of the Okipa or O-kee-pa,
with some modifications, and call it Akupehli.  At this time, the
Hidatsa call the Alandan cerelnony Akupi (of Nwhich word
probably Akupehli is an old form); but they apply no such
term to their own festival. MAaximiilian did not spend a summer
among tliose Indians, and, therefore, knew of both ceremonies
only from description.  If the Minnetaree festival to which he
referred was, as is most likely, the Nahpike, he is, to some extent, in error.  The rites resemble one another only in their
appalling fasts and tortures. In allegory, they seeni to be
radically different.
The minor ceremonies are chieflythose connected with their
pp. 276, 277, 2a5.      t pp. 277, 278.
46 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HID)ATSA INDIANS.
bands, of which the men and women have separate organizations and separate ceremonies.* Rites connected with the eagletrapping will be noticed hereafter.  In one of his letters descriptive of the Mlinmetarees, Catlin gives an account of a greencorn dance, t and devotes a plate to illustratiing the same.   I le
does not directly say that this is a MNinnetaree festivity, but
introduces the description in a way calculated to lead the casual
reader to suppose that it is such.  I have shown the plate to
several of these Indians, and have given them the description
of the dance, but have been invariably informed that they
never had such a ceremony.  In the same letter, he speaks of
an improvident waste of she harvest in gluttonous eating of
the green corn. His remarks on this point certainly do not
apply to thie lHidatsa. In Chapter XIII of his work, Boller
gives a brief description of a dance or paduididi performed by
the Goose Band, an organization of the old women of this tribe;
and, in Chapter XIX, he describes certain ceremonies of the
White Cow Band. The latter band, originally, I believe, belongs to the Mandan women, but Hidatsa women are now admitted to its mysteries.
23. MYTI'HOLOGY AND SUPERSTITIONS.-Objects of veneration. -The object of their greatest reverence is, perhaps, Itsikamahlidis, the First M(ide, or First in Existence.   They sometimes designate him as Itakate'tas, or Old Man Imtmnortal. Some
Indians say that itsikamahidis means hle who first nmade, but
such a rendering is not in accordance with the present etymology
of the language.  They assert that he made  all things, the
stars, the sun, the earth, and the first representatives of each
species of animals and plants, but that no one made him.   He
also, they say, instructed the forefathers of the tribes in all the
ceremonies and mysteries now known to them.
Maahopa, or Miahopa-ictias, is the equivalent in the Hidatsa
language for those terms in other Indian tongues which  are
usually translated "Thle Great Spirit".  In thislanguage, it mlay
be (figuratively, perhaps) applied to the Itakatetas, or any    * See icke, iliokaicke, ihokamiaicke, ma4ukaicke, mxasukakadigta, masutamadaki,
midaicke, and padnididi, in the Diction~try.
t p. 1&9.                                         t Plate 75.
47 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE B1DATSA INDIANS.
thing else of a very woniderful or sacred nature. Much diversity of opinion exists among observers of Indian character concerning the ideas which the savages attach to this term; and
the subject deserves more consideration than it has yet received.
The ideas of all the tribes within our borders have uniidoubtedly been greatly modified by intercourse with the whites;
and, recognizing this fact, many claim that the Great Spirit,
or, more properly, Great Mystery, s a deity of the modern
Indian only.  I have certainly heard some old and very conservative Minnetarees speak of Mahopa as if they meant
thereby an influence or power above all other things, but not
attaching to it any ideas of personality. It would now be perhaps impossible to make a just analysis of their original conceptions in this matter. But the Old Man Immortal has no
vague existence in their minds.
If we use the term worship in its most extended sense, it
may be said that, besides this being, they worship everything
in nature.  Not man alone, but the sun, the mnoon, the stars,
all the lower animals, all trees and plants, rivers and lakes,
many bowlders and other separated rocks, even some hills and
buttes which stand alone in short, everything not made by
human hands, which has an independent being, or can be individualized, possesses a spirit, or, more properly, a shade.  (See
idahi in Dictionary.)
To these shades some respect or consideration is due, but
not equally to all.  For instance, the shade of the cottonwood,
the greatest tree of the Upper Missouri Valley, is supposed to
possess an intelligence which may, if properly approached,
assist them in certain undertakings; but the shades of shrubs
and grasses are of little importance. When the MIissouri, in
its spring-time freshets7 cuts down its banks and sweeps some
tall tree into its current, it is said that the spirit of the tree
cries while the roots yet cling to the land and until the tree
falls into the water.  Formerly it was considered wrong to cut
down one of these great trees, and, when large logs were
needed, only such as were found fallen were used; and to-day
some of the more credulous old men declare that many of the
misfortunes of the people are the result of their modern disre
48 
ETHNOGRAPIHY OF THE IIIDATSA IN])IANS.
gard for the rights of the living cottonwood.   The sun is held
in great veneration, and many valuable sacrifices are made to it.
Future state.-They believe neither in a hell nor in a devil,
but believe that there are one or more evil genii, in female shape
(see mahopamiis in Dictionary), who inhabit this earth, and
may harm the Indian in this life, but possess no power beyond
the grave. Their faith concerning a future life is this: When
a Hidatsa dies, his shade lingers four nights around the camp
or village in which he died, and then goes to the lodge of his
departed kindred in the Village of the Dead. When he has
arrived there, he is rewarded for his valor, self-denial, and ambition on earth by receiving the same regard in the one place
as in the other; for there, as here, the brave man is honored
and the coward despised.  Some say that the ghosts of those
who commit suicide occupy a separate part of the village, but
that their condition differs in no wise from that of the others.
In the next world, human shades hunt and live on the shades of
buffalo and other animals that have here died. There too
there are four seasons, but they come in an inverse order to
the terrestrial seasons.  During the four nights that the ghost
is supposed to linger near his former dwelling, those who disliked or feared the deceased, and do not wish a visit from the
shade, scorch with red coals a pair of moccasins, which they
leave at the door of the lodge.  Thie smell of the burning
leather, they claim, keeps the ghost out; but the true friends
of the dead man take no such precautions.
Various superstitions.-They have a great many superstitious notions, yet I believe their superstitions are neither more
numerous nor more absurd than those of the, peasantry of some
European nations to-day.  There is, too, among them every
degree of faith in these fancies, from almost perfect skepticism
to the most humble credulity.  I will not describe all of their
superstitions known to me, but will refer, for illustration, to a
few of them. They believe in the existence and visibility
of human and other ghosts, yet they seenm to have& no terror
of graveyards and but little of mortuary remains. You may
frighten children after nightfall by shouting nohidalii (ghost),
but will not scare the aged. They have; muck faith in dreams,
4
49 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
but usually regard as oracular those only which come after
prayer, sacrifice, and  fasting.   They  have  queer  notions
respecting the effects of different articles of diet, thus: An
expectant mother believes that if she eats a part of a mnole or
shrew, her child will have small eyes; that if she eats a piece
of porcupine her child will be inclined to sleep too much when
it grows up; that if she partakes of the flesh of the turtle, her
offspring will be slow or lazy, etc.; but they do not suppose
that such articles of food affect the immediate consumer.
They have faith in witchcraft, and think that a sorcerer may
injure any person, no matter how far distant, by acts upon an
effigy or upon a lock of the victim's hlair.
It is believed by some of the Hidatsa that every human
being has four souls in one. They account for the phenomena
of gradual death, where the extremities are apparently dead
while consciousness remains, by supposing the four souls to
depart, one after another, at different times. When dissolution
is complete, they say that all the souls are gone, and have
joined together again outside of the body.  I have heard a
Minnetaree quietly discussing this doctrine with an Assinneboine, who believed in only one soul to each body.
Amulets. Every man in this tribe, as in all other neighboring tribes, has his personal medicine, which is usually some
animal.  On all war-parties, and often on hunts and other excursions, he carries the head, claws, stuffed skin, or other representative of his medicine with him, and seems to regard it in much
the same light that Europeans in former days regarded-and
in some cases still regard protective charms. To insure the
future fleetness of some promising young colt, they tie to the
colt's neck a small piece of deer or antelope horn. The rodent
teeth of the beaver are regarded as potent charms,  and are
worn by little girls on their necks to make them industrious.
Oracles. Since their removal to their present village, they
do not seem to have any very important local oracles to consult; but when they lived on Knife River, they had at least two
such holy places. f One of these was a famous holy stone, or
'Medicine rock" (Mihopas, or, Mandan, Mihopinis), which is
described by Long and by. Maximilian. It was some two or
50 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
three days' journey fromn their residence. The Hidatsa now
seldom refer to it, and I do not think they ever visit it.
The other famous oracle, to which they now often refer, as
they have still some fancies connected with it, was the Makadistati, or House of the Infants, a cavern, near the Knife River,
which they supposed extended far into the earth, but whose
entrance was only a span wide. This cave, they say, was inhabited by pigmies, or mysterious infants, who came out only
at night, and then with great caution, lest they should be observed, and who followed a wise and watchful leader that
knew the scent of man and snuffed the air as he advanced,
like the leader of a band of antelope.  They suppose that if
he detected the presence of a human being, he gave the alarm
and all retreated. After rainy nights, they saw tracks of some
animals going from and returning to the cave, which tracks
they said were those of the infants. The oracle was thus coiisulted: The childless husband, after a long fast, would repair
to the neighborhood of the cave at night, and secrete himself
behind a bowlder, to the leeward, to watch; if, in his hungerweakened brain, he had a vision of the infants, he returned
home, confident that he would be a father within a year. The
barren wife who desired children would, at sunset, lay at the
mouth of the cave a tiny play-ball and a little bow and arrow.
If the ball was missing in the morning, she believed that
within a year she would be the mother of a girl; while if the
bow and arrow were missing, she supposed she would be the
mother of a boy. If neither were "taken", she went back
with little hope, and could not consult the oracle again until a
year had elapsed.  There are those among them who imagine
that, in some way or other, their children comne from the
Makadistati; and marks of contusion on an infant, arising from
tight swaddling or other causes, are gravely attributed to
kicks received from his former comrades when he was ejected
from his subterranean home.
An account, given in Long's travels, of a certain hill,
which "was supposed to impart a prolific virtue to such
squaws as resorted to it", etc.,* seems to refer to this oracle;
-* Lo<g, vol. i, pp. 274-275.
51 
ETHNOGRAPIIY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
but, if such is the case, I believe the account to be incorrect in
some respects.
24. MARRIAGE, ETC.-Marriage is usually made formal
by the distribution of gifts on the part of the man to the
woman's relations.   Afterward,  presents of equal value  are
commonly returned by the woman's relations, if they have the
means of returning them "and are satisfied with the conduct of
the husband.  After the marriage, if the husband is a young
man taking his first wife, he becomes an inm-ate of his fatherin-law's lodge, and helps, by his hunting, to support his wife's
parents.  Some travelers have represented that the "marriage
by purchase" among the Indians is a mere sale of the woman
to the highest bidder, whose slave she becomes; but I feel that
they misrepresent the custom, unless where their remarks may
apply to some modern irregularities among the least reputable
persons. Certainly, they misrepresent the custom as it exists
in this tribe.  The presenting of the wedding-gift is a form.
The gift itself is a pledge to the parents for the proper treatment of their daughter, as well as an evidence of the wealth
of the suitor and his relations.  The larger the marriage-gift
the more flattering it is to the bride and her relations; hence,
the value of the presents offered has something to do in favoring a suitor's cause; but girls are left much to their own choice
in selecting husbands for themselves. Parents soinetimes, by
persuasion, but rarely by any harsh coercion, endeavor to
influence a daughter in the reception or rejection of an offer.
I have known many cases where large marriage-presents have
been refused from one party, and gifts of much less value
accepted from another, simply because the girl showed a
preference for the poorer lover. The fame of a man as a
warrior, his influence and position in the tribe, do more to
secure him a good wife than the presents he may offer. Skill
in hunting is a high recommendation;  parents  comnmonly
advise their daughters to marry the men who will never leave
the lodge unprovided with meat. I knew a case of a poor
young Mandan, who had a sickly and worthless wife of
another tribe, to whom, however, he was very kind; when
she died, a well-to-do Grosventre, who had three fine daugh
52 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
ters, gave them all to the young widower in marriage, and
with them a valuable present in horses and other property,
saying, "The young man has a good heart, and will be kind
to my children when I am dead."  Sometimes when  a girl is
crossed in her love, she elopes with her favorite.  The pair
remain out on the prairie for a week or so, and then return to
the village. Usually this ends the trouble. They are then
considered married, but such marriages are looked upon as
undignified, and different terms are applied to a marriage by
elopement and a marriage by parental consent.  (See kidale
and uahe in Dictionary.)
Polygamy is practiced, but usually with certain restrictions. A man who marries the eldest of several sisters has a
claim to the others as they grow up; and in most cases marries
them, unless they, in the mean time, form other attachments
and refuse to live with him.  As certain female cousins are
regarded as younger sisters, a man has often much latitude in
selecting wives under this law.  A man usually takes to wife
the widow of a brother, unless she expresses an unwillingness
to the arrangement, and he may adopt the orphans as his own
children.. When a Grosventre takes a second wife who is no
relation to the first wife the results are generally unhappy.
Sometimes the first wife leaves him and returns to her relations;
so)metimes she succeeds in chasing the second wife away. Occasionally, if the husband is well off, he provides them with
separate establishments; sometimes, again, but rarely, the two
wives agree.
Divorce is easily effected; yet, among thIe better class of
people in the tribe, it is rare.  A young man who possesses
sufficient recommendations to secure a comely and industrious
girl of good reputation and well connected is usually in no
hurry to part with her, nor is she willing to leave him for trifling
causes. The unions of such people often last'for life. Among
persons of different character, divorces are common. The Mlinnetaree woman is, as a rule, faithful to her husband, particularly
when she is married to the man of her choice.  It~sometimes happens, however, that a married woman elopes. The injured husband may then satisfy himself by seizing all the property of the
53 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
seducer and of the seducer's friends that he can lay his hands
on, and the latter often give him opportunities of doing so, or
voluntarily come forward with presents to appease him.  If the
husband should at first slay his faithless wife, which is rarely
done, no one would call him to account for it; but if lie or any
of his relations have made seizures or accepted presents on
account of the elopement, he does not dare to touch her when
she returns. But the most praiseworthy course for the husband
to pursue is to send for the runaways, request their return to
the village' and, when they come back, invite them to his lodge
and formally present the woman to her seducer, giving him a
horse or some other valuable gift into the bargain.  In short,
if he would show that "his heart is strong", he must treat the
whole affair as if he had had a good riddance. If a man discards a wife for infidelity, or if she elopes from him, he hopelessly disgraces himself if he takes her back.
Notwithstanding that such are their customs, it  must be
remembered that their social discipline is not very severe.  Punishments by law, administered by their soldier band, they have,
but only for serious offenses against the regulations of the camp.
He who simply violates social customs of the tribe often subjects himself to no worse punishment than an occasional sneer
or taunting remark; but for grave transgressions he may lose
the favor and regard of his friends.
With the Mlinnetarees, as with other western tribes, it is
improper for a man to hold a direct conversation with his motherin-law; but this custom seems to be falling into disuse.
25. NAMES.-Children are named when a few days old.
Sometimes to males four names are given, all of which will
have the same noun, but each one a different adjective. Only
one of these names will be commonly used. In after years, the
names of the males are changed once, or oftener, or rather new
names are given; for they will be called as often by the old
names as by the new.  The first new name is usually given to
a youth after he has first struck an enemy in battle. The
names of women are rarely changed. Sometimes, if a name
is long, a part of it only is used in ordinary conversation.
Nicknames are often given on account of some absurd saying,
54 
ETHNOGRAPHY- OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
ludicrous circumstance, or personal peculiarity; and it sometimes happens that a person is called by his nickname almost
to the exclusion of his proper name. Boys are sometimes
named in honor of distinguished warriors deceased. Horses
are rarely named; but names are often given to dogs, particularly to such as children keep for pets.  White men known to
the tribe are ordinarily named by these Indians from personal
peculiarities; thus, we have for whites names which translated
signify Long Neck, Fish-Eyes, Antelope-Eye, Old Crane, etc.
A white man whlo has been for many years employed at Fort
Berthold as an ox-driver, and who has, in consequence of his
employment, frequently occasion to say "wo, wo-haw!" is
known among the Grosventres as momohas (Englished, Momohaush or Bobohaush).  Whites are sometimes called by the
translations of their regular  Christian-names or surnames.
Thus, an old interpreter named Pierre Garreau is called mis
(Englislied, Meesh or Beesh), from mi', a rock; and a Mr. Pease,
who formerly traded at Fort Berthold, is known to the tribe as
amazis (Englished, Amau'zhish), from amazi, beans. It is probable that some of these translations are made - by the whites
and then employed by the Indians.
I have seen some members of this and of other tribes who
are ashamed to tell their names, and when asked for their
names will answer reluctantly and with apologies, or seek a
third party to give the information; while other Indians, apparently as conservative, exhibit no such hesitancy. I think
that sensitiveness on this point is not so common among the
Indians at Fort Berthold as among other tribes; nor is it as
common among them now as it was ten years ago.
26. RELA'I'IONSHIP.- To illustrate their system of relationship, some of the Hidatsa names for relations are here synoptically given, although they may be found also in the Dictionary, each in its alphabetical order.
adutAka,-grandfather  or great-grandfather, or grandfather's brothers.
iku, —grandmother,   great-grandmother,  grandmother's
sisters.
lta,-father, father's brothers, uncles in the male line.
55 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
dte-ka'ti,-a true father.
tatls,-another term for father, never used with the pro
nouns.
ika' or ikas,-mother, mother's sisters, aunts in the female
line.
hidu',-a true mother.(same word as for bone).
hu,-another term for mother, said to be of amahami
origin.
itidu, a mother's brothers, uncles in the female line.
iidmi,  a fathler's sisters, aunts in the male line.
itakfsa, a general name for sisters and female cousins,
also the only name for a mnan's younger sister.
itame'tsa, a general name for brother or male cousin, also
used in the sense of companion as in English. The only term
for a woman's elder brother.
itaku,-,-a woman's younger sister.
idu', -a woman's elder sister.
itami'a,-a man's elder sister.
itsu'ka,-a man's or woman's younger brother.
faka,-a man's elder brother.
idisi,- a son, said by both parents.
ika,-a daughter, a brother's daughter. 
kid&, a husband.
itddamia,-a wife, a wife's sisters, particularly her younger
sisters.
ua, -a true wife.
isiklss,  a husband's brother.
ida'ti,-a wife's brother, a brothler's husband.
The above terms are for relations of the third person;
many of them having the possessive pronoun of the third person'i' inseparably prefixed, or to be removed only when pronouns of the first and second persons are used. To make the
forms of the first and second persons'ma' and'di' are respectively substituted for'i', or the fragmentary pronouns
'm' and' d' used.  We have thus, mate, my father; matsuka,
my younger brother; du'a, your wife; di'aka, your elder brother,
etc. The words tatis, ika', and hidu do not ordinarily take
possessive pronouns, but are the same for all persons.  All
these may end with 5.  (See E 90 in Grammar.)
56
I 
ETIINOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
In the above definitions, male cousins and adopted brothers
are included under the term brother, and female cousins and
adopted sisters under the term sister.  Hence it is evident that
their words expressive of relationship are often applied to the
most distant and indefinite connections.
On examination of the foregoing list, the following facts
may be noted: Of the terms for brother and sister, certain ones
are used only for relatives of the male, others only for those of
the female; some are applied only to elder, others only to
younger relatives; while two of the terms are general. There
is a separate term for a maternal uncle, but none for a paternal
uncle; he is called by the same name as a father. When they
wish to distinguish between an actual father and a father's
brothers, they use the adjective ka'ti, true, real, in speaking of
the former. While there is a name for paternal aunt, there is
none to distinguish maternal aunt from mother; yet there is a
special word to designate the real mother, although she is coinmonly called by the terms which apply as well to her sisters.
There are two names for wife; one for a wife by actual marriage, the other for an actual wife as well as what might be called
a potential wife, i. e., a wife's sisters. There are two terms for
brother-in-law, but no general term, as with us.
It must not be supposed, from the wide significance of
some of their terms, that they do not discriminate between
all grades and conditions of kinship.  When they have no
single word to define the relationship, they employ two or
more words.
~ 27. HUNTING.-Their methods of hunting are much the
same as those of all the other plain Indians. In former days
they made antelope-parks; * they stampeded heTds of buffalo
over bluffs; they approached animals carefully until within
close arrow-range, or decoyed them to approach the hunter by
imitative sounds, or, as in the case of antelope, by displaying attractive objects. When they obtained horses, the chasing of the buffalo became common; and when they came into
the possession of fire-arms, they began to hunt much as white
* See Lewis and Clarke, p. 92; De Smet, p. 148 et seq.; Maxihilian, p. 385. Other
authors describe this mode of hunting.
57 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF TIIE HIDATSA INDIANS.
men do. They still often employ the primitive methods; thus,
when they find antelope abundant, they make the oft-described
antelope-park. The bow and arrow are still largely employed
by the hunters; and fall-traps and snare-traps are made to catch
foxes and other small animals.  The boys practice themselves
in the use of the bow by -shooting at marmots and small birds,
and in winter they set horse-hair snares for snow-buntings.
The majority of their modes of capturing and killing the lower
animals have been so extensively described by other observers*
that I will make no further reference to them here. But I will
give an account of their eagle-hunt, which, as far as I know,
has never been fully described in any book of travels, although
Maximilian and Hayden both speak of it.
Eaqle-hunting.-Late in the autumn or early in the winter,
when they go out on their winter-hunt, a few families seek some
quiet spot in the timber, and make  a camp with a view to
catching eagles. After pitching their tents, they first build a
small medicine-lodge, where the ceremonies, supposed to be
indispensable, are performed, and then make several traps on
high places among the neighboring hills. Each trap consists
of a hole dug in the earth, and covered with sticks, sods, etc.;
a small opening is left in the covering; a dead rabbit, grouse,
or other animal is tied on top; and an Indian is secreted in the
excavation below. The eagle, seeing the bait, sweeps down
and fastens his claws in it; but, the bait being secured, he is
unable to remove it.  When the eagle's claws are stuck, the
Indian puts his hand out through the opening, and, catching
the bird by both legs, draws him into the hole and ties him
firmly.  The trapper then re-arranges the top of his trap, and
waits for another eagle. In this way many eagles are caught;
they are then brought alive into camp, the tails are plucked
out, and the bird is set at liberty, to suffer, perhaps, a similar
imprisonment and mutilation at some future time.
The covered hole or trap is called amasi'. When the trapping-season is over, they break up the camp; and, if the
locality is not already provided with a name, they call it the
* Particularly the exciting "buffalo-surrouud ". See Catlil), N A. Indians, vol. I,
p. 199 et seq.-Boller, p. 224 et seq.
58 
ETIINOGRAPIIHY OF THiE HIDATSA INDIANS.
amasi' of whoever was master of ceremonies during the season.
Two instances of this manner of naming are given in the list
of Local Names.
The medicine-lodge is built after the ma~nner of their ordinary earth-covered dwelling-houses, but is much smaller.  The
door-way is low and small; and the door, consisting of a skin
stretched on a frame, is suspended from the top by a string.
On the inside of the lodge, opposite to' the door, is a sort of
altar, on which various charms and relics are placed; around
the edge,to the right and left of the door, hay is spread to
serve as seats; and, in the center, is the fire-place. At night,
after the trappers return, they sit to the left; their visitors sit
to the right, as they enter.  The latter enter and leave the
lodge only by opening the door on the side corresponding
with their seats.  No person is allowed to spit on the floor, but
he may spit behind him in the hay. Women are not allowed
to enter the lodge, but may come to the door and hand in food
and water.
When some of the men wish to take part in the trapping,
they go, during the day, after a preliminary fast, to the medicine-lodge. There they continue without food until about
midnight, when they partake of a little nourishment, and go
to sleep.  They arise just before dawn, or when the morningstar rises; go to their traps; sit there all day without food or
drink, watching for their prey, and return about sunset.  As
they approach the camnp, every one there rushes into his lodge,
for the hunter must see, or be seen by, none but his fellowhunters until he enters the medicine-lodge. On entering the
lodge, they stay there for the night.  About midnight they eat
and drink for the first time since the previous midnight, and
then lie down to sleep, to arise again before the dawn and go
to their traps.  If where be one among them who has caught
nothing during the day, he must not sleep at night, but must
spend his time in loud lamentation and in prayer.  The routine
described must be continued by each hunter four days and
four nights, after which he returns to his own lodge hungry,
thirsty, and tired,' and follows his ordinary pursuits until he
feels able to go again to the eagle-traps. During the four
59 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
days of the trapping, the hunter sees none of his family, and
speaks to none of his friends except those who are engaged in
the trapping at the same time. They believe that, if any
eagle-hunter does not properly perform  all these rites, the
eagle, when caught, will get one of his claws loose and tear
the captor's hands. There are men in the tribe who have had
their hands crippled for life in this way.
The chief objects of pursuit in this hunt are the tailfeathers and largest wing-feathers of the war-eagle, Aqtuila
chrys[etus, which are in such great requisition as emblems of
valor.  Of course, other birds of prey besides the war-eagle
often seize the bait; of such tluhree species are considered
worthy of capture; but these inferior birds are often slain at
the'trap instead of being brought home alive.
~ 28. WARFARE.-The tales which some of the old men
of this tribe tell of the warlike expeditions of their fathers and
grandfathers seem scarcely credible, although from the descriptions of distant countries that they contain they bear
internal evidence of truth. The journeys performed by the
Hidatsa war-parties of the last century were very long,. but
those undertaken by single individuals were more extraordinary.  I have heard it related (with many descriptive embellishments and minute particulars) of an old warrior that he
traveled directly to the south on foot until he reached the
Platte River; there he built himself a bull-boat, and floated
far down the Lower Missouri, where he found the land alf
forest, and where he plucked fruits and shot birds such as he
had never seen before;  and there, from the head of some
unknown Indian, he raised a scalp, and returned to his people
after an absence of twenty lunar months. Another story is
told of one who traveled toward the north-star until lie came
to a land where the summer was but three moons long.  Here
he raised the scalp of some poor Tinneh, and came back to his
native village in about seventeen moons from the day he
started.         *
The?Minnetarees now rarely meet the Shoshonees, or
Snake Indians of the Rocky Mountains, either in war or in
peace;_yet, in 1804, as appears from the account of Lewis
60 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
and Clarke, an almost constant warfare was carried on be tween these two tribes. There are old men now among the
Hidatsa who speak of battles that they fought in their youth
on the banks of streams that flow to the west. There are
middle-aged men in this tribe who have, on mounted war parties, passed through the Dakota hunting-grounds to strike
the Chippeways in Minnesota.  When  the Chippeways would
see the tracks of the scalp-hunters pointing toward the western
prairies, they would perhaps blame the Dakotas, and revenge
themselves on the latter. Of late years, their military operations have become more restricted since the Dakotas have
given them all they could attend to near home.
Occasionally they have pitched battles with their enemies, but most of their hostilities consist in the raids of small
war-parties, whose great object is not to take many scalps at
any hazard but to inflict some injury without loss to themselves.  The popularity of a partisan leader depends much on
the small cause for mourning which his excursions entail on
the tribe.  When, however, they fight to resist a war-party,
or meet an enemy by accident when they are not out on a
regular war-excursion, they fight with little regard for life.*
Many of their war-parties start out on foot, expecting to return
with stolen horses.
Prisoners of war. —-Young children are often taken prisoners of war.  They are neither ill-treated nor compelled to perform unusual labors. Sometimes they are adopted by people
who have lost children, and are then treated with parental
kindness. When they have grown to maturity, they sometimes return to the tribe whence they came, but more often
remain with their captors. I have never seen or heard of
these Indians taking adult prisoners, for the purpose of torturing them to death, as was so common among the eastern
tribes. The Hidatsa kills his enemy outright.
The bodies of the slain, however, they mutilate in every
conceivable shape. Sometimes they burn them whole, on
large pyres; sometimes they hack them in pieces and burn
* See account of a battle near Fort Berthold between Minnetarees and Sioux, 
given by Boller, p. 145.
61 
ETHNOGRAPIIY OF THE HIDA'rSA INDIANS.
the fragments as offerings to the sun.   Palliser gives an
account of a fight between the Minnetarees and the Sioux at
Fort Berthold, which he closes with the following remarks:"The skirmish now terminated; the Sioux retired and the Minnetarees returned to their village in triumph, dragging the
body of their unfortunate victim along with them.   Then
commenced a truly disgusting sight; the boys shot arrows
into the carcass of their fallen enemy, while the women, with
their knives, cut out pieces of the flesh, which they broiled
and ate. I turned away chilled with horror, and the whole
scene hiaunted me for hours, and frequently afterward."* I
first read this after I had known these Indians for some years,
and was much surprised, for I had never heard of cannibalism
among them, and had known of cases where some had died of
hunger without resorting to this practice, which, among starving Europeans, is not uncommon.  I had also heard Mr. Palliser's former hunting-companions and acquaintances on the
Upper Missouri speak of him in terms of high praise as a man
of veracity; and I have heard the adventures related in his
book corroborated by eye-witnesses; therefore I took particular pains to inform myself on this point; and I was
assured by the oldest white residents, as well as by the oldest
Indians, that none of this tribe had ever, under any circunmstances, devoured human flesh. They say that the neighboring tribe of Crees do sometimes eat parts of the bodies of enemies slain in battle; and they account for his assertion either
by supposing that there were Crees visiting the camp  at the
time, or that the horrified Palliser "turned away chilled" upon
witnessing the cutting and broiling, and without waiting to see
if the flesh was eaten, but taking the latter for granted.
29. STORIES.-Long winter-evenings are often passed in
reciting and listening to stories of various kinds. Some of
these are simply the accounts given by the men of their own
deeds of valor, their hunts and journeys; some are narrations
of the wonderful adventures of departed heroes; while many
are fictions, full of impossible incident, of witchcraft and magic.
The latter class of stories are very numerous. Some of them
p. 286.
62 
ETHINOGRAPIIY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
have been handed down through many generations; some are
of recent origin while a few are borrowed from other tribes.
Of course, the interest of a tale depends much on the way it is
told; although the plot remains the same with different narrators, the accessories and embellishments are added by each
one to suit himself  Thus, some old men acquire great reputations as story-tellers, and are invited to houses and feasted
by those who are desirous of listening to them. Good storytellers often originate tales, and do not disclaim the authorship. When people of different tribes meet, they often exchange tales with one another.
As an example of their tales of fiction, I have selected a
story, said to belong originally to this tribe, and to have been
known to it from time immemorial. An old Indian will occupy
several hours in telling it, with much elegant and minute
description, which I omit.  On the other hand, I add nothiing,
and give the following as a simple abridgment of the tale as
I have heard it told.
Tale of fiction.-Near the mouth of Burnt Creek, on the
east bank of the Missouri, are the vestiges of some large
round lodges, which stood there before the Indians came into
the land.  They were inhabited by various mysterious beings
of great power in sorcery. In one of the lodges lived the two
great demi-gods Long Tail and Spotted Body;  a woman lived
with them, who took care of their lodge, and who was their
wife and sister; and these three were at first the only beings
of their kind in the world. In a neighboring lodge lived an
evil monster named Big Mouth, "who had a great mouth and
no head".  He hated the members of Long Tail's lodge, and
when he discovered that the woman was about to become  a
mother he determined to attempt the destruction of her offspring.
When Long Tail and Spotted Body were absent on a hunt
one day, Big Mouth entered their lodge, and, addressing the
woman, said that he was hungry. The woman was greatly
frightened, but did not wish to deny him her hospitality; so
she proceeded to broil him some meat on the coals. When
the meat was cooked, she offered it to him in a wooden dish
63 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE IIIDATSA INDIANS.
He told her that, from the way his mouth was made, he could
not eat out of a dish, and that the only way she could serve him
the food so that he could eat it was by lying down and placing it
on her side.  She did as he intimated, when he immediately
devoured the meat, and in doing so tore. her in pieces. She
died, or seemed to die; but the children thus rudely brought
into the world were immortal. One of these he seized, and
throwing him into the bottom of the, lodge, said: "Stay there
forever among the rubbish and let your name be Atutish."*
The other lie took out and threw into a neighboring spring,
saying to him: "Your name is Iahash;t stay there forever,
where you will love the mud and learn to eat nothing but the
worms and reptiles of the spring."
When Long Tail and Spotted Body came home, they were
horrified to find their sister slaughtered; they mourned her
duly, and then placed her body on a scaffold, as these Indians
do. After the funeral, they returned hungry to the lodge, and
put some meat on the fire to cook. As the pleasant odor of
the cooking arose, they heard an infantile voice crying and
calling for food. They sought and listened, and sought again,
until they at length found Atutish, whom they draggedl forth
into the glht, and knew to be the child which they supposed
was devoured or lost forever. Long Tail then placed Atutish
on the ground, and, holding his hand some distance above the
child's head, made a wish that "he would grow so high"; and
instantly the child attained the stature, mind, and knowledge
of a boy about eight years old. Then Long Tail made many
inquiries concerning what had happened to him and the whereabouts of his brother; but the child could give no information
of what took place during the visit of Big Mouth.
In a day or two after this transaction, the elders made for
the child a little stick and wheel (such as Indian children use
in the game called by the Candians of the Upper Missouri
roulette), and bade him play round in the neighborhood of the
lodge, while they went out to hunt again. While he was play    * Or atutis. See' atuti' in Dictionary.
+ Or mahas. See' naha' in Dictionary.
I have given above these two names in an English form for the convenience of
the reader.
61
I 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
ing near the spring, he heard a voice calling to him and saying
"miakas " (ty elder brother).- He looked in the direction from
which the voice proceeded, and saw little Mahash looking out
of the spring.  Wanting a playmate, Atutish invited him to
come out and play. So Mahash came out, and the two brothers
began to amuse themselves.  But when  Long Tail and his
brother approached the lodge, on their return from the lhunt,
Mahash smelled them far off, rushed svay like a frightened
beast, and hid himself in the spring. When the elders returned,
Atutish told them all that had happened while they were gone.
They concluded that he of the spring must be their lost child,
and devised a plan to rescue him, which they communicated to
Atutish.
Next morning they made another and smaller roulettestick, for the enchanted child to play with. Then they divested
themselves of their odor as much as possible, and hid themselves near the sprint and to the leeward of it. When all was
ready, Atutish went to the edge of the spring, and cried aloud
"Mahash! Do you want to come out i"  Soon the latter lifted
his head cautiously out of the spring, raised his upper lip,
showing his long white fangs, snuffed the air keenly, looked
wildly around him, and drew back again into the water.  Atutislh
then went near where he had seen his brother rise, and called
again to him; but the child answered from the water that he
feared to'come out, as he thought he smelt the hunters. "Have
no fear," said Atutish; "the old men are gone out hunting
and will not be back till night.  I am here alone.  Come out
to the warm sunlight.  We will have a good time playing; and
I will give you something nice to eat."  Thus coaxed and reassured, the other ventured out, still looking mistrustfully
around him. Atutish then gave him a piece of boiled buffalotongue to eat, which the little bov said was the best thing he
had ever tasted.   "Very well," said Atutish, "let us play,
and I will stake the rest of this tongue against some of your
frogs and slugs on the game." Mahash agreed; and soon, in
the excitement of the play, he forgot his fears.  They played
along with the roulette some tinie without much advantage on
either side, until, at length, they threw their sticks so evenly
5
65 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
that it was impossible to tell which was farthest from the wheel.
They disputed warmly, until Atutish said, "Stoop down and
look close and vyu will see that I have made the best throw."
The other stooped over to observe; and, while his attention
was thus engaged, his brother came behind the little fellow,
seized him, and held him fast.  Atutish then called to the concealed hunters, who ran up, threw a lariat around the struggling
captive and bound him firmly. Having secured the wild boy,
their next task was to break the spell by which his tastes and
habits were made so unnatural.  To accomplish this, Longl
Tail and Spotted Body put him in the sweat-hlouse and there
steamed him until he was almost exhausted.  They then took
him out and began to whip him severely.  As they plied the
lash, they made wishes, that the keen scent would leave his
nose, that the taste for reptiles would leave his mouth, that the
fear of his own kind would leave his heart, etc. As they progressed with this performance, he suddenly cried out to Atutish,
"Brother, I remember myself now.  I know  who I am."
When he said this he was released; and his first impulse was
to run to the spring. He ran there; but when hle reached the
edge, he stopped, for he found that he no longer loved the
black mud and the slimy water; and he returned to the lodge.
Long Tail then placed the twins side by side, and holding
his extended hand, palm downward, above their heads, a little
farther from the ground than on the previous occasion, wished
that they would both be "so high"; when, at once, they grew
to the size of boys about fourteen years old, and they grew in
wisdom correspondingly.  Then Long Tail made bows and
hunting-arrows for the boys, and a pair of medicine-arrows for
their protection and for use on extraordinary occasions; and
he addressed them saying, "You are now big enough to protect yourselves. Go out on the prairie and hunt, and we will
see which one of you will be the best hLunter."  After that time
thley went out every day, and became expert hunters.
Once, as they were looking for game among the hills, they
came to a scaffold on which a corpse was laid.  "There," said
Atutish, "is the body of our mother.  She was murdered, no
one knows how." "Let us try the strength of our medicine
6-6 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
arrows on her," said Mahash; "perhaps we can bring her back
to life." So saying he stepped close to the scaffold and shot
straight up. As the arrow turned to fall, he cried out, "Take
care, mother, or you will get hurt;" and, as it descended near
the body, the scaffold shook and a low groan was heard. Then
Atutisli stepped nearly under the scaffold and shot up in the
air. Ashis arrow turned to fall, he cried out, "Mother! Mother!
Jump quick, or the arrow will strike yott." At once she arose,
jumped down from the scaffold, and, recognizing her children,
embraced them.  The boys then asked her who was the author
of their calamities, and how it all happened.  She pointed to
the lodge of' Big Mouth, and related all the circumstances of
her death.  Upon hearing this, the boys swore they would be
revenged. Their mother endeavored to dissuade them, describing Big Mouth to them, assuring them that his medicine was
potent, and that he would certainly destroy them if they went
near him. They paid no attention to her remonstrances, but
proceeded to plot the destruction of the monster.
Now, this Big Mouth had a very easy way of making a
living.  He neither trapped nor hunted, nor took pains to cook
his food.  He simply lay on his back, and when a herd of deer
came within sight from his lodge, or a flock of birds flew overhead, no matter how far distant, he turned toward them, opened
his great mouth, and drew in a big breath, when instantly
they fell into his mouth and were swallowed.  In a little while,
the boys had their plans arranged. They built a large fire,
and heated some small bowlders in it.  Then they carried the
stones to the top of his lodge, put them near the smoke-hole,
and began to imitate a flock of blackbirds. "Go away, little
birds," said Big Mouth; "'you are not fit to eat, and I am not
hungry; but go away and let me sleep, or I will swallow you."
"We are not afraid of you," said the boys; and they began- to
chirp again.  At length Big MAouthl got angry.  He turned up
his mouth, opened it wide, and just as he began to draw his
breath to suck them in, the boys stepped aside, and hurled the
stones down into the lodge. "Oh, what sharp claws those
birds have! They are tearing my throat," exclaimed the monster, as he swallowed the red-hot rocks.  The next moment he
67 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
roared with pain and rushed for his water-jars, drinking immense draughts; but the steam made by the water on the
rocks swelled him up; and the more he drank the worse he
swelled until he burst and died.
The boys brought the body home, and, after they had
danced sufficiently around it, their mother praised them for
what they had done, but she said, "You must not be too ven,turesome.  All these lodges around are inhabited by beings
whose powers in sorcery are great. You cannot always do as
well as you have done this time.  You should keep away from
the rest of them. There is one old woman in particular whom
you must avoid. She is as powerful as Big Mouth; but you
cannot kill her in the same way that you killed him, for she
catches her food, not in her mouth; but in a basket.  Whenever she sees anything that she wants to eat she turns her
basket toward it and it drops in dead.  If she sees a flock of
wild geese among the clouds, no matter how high they fly, she
can bring them down."  When the boys heard this, they said
nothing in reply to their mother, but set off secretly to compass the death of the witch.  They went to the lodge of the
latter, and, standing near the door, cried, "Grandmother, we
have come to see you."  "Go away, children, and don't annoy
me," she replied.  "Grandnother, you are very nice and good,
and we like you.  Won't you let us in? " continued the boys.
"Oh, no," said she, "I don't want to hurt you; but begone,
or I will kill yvu."  Despite this threat, they remained, and
again spoke to her, saying, "Grandmother, we have heard that
you are very strong medicine, and that you have a wonderful
basket that can kill aniiything. We can scarcely believe this.
Won't you lend us the basket a little while until we see if we
can catch some birds with it?"  She refused the basket at
first, but, after mLuchl  coaxing and flattering, she handed it to
them.  No sooner were they in possession of the basket than
they turned it upon the witch herself, and she dropped into it
dead.
After this exploit, the mother again praised her boys, but
again warned them to beware of other evil genii of the place,
Which she described.  One of these was a man with a pair of
68 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
wonderful moccasins, with which he had only to walk round
anything that he wanted to kill.  Another was a man with a
magic knife, with which he could instantly cut or kill anything
that he threw the knife at. These individuals they destroyed
in the same manner that they overcame the basket-woman, by
coaxing them to lend their magic property, and then slaying
the owners with their own weapons.  On each occasion, the
boys retained the charmed articles for their future use.
When all this was done, the old mother called her boys
and told them there was but one more dangerous being that
they had to guard themselves against. She said, " He lives in
the sky, where you can not get at him; but he can hurt you,
for his arm is so long that it reaches from the heavens to the
earth.  His name is Long Arm."  "Very well," said the boys,
"we will beware of him." One morning, soon after receiving
this advice, they went out very early to hunt, but could find
nothing to kill. They walked and ran many miles, until late
in the day,, when they became very tired and lay down to
sleep on the prairie. As was their custom, they stuck their
medicine-arrows in the gromund, close beside them.  The arrows
possessed such a charm that if any danger threatened the boys
they would fall to waken them.   While  the brothers lay
asleep, Long Arm looked down from the clouds, and, beholding
them, stretched his great arm down toward them.  As the arm
descended, the arrows fell hard upon the boys, but the latter
were so tired and sleepy that they did not waken, and Long
Arm grasped Atutish and bore him to the sky.  In a little
while, Mahash woke up and discovered, to his horror, that the
warning arrows had fallen and that his brother was gone. He
looked round carefully on the prairie for the departing tracks
of his brother or for the tracks of the man or beast that had
captured him, but in vain. When at his wit's end, and almost
in despair, he chanced to glance toward the sky, and there, on
the face of a high, white summer cloud, he saw the doubled
track of Long Arm, where he came near the earth and went
back. Mahash laid down his bow and arrow and other accouterments, retaining only his medicine-knife, which he concealed in his shirt. He next stuck his magic arrows into the
69 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
ground and got on top of them, anl then he crouched low,
strained every muscle, and sprung upward with all his might.
He jumped high enough to catch hold of the ragged edge of
the cloud.  From that he scrambled higher until he at last got
on Long Arm's trail, which he followed.  For fear of recognition, he wished himself smaller, and, becoming a little, toddling
child, moved on until he came to a great crowd, moving in
one direction, with much talk and excitement.  He ran up to
an old woman who walked a little apart, and asked her what
was the matter.  She informed him that they had just captured
one of the children of the new race which was growing on the
earth-a boy who had destroyed many favored genii, and that
they were about to kill and burn him.  "Grandmother," said
Mahash, "'I would like to see this, but I alm too little to walk
there. Will you carry me?"  She took him on her back and
brought him to the place where the crowd had gathered.
There he saw hIis brother tied to a stake, and a number of
people dancing around him. He thought that if he could only
reach the post unobserved and touch the cords with his medicine-knife, he could release his brother; but for some time he
was puzzled how to do it. At length he slid down from the
old woman's back,'1and wished that for a little while he might
turn to an ant. He became one, and, as such, crawled through
the feet of the crowd and up to the post, where he cut the
cords that bound Atutish.  When the latter was free, Mahlashi
resumed his proper shape, and they both ran as hard as they
could for the edge of the clouds. The crowd pursued them;
but, as each foremost runner approached, Mahash threw his
knife and disabled him. At last, Long Arm started after the
brothers, running very fast.  As he came within his arm's
length of them, he reached out to grasp one of them.  As he
did so, Mahash again threw his knife, and severed the great
arm from the shoulder.  The boys got back safely to the
earth. Then, having ridded themselves of all their enemies,
they lived in peace, and in time they moved away from that
locality.
~ 30. DivIsIoNs OF TIME.-Many writers represent that
savage Indian tribes divide the year into twelve periods corre
70 
ETHNOGRAPHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
sponding to our months, and that each month is named from
some meteorological occurrence or phase of organic creation
observable at the time. Among others, Maximilian presents us
with a list of twelve months,*-"The month of the seven cold
days", "The pairing month",   "The month of weak eyes"
etc.  He introduces this list in one of his chapters descriptive
of the Mandans.  He does not say it is their list of months.
He publishes it without comment; and yet it is presented in
such a way as to lead the reader to suppose that it is the regular
and original Mandan calendar. Other authors present lists of
Indian months in much the same way. As the results of my
own observations, I should say that the Mandans and Minnetarees are generally aware that there are more than twelve
lunations in a year, that they as yet know nothing of our
manner of dividing the year, and that, although when speaking
of "moons", they often connect them with natural phenomena,
they have no formal names for the lunar periods.  I think the
same might be said of other tribes who are equally wild.
The Hidatsa recognize the lapse of time by days, by lunar
periods, and by years.  They also recognize it by the regular
recurrence of various natural phenomena, such as the first formation of ice in the fall, the breaking up of the Missouri in the
spring, the melting of the snow-drifts, the coming of the wild
geese from the south, the ripening of various fruits, etc. A
common way of noting time, a few years ago, was by the
development of the buffalo calf in utero.   A period thus
marked by a natural occurrence, be it long or short, is called
by them the kadu, season, time, of such an occurrence.  Some
long seasons include shorter seasons; thus they speak of the
'season of strawberries, the season of service-berries, etc., as
occurring within the season of warm weather.  They speak of
the seasons of cold weather, or of snow (tsidie, mada), of warm
weather (ade), and of death, or decay (mata), which we consider as agreeing with our seasons of winter, summer, and fall;
but they do not regularly allot a certain number of moons to
each of these seasons. Should you ask an interpreter who
knew the European calendar what the "Indian names of the
* p. 384.
7.1 
ETHNOGRAPIHY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
months" were, he would probably give you names of a dozen
of these periods, or natural seasons, as we might call them,
corresponding in time to our months.  In a few years, when
these Indians shall know more of our system of noting time
than they now do, they will devise and adopt regular Hidatsa
names for the months of our calendar.
Other facts concerning their cognizance of time may be
learned from Paragraphs 256 and 25-7 of the Grammar, and by
referring in the Dictionary to the following words, which are
names of different parts of the astronomical day:-atade, ata,
kiduhakute, midiatede, midiate, midiatedu, midiate-odaksipe,
midimnapedupahide, midimapedupahli, midimapedupahi-dakamidi, midiimahpide, midiimahipi, opade, opa, oktside oktsi,
oktsidu, mape and maku.
72 
P ILOLOG.
4 
4 
PHIL O LOGY.
~I. CLASSIFICATION OF THE HIDATSA LANGUAGE. —The language of the Minnetarees has been  classified as belonging to
the linguistic group called the Dakota group, and very properly
so called, not because there is any evidence that the present
Dakota tongue is the parent language of the group or the most
direct representative of an archaic parent language, but because
it is the miost extensively spoken, and the most thoroughly and
intelligently studied language of the group.
II. RELATIONS OF DAKOTA TO  HIDATSA.-The  Hidatsa
language resembles the Dakota in many respects; and a large
list might be made of words which are the same in both languages, if we allow for the interchangeability of certain lingual
and labial sounds in the Hidatsa, to be described hereafter. The
following are examples: -hota, gray; i, mouth; ista, eye; itopa,
four)th; Ina, I; mini or midi, water; nita or dita, thine; nopa or
dopa,  two; te, die; topa, four; besides particles, such  as i,
denoting the instrument, to, interrogative, etc.
There are many more words in each language which very
closely resemble their synonymes, or approximate synonymnes,
in the other; and several which in both languages are perfect
homonymes and imperfect synonymes. These statements are
illustrated in the following list:(DAKOT A.*)                      (HIDATSA.)
dote,                            doti, throat;
hi,                              hi, tooth, edge, point;
his,                             hi,'feather8,fur, hair; 
ha,                              ha, rough;
inkpa,                           icpu, point;
ino) pa,                         inopa, second;
ite,                             ite, face;
niita,                           inata, mny, mine;
nitawa,                         mnatawae, mine;
* The Dakota words used throughout this essay are from Rev. S. R. Riggs's Dakota
Gramntmar and Dictionary. Where the Dakota definitions differ from the Hidatsa, they
are given separately. 
PHILOLOGY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
(DAKOTA.)
nagi,
a, to shoot and hit,
oti, ti, tipi,
ozu,
po,
pte,
pute,
9upe,
to,
(HIDATSA.)
dahi or nahi, ghost;
u, to wound;
ati, house;
oze, to plant;
pue, foggy;
nlita,  c  o    w;
apite, uipper lip;
~ipe, bowels;
tohi. blue;
ha, to come;
into or wad  snow;
roaml or waa, iwhite man;
rmati or wati, boat;
mia or wia, woman.
of words which are nearly or quite synonynguages, we find little difference in sound,
akota 6 (English ch in chain) stands in place
as in these examples: -
(HIDATSA.)
cagu,                               dalio, lungs;
6aicao,                             dada, to tremble;
cainte,                             da'ta, heart;
daze,                               dazi, name;
cekpa,                              dehpa, navel;
cezi,                              (dezi, tongue;
cute, side;                         duta, ribs;
calihaliake, vertebre;             dahaha, vertebral processes;
nmicui,                              nada, my elder sister;
nicun,                               didu, or nidfi, thy elder sister.
More commonly, however, we find the difference to consist chiefly in the Dakota words having y, where the Hidatsa
words have d: As the Dakota causative prefixes ya and yu
are represented in the Hidatsa by da and du, many verbs may
be placed  under this head.   In  the following words, and in
many others, we have instances of this difference:(DAKOTA.)                           (HIDAT'SA.)
ya,t
ya, to go,
yaga, to peel with the teeth,
yalideca, to tear with the mouth,
yaliepa, to drink up, as  water,
yamni,
76
U,
wa,
wasi6ui),
'wata,
Wil),
(DAKOTA.), -.
I
cagti7
6ai)cai),
6ai) te,
aie,
6ekpa,
6e2i,
6ute side;
7
6ah,,thake vertebrce -
7  -         7
mi6ul)7
ni6un,.
da, thou;
da, go thou;
dalia(le, to shell with the.teeth;
dahea, to tear with the teeth;
daliupi, to drink dry;
dami, three;, 
PHILOLOGY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
(DAKOTA.)                           (HIDATSA.)
yuha, to lift,                     duhe, to lift, duha, lift thou;
yuh(leca, to tear in pieces, etc.,  duhe,a, to tear in any way;
yuhpa, to throw down, etc.,        duhlpi, to take down   of;
yuhuga, to break a hole in, etc.,  duliolii, to break across;
yuksa, to break off, etc.,         dutsaki, to pull apart;
yulka, to loosen, to untie,.(luka, to open, as a box;
yutkiCda, to press, squeeze,       dutsikti, to strangle;
yuta,                              duti, to eat;
yuza,                              dutsi, take hold of.
In some of the above verbs it will be seen that the roots
are much alike in both languages.   Many of the quoted definitions embody similar ideas, although they are differently worded.
It is well to remind the reader that even in the Dakota, in
verbs beginning with ya and yu, the y is changed to d in the
conjugation.   (See Riggs's Dakota  Gramnmtar, ~ 50.)
In some cases, we find that the Dakotas  use s where the
Hidatsa usually use ts; but on this point usage is somewhat
divided in the Hidatsa.  (See Grammar, ~ 17.)
(HIDATSA.)
liatski,
tsi (itsi),
trite,
tsidia,
ditsukla, nitsuka,,
sir) te,           ti e,               Iat;
sni,               tsidia,             cold;
nisurja,            ditsulia nitsakl    your younger brother.
And some other words might be quoted to exeminplify this
difference.
In the words nagi and dahi, cagu and daho, yaga and
dahiada, quoted above, and in others, the g of Dakota takes the
place of h in Hidatsa.
Althou(lh, as has been shown, there are many words alike
or nearly alike in these two languages, allowance being made
for certain uniform sound-changes, it must be remembered
that a large majority of the Dakota words have no resemblance
to anything in the Hidatsa. Reduplication in verbs, which is
a prominent feature of the Dakota tong-ue, I have not observed
to occur in the lHidatsa except in one word, ikaka.
III. RELATIONS OF CRow TO HIDATSA. The Hidatsa
bears a greater resemblance to the Crow than to any other
language.  Some speak of one as being but a dialect of the
77
(DAKOTA.)
1) as k a,
sihe,
sii)te1 7
sni,
nisui)l,ca,,
I(ENGLISH.)
lo' ng -
ot;
tail; 
PHILOLOGY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
other; and so they might be regarded if we use the word dialect
in a very wide sense.  The Crow has its own dialects, differing
to no great extent from one another. My opportunities for
studying this language, particularly the dialects of the Mountain Crows, have been very limited.  A vocabulary which I
prepared of the language as spoken by the River Crows has
been destroyed.  I cannot, therefore, give a very full comparison of the Crow and Hidatsa. The Crow words presented
below are from Dr. Hayden's Ethnography and Philology, which
contains the most complete and accurate Crow vocabulary
extant.
A comparison of Hayden's Crow vocabulary with this
Dictionary shows that many words of similar meaning are
spelled alike in both, as adaka, you see; amaka, I see; apaka,
a mnosquito; da, go; di, you; ika, he sees; mahla, a spring;
mape, d(lay; ope, tobacco; ua, a wife, etc.; and that many other
synonyms are nearly alike in spelling, as in the following examples, in each of which the Crow word precedes the Hidatsaame, anma, earth; apahe, apahi, cloud; ape, apa, leaf; aze, azi,
river; daho, daho, lungs; dahlpitse, dahpitsi, bear; deze, dezi,
tongue; due, duhi, lift; ho, hu, come; ho(e,  hutsi, wind; ide
idi, blood; mia, mi', stone; mnie, mia, woman;  mihahe, mihaka,
duck; oki, uki, clay; pohe, puhi, foan.
The oft-quoted consonants (Grammar,'f~[ 19-23), which
are interchangeable in the Hidatsa, are also interchangeable
in the Crow, but perhaps in a less degree in the latter than in
the former.  Of the labial series, the Crows seem to pretfer b
more than the Hidatsa; and of the linguodental series they
use r and n to a greater extent than we find it used by the
latter tribe. By taking this permutation of consonants into
consideration, we find many words alike or nearly alike, both
in Crow and Hidatsa, which would otherwise seem different.
Examuples:
(cRow.)              (HDAI'TSA.)           (ENGLISH.)
atnalabe,             ama,haini,            mountain;
are,                  ade,                  warm;
are, arek,            ade, adets,           ache, it aches:
apana,                apadi,                to grow:
apani                 apadi,               porcupine;
78 
PHILOLOGY OF THIE HIDATSA INLIANS.
(HIDATSA.)
atsimidi,
ma(luhi,
matse, watse,
mnatsikoa,
iiiatsu,
matsua,
maitaniua,
mi, bi,
mide, bide,
mida,                    r
mi(dahka,
mitskapa,
rnitia, bua,
imia,t
i(iuka or iruka,
kada, kara,
niada,
nmi(la,
midi,
ldaka,
(11daii, nawi,
dl'l ln, nain   a        ee u
dumidi,
dopa, nopa,
The Crows commonly use a sibilant, as s, sh, or z, where the
Hidatsa use some other dental, as t.  There are many Crow
words which, except in this respect, differ but slightly or not at all
from their Hidatsa synonyines, as the subjoined list will show:
(CROW.)               (HIDIATSA.)            (ENGLISH.)
_she,               ati,                   house;
hou'se;hiead;
mtnie;
auttum)n;
Vemy noccasin;
boat:
buffalo;
rib;
large;
face;
how many;
what;
who;
dead;
inud;
79
(CRow.)
(ENGLISH.)
mnilk;
I lift;
qnan;
sugar;
cherry;
sinew;
bell;
. I,? e;
door;
fire;
kettle;
rose;
fish;
to cry;
mneat;
run aw,ay;
Winter;
goose:
water;
child;
three;
deep;
twist, wind;
two.
atsimina,
b'arue,
batse, watsi,
batsihua,
batsua,
batsun,
bate)hue,
bi,
bi(lia,
bide,
birahe,
bitskipe,
btia,
it)ek,
irtike,
kana,
11ana,
miina,
inine,
ihake,
Ham,
na,mo
niomina.,
hop, 
PHIIILOLOGY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
(HIDATSA.)
(CROW.)
sho,
shorak,
shop,
( EwNGLISe H.)
where;
where, etc.;
four.
In a few cases, the above rule seems to be reversed, as in
buata, motsa, coyote, wolf;.dakaka, tsakaka, bird; tamelh, same,
Riot; azkate, azikaza, little river; miekate, miakaza, youtny womnan;
tseete, tsesa, wolf; atanua, asadi, to steal.  In these examples,
the Crow words stand first.
The Crow has an oral period as well as the Hidatsa; in
the former it is k, in the latter ts.  (See Grammar, f[[ 33, 16C8.)
As these oral periods are much used, they constitute an
important element in the difference in tone of the two languages.
The Crows sometimes use s where the Hidatsa use 5 or ts,
and c' (English ch in chain) where the Ilidatsa use k. There
are many other instances of changes of sound in these languages which I  have not now  the  means  of illustrating
sufficiently.
. IV. SOME DIFFICULTIES IN TIIE STUDY OF TIIE HIDATSA.
The interchangeable labial and linguo-dental sounds are very
perplexing features of this laniiage.  The sounds of m, b,
and wU are interchangeable; so also are those of d, l, n, and r.
'I'Thlese permutations exist in other Indian tongues, though in
few, I presume, to the extent to which they exist in this tongue.
In the Dakota language, for instance, changes in these sounds
are said to mark difference in dialect, while within each dialect
the labials and linguals are not interlchanged to an extent sufficient to excite remark.
The present Hidatsa tribe represents several bands formerly distinct; and the present language  of this people, no
doubt, represents nearly as many ancient dialects, the distinctive features of which cannot easily be determined at this day.
The consolidation of these diverse dialects has had, perhaps,
some share in producing this confusion of sounds; but, at most,
it has had a very limited share.  I believe that these Indians
do not well appreciate the differences between these allied
sounds as they fall on their ears, and consequently make no
effort to distinguish them with their tongues. I have often,
so
to7
tod u,
topa, 
PHILOLOGY OF THIIE HIDATSA INDIANS.
for experiment, taken a word which contained two or more of
these sounds, and pronounced it, in the course of conversation,
with every possible change, and without being once mtisunderstood.  Thus, the word madakoe, mny friend, my comrade, which
contains but one labial and one dental sound, may be pronounced in at least twelve different ways,-which we have
characters to represent, as, madakoe, marakoe, manakoe, malakoe, badakoe, barakoe, banakoe, balakoe, wadakoe, warakoe,
wanakoe, and walakoe,-without fear of misapprehension,
although they usually pronounce it malakoe or barakoe.
Furthermore, when you hear an Indian uttering a sound
belonging to one of these two series, you are often at a loss to
select a character to express it.  His labial will often sound
as much like m as like b, or as much like w as m. Among
linguo-dental sounds, it is often impossible, even after several
repetitions of a word by an Indian speaker, to decide between
d and r, or between d, 1, and n, as the best suited to represent the
sound that smites your ear. In other words, there are labial,
lingual, and dental sounds which we have not yet learned to
distinguish, and which we have no characters to represent. I
marvel not that old Charbonneau should have "candidly confessed" to Prince Maximilian, after a residence of thirty-seven
years among the Minnetarees, that he could never learn to
pronounce their language correctly.*
In the Grammar (~~ 19-23), where this subject is further
discussed, it will be seen that I have selected a standard letter
to represent each series,-m for the labial, and d for the lingual
or linguo-dental. When I first commenced to form my vocabulary, I adopted a different course, and put down each word
in all the forms in which I heard it; but, in time, I discovered
that I might fill a large volume with these repeated words,
and, in the end, only confuse the student, obscure the truth,
and misrepresent the language.
When  I first obtained some insight into the extent to
which these permutations existed, I could scarcely trust my
senses, and often feared that I labored under some subjective
difficulties. At other times, when, in the mouth of the same
speaker, and almost in the same breath, I would hear a well                       * Maximilian, p. 318.
6
81 
PHILOLOGY OF THE HIDATSA INDIANS.
known word suddenly change its form, I would puzzle myself
by supposing that thef change took place in accordance with
some inscrutable grammatical rule. But when I came into the
possession of vocabularies collected by others, I became better
satisfied with the results of my own observations. In the
compared vocabularies presented below, it will be seen how
differently each author spells one and the same word, and that
their differences arise chiefly from the transmutability of the
sounds to which I have referred.  In the first column (Say),
the vowels have the English sound; and, in the second column
(Hayden), they have the continental sound.
VARIOUS AUTHORS.3
MwATTsbHEWS.
miiptsa [bi-].
(nohpittsee, Boller.5
lachpizi, Max.6
daipitsi.
[ [nahpitsi].
i de,
ridia,
peritska,
awa,
bida,
ada,
bi,
baruhe,
badi,
bautse,
idi.
tsidia.
pedetska.
ama.
mida [bi-].
ada.
mi [bi].
maduhi.
maetsi [bI)aetsi.]
matse [watse, batse].
amah,
beras,
arra,
i  mee,
merohhe,
matze,
mattza,
( Elahsa, Max.,1I
hinatsa,9     ~ Idatza, De  Smet,nd
I eraansl  Bo'er 
[ lteeraeainseb, Bol'ler,12
najes,
laughpa,
mourisha,
neighje,
nogpah,
mene,
boshe 14 and wasshe 15
meya,
inbea, Catlin,    17
mia,    w ea, Lewis and Clarke,    "      w
From Dr. Say's YVocaullary in Long's Expedition, pp. lxx-lxxviii and p. lxxxiv.
2 From Dr. Hayden's Minnetaree Vocabalary in Hayden's Ethnography and Philology, pp. 424-'46.
3 Taken from various parts of the works of the authors to whom referred.
4 "Tomahawk, weep-sa-lan-ga", p. lxxxv.  (See miiptsa daka, in Dictionary.)
"loc-pitts-ee-toapish, or Four-Bears."  Boiler, p. 56.
6 " Lachpizi-sihrish (the yellow bear)."  Maximilian, p. 180.  The letters have here their German
sounds probably.
7 "Pehriska-Ruhpa (the two ravens)."  Max., p. 180.
s8 The first two syllables of "Awachawi", p. 178. (See amahami in the Dictionary.)
9 "Indian, hinatsa."
o Max., p. 178. (See Ethnography, ~ 18. Hidatsa.)
il "The Idatzas, miscalled Grosventres." From letter in Report of the Commissioner of Indian
Affairs for 1864, p. 276.
12 " Men of the Hee-rae-an-seh ", p. 97.
13, Pehriska-Puhpa, (the two ravens)."  See note 7 above.
14 "French, bo-she", p. lxxxiv.
15  Spaniard, was-she-o-man-ti-qua", p. lxxxiv.  (See mahi and umatikoa in Dictionary.)
16' Leaving the'moshees' (whites) to reflect ", etc., p. 187.
7 In the feminine ending of the name "Seetsebea", p. 188.  (See Grammar, ~ 93.)
18 In the feminine ending of the name "Sacajawea", p. 279.
82
EXGLISH.
axe,
SAY.,
weepsa,4
HAYDEN.'
biipsa,
bear,
lab-petze,
blood,
cold,
crow,
earth,
fi,-e,
haii-,
I,
ice,
k i i ife,
mai7,,
eb Fe,
cerea,
pebris'ka, Max.,'
awa. Max.,'
I
hidatsa.
i.
dega fneaj.
dahpi[nahpi].
madii.
dezi [nezi].
dopa [nopa].
midi [bidil.
mai.
mada.
Imia [wia, bia].
Minnetaree,
desba,
dalipe,
badisba,
deze,
no,
s7cin,
my son,
tol,tgue,
two,
qvater,
.white man,
..woman,
Y'Libpa, Max.,"
bidi,
bashi,
mana,
moshee, BoZZer,16 
PHILOLOGY OF THE IIIDATSA INDIANIS.
Lest some should urge that these variations in orthography
might be sufficiently accounted for by taking into consideration the changes which time may have produced in the language-for the quoted authors wrote at different dates-or by
supposing the vocabularies to have been written from the dictation of men who spoke different dialects, I must call attention to the fact that there are many instances where one word,
in different connections, is spelled with' different interchangeable consonants by.the same author. (In the following examples, the Hidatsa words in parentheses are forms given in the
accompanying Dictionary.)  Thus, Say presents us with two
different forms of duetsa or luetsa, one, in "nowassa-pa" (duetsapi), nine, and "ape-leimoisso" (ahlipiduetsa.), eleven; with two
forms of daka, child, a diminutive ending, in "sacanga-nonga"
(tsakaka-daka), eyg, and "weepsa-langa" (miiptsa-daka), tomnah7aw/; with two formis of masi, white ian, in "French, boshe"
and "Spaniard, wasshe-omantiqua" (the latter is doubtlessly
intended for masi umatikoa, white nten at the so8uth-see note
1a, page 82); and withl two forms of dohpaka, people, in "Snake
Indians, mabucshlo-rochlpanga" (mapoksa, dohpaka), and "Les
Noire Indians, ateshlupeshla-lohpanga" (ati, sipisa, dohpaka).
In Hayden's vocabulary, we find two different spellings of matse,
san, in "bautse-itse" (matse-etsi), chief, and "makariste-matse"
(makadista-matse), boy; two spellings of adui, sour,  ungyent,
etc., in "adawi", sour, and bidi-arawi (midi-adui), whisky; and
two spellings of midi, sun, in "miidi-ewukpi" (midi-imalipi),
sunset, and  "bidi-waparepelhe" (lmidi-mapedupahi or bidiwaperupahi), mnidday, noon.  I regret that, in preparing these
remarks, I have not had access to a copy of MAaximilian's orliginal work, which contains a vocabulary of the Minnetaree language; but I have no doubt that instances of this kind might
be drawn from it.
Besides making the various labial interchanges mentioned
above, they sometimes, but very rarly, use b for p; and occasionally, too they combine the sounds of b and w, thus ama
may be pronounced abwa.  A third series of interchangeable
consonants might be mentioned, namely, a sibilant series. To
some extent they confuse the sounds of s, 5 (English sh in shun),
83 
PIILOLOGY OF T''IIE HIDATSA INDIANS.
and ts (see Grammar, SE~ 17, 18), and illustrations of this confusion might.be taken from the vocabularies I have quoted; but
these sibilant interchanges do not occur to such a marked extent as do the labial and lingual changes, and, when heard, they
are not so perplexing to the English student.
V. SONANT cHARAcTER.-The Hidatsa language is sonorous and pleasing to the ear; but I consider it less musical than
the Dakota. One of the chief reasons for the difference in tone
between the Hidatsa and Dakota languages, I believe to be the
almost total absence, in the former, of the nasal-vowel ending
(i)) so common in the latter (see Grammar, SUE 4, 14).  The
aspiration of the vowel in the Hidatsa takes the place of the
nasal ending to a great extent. Another reason for difference
of tone is that the Hllidatsa shorten and obscure their vowels to
a greater extent than the Dakotas. The Hidatsa is spoken
with much inflection, and the vowels are often increased in
quantity to express different shades of meaning.
If a party of Indians should be seated in an adjoining
room, or at a short distance from the listener, conversing, where
the voices can be heard, but not a syllable distinguished, the
accustomed ear has little difficulty in discerning which one of
the many languages of the plains the Indians are speaking.
Each language has its own peculiar sonant character. It is
more difficult to distinguish by this character the Hidatsa from
the Crow than from the Dakota or Miandan, and more difficult
to distinguish it fromn the latter than from the former of these
two. The tones of these four languages belonging to the Dakota group are somewhat alike; so mnuch alike that a person
possessing but limited acquaintance with them might mistake
one for another, hearing it at a distance as I have described.
But the contrast in tone between these tongues and the neighboring, but alien, Arickaree is well marked, and any quickeared person might learn at once to distinguish it from
them.
~VI. CHIIANGES IN COURSE OF TIME.-I have said that the
three languages spoken in the village at Fort Berthold show no
perceptible inclination to coalesce (Ethnography, ~ 13). I have
said this, well knowing that the statement was somewhat at
84 
PHILOLOGY OF THE IIIDATSA INDIANS.
variance with the opinions of earlier observers.*  The few Mandan and Minnetaree words given by Lewis and Clarke in proper
names shlow, as far as they go, that the languages have not
materially changed since 1804.  There are now, and doubtlessly there were in 1804, many points of correspondence between the Mandan and Hidatsa languages; but there are none
which may not be more easily' explained by supposing the two
languages to have sprung from a common source than by supposing them to have been reciprocally changed by contact. I
never could discover that the Hidatsa and M'andaii spoken by
the rising generation resembled one another more than did those
languages as spoken by the old men. I do not claim that the
long and intimate intercourse which has existed between these
two tribes has produced no ap)proximation or coalescence of
their languages.  It is but reasonable to suppose that the contrary is the case; but I could never get an Indian to point out to
me, nor could I ever otherwise discover, a satisfactory instance
of such coalescence.
Throughout the past hundred years, the MIandans have
had as much intercourse with the Arickarees as with the Minnetarees; yet I never could trace any resemblance between the
modern Mandan and Arickaree tongues. As far as I have observed them, there is not a single word alike in both. It is not
likely that intercourse has produced a noteworthy approximation of languages in one case and none whatever in the other.
There is no doubt that the Hidatsa language has changed in
the course of time; but the change has resulted chiefly from
causes other than the influence of the Mandan tongue.  Some
of the old men occasionally converse among themselves in
terms which younger members of the tribe do not understand,
and, when asked what they mean, they say they are trying to
speak the old language.
Lewis and Clarke, p. 97.-Maxinilian, pp. 393, 405.
85 
I 
HII)ATSA G AMMAI
87  
HIDATS A  GItAMMAIR.
1. LETTERS.
1. Twenty letters, exclusive of the apostrophe, are used in this work
to express in writing the Hlidatsa language.  Fifteen of the letters are
essential, an(! five non-essential.
Essential Letters.
2. Of the essential letters, five are vowels, and ten; consonants.
3. The vowels are a, e, i, o, u.
a has three sounds;-a (unmarked) has the sound of English a ill
father; a (short) has the sound of English a in what; a (obscure)
has the sound of short i in tun.
e has three sounds;-e (unmarked) has the sound of English ai in
air; e (short) has the sound of EInglish e in ten; e (long) has
the English sound of e in they.
i has two sounds;-i (unmarked) has the sound of English i in
marine; 1 (short) has the sound of English i in tin.
o has the sound of Ernglish o in tone.
ui has the sound of English u in rude.
4. The apostrophe (/) is placed after vowels to denote a peculiar force
or aspiration, not initial, in pronouncing them, which slightly modifies
the sound.
5. The consonants are c, d, h, ]i, k, il,l p, s, i, t, z.
c has the sound of German ch in ich.
d has the common English sound before consonants; but before
vowels it has a slight sound of English th in this.  d is inter        changeable with n, 1l, and r.
h has the sound of English h in hat.
Ii represents the guttural surd no longer in use in English; it is like
the German ch in machen, but a somewhat deeper sound.
k has the English sound, as in took.
m  has the ordinary English sound, as in man; it is interchangeable
with b and iw.
p has the ordinary English sound, as in pan.
s has the sound of English s in sun.
has the sound of English sh in shun.
t has, before consonants, the ordinary English sound, as in tit; but
before vowels it has a slight sound of English th in thin.
z has the sound of English z in azure. 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR..
Non-essential Letters.
6. The non-essential letters are five of the seven interchangeable consonants of the language; they are b, 1, n, r, and w; they have all the
ordinary English sounds. The language might be written or spoken
without them. b and w are interchangeable with the essential letter m,
and 1, n, and r with the essential letter d.
Remarks.
7. As no great advantage could be seen in retaining two sets of characters, capitals are, here, entirely dispensed with in writing the Indian
words; but, in the Ethnography, where a Hidatsa proper name is used~
temporarily, as an English word, the initial letter is a capital.  Proper
names are easily recognized by the termination i.
8. The following letters of the English, it will be seen, are not included
in this alphabet: f, g,j, q,, x, and y.  The sounds off, g,* and v are
not in the language. It is a difficult matter for these Indians, or any
one else, to pronounce i followed by a vowel (and many other vowel
combinations) without an intervening consonantal sound of y; elsewhere
in their tongue this sound is not heard, and a character to represent it
would be useless. k is the equivalent of q. English j might be represented by dz, and x by ks; but neither of these combinations has been
found in the Hidatsa.
9. Some of the tribe occasionally pronounce the first sound of a like
English a in hall, and make other slight variations of the vowel sounds,
which, however, seem to be only individual peculiarities of speech, or
modifications unavoidably produced by preceding or succeeding consonants. It is believed that all the standard variations are duly represented.
10. Often before a final ts, and more rarely before a final k or s, long
vowels may be shortened, e changed to 1, and a to a. (~IT 30-33).
11. It was originally thought advisable to include a short ti in the
alphabet, or to introduce a new character to represent the sound of English iU in tub; but it is now believed that wherever this sound constantly
occurs it is as a modlification of a.
12. o is never shortened, as in the English word not; but a sound much
like short 6 is heard in the modification of a, which is represented thus, a.
13. The sounds of English u in pure and oi in oil, are not found in this
language; nor is the sound of ou in our ever used except occasionally
in the word ho or hao.
14. The nasal modification of vowels, so common in the Dakota, does
not properly belong to the Hidatsa, although a few of the tribe use it
with aspirated a in the words adtsi, idad'ti, ihabtaha, and liaka'ta.
* In the words lioki, iplioki, matslioki, and one or two others, I have
occasionally heard the k softened into a hard g.
90 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
15. The sound represented by c occurs only after i, and ill accented
syllables which are not terminal.
16. The English sound of ch in chais is represented by t;.
17. In words beginning with ts, the t is occasionally dropped by
women and young people, who thus say sakits for tsakits, sitska for
tsitska, etc.; but, according to the best usage of the language, the plain
sibilant is never found alonewith a vowel and never begins a syllable.
18. Sometimes ts is used where ts is to be regarded as the standard;
thus itsuasuka, a horse, may be pronounced itsuasuka.
19. In acquiring the language, and making a correct analysis of its
words, one of the greatest difficulties to be encountered is the interchangeability of certain consonants.
20. There are two important series of interchangeable consonants; a
labial series consisting of m, b, and w, and a dental, or linguo dental,
series consisting of d, l, n, and r. The constituent sounds of each series
are subject to interchanges so arbitrary and frequent that no definite
rules can be given for them.  The following remarks, however, will be
found to apply: (t[f 21, 22).
21. m is regarded as the standard letter of the labial series; it is the
one most commonly used by those who are considered the best speakers
of the language.  Before the vowel i, b is as commonly used as m  it
initial syllables, and w more commonly in median and terminal syllables
22. d is the standard of the dental series. WVhen r is substituted for
d, it is more commonly done by men than by women, while the latter
appear to have a greater preference for 1 and n than the former. A
desire for euphony seems sometimes to determine sp)eakers ill their
choice.
23. Whenever, in any word, a non-essential letter is heard as often
or nearly as often, as its corresponding essential, the fact is shown ia
the Dictionary in one of three ways: 1st, by putting the modified syllable in brackets and indicating its position in the word by dashes, thus
' liamua [-bu-] and "  liami [-wi]'" denote that these words are very often
pronounced liabua and liawi; 2d, by placing the entire modified word
in brackets; and, 3d, by giving the modified word in its alphabetical
order, referring to the same word with the standard spelling.  Where
a non-essential letter is heard oftener than the standard letter, the
fact is shown by prefixing plus [+] in the brackets, thus,'dOpa
[+ mopa].
I1. -SYLLABLEUS.
24. The words are divided into syllables in such a manner as to make
the etymology as clear as possible.  It is designed that each syllable
shall represent one complete factor of a word, or, in case of contraction,
tiore than one, but not the fragments of these factors joined together in
an arbitrary way to simplify the task to the tongue and ear of the
English-speaking student.
91 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
25. A very large proportion of the syllables end with vowels. The
more common cases in which they end with consonants are given below.
(~ll 26-33).
26. Initial and median syllables may end with c or k.  (~Jf 27, 28).
27. Syllables ending in i occasionally take c after i when another
syllable is suffixed (I 15); this most frequently happens when the added
syllable begins with k, p, or t; thus we have micki from'ni, and halipicti
1rom hlalipi.
298. In the prefixes ak, dak, and mnak, the kli is seldom transferred to the
following syllable.
29. Terminal syllables (and consequently words) may end in k, t, A,
and ts. (lIT 30-33).
30. A syllable may be closed by k: 1st, when verbs ending in ki form
the imperative by dropping i, as amaki is changed to amak; 2d, when
ak, duk, and tok are used as suffixes; 3d, when ak, d'k, or mak stand
alone; and, 4th, in the words duk, tok, and tsakak.
31. A syllable may be closed by t, when a verb ending in ti forms its
imperative by dropping i, as kipisuti is changed to kipgsit.
32. Proper names commonly end with A.
33. A word which closes a sentence, or stands alone forming a sentence by itself commonly terminates in ts, if not with k, t, or s. ts answers the purpose of a vocal period in most cases. (IT 168).
31. Syllables are frequently contracted by the elision of their vowels.
35. A contracted syllable, when not terminal, belongs to the succeediiig syllable.
36. A syllable consisting of a single vowel, when following immediately an accented vowel, or standing immediately between  two other
v,)wels, may sometimes be omitted.
IlI. WORlD)S.
37. Words will be considered under the usual eight heads (articles
excluded) of nouns, pronouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions,
conjunctions, and interjections.
Nouns.
38. For convenience of description, nouns may be divided into two
c'asses, primitive and derivative.
Primitive Nouns.
39. Primitive nouns are such as, with our present knowledge of the
language, we are unable to analyze either in whole or in part; as ma',
snow; i', mouth; ista, eye, etc.
40. Nearly all the monosyllabic nouns are primitive, as are also the
names of many things which are longest known to the people.
41. Many of the primitive nouns of the Hidatsa have, in kindred languages, their counterparts, which they closely resemble in sense and
sound.
92 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
Derivative Nouns.
42. Derivative nouns are such as we are able to analyze in whole or
n part.
43. Derivative nouns may be formed from words of any class, but
chiefly from verbs, adljectives, and other nouns, either primitive or de.
rived, by certain prefixes and suffixes, the commonest of which are i.
adu, o0, aku, ma, the possessive pronouns, and the diminutives d(ika and
kaza.
4a. i, prefixed to transitive verbs, forms nouns denoting the instrument or material with which the action is performed; thus, ita, an arrow,
is from ta, to kill, and ikipakisi, a towel, from kipakisi, to rub back and
forth. Nouns formed in this way are commonly prefixed by other
nouns (denoting the recipient of the action), by the prefix ma, or by
both; thus, maikipakisi, iteikipakisi, and maiteikipakisi are more commonly used than ikipakisi, although all these words denote the same
thing.  Nouns of the material are seldom heard without such prefixes;
thus, maikikak, ithread (from kikaki, to sew), and maiteidusuki, soap
(from ite, theface, and dusuki, to wash), are not heard in the simple forms
of ikikaki and idusuki.
45. adu (an adverb of time and place when used alone) is employed
as a prefix to form nouns under the following circumstances: (][~f 46-48).
46. adu, prefixed to verbs, forms nouns denoting the part on which
the action is performed; as, adukikaki, a seamn, from kikaki, to sew.
Here ma, or the name of the thing to which the part belongs, precedes
adu.
47. adu is also prefixed to verbs to form nouns, which signify the
place where an action is performed; thus, from kidusa', to put away carefully, comes adukidusa, a place of deposit.  In this case ma, or the noun
denoting the object of the action, frequently precedes adu; e.g., maadukidusa, a place where anything is put away or stored, matakiadukiduna,
a cupboard.
48. adu is prefixed to intransitive verbs and adjectives to denote oneor more of a kind or class which the verbs or adjectives describe; thus,
from idakisa, left-handed, comes aduidakisa, a left-handed person, and
from kiadetsi, brave, skillful, etc., comes adukiadetsi, one of the brave or
skilled. In this case, ma usually precedes adu.
49. o, prefixed to a verb, may form therewith the name of the action;.
as in odidi, walking, gait, from didi, to walk.
50. o is used in the same way as adu, to denote the place where, or
the part whereon, an action is performed; as in od(fitsi, a mine, from
dfitse, to obtain.
51. aku (a relative pronoun when used alone), prefixed to a transitive verb, forms a noun denoting the agent or performer of the act, and
is nearly or quite synonymous with the English suffixes er and or.  In
this case, aku is commonly preceded by the name of the object; thus,*.
93 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
froum mnasipia, grapes, and duti, to eat, we have magipisaakudfti, grapeeater, i.e., the cedar-bird, or Ampelis cedrorum.
52. aku is sometimes used in the same sense as adu, in Par. 48.
In this sense, it is common before the adjectives denoting color; as in
akutohi, beads, fromin tohi, blue, and akusipisa, black cloth, from Aipisa,
black.
53. ma (to be distinguished from the pronoun ma) is a prefix of very
extended use in the language.  With some nouns, however, it is rarely
used, while to a different class it is indispensable.  It may be regarded
as an indefinite particle, or as a universal noun or pronoun, qualified by
the words to which it is prefixed.  Some of the more common instances
of its use are here given.
54. ma is prefixed to nouns of the instrument beginning with i, as
in Paragraph 44, when the object on which the instrument is employed
is not designated.  When, for precision of definition, the object is
named, its name takes the place of ma. When the name of the material of which the instrument is made is included, it commonly precedes
ma; thus, from maidutsada, a sled, comes mida-maidutsada, a wooden,
sled.
55. ma is prefixed to adjectives to form the names of articles which
possess in a marked degree attributes to which the adjectives refer;
thus, from tsikoa, sweet, we have matsikoa, sugar.
56. ma is prefixed to verbs to form the names of objects on which the
action denoted by the verb has been performed; thus, from kidutskisi,
to wash out, comes makidutskisi, a lot of washed clothes.
57. Many words beginning with ma drop this prefix when incorporated
with the possessive pronouns.
53. The possessive pronouns, (tu), ma, mata, (d), di, dita, i, and ita,
are placed before the name of the thing possessed; then, together, they
are pronounced as one word, and the pronoun regarded as a prefix.
59. In many cases, where possessive pronouns are prefixed, the noun
denoting the thing possessed loses its first syllable, has its accent
removed, or is otherwise much changed; as in itapa, his moccasins, from
hupa, moccasins; itasi, his robe, from masi, a robe.
60. Some words are rarely, others never,* heard without a prefixed
possessive pronoun; as, itadsi. leggings, his leggings; isami, a father's sister; itsuka, a mtan's younger brother.
61. But few words, formed as shown only in Par. 58, are given in the
Dictionary, while all known words in the 3d person, formed as in Pars.
59 and 60, are laid down. In the cases of such words as are referred
to in Par. 60, as never being heard without a pronoun, the noun, with
the pronoun omitted, is given sometimes as a hypothetical word.
* This construction is only found with names of things, which necessarily belong to some one, and cannot otherwise exist (as blood relations),
or are usually so conceived (as certain articles of personal property),
and only to a limited number of such names. 
'94 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
Diminutives.
62. daka, which, when used alone, means the offspring or young of
anything, is employed as a diminutive suffix of general application.
Ex.-idaka, his or its young (the offspring of any individual or species
mentioned); dalipitsidaka, a bear's cub, from dalipitsi, a bear; miiptsidaka, a hatchet, from inmiiptsi, an ax.
63. kaza is a diminutive suffix, whose use is limited to about twenty
words of the language, including proper names. Ex.-masuakaza, a
puppy, from masfika, a dog; miakaza, a young weoman, from mia, a womanl;
amatikaza, the Little Missouri River, from amati, tho Missouri.
64. The adjective kadista is also used as a diminutives
Comipound Nouns.
65. There are certain words which may be considered as compound
nouns, because they closely resemble in structure compound nouns in
English; although no definite distinction can be made in Hidatsa between compound and other derived nouns, since the so-called prefixes
and suffixes are really words-the most of them capable of being used
alone.
66. Compound  nouns are formed in the various ways described in
Pars. 44, 46, 47, 54, and 57, and also by simply placing two or more
nouns together or by joining nouns to verbs, adjectives, and adverbs;
e.g., istamidi, tears, from ista, the eye, and midi, water; masitadalipitsisui, bacon, from masi, white man, itadalipitsi, his bear, and Afni, fat;
istaoze, eye-wash, collyrium, from ista, eye, and oze, to pour into; itahatski, the Dakota Indians, from ita, arrows, and hatski, long; amasitakoamasi, the people of Prince Rupert's Land, from amasitakoa, at the north,
and masi, white men.
67. When a compound noun is formed by simply placing two nouns
together, the first word commonly denotes the possessor, the second the
thing possessed. (IT 84).
68. Sometimes verbs, adjectives, and adverbs are used as nouns without undergoing any change of form; as oze, to pour, a drink; patsatikoa, at the west, the west.
Properties of Nouns.
GENDER.
69. Gender is distinguished by ising, for the masculine and feminine,
different words, which may either stand alone or be added to nouns of
the common gender.
70. matse, man, sikaka, young man, itaka, old man, the terms used for
male relations (as itsuka, idisi, etc.), for callings exclusively masculine,
and the compounds of these words (as makadista-matse and itakalie),
are nouns of the masculine gender, applied to the human species.
95 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
71. mia, woman, kadulie, old womnan, terms used for female relations
(as idu, itakisa, etc.), for those employed in labors exclusively feminine,
and the compounds of these (such as miakaz-, a young  wm) are
nouns of the feminine gender, applied to the human species.
72. kedapi, bull, when used alone, means a buffdlo bull; but as a
suffix, either with or without the interposition of adu, it designates the
male of any of the lower animals.
73. mite, the generic name for buffalo, means also a buffalo cow.
74. mika, a mare, is used as a suffix to denote the females of the
lower animals. it follows the specific name, with or without the intervention of adu.
75. When the species has beeni previously mentioned, or is otherwise
understood, the specific name need not be prefixed to kedapi, aduked(lapi,
mika, or adumika.
NUMBER.
76. Hidatsa nouns suffer no change of form to indicate the difference
between singular and plural.
77. Some nouns we know to be singular or plural from their original
meaning or from the sense in which they are used. In other cases, our
only means of making a distinction is by the use of numeral adjectives,
or such adjectives as ahu, many, etsa, all, kausta, few, etc.
CAsE.
78. In view of their syntactical relations, Hidatsa nouns may be
parsed as having the same cases as nouns of other languages; but they
are not inflected to indicate case except, doubtfully, in the possessive.
79. Possession is ordinarily shown by the use of the possessive pronouns, which stand before the noun denoting the thing possessed, and
are usually considered as prefixed to it.
80. Two kinds or degrees of possession are indicated in the language.
One of these may be called intimate, integral, or non-transferable possession; such as the possession we have in the parts of our body, in our
blood-relations; the possession which anything has in its parts or attributes-the words idakoa, his friend or comrade, and iko'pa, her friend or
comrade, are put with this class. The other kind, or degree, is that of
acquired or transferable possession; it is the possession we have in
anything which we can acquire, or transfer from one to another.*
81. Intimate or non-transferable possession is shown by the use of the
simple possessive pronouns, i, his, her, its, di, your, ma, my, and the contractions, m and d. Ex.-saki, hand, isaki, his or her hand, disaki, your
*The terms here employed for the different classes of possession, as
shown by the different kinds of pronouns, are the best which, at pressent, present themselves; bat they do not accurately cover all cases.
96 
HIDATSA GRAMMAB.
hand, masaki, my hand; iaka, a man's elder brother, diaka, yotur elder
brother, miia,ka, my elder brother.
82. Transfera,ble possession is shown by the compound possessive
pronouns, ita, dita, and mata, which are formed by adding the syllalle
'ta  to the simple pronouns.   Ex.-midaki, a shield, itamidakii, his
shield, ditamid(laki, your shield, matamidaki, my shield.
83. The noun denoting the possessor is placed before the nount denoting the thing possessed, and, when the former appears il  a kenten(e,
only the possessive pronoun of the third person can, of course, be used.
84. Possession may be indicated by simply p)lacing the name of the
possessor before that of the thing possessed, without the use of an intervening pronoun; the two words may be written separately, or as a conipound word (~[T 66, 67), if the signification requires it.  Some cases of
this itiode of showing possession may be regarded as simply an omission
of the pronoun i; others, as the use of one noun, in the capacity of ai
adjective, to qualify another nioun.
85. When the name of the possessor ends with a vowel, the'i' of its
may be dropped, in which case the names of possessor and possessed,
with the itnterposed'ta', may be written as a compound word with at
vowel or syllable eli(le(l, as shlowin in Pars. 34 and( 36.  But if we
regard thl'ta' as belonging to the noun denoting the possessor, we
have as true a possessive case as is made by the English l apostrophe
and s".  The possessive particle ta is never used alone as a prefix..
86. The position of a word in a sentence and the conjugation of the
verb which follows, usually show whether it is in the nominative or
objective.  Often, too, the case is rendered unmistakable by the mleaning of the word and by the context.
Proper Nouns.
87. Proper names, whether of persons, domnestic animals, or places,
are usually terminiated( with thle consonant A, if not already closed by
another consonantal sound, as t or k.
88. A may be regarded as the regular sign of a proper noun.  It is
well to end any proper name with A, where another terminal consonant
does not interfere, but it may be omitted when, in calling a person. we
accent the last syllable of his name, when we aninex the word azi to the
name of a river, and occasionally under other circumstances.
89. A is not suffixed( to the names of tribes or nations when the whole
people are referred to. Perhaps such words are not regarded as proper
nouns by this tribe; but if.the name of the tribe is used to distinguish
one member of it, and is thus employed as a proper name, it takes the
terminal A.
90. Words temporarily enmployed as proper names (as terms of relationshlip, etc.), may take the terminal, if there would be danger of
amtbiguity without it.
91. The name of a person may consist of' a single word, usually a
7
9 7
0 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
noun; as, tsatses, Eagle (the spotted eagle), motsas,  Coyote,  amazis:,
Beans.
92. Personal unames are, however, more commonly compound words
formed-(1) of two noliluns; as, pedetskiliis (pedetska an(d ilii), Crow-crop,
ista-uetses, Iron. eye;-(29) of a lnoun and a verb; as, tsakaka-amakis,,
kSitting bird, dalil)itsi-i(luhis, Rising beqr;-(:(3) of a noun and an adjective; as, tsesa-liadaliis, Lean-twolf, tsalkaka-tobis, Blhtebird;-(4) of a
noun and adverb; as, inidikoa-miis. Woman-at the water;-(5) of a pronoun, noun, aind adjective; as, itamidaki-iliotat is, His white shield,-and
in various other ways.*
93. Names of females often begin with the word inia (wia, bia), or end
with  inia, Iniis (wiis), all of  which  mean  woman.   Ex.-miahopl)as,
Miediciie-woman; miadalipitsis, Bear-woman; tsakakawiis, Bird-woman;
Ilat ailiimii, Turtle- woman.
94. Localities are nalned from physical peculiarities or historical asso(ciations.  The  names of various localities  known  to the tribe  are
appended to the  )ictionary.
Syntax of Nouns.
95. A noun precedes a verb, adjective, noun in apposition, or any
part of speech used as its predicate. Since there is no verb to be, used
as in English, any word except a conjuuction or interjectiou  mcy be
emiployed as the predicate of a noun.
96. The name of' the person spoken to' commonly fi)llows a verb inii
the imperative; but in almost all other cases a noun, whether subject
or objec(t, stands before the verb.
97. WVhen the names of both subject and object appear, the former
usually precedes the latter.
98. The name of the possessor precedes that of the thing( possessed.
PRONOUNS.
99. Htidatsa pronouns ]may be divided into four classes, nainely, per0sonal, relative, interrogative, and demonstrative.
Personal Pronouns.
100. Personal pronouns are of two kinds, simple aid( compound.
o101. Simple, or primary, personal pronouns consist, in the.ingular,
of but oine syllable; they may stand alone, as separate words, but are
usually found incorporated wi'h other words.
102. Compound personal pronouns consist of more than one syllable,
are derived from simple pronouns, and, except those in the possessive
case, are nsed as separate words.
103. Personal pronouns exlhibit, by their different forms, their persont,
n?lrnber, and case.
*S e Ethiograpliy, ~ 25.
98 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
104. They have the first, second(, and tllir(d personts, the singulartand
I)ltiral numbers, anid the nominative, 1)ossessive, andI objective cases.
SIMPLE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
105. The simple personal pronouns are five in number; they are ma
'Ilid mi (sometimes contracted to mn) for the first person, da and di (some times contracted to d) for the second person, and i for the third person.
1()06. They stand'alone when used for repetition and emphasis,  but
otlierwise are incorporated with other words..
107. ma, I, and da, thou, are the proper nominative forms; they are
used as the noininatives of transitive verbs, I)ut may also be employed
ais the liominatives of certain intransitive verbs which have an active
sense; as, ainaki, he sits, ainamaki, I sit, adamaki, you sit,  They may be
l)refixed or suffixed to, or inserted into, verbs; thus we have  kikll(i, he
tunts, makikidi, [ hunt, dakikidi, you htunt; katsihe, he extinguishes, ka.
tsiii,a, Iextinyguish, katsida, you e vtinguish; akakasi, he writes, ainaka k:)g, I write, adakakasi, you write.
I()S. ma, my, is used in the possessive case, prefixed to the noun deliotitig the thing I)ossessed, in intimate or non-transferable possession;
as in iinasaki, my hand, from saki, hand; matsi, imyfoot, from itsi, his
foot.  (IT SI).
1 9. ini, me, di, thee, and i, him, her, it, are prefixed to transitive verbs
to denote the object; as, from kid(esi, he loves, we have Iniki(ldei, he loves
ne, dikidesi, he loves thee, ikidesi, he loves him, her, or it, nidakidesi (me
thou lovest), you love me, and dimakidesi (thee I love), 1 love you.
110. mi and di are, however, used as the nominala,tives of such intransitive verbs as imply only quality or state of being, and of qualifying
words used as verbs.
111. di, thy, your, and i, his, her, its, theirs, are also used in the possessive case, prefixed to the name of the thing possessed, to denote nontransferable possession. (~ 81). Examples.-disaki, your hand, isaki, his
hand, from satki, hand; ditsi, your foot, itsi, his foot (the hypothetical
word, tsi, is not used without the possessive pronouns).
112. ma and mi, da and di, are commonly contracted, when placed
before vowels, according to orthographic rules already given (I[~ 34, 35);
as in makulii, my ear, dakulii, your ear, from akulii, ear; mista, my eye,
(lita, your eye, from ista, eye.
113. The possessive pronoun, i, is often omitted before words beginning with a vogel, where possession is intimated; thus, akulii, ear, is
also. his or her ear; ista, eye, also his or her eye.
114. When the pronoun of the third person, singular, stands alone,
it is often pronounced hi.
115. The plural forms of simple pronouns are not incorporated; they
are mido, plural of ma and mi; (lido, plural of da avid di; and  hido,
plural of i..
: ~e
9"9 
IIIDATSA GRAMMAR.
COMPOUND PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
116. The compound personal pronouns are formed from the simpl)le
pronouns by means of suffixes. The words most readily recognizable,
as of this class, are micki, dicki, and icki (with their plurals), and the
possessives, mata, dita, and ita.
117. micki (1st person), dic(ki (2d person), and icki (3d person) are used
in an emphatic and limiting sense, and are nearly synonymous with the
English words myself, thyself, and himself or herself They may be used
alone, as nominatives or objectives to verbs, but are commonly repetitions, being followed by the simple incorporated pronouns with whichl
they agree.
118. Their plurals, used in the same way as the singular forms, are
midoki (ourselves), didoki (yourselves), and hidoki (themselves).
119. mdtai my, our, ditat thy, your, and ita, his, her, its, their, are compound possessive pronouns, which are ordinarily used to indicate an
acquired or transferable possession (SST 80-82), and are prefixed to
nouns, denoting the thing possessed.  (I[ 83).
120. In compound words, formed of the names of possessor and possessed with the pronoun ita, the i of ita may sometimes be dropped.
(11 36, 85).
121. mata, dita,, and ita have not separate forms for singular and
plural.
122. The words matamae (1st pers.), ditamae (2d pers.), and itamae
(3d pers.), are used respectively as the equivalents of the English words
mine or my own, thine or thy own, and his, hers, its, theirs, or his own, etc.,
and also as the equivalents of the Dakota words mitawa, nitawa, and
tawa. The lHlidatsa words, however, I regard not as pronouns, but as
nouns formed by prefixing the compound possessive pronouns to the
noun' mae'. According to the usual custom with interchangeable coilsonants, these words are often pronounced matawae, nitawae, and itawae.
SYNOPSIS OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
Skimple.
Singular.
nom., ma and mi.
1st pers.   poss., ma.
obj., mi.
nom., da and di.
2d  pers.   poss., di.
obj., di.
noom.,       ([ 133).
H....*ad. gem~. jposs., i.
-  -   ( obj., i, or hi.
I o,o
Plural.
all cases, mido.
all cases, dido.
all cases, hi(lo. 
HIDATSA GRAMMIIAR.
Comnpound.
With'ki' for emphasis and limitation.
Singular.
1st pers., micki.
2d pers., dicki.
3(l pers., icki.
With'ta' to denote transferable possession.
Singular and Plural.
1st pers., mata.
2d pers., dita.
3d pers., ita.
Relative Pronouns.
123. The interrogatives tapa, what? tape, who? aku (~[I[ 51, 52), and
s )Ine other words are used as relative pronouns.
Interrogative  Pronouns.
124. Interrogative pronouns, and all other interrogative words of the
iunguage, begin with t, which, being always followved by a vowel in
these words, has a slight sound of English th in thing.  (ff 5).
125. tap6e, who? tapa, what? taka, what? to, which or where? tua,
which? hlow? are the principal interrogative pronouns.
126. Their compounids, tapeitainae, whose? tapata, takata, tota, whither?
todu, where? tuami, how many? etc., etc., are sometimes used as proitouns, although usually filling the offices of nouns, adjectives or adverbs.
Demonstrative Pronouns.
127. The demonstrative prolnouns are hidi, this, hido, that, with ku and
A or cia, that, him, distinctive or emphatic forms.
128. Their compounds are hidimi, this many, hidika, this much, hiduka,
this way, kutapa, what is that? kuadu, that place, kutsaki, setsaki, that
alone, sedu, just there, etc., etc. Tbhese, like the compounds of interrogative pronouns, are used as pronounis but more commonly as other parts
of sl)eech.
Syntax of Pronouns.
129. All simple pronotuns in the objective case, or used sel)arately for
eiiiphasis, and usually all compounId pronouns in any case, precede the
verb.
130. Personal p)roinouns in the objective commonly precede those ip
the nominative.
101
Plural.
nmidoki.
didoki.
hidoki. 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
131. VWhen mni or d(i is used as the nominative of an intransitive verb
(1 110), or of any word used as such, it stands before the verb.
132. When ma or da is used as an iilcorporatedl pronoun in the noiiiinative (~1 107), its position in the verb is usually determined as follow.~;:
(1st) In a verb formed directly froin a verbal root and beginning witIh
any consonant (except mI followed by a), the pronoun is prefixed ill tlhe
indicative  as in kikiski, hle mneasures, mnakikiski, I mteas?re, dakikigki,
you mneasure; patsaki, he cuts, Imiq)atg. ki, I cut, dapatsaki, you cut.  (21)
In a verb formed directly from a verbal root and beginning witih a vowel,
or the syllable ma, the p)ron)ouii is inserted iii the indicative; while tile
verb, if beginning in the third(l person with i or o, is miade to begill witi
a in the first and second lpersons.  ]Ex. —aadi, he steals, anasadadi, I
steal aaaidadi, you steal; maihe, 7e tries, maiiiahe, I try, madahe,?ott
try; iku'pa, he hates, alnakul')a, I hate, adalikuI)a, you hate; oda)i, he (discovers, amodapi, I discover, adodiapi, you discover.  (3(1) In a transitive
verb formed from an initransitive verb by the addition of be, ha, or k(,
the pronoun is suffixed.
133. There is no incorporated pronoun in the third person nomitnative.*
134. The use of incorporated pronouns being necessary to the conj,igation of verbs, they cainnot be omitted when several verbs refer to tile
same subject or ob)ject.
135. Incorporated possessive pronouns must be prefixed to the namie
of each thiig possessed, even when buit one possessor is indicated.
136. A dernonstrative, relative, or interrogative pronoun usually standls
at the beginning of the clause to whlich it belongs.
137. Wheni  a relative and demonstrative pronoun appear in the saiiie
sentence, the clause contaihing the former usually stands-first.
138. Some modifications of the above rules will be discussed und(er
the head of verbs.
VERBS.
139. Almost any word in the lanLguage mnay be used and conjugate(1
as an intransitive verb, and may again, by certain suffixes, be change(l
to a transitive verb, and be conjugated as such.
140. A(ljectives, iiouns, adverbs, and prepositions are often thus
treated; pronouns, conjulictions and interjections rarely.
141. But there is a large nuniber of words in the language which are
used only as verbs and are not derived from other parts of speeclh;
these may be called verbs proper.
142. Mainy verbs proper we cannot anal ze, and therefore consider
themn as l)rimrnitive verbs.  Such are ki, to bear or carry; hu, to come; d4i,
to depart; eke, to know, etc.
* Possibly ini maihti anud maihe we have exceptions to this rule. (I
199).
102 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
143. Othler verb  p)roper, which we call derivative, are forne(l, by thle
use of certain p)refixes 1il(1 suffixes, from verbal roots, from primitive
verbs, and from- other deriv-Ltive verbs.
Verbal Roots.
144. Verbal roots are not used as independent word(s.  A great number have been foun(l in the latiguage; butit satisfictory mneanings lliave
been discovered for a very fewv oilly, sotlue of whi(,h are here giveni for
illustration: liapi, bark, peel; litce, tear through; liolii, breakacross; lil,
spill, overset;  kahe, spre{,d, stretceh; kape, tear into), lacerate; k.a tsi,
notch; kide, plush; kiti, clear off; kt(de, p)oun(d i, pe; inid(li, ti(-ist;
ilitsi, mtince; inu, take noise; 1iuidsi, roll up; p)al)i, roughen  chlp; l)i,
penetrate; j)lit, or pliuti, squeeze or press out;  )kiti, s)Iooth out (? fr. kiti);
pgu, dislocate; ptsu or p)tsuti, thrust forth; silji, loosen; ski, open out;
,sku, extract; saki, erase; ta, destroy; t.%',ii, pl(,ce iii contact, shut; t.'l)i,
squeeze; ts,, sepattrate; tsad(, slide; ts,'ti,stick, polish; tsiti,raze; tski,
squeeze on a stall sur/fdce from  different directions, shear, strangle, etc.;
tskipi, pare; tskise, wotash; tskupi, bend.  Soine of these may  be no(dified roots, coutaiting somethinig more than the simplest radical idea, but
could not be well furtlier analyzed.
Prefilxes and Suiffixes.
145. Some of the prefixes anid suffixes referred to are indepentdeit
words, bitt many of thein are used only whein connected with verbs.
Some are to be regarded as'adverbs, others perhaps as auxiliary veribs.
PREFIXES.
146. The more important prefixes, whose meanings have been determined, are ada, ak, da, dak, du, ki, mak, and pa.
147. ada immediately precedes the root, and (lenotes that tlhe actioin
is I)erformned by the foot, or by ilieans of heat or fire; as in adraliolii, to
break across with the foot, from liohi, break across, ad(1 adakite, to cletar
off byfire, as in burning a prairie, from thle root kite, clear off.
148. ak deniotes that the action is perfobrmed with or on something;
as, aksue, to spit on, from sue, to spit.
149. da deinotes that the action is done, or nmay properly l)e done, with
the mouth; it standls immediately betore the root, an(l is ofen  p)ronounce(l ra or la.  Ex.-itlatsa to bite off, from tsa, separate; daliese, to
tear wuith the teeth, from the root liese, tear.
150. d(ak (or daka) Staids iiiitnediately before a root or verb to denote
that the actioti is )erforied( with a sudden fort,ible inmplse, or with great
force appliedl (luring a short time, and Iusuall y repeatedl at short intervals; as in dl'kts aki, to chop, fromin tsaki, cut; d(lakaliolii, to break across
with a blow, froth the root lio(liL break across.  n is often nsed as the initial sound of this prefix.
103 
HIDA'TSA GRAMMAR.
151. du is prefixed to roots, to convert them into verbr, without materially adding to their significance; it may be said to denote general or
indefinite causation; is sometimes pronounced ru or lu.  Ex.-duliolii,
to break across in any way or by any means, firom liolii, break across;
dumidi, to twist in any icay, from the root nmidi, twist.
152. ki is sometimes added directly to verbal roots, but more cominonly to verbs. It may be added to any verb, no matter how formed,
and is the iiiost extensively used verbal  prefix in the language.   It
intensifies the meaning; denotes that the action is done forcibly,
repeate(lly, completely, with difficulty, or 6ver the entire object. Some.
times it ierely strengthens, without altering the meaning of the verb;
in other cases, it totally changes its application. Some verbs are never
used without it.  Ex.-dili)a, to put the arms around, kidalipa, to hun7;
pati, to fill down, kipati, to fallfrom a great height.  The words kime, to
tell, and kilesi, to love, have not simpler forms.
153. mak (or maki) is prefixed to verbs to denote opposition or reci)rocity; that the action is performed by two contending parties, that
the motion is from opposite directions, that two actors mutually and
reciplrocally perform the action; thus, from pataki, to close, comes makil)ataki, to close anything which has both sides moved in the act, as a book or
a pocket-comb, and friom iku'pa, to hate, makiiku'pa, to hate mutually, to
hate one another. 
154. pa is a causative prefix, denoting that the action is (lone by the
hand, or by an instrument held in the hand, or that it may be properly
so) performed. It stands immediately before roots and primitive verbs.
Ex.-paliu, to pour with the hand, from liu, spill; pamidi, to twist with
the hand, from midi, twist.
SUFFIXES.
155. The principal suffixes to verbs are adsi, adui, (le, he, ha, ke, ksa,
and ti, with duk and tok for the subjunctive, di, diha, mi, and miha for
the future indicative, and ts for the closing of sentences.
156. adsi denotes a resemblance or approach to the standard described
by the simpler form of the verb; it is most commonly, however, used
with adjectives, rarely with verbs proper.  (IT 226).  Ex.-mitapa,to lie,
to deceive, mnitapadsi, to equivocate.
157. adui denotes progression and incompleteness in action on conditionI; it answers somuetimes the purpose of the English termination ing
iii present participles.  Verbs ending in adui are intransitive and usually
preceded by ki. Ex.-titsi, thick, titsadui, or kititsadui, gradually increasing in thickness; isia, bad, isiadni, deteriorating, to become progressirely worse.
158. Verbs lose their final vowels when adsi and adui are suffixed.
159. de may be translated, almost, nearly, about to, and denotes an
incoIlI)lete action or condition.  It is added to, and forms, intransitive
104 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
verl)s.  Ex. —tsipiti, to ftill upon the utater, to be in a condition to sink,
tsil)iti(l(e, to be about tofall, or nearly falling, on the water.
16(). he, signifying generally to miake or cause, changes some intransitive verbs, and words used as siuch, to transitive.  Verbs take it iln
thle third person indicative, but rarely retainl it in the first person;
while inii the seconid p)erson indicative, and iii the imperative, it is
(dropped or chanlged to ha.  The incorporated i)ronoutns are  suffixed
to verbs formed by tile addition of he, which suiffix they sometimes
follow, but more commonly replace.  Ex.-komi,  complete, finished,
koinihe, he finishes, komima, I finish, koiilidia, you finish, koinihada.
finish thou!
1(61. ha is the form of'he' used in the second person.
162. ke signifyiiig to cause, to change. to use for, is added to intransitive verbs, to form transitive verbs.  It is more extensive in its applieation than he, and may be ad(lded to any of the numerous words of
the laniguage which are capable of beirng used as intransitive verbs.  It
is retained in all persons, tenses, and mnodes and followed by the incorporated pronouns.  W\hei ke is suffixed, the verb is most commonly put
in the intensive foril. The more familiar instanuces, only, of its use are
given in the Dictioxiary.  Ex.-hisii red, hisike, to dye or color red, dyed
red; isia, bad, i,siake, to make bad, change from good to bad, damaged,
debased, kiisiake (intelsive), he damages, kiiuiakema, I damage, kiigiakeda,
you daman(ge; ati, a house, kiatike% to use fi)Jr a dwelling, or convert into a
dluelling; miidi, w'ater, kimidike, to liqueqty.
163. ksa denotes that an action is performed habitually or excessively,
or that a quality exists to a constant or excessive degree; it is used with
verbs proper and adjectives.  Ex.-nitapa, to lie or deceive, mitapaksa,
to lie habitually or excessively; ide, to speak, idekst, to speak garrulously
or unguardedly, to say too much.  (q 231).
16;4. ti, de(noting a favorable condition or readiness to, perform an act,
is added to initranisitive verbs, forminig new intransitive verbs.  Ex.liua, to coughl, huati, to be about to cough, tofeel a desire to cough; halipi,
to s8teeze, halipicti, to desire ta sneeze; tsipi, to sink, tsipiti, to fall uplon
the water, to be placed in a( condition farorablefor sinking.
165. duk, used alone as -Ln adverb of future time, is suffixed to subjoined verbs, to denote donlyt or condition in regard to future time, and
is therefore equivalent to a signi of the subjunctive mode in the future
tense.  Ex.-mniiadeheduk d(litamiamits, ifI am atgered, I will kill you.
166. tok. an adverb used to denote doubt and interrogation, is usually
used independently, but may be suffixed to verbs to indicate the past
anLud preselct tense of the subl)junctive mode i as ill timadetok dliamakatats,
had Igone, 1 would not have seen you.
167. di (2d persoli sinigular), diha (2d person plural), mi (1st person
siligular), and miha (1st person plural) denote the future tense, indicalive mode, and may follow any verb which takes ma and (lda for its
incorl)poratd no.nilLative lproouoas~ They Ilthe the apt)pearance of being
10l 
B IDATS.A GRAMMNIAR.
only repeated pronouns, bIt are probably different forms of a regullrly
co)jutgated auxiliary verb.
168. A verb, or any wordl used as such, in the indicative mode, wheei
closing a sentence, and therefore when standing alone and formingi   a
sentence by itself, is terminated in ts; if in other situations it ends in a
vowel. (~f 33). By comparison of this with previous rules, it will be seeli
that a large majority of the wordis of the language are capable of receiving this termination.  Iii the coiijugations following, some of the verbs
are shown with the terminal ts. (fff 1962 198).
169. ta' (not) and ta (only) are often pronounced as if suffixed; they
are regarded, however, as independent adverl)s.
170. There are verl)s which are heard to end sometimnes in i and sometimes in e, and( apparently wlhen a passive sense is meant by the former
and an active by the latter.  Owing, however, to the in(distinet mannier
in which final vowels are so ofte-l pronounce(l, and to certaiii in(lividual
liberties taken with vowel solunds, the value of this peculiarity, as a
grammatical rule, cannot now be estimated.  A few words, where this
change of terminal vowels was often heard, are given in both fortis in
the Dictionary.
171. Maiy verbs ending in i or e chi,i-ge these letters to a il the
second person indicative, and also iii the imperrttive, when the fti-ll i or
e is not dropped.
Properties of Verbs.
PERSON.
172. The first and( second persons are shown by thle incorporated pronouns,  iia and mi tor the former, da and di for the latter.  The third
person is shown by the simple form of the verb.
NUMBER.
173. In the conj'lgation of the verb, nunmber is indicated only in the
future indi(ative, where mii and di are used in the singular, for the
first and second personis respectively, and miha and d(iha in the plural.
(J 167).
MODE.
174. Three modes onlyl, thile itnfintitive, idica(tive, and imperatire, are
shown iIn the conjugatiolls of verbs.  The subjauctive and poteutial are
indicated by adverbs or additionatl verbs.
InJfiniitire.
175. The itifiiiitive mod(le is the samre as the third pterson indicative,
the simple tormn of the verb.  It is, however, rarely ulse(l, finite ve: bs
beiiig empl)loyed inlsteadl; thus, " [ try to cough" is more freqiuently rendered maliua  miamiahets, I couyh I try, than hua marmahets, to cough
I try.
106 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
176. In the thiud person, no distinction is made between the infillitive
and indlicative; thus, hua miaihets  ally be rendered either to eoutyh he 
tries or he coughs he tries.
Indicative.
177. The silmple form of the verb is usetl as the thiirdI person indicattive.  For the first and second persons this is nmodlified by the incori)po
rated pronouns; aud for the future tense, as shown in Pars. 1G7 and 173.
Imperative.
178. The iIml)erative mode has five forms.
179. The first conisists in using the same form as the second person
indicative; this is done mostly in verbs which have the incorporated
pronouns suffixed.
180. The second is made  )by changing final i or e of the infinitive to
a, or using an infiniti(ve ending in a or u.
181. The third is formed by drop)ping the flial i of verbs eniding inii
ki, and somnetimes of those eindiig in ti; thus, we have amak, ilmp)erative
of amaki.
182. In the fourth form, the auxiliary da is added to the second foIrtih
of the ilmperaltive; it is usuailly, but not invariably, placed after tile
verb.  da seems to be a form of the verb de, to depart, ineaiing go thou!
183. The fifth form of the imperative  mode is made by a(l(liig dilia
instead of da.
184. The fourth and fifth f)rmas are used whlen immediate counpliance
with the order is desired.
TENSE.
185. But two distinctions, in regard to timne, are made in conijugating,
verbs; olie of these is for indefinite, the other forfuture timne.
186. OthLer varieties of titme are expressed by adverbs, suffixed or
independent, or by other wor(ls used independently.
187. The indefitite tetse, useil for both present and p)ast time, is showll
by tlhe simple forti of the verb, with or without the incorporated pronouns.
188. For thefuture tease, indicative iiod(e, mi an(I  miha are added to
the indefilite for the first p)erson, atild di an1 d (liha for the second perSon; in tlhe third person, the formn is the same ias in the indefinite.
189. Sometimes, to a verb in the tlhird person, future teise, at tile
close of a sentence, they are heard to add hIits, pronouncing it as a sel)arate word.  This inly be a part of the conjugationi, but is, more l)rol)ably, a personal  )roottin of the thirTl persoli, li, with the entlinrg ts,
added for eiiphasis.
107 
HIIIDATSA GRAMMAR.
CONJUGATION.
19(). All transitive and some intransitive verbs are properly coiijugated, having different forms fi)r the different m,)des and tenses.
191. The greater part of the intransitive verbs, and words used as
suchi, are not prop)erly conjugated, since they suffer no change of form
iii the different modes and tenses.
192. The verbs which are coinjug.ated may be known by taking ma
(I) and da (thou) for their incorporated pronouns in the nomninative;
while those which are not conjugasted have the pronouns mi and di incorporated iii the nominative case.
Conjugated Verbs.
193. The conjugation has three principal forms.  In the first formn, the
pionouns are prefixed; in the second, inserted; and, in the third, suffixe(l.
194. In adding the pronouns, hlowever, some additional changes are
i.sde in the verl), producing in all ten varieties of the conjugation.
195. In the first variety, the incorporated pronouns are simnply prelixed to the third person, or simple form of the verb; while the latter
r&iunains unchanged.  Ex.-kidesi, to love, or he loves.
INFINITIVE MODE.
kidesi, to love.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Indefinite Tense.
Singular and Plural.
kidesi, he, she, or it loves or loved, they love or loved.
dakidesi, thou lovest, you love or loved.
inakldesi, I or we love or loved.
Future Tense.
Singular.
kid6ei, he, she, or it will love.
daked6sidi, thou wuilt love.
inakidesirni, I will love.
Plural.
kideSi, they will love.
dakidesidilia, you will love.
inakidesiiiiiha, we will love.
IMPERATIVE M'ODE.
kidesa, kidesada kidesadiha, love thou, love
il esa, I ilesa La,  il (sa ia,  ore otiot, oroe ye.
196. In the secoix variety, the first letter of the siinple formn is drop)pe(l
when the pronouns are prefixeld, and( the pronouns are contracted to m
108
3d person.
2di person.
lst person.
3d person.
2d person.
lst person.
"d person.
2d person.
lstperson. 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
and d.  The words belonging to this variety are not numerous; they all
begin with d, and consequently in the indicative mode, indefinite tense,
the forms of the second and third persons are the same.  Ex.-dfiti, to
eat, to chew.
INFINITIVE MODE.
duti, to celtew or eat.
INDICATIVE MODE. 
Indefinite Tense. 
Singular and Plural.
(without terminal ts.)
3d person.   duti, he eats, etc.
2d person.  duti, you eat, etc.
lst person.   muti, I eat, etc.
Future  Teitse.
Singular.
duti, he will eat, etc.
dutidi, thou wilt eat.
muttimi, I will eat.
Plural.
duti, they will eat.
dutidiha, you will eat.
mutimiha, we will eat.
IMPEIIATIVE.
d(lut.   dal dut, etc.
197. The third variety of the conjugation has the pronouns prefixed
to the unaltered simple form; but the letter a is in turn prefixed( to tlhe
pronouns, causing them to appear inserted in the verb; further, the
pronouns are contracted by the omission of their vowels.  Most Verbs
beginning with o belong to this variety.  Ex.-6kip'tpi, to fiid, to re.(
cover something lost, but not to make an original discovery.
INFINITIVE MODE.
okipapi, to find.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Indefinite Tense.
Singular and Plural.
okipapi, he, she, or it finds, or found, or they, etc,
adokipapi, you find or found.
atuokipapi, I or tee fiind orfoztnd.
109
(with terniiiial ts.)
dutits.
dutits.
mutits.
3d, _person.
2d verson. -
1 st _person.
dtitits.
dutidits.
mutilnits.
3d person.
2d person.
lst person.
dutits.
datidihats.
mutitnibat,,.
eat, eat thou.
3d, _pers.
2d, _pers.
Is t _perg. 
IIIDATSA GRAMMAR.
FTture Tense.
Singular.
okipapi, he, she, or it will find.
adokipapidi, thou wilt find.
anmokipapim i I willfind.
Plural.
okil)api, they will fiind.
adokipapi(liha, you will find.
a mokipapimih a  we will find.
IMIPERATIVE MODE.
okipapa, okipal)a da', okil)apa diha.
1I)S. Iii the fourth variety,  the incorporate(d p)ronouns are inserted( iii
the v-erb by being placed imne(li[ttely after the first syllable of the sim1)le fobrm, while no change is iimad(le i  the latter, except the separationI of
the s llables.  Verbs conjugated thus have a or e for their first syllables.
Ex.-6ke, to know, to recog)ize.
INFINITIVE MATODE.
eke, to know(.
Indefinite Tense.
Singular and Plural.
(without terininial ts.)       (with terminal ts.)
3dpers.  eke, he, etc., knows, or knew.  ekets.
2d pers.  e(lake, you know or knewv.    edakets.
lstl)ers.  einake, I know or kiewv.         einklkets.
Future Tense.
Singul-ar.
eke, he, etc., w?ill know.it
edakedi tho?u wiilt kno?.
emnakemi, I will know.
Plural.
eke, they will knouw.
edakedilia, you will know.
emakemilia, wte will know.
IMPFFRATIVE MODE.
eka, eka d(a', eka diha.
19)9. To the fifth variety, belong verbs beginning with  ma.  In it,
the incorporated p)ronouns cotne, after the first sylalale, an(d are substitnite(l for the second syllable of the siInl)le form, which is, therefore,
ciaiiged by the loss of a syllable.  Ex. —maihu, to trade, to b?ty.
. I
110
3d _pe)-s.
2d _pers.
1 -st _pers.
3d.pers.
2d _pers.
Ist I)ers.
3d _pers.
')d vers.
I st _pers.
el,- 6 t S. - -
edalie(lits.
eii)aketuits.
3d, _pers.
2d _pers.
I st.pers.
edikediliats.
eidakeniiliats. 
IIIDATSA GRAMMAR.
INFINIf IVE MIODE.
naihu, to trade.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Ildefinite Tense.
SiDgula-r tend Plural.
3d pers.  inaihu, he or she trades or traded, the,, etc..
2d perts.  mtadahlu, y)u trade or traded.
lstpers.  inmamahuL I or we trade or traded.
Future Teise.
Singul ar.
maihu, he or she w(ill trade.
I4  e   hidiludli, tihou utilt trade.
t mniamahumii I w ill tt'ade.
Plural.
mailit, they?will trade.
madahudiha, you will trade.
t rmanlahumiha, wie will trade.
IMPERPATIVE MODE.
madahu da, maihu dal.
2)00. In the sixth variety, the incorporated pronouns are inserted in
tlhe same way as in the fourth; but the syllable da is inserted, in the
first and second persons, immediately before the last syllable of the
verb.  This oxtra interpolated syllable does not seem to answer the
liiri)ose of either pronoun, adverb, or auixiliary; its utility has not I)eeni
(iiscovered.  asadi, to steal, ata,ti, to go out of a house, and perhaps a few
othier verbs, are conjugated in this way.
INFINITIVE MODE.
asadi, to steal.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Indefinite Tense.
Singular and Plural.
3d pers.  atadi, he or she steals or stole, they stea{l or stole.
2d4 pers.  adasadadi, you steal or stole.
lstpers.  ama:tsaddi, I or we steal or stole.
q0
lit
3d pe)s.
2d pers.
1 st pei-s.
3d _pers.
2d _pers.
lst pets. 
HIDATSA GRAM.NIAR.
Future Tenise.
Singular.
ae.    asdi, he or she will steal.
a(2aes adadidi, thout wilt stetl.
a1Itaaadadimui, I will'steal.
Plura,l.
asadi, they?eill steal.
adasa(ladidiht, you will steal.
amasadadimiha, we will steal.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
asada dil', aaada diha.
201. To the seventh variety lbelong verbs beginning in i (not tIre
incorporated pronouiin of the third persou objective). Here the inicorporated pronouns are inserted, but i is changred to a.  EK.-ika, to see.
INFINITIVE MIODE.
ika, to  see.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Indefinite Tense.
Singular and Plural.
ika, he or she sees or saw, they see or saw.
adaka, you see or saw.
amaka, I or we see or saw.
Future Tense.
Singular.
ika, he or she wiill see.
adakadi, thou?vilt see.
arnakami, [ will see.
Plural.
ika, they will see.
adakadiha, you will see.
amakamiha, we will see.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
9     ika, ika da', ika diha.
Besides these, ika has a reduplicated f()rm in the iinperative, uiseI iit
an exclamatory manner, ikaka! See there! Behold!
112
3d pers.
2d _pers.
Ist pers.
3d pers.
2d pers.
l st pers.
3d pers.
2d _pers.
Ist pers.
3d pers.
2d pers.
lst pers.
3d _pers.
2d pers.
Ist pers. 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
202. The eighth variety is distinguished by the iniicorporated pronotlus
of the nominative being substituted for the last syllable of the infinitive
form. Nearly all transitive verbs formnied from intransitive verbs by the
suffix he belong to the eighth variety.  Ex.-liapihe, to lose.
INFINITIVE MODE.
liapihe, to lose.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Indefinite Tense. 
Singular and Plural.
lia. pihe, he or she loses or lost, or they lose or lost.
lie.hpida, you lose or lost.
liapima, I lose or lost, or we lose or lost.
Future Tense.
Singular.
lia. pihe, he will lose.
li.apidadi, thou  wilt lose.
lia pimami, I will lose.
Plural.
3d pers. lihapihe, they will lose.
2d pers.  liapidadiha, you wvill lose.
lstpers.  liapimamiha, we will lose.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
liapida, da' liapida, liapihada.
203. The ninth variety is the same as the eighth, with the addition of
the simple possessive pronouns, in full or contracted, prefixed to the
verb.  In this variety are found but few verbs; they are formed from
nouns by the addition of the suffix he; they undergo a double inflection,
one to denote possession of the noun, and the other to show person,
tense, etc., in the verb.  Ex.-fiahe, to make or cause to be a wife, to wed,
from ua, a wife.  uahe, in its active sense, or used personally, is said
of the male.
INFINITIVE MODE.
nahe, to make a wife, to wed.
INDI('CATIVF MODE.
Indefinite Tense.
Singular and Plutral.
3d pers.  uahe, he makes his wvife, he or they wed or wedded, etc.
2d pers.  duada, you make your wife or wives, you wed or wuedded, etc.
lstpers.  muamna, I make my wife, I or we wed, etc.
8
113
3d _pers.
2d _pers.
Ist_pers.
3d _pers.
2d _pers.
lstl)'ers. 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
Fututre  Tense.
Singular.
3d pers. uahe, he will make his wife, or wed.
2d pers.  duadadi, thou wilt make thy wife, or wed.
lst pers.  muamami, I will make my wife, or twed.
Plural.
3d pets.  uahe, they w?ill make their wives, or wed.
2d pers.  duadadiha, you will make your wives, etc.
lst pers.  muamamiha, we will make our uwives, or ued.
IMPERATIVE MODE.
duada, duaha da', duaha diha.
201. In the tenth variety, the pronouns are suffixed to the simple
form, which in itself remains unchanged. Transitive verbs formed fromn
the intransitive by the addition of ke are conjugated in this way. Ex.kitsakike, to render completely good, to make whole or sound, to change
from bad to good, etc., from tsaki, good.
INFINITIVE MYODE.
kitsakike, to make good.
INDICATIVE MODE.
Indefinite Tense.
Singular and Plural.
kitsakike, he, she, it, or they make or made good.
kitsakikeda,-you make or made good.
kitsakikema, I or we make or made good.
FFuture Tense.
Singular.
kitsakike, he, she, or it will nmaI,e good.
kitsakikedadi, thou wilt make good.
kitsakikemami, I will make good.
Plural.
kitsakike, they will make good,
kitsakikedadiha, you will make good.
kitsakikemamiha, we will make good.
IMkPERATIVE MODE.
kitsakikeda, kitsakike diha.
114
3d pers.
2d _pers.
1st pers.
3d pers.
2d _pers.
lst pers.
3d pers.
2d _pers.
I lst pers. 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
Unconjugated Verbs.
205. All adjectives, adverbs, nouns, etc., used as predicates of nouns,
are regarded as intransitive verbs, there being no copula in the lliiguage. These intransitive verbs, and such others as denote only (luality or condition, suffer no change of formn to denote different mnodes atid
tenses.  They may, however, take the incorporated pronouns mi and di
for their nominatives.
206. These pronouns are prefixed.  To veirbs beginning with consonants they are usually prefixed in full.  Ex.-iie6, old, to be old.
liie, he, she, or it is or was old, they are or were old.
diliie, thou art or wert old, you are or were old.
iillie, I am or was old,  we are or were old.
207. Before verbs beginning with vowels, the pronouns are often contracted.  Ex.-ad(liise, to be ignorant.
adaliise, he is or was ignorant, they are or were ignorant.
dada,liiie, thou art or wert ignorant, etc.
madaliise, I am or was ignorant, or we were ignorant, etc.
208. Transitive verbs in the third person, or used in a passive sense
or impersonally, with pronouns in the objective case prefixed, have the
same appearance as the unconjutgated iutrausitive verbs, excep)t that fobr
the third person the objective pronoun i is used; thus, from aia6~, to
conceal, we have
ialioa, he conceals it, or it is concealed.
dialioa, he conceals you, or you are concealed.
mialioa, he conceals me, or L am concealed.
Irregular and Defective Verbs.
209. There are a few irregular and defective verbs in the language, of
which the following are examples:
210. hi, to draw into the mouth, to drink or inhale, may, with terminal
ts, be conjugated thus:
1. hits, he drinks or drank or will drink, they drink, etc.
2. dats, you drink or drank.
3. mats, I drink or drank.
4. d,adits, you will drink.
5. mamits, I will drink.
Here, in the fourth and fifth forms, there are (with the terminal) but
the pronouns and signs of the ftiture tense, anti in the second ant' third
tfrnis, only the pronouns.
211. matfi, there is or there are, has no other form.
212. inuk (sometimes pronounced as the Eilglisli word book) signifies
girve me.  It may be an irregular imperative of. the verb ku, to give, but
is more probably a defective verb.
115 
1HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
Compound Verbs (so called).
213. Sometimes two verbs are used together to express an idea for
which there is no single word il the lainguage.  Wheii both verbs are
in the third person indicative, or when one is in the infinitive, they often
appear to us as a single word, particularly if their English equivalent is
a single word; but when conjugated, it is found that each assumnes its
()wn proper form, the same as if used indlependently.  Ex.-ikhn, to
bring, consists of ak, to be with, and hu, to come. This, when in-fiecte(ld,
appears as two separate words, one conjugated, the other ulncon)jugated;
thus, ak-hu, he brings; dak-dahu, you bring; imak-mahu, I bring; dakdahudi, you will bring; mak-mahumi, I will bring, etc.
214. Again, a noun and a verb may be used together to express an
idea for which there is no single word in the language; thus, from hi,
to draw into the mouth, we have ope-hi, to draw tobacco into the mouth, i. e.,
to smoke, and midi-hi, to draw water into the mouth, or drink.
215. Some expressions, such as these, are, for convenience of definitioil, put in the Dictionary as compound verbs.
Syntax of Verbs.
216. Almost all sentences are closed by verbs or words used as such;
the principal exception being where interrogative adverbs are used to
qualify an entire sentence.
217. When a verb denoting quality or condition, and another detiotiiig
a(,tionI, are used in the same sentence with a common subject, the former
)recedes the latter; or, in other words, conjugated verbs commonly follow n1uconjugated verbs.
218. Verbs in the infinitive usually precede those in the ind(licative.
219. Any word used alone, wtith the terminal ts, in answer to a qutestiori, may form a sentence by itself; for it is used as a verb in the siln)le forin, where a personal pronoun of the third person is understood to
be in the nominative.
'20. In this language, as in other languages, " active transitive verbs
govern the objective case".  It might be said that all transitive verbs
govern the objective case, for the existence of a passive form is queslioiiable. (11 170).  When an ol)bjective pronoun is followed by the simple
form of a transitive verb, the latter may be parsed as in thie third person indicative; although, in trauslatilg, the expression into Etiglish, a
verb in the passive voice may be used.
221. Other points conne(cted with the syntax of the verb have been
referred to in the discussion of the etymology.
ADJECTIVES.
:22. There are certain intransitive verbs in the Hidatsa, which are
IIse(l in the samne sense as the adjectives of Eturo)peiii lainguages, and(
niioly be translated by them.  For thie cotnvenience of the Entglish studellt, these verbs will be catlled adljectives, an,d descril)ed as such.
116 
IlIDATSA GRAMMAR.
223. There are a large number of the adjectives, which we callnlot
analyze with our present knowledge of the language, and which nmay be
called primitive.
224. Derinvative adjectives are formed fromn primitive adjectives, fromll
other derivatives, from nouns,   adverbs, etc., by forming compound words,
or by the use of suffixes having the force of adverbs.
225. The force of the adjective is modified by the adverbial suffixtes
and also by adverbs used in(lepeudently, as shown in the following
paragraphs.
2a6. adsi is suffixed to denote an approach to the standardl qualit y
or positive degree, as inldicate(l by the simpl)le forth of tlhe adjective;
thus, from hisi, red, scarlet, comes his Ldsi, of a dull red color, crimson or
purple. (1J 156).
227. isa, or ise, is of much the same signification as a(lsi, but sometimes applied differeutly; it signiifies like or resembling.  Ex.-FroilL
tohi, blue, sky-blue, colies tohist, of an impure or uncertain blue, bluish;
from siai, black, coinmes sip)isa, resembling black, i.e., of a deep color hardly
to be distinguished from  black.  adsi may follow is6 to denote a wider
variation from the staIndard quality.
228. de is a suffix, which may be translated almost or nearly. Ex.kakilii, round, kakiliide, almost round; tsamutsi, straight, tsamutside,
almost straight.
229. di increases the signification of the adjective to which it is
suffixod; its use is not very extended; it seems to be suffixed only to
words of three syllables, ending with i and accented on the penult. Ex.padlopi, short,- lou-sized, padopidi, very short; tamulii, minute, tamuliidi,
rery minute.
230. tsaki, good, takes, as an increased or intensified form, tsakicti,
which may be a compound of tsaki and ictia, great.  tsakicti commonly
takes the suffix di; thus, tsakictidi denotes a very high degree of excellence.
231. ksa denotes that the quality exists excessively, habitually, or
continuously. Ex. -isia, bad, isiaiks., persistently bad. (f~ 163.)
232. ka'ti, much, true, truly, is a word used independently as an adljective and adverb.  As an adverb, it is used to limit the significance of
adjectives to the true or standard qualities; as in hisi-ka'ti, true red,
bright red, isia-ka'ti, truly bad, unqualifiedly bad.
233. When two niouns are compared together il regard to quality, and
either one used as the standard of comparison for the other, the exprt ssions itadotadui and itaokadut are used.  The former means at the
near side of it, and indicates the less degree; the latter signifies on the
far side of it, or beyond it, and indicates the greater degree.  These expressions give us more nearly the equivalents of the comparative degree
of English than anything else in the Hlidatsa.
234. An adjective may be formed of a noun and an adjective.  Ex. —
117 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
From  mika', grass, and  tohiaa, bluish, comes mika'tohisa, green (grass.
bluish).
235. Some  adljec(tives are compounds  of two other  adjectives; as,
tsidisipi, bay, from tsidi, yellow, and Aipi, black.
Numerals.
236. The Hidatsa system of numeration is strictly decimal; consequently, there need not be more than ten primitive numeral adjectives.
237. There are, however, not more than~eight; these eight are    du6tsa (or luetsa), one,              kiliu, five,
d)6pa (or nopa), two,                 akama (or akawa), six,
dami (or nawi), three,                sapua, seven, and
t6pa, four,                           pitika, ten.
238. d6papl)i, eight, is a compound of dopa, two, and pi (which seems
to be the root of pitika); it probably signifies ten less two.*
239. du6tsapi, nine, is a compound of duetsa, one, and pi, and seems
to mean ten less one.
240. Multiples of ten less than one hundred are named on the same
principle as in English; thus we have  dopapitika (twotens), twenty,         akamaapitika, sixty,
damiapitika, thirty,                  sapuapitika, seventy,
topapitika, forty,                    d6papiapitika, eighty, and
kilifiapitika, fifty,                 duetsal)iapitika, ninety.
It will be seen that the first word of each of these compounds, if not
ordinarily ending in a, is made to do so in this connection, and that the
accent is sometimes removed.
241. The word for one hundred, pitikictia, signifies great ten. The
term for one thousand is, pitikicetia-dkakodi,-the meaning of akakodi, I
know not.
242. Numbers over ten, but not multiples of ten, are named by the
addition of the word alipi (portioned; a part or division), thus:
alipidu6tsa, eleven,              dopdapitika-alipiduetsa, twenty-one,
alipid6pa, twelve,                dopa'pitika-alipid6pa, twenty two,
alipidami, thirteen,              damiapitika-alipidami, thirty-t'tree,
alipit6pa, fourteen,              topa'pitika-alipit6pa, forty-four, etc.
243. With the exception of the word for first, itsika, the ordinals are
formed by prefixing i to the cardinal numbers; thus, we have id6pa,
second, id7lni, third, it6pa, fourth, etc.
Syntax of Adjectives.
244. Adjectives usually immediately follow the nouns or pronouns
which they quality.
* Some judicious remarks on this paragraph, and on Par. 239, may be
found in a paper On Numerals in American Indian Languages, etc. By
J. Haemond Trumwbull, LL. D.  Hartford, 1875.  plt) 28, 29.
118 
HII)ATSA GRAMMAR.
245. Qualifying words are often seen used as nouns or pronouns; this
is particularly the case with numeral adjectives, and such words as
,thu, many, etsa, all, iha, other, kausta, few, etc.
ADVERBS.
246. There are adverbs which are apparently primitive; as, t', not, dik,
when, tia, a long time, etc. Many primitive adverbs are used as suffixes,
ils already shown when describing verbs and adjectives.
247. A large number of adjectives are used- as adverbs, without un(lergoing any change of form. When primitive adjectives are thus used,
they appear as primitive adverbs.  Ex. —ua, slow, slotly, hita,Jfleet,
fleetly, atsa, near, tisa, far.
248. Derivative adverbs are formed fromt nouns, from demonstrative
(nid interrogative pronouns, fiom adjectives, and from other adverbs.
249. A large number of adverbs of place are formed from nouns by
suffixing the prepositions (postpositions), du, lia, ka, koa, and ta; thus,
from dutmata, the middle, we have dumatadii, in or through the middle,
dtilmatalia, toward the middle, dumataka, on the middle, dumatakoa, at
the middle, and dumatata, facing the middle, or in the direction of the
mliddle.
250. Words formed thus (~ 249), might be regarded as merely nouns
in the objective, with their governing prepositions; but they are proniounced and used as if belonging to the same cla.ss of words as the
English adverbs windward and forward.  Since every noun in t.e Ianguage is capable of taking one or more of these postpositions, the number of adverbs of this character is very great.
251. From nouns, adverbs of time are formed by suffixing du, duk,
and sedu; the first of these means in or during any time, the second in
or during future time, the third in or during past time; thus, from maku,
night, we have makudu, during the night, nightly, makuduk, during the
coming night, " to-night", makiusedu, during the past night, or "last night";
from oktsia, meaning also night, we have oktsisedu, oktsiadu, and oktsiaduk; from ata, daylight or dawn, we have ataduk, tomorrow, etc.
252. From pronouns, adverbs are formed in much the same way as
from nouns; thus, from the demonstrative se, we have sedu, in that time
or place, sekoa, at that place, just there, Aeta, in that direction, and from
the interrogative to, we have t6ta, whither, t6du and t6ka, where, wherein,
whereat.
253. When adjectives are used as adverbs, the same suffixes, to modify their force and meaning, are used in the one case as in the other.
Adjectives which can denote the manner of performing the action aie
those chiefly used as adverbs.
254. Adverbs are formed from numeral adjectives by suffixing to
the names of the cardinal numbers du, and the compound preposition
tsakoa; thus we have d6padu, at two timnes, or on two occasions, twice,
119 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
dan)idu, thrice, t6padu, four times, and also dopatsakoa, at or in two
places, dahmitsakoa, at or in three places, t6patsakoa, in four places, etc.
255. From ordinals, adverbs are formed by the addition of du; thus,
itsikadu, in the first place or order, firstly, id6padu, in the second place or
order, secondly, idamidu, thirdly, it6l)adu, fourthly, etc.
256. In adverbs of time, formed by adding' to nouns du, dulk, alII(l
.edu as indicated in Par. 251, the numeral adjectives are inserte(l between the noun and the adverbial suffix iii the manner and for the pItrpose here indicated; thus from 6ktsi or 6ktsia, night:
oktsiadu, during the night.
oktsid6padu, during two nights.
oktsit6padu, during four nights.
oktsiaduk during the coming night or to-night.
oktsid6paduk, two nights hence, or during the night after next.
oktsidamiduk, three nights hence.
oktsit6l)aduk, four nights hence.
oktsised(lu, last night, during last night.
oktsid6pasedu, night before last, two nights ago.
oktsit6pasedu, four nights ago.
257. Adverbs formed from nouns are often used as nouns;  thus,
,ttaduk, during to-morrow or to-morrow, oktsisedu, during last night, or
last night, ad6sedu, during last summer, or last summer.
258. Adverbs are used as predicates to nouns, and in this posit.on,
there being no copula, fill the office of intransitive verbs.
259. "Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs ", as in
other languages.
260. Adverbs usually precede the words which they qualify; but
ka'ti, much, or truly, tq, not, ta, only, and the interrogative tok, more
commonly follow the words they qualify.
PREPOSITIONS.
261. ak (~ 148), which is prefixed to verbs, and du, in or during, lie,
toward, ka, in, koa, at, ta, in the direction of, feicing, which are suffixed
to nouns ([ 249) to form adverbs, fill more fully the office of prepositions
than anything else in the language.  They are not, however, usedl is
independent words; and, from the position which they occupy in reg,trd
to nouns, would be more properly called postpositions.
262. aka, on, and api, with, are perhaps to be regarded as independent
or separate prepositions.
263. There are many adverbs which answer the purpose of prep)ositions, and may be translated by the English prepositions.  Adverbs
formed fromn nouns which are the names of place, belong particularly
to this class; thus, from mikta, the bottom, comnes mikt.,ko, below, (lIId
niJiktAta, down; from amaho, the interior, amah6ka, wlithin or in; from
atfisi, oll out of doors, ataiikoa, out.
120 
HIDATSA GRAMMAR.
261. Prepositions, separate and incorporated, and all adverbs used as
prepositions, follow the nouns which they govern.
265. WVhen incorporated, they may be found suffixed to the inoliils
which they govern, or prefixed to the verbs which follow;. but in either
case they comle, of course, after the noun.
CONJUNCTIONS.
266. There are two words which are possibly simple conjunctiol)s;
they are isa, and, also, and duma, but.
267. Other words used in joining words and sentences perform also
the duties of adverbs and prepositions, and are properly to be classed
as such.
268. ConjuLnctions comumonly stand between the words, clauses, or
sentences which they connect.
INTERJECTIONS.
269. There are not many words which are purely exclamatory or iliiterjectional; a large number of the words which are used as inteijectiolls
being verbs.
270. The following words, however, cannot be well analyzed, and may
be regarded as true interjections:
u! oh! expressing pain or astonishment, and commonly preceding a
sen tence.
ihe! there now! does that sati.sfy you? etc.
ki! is used in doubt and astonishment.
hidi! used by children when tease(l; perhaps from the demonstrative
pronoun hidi.
huikahe! used by men to express surprise and delight; as when much
game is killed at a volley, etc.
tsakakl'! an expression of disgust and impatience, may be a derived
word.
121 
I 
IID)ATSA DICTIONARY.
123 
I 
H,II)ATSA DICTIONARY-.
a.
a d   lii;e, v. t; to be ignorant
of.-niadaliisets, I don't know,
I am ignorant.
a da  lii se ke, V. t.; to make ig  itorant; to leave-in ignorance.
A  da  lii  lii, v.  t., fr.  adA and
liolii; to break with the foot.
ia da lipa ko a, n.; the Mandan
Iidians.
a di!ipi, n.,fr. adu and alipi;
a part of anything;-also adal~i
a, n. a treLe, a plant; the entire
!)lallt c,s distinguislhed fromn its
l)arts; —used after' ma-' or as a
suxffi to nouins; as, kohati, corn,
koliatia, a stalk of cor;. 
a. n.; a  nmuscle.
a a4  te, v. t.; to strike by throw  in(,r; to hi it or bruise with al stone
or other missile.
a  i ti, v.; hurt or bruised by a
ti da  [aral,  n.; the armns; the
forelegs of quadrupeds.
i d(a, n.; the hair of the head;
ilie locks.
,4 da, a causative prefix to verbs,
(lenoting thet the action is done
1)y the foot, or by heat or fire. (      k
147).
a  da  a  du  ic ti a, n., fr. ada
and amiuictia; the brachiznm, the
upper part, of i he arm.
a di du i, v. i.,fr. ade and adni;
beColiiig painful.
A da  lia, v. i.; to be burning;
I)iirnt, parched, charred.
i da lhia he,  v. t., 3d pers.; to
1)arch or bourn.'
i d~t lia ke, v. t.,r. atlailia; to
,ittise to burnl; to be burxned or
!)arched.
.i d  h lia pe, v. t., fr. ada  and
icl)i; to kick; to ]ark or denude
I)v kic(king.
ai d,i lie lie, v. t.; to seize, take
ii,)Il  of, cli ng to; —:tlso atlAlielii.
a  da  li( se, v. t., fr.. a(1  and
liee; to teair with thle foot; to
teatr with the paws, as a. be.-ist.
pi.'
a  da  lipi ke, v. t.; to mniake or
be made a portion; to make one
thing a part of another.
ai da liul, v. t., fr. i(1A and liu; to
spill with the foot; to upset by
kicking;-also a(laliue.
a da i du ti [-ruti], n., fr. ada
and iduti; ribbon or braid used
ill tying up the hiair.
a da  ka, v. t., 2d pers. of ika, to
see.
a da kf da ho  [ara-], n.; the
Arickaree Indians; perhaps from
pad,,the hair or lock7s.  This name,
it is sai(, was originally applied
to the Arickarees from their mnan  ner of wearing their hair. The
Ineanling of the last three sylla  bles is now unknown.
a da k.i pe, v. t.,.Jr. A'A,~ antd
ka[)pe; to scratch with toe-nails,
or witlh  )aws, as a dog;-also,
a(lak api.
a da ki de, v. t., fr. kide; to
Ipuish with the foot.
Aid&
a 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
ad6
a  da  tsi  ki he, v. t.; to sev(r
by fire.
a  da tsa ko a, adv.,fr. adats;;
and koa; behiud.
a  da  tska  pi, v. t.,,fr. 5la,  ail
tskapi; to press with the toes;
to walk on tiptoes.
a   da tska  ti, v. t., fr. ada aner
tsltati; to enter or pass throtught
on tiptoes.
a da tskiu i du i, v. i.; becoin  ing progressively moist.
a  da tsku i [aratskuli], adj.;
moist, wet.
a lId  tsku i de, v. i., fr. ada  tskuti; almost wet.
a da tsku i ke, v. t.; to wet or
moisten; wetted.
a (1, v. i., adj.; to be warm; un  pleasantly warm; painful.
a d6i, n.; warm weather; summier.
a d6 a du i, v. i.; same as ada  dui.
a d6 de, adj.; almost painful.
a d6 du [-ru], adv.,.fr. adt6; dutr  ing the summer.
a de duk [-ruk], n. an(l adv.,fr.
ade; next summer; during next
summer.- ade-(dopa-duk, t w o
summers hence.  ade-dami-duk
[ade-nawi-ruk], three  summers
hence. ade-tol)a-duk, four snm  mers hence.
a d6, he, v. i., fr. ade; to be al  gere(l; he is angry.
a de he  ke, v. i., fr. adehe; to
make angry.
a dei ke, v. t., fr. ade; to make
warm or painfull; changed from
a comfortable to a painful condi  tion.
a de  ksa, adj., fr. ade and ks-a;
sul trys.
a d( se du [-ru], n. and adv., fr.
ade  and sedu; las t su mmer; -dur  inlg last -summner. —ade'dopa-,%d u
hdh
a da  ki ti, v.; cleared.  o?ff by
fire, as a bturned prairie.
a  da  kti"pa, v. t., 2d  pets. of
ikul'pa, to hate.
a  dh mi  di [-widi], v. t.,.fr.
adq and midi; to twist with the
foot.
a dh pa pi du i, v. i., fr. ~d~  papi; becoming scorched or sun  burnt.
A da pa pi [hla- or Zla-], v. i.;
scorched; sunburnt.
a dh pfi pi de, v. i., a(Ij.; al  most scorched. 
a dh pa' pi he, v. t., 3d pers.;
to scorch or chap.
a da pai pi ke, v. t.; to cause
to become scorched or sunburn t;
to expose to sun or fire.
i da pc, v. t.; to kick.
a dh sui ki, v. t., fr. 6(til and
suki; to erase with the foot.
a da t. lipi, v. i.; to snap or
crackle in the fire.
a da ta lipi he, v. t.; he makes
snap by fire.
a da ta lipi ke, v. t.;. to caus       e
to SDap by fire.
a da ta pi, v. t., fr. Adq and tapi;
to squeeze with the foot; to
trample on.
a da te, v. i., fr. ada and te; to
be  bruised under foot;  to be
trampled to death.
a da te he, v. t., 3d pers.; to
trample to death.
a dai ti, n., fr. adu and ati;  a
camp)itg-ground; a place marked
with the remains of old camps.
a da to" ti, v. t.,fr. to'ti; to agi  tate or shake to and  fro with
the foot.
a  da  lsa, n., adv.; a place be  aind  somkethi,ng else; behid ndsd.
hi da ts.~ ki, v. i.~fr. tsgki; to
be severed hy fire.
126 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
/du
a du hi dfl, n.,fr. hidu; the skel  eton; the bony part of any mem  ber.
a du h6             pi, n., fr. ad u  and hopi;
a perforated or excavated place;
a hole.
a  du hfu  pa,  n. See hupa.
a du hia   kfu pi,    n.,fr. ad u an ld
liakupi; a      g roove  or crease; ai
longditudinal depression.
a du ai pii,  n.,fr. liapi; any pla(i,e
to lie  down; a be d, either  temo  porary or per ma  nent.
a du liE   pi, n.,.fr. adu and liepi;
a shallow placein a  lak e or river;
a s hoal.
at du i, a suffix to verbs signifying
conitinuiiation or progress. (] 157).
a du i, v., adj.; bitter; sour; pun  gent.
a  du i, n.,fr. adu and i; h air;
feathers; the entire plumage of
a bird or pelage of an animal.
a du ic ti a, n., fr. adt and ictia;
the main part, the larger part of
anything as distinguished froui
its smaller parts.
a du i dfl lipi, n., fr. idalipi; an
incised wound, a knife-cut.
a du i da ki sa, n., fr. adu and
idakiaa; a left-handed person;
the left side.
a du  i d(, n.,fr. adu and ide;
speech, language; a word.
a du i de, v. i., adj.,fr. adui; al  most bitter or sour, as changing
milk.
a du i d  tsi, n.,fr. adu and iditsi;
scent, smell, odor.
a du i di, tsi-i si" a, n. (iaia,
bad); a stench.
a du i d[ tsi-ts~a" ki, n. (ts~aki,
good); an agreeable oclor.
~iidu ike, v. t.,ffr. adui; to change
from sweet to bitter.
adi
[ade-uopa-Aern], t w o summers
ago. ade-topa-sedu, four sumn  mers ago.
a di [aril, n.; a   road. a trail.
a di a sa dsi, adj.; poor, desti  tute.
a di a sa dsi ke, v. t.; to im-         d
poverish.
a di i ta du i, v. i., fr. adiiti and
adtii; becoming hungry.
a di i ti, v. i., adj.; hungry.-m -
diiti, or bqdiitits, I am hungry.
a di i ti ke, v. t.; to cause to be
hungry; to be made hungry.
a di;a, n.; the little ravenl of the
northern  plains, probably  the
Corrus columbianus of Wilson.
a  di a  i ta pa" hi;, n. (See
Local Names.)
a dsi, a suffix to verbs and adjec.
tives denoting an aplroach  to
the standard.  (1 156).
at du raru],prob. fr. du; a suffix
denoting time and place; an ad  verb of time and place.
a  du, a prefix to verbs forming
nouns; a part, a place, one of a
kind.  (1~1 45-47).
a du a da pa pi,n.,fr. adapapi;
a sunburint surface.
a du a du i, v i.,.fr. adui; becom  ing bitter.
a du a  ka, n.,fr. adu and aka;
outside part; skin or rind.
a du  ak   a.  ki, n.,fr. adu and
akIaki; a contusi on; a contused
wound.
a du  a ptse, n., fr. a.,ptse; the
edge of a knife.
a dti  ( di, n., fr. adu and edi;
ordure.
a du e ta, n.; a sore place, ascar
or ulcer.
a  diu hi da, n., Jr. hi(la; new
gools or articles.
127 
HIDATSA DI)ICTIONARY.
adu
a du   kLi d6 pa  ke  [+ -nopa],
same as last word.
a du ki du i6 tsa pike, n.; one.
ninth.
a du  ki du sa, n.,fr. aduii and
kidusa; a place where ainything
is laid away or put in order.
a  du ki du sa  ko a, adv.,Jfr.
adukiduaa.
a du ki ka  ki, n., fr. kikaki; a
seamn.
a du ki ki  lin a ke, n.,fr. kiki  liuake; a fifth part.
a du ki si pt a  he  ke, n., saine
a.s the next word.
a du  ki aad  pu a    ke, n., fr.  kisa  puakie; a seventh part, one-sev
a du ki t6 pa ke, n.,fr. kitopa  kt; a fourth part.
a du m6  di     he, n.,fr. adu and
madihe; prepared fbod; prtpa  ration of food; cooking.
a  du mor  di  he   a  tid n.,.fr. adu -
madihe and ati; a kitchen.
a du ml' ta pa, n..fr. mitapa;
falsehood, deceit.
a du o ki pa di, n., fr. adu and
okipadi; young trees, saplings.
a du 6 ktsi, n., fr. adu and oktsi;
a shadow.-a(luoktsi  mnahewits,
I will mnake a shadow, i. e., erect
a screen to keep off the sunrlight.
a  du  p4 lia du  i, n.,fr. palia  dui; a blister; a chafed    or blis  tered part.
a du p.i!ii, n.; a corner or an  gle.
a du pa lii-dfi mi  [+-nawi,
n.; a triangle.
a du pqa lii-t6 pa, n. (topa,
four); a quadzranlgle.__adup~a.lii
kiliul, a pelitaigl. —adupa. lii-ahu,
. polygon.
&du
ah dit I k;a, adj.; excessively  b)it  ter.
a d ii I ptsi, n., Jfr. adu and iptsi;
an upright, a perpendicular sup  1'ort, as a chair-leg.
a du i sa mi ke, n., fr. adu and
isamike; young twigs sprouting
froin a stum)p.
a dHi I si, n.,fr. adu and isi; rind;
covering; exterior; —nearl, syn  oilliylIous with aduaka.
a d i i  i a, n., fr. isia; an ilfie  Iior or rotteii portion; -  used
soiiietimtnes as a term of contempt
for p)ersons.
a du i ti pe, n.,fr. itil)e; a hole
dIugof, or a place in any  way ar  raIoged for a trap.
a du li.4 ti, n.; cultivated ground;
a field or garden.
a du k@a ti lia, adv.; toward the
a du ka ti ka, adv.; in the field;
among the fields.
a dui  ka  ti lko a, adv.; at the
field. 
a  du ke da pi, n.; the male of
a]Jy species.
a du ki a de tsi, n.,fr. kiadetsi;
a  )irdleve, skillful, or enrduring fer  son;        a goo d hunter or warrior;
ohe  intellig ent o r ingenious.
a dui Li a      kt  nla    kIe  n.,fr. aka  lnIaike;  one     - sixth.
a di  ki dai-de   a [-nesa], nt.,
fr. kida antd (lesa; a maiden.
a du ki dli-ma tu, n.; a woman
who is or has been married.
a du ki da mi he kel n.,fr.
kIi(tatmiheke; one-third.
a du ki dak mi ke [+-kina  wike], same as adlukidamuiheke.
a du ki do pa he Le, n.,fr. ki  dopaheke; one-half.
128 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
alip
a  du  ts6 hi, n.,fr. tsohi; a point;
a tapering end or part.
a du tsit a, n.; a seed.
w   a du i, n.,fr. adu and u; a wound,
more particularly a bullet or ar    row wound.
a   a  du  fi e, n., fr. adu and ue; a
, fire-place.
a  du  ei  C lia, adv., fr. aduue;
toward the fire, i.e., in the direc    tion of the centre of the lodge,
opposite to atutilia.
a du i     klio a, adv.; at the fire.
plae.
a  du  fit  C-l"  C tsa, n. (uetsa,
metal); a stove.
a du wi ta pa.   See adumitapa.
a  hi", n.; the'l)omme-blanche,
or  Psoralea esculenta, a plant
bearing an edible root, growing
wild in D)akota.: lecently, the
name has been applied to turnips
introduced by the whites, and now
cultivated by these Indians.
a hil mi   ka, n.,fr. ahi and iiiika,;
the " female pomme-blanche'", or
Psoralea argophylla.
a hfi, adj.. adv.; much, inany.   ahuts.
a hfi ke, v. t.,fr. ahu; to increase,
to multiply; increased.
a li6 a, v. t.; to conceal, to hide
also alioe.
ai lio ka, n.; the kidneys.
a lilpi, adj., n.; Iportional; not en  tire; a )art.
a lipi a kfi ma [+-wa], nurm.
adj.,ifi. a,lipi and akarna; sixteen.
a lipi di mi [+-nawi], adj.,fr.
alipi atd dami - thirteen.
a lipi d6 pa [+-nopa], adj.,fr.
alip~i and dopa, twelve.
a lipi d6 pa pi, adj., fr. alipi and
dopapi; eighteen.
adu
a da pi. tska, n.,fi. adu antd p.     tska; a side; anln even surface; a
'lacet.  The compounds  of this
word and of adupalii are often
used synonymously;   b u t the
former commonly refer toflat sur    taces and short solids, the latter
to long prismoidal bodies.
a da p-a tska dai mi [-nawi],
gi., Jr. adup.tsk-a and dami; a
three-sided needle a glover's nee
aI di p.i tska ko a, adv.,fr.                atdt u   I)atska; at or on the side.
a dEu p-a tska t6 pa, n. (topa,
J)ibr); any long, four-sided, ob,ject, as a hewn log.
a du pi, i. fr. adu and pi, to tat   too or patnt; a       tattooed  mabl- on
tlce body; tattooing.
a du pi                     di e, n., fr. pidie;  a ruf   flel edging.
a du p6 ada mi  [-wi], n. fr.
t        adu and poadam i; a bullet; bul   lets.
a         d oa p6 a da  mi-ka  di"      ata,
t. (knadista, small); shot.
a du  pf  a, n.,fr. adu and pua; 
a sw,elling.
a d  ta L;a, ui.,  fr. adu                 a  and    dam     t t
i fork or branc h, a bifurcation.
a du ti pei aa.,fr. adu  and sipe;
a )iece of broken ground, a suc  c(ission of steep hills and            d   eep
ravines.
a du 46 lki, n., fr. adu and &oiL;
thre back of a knife; dull part of
an, iy cutting instrument.
a du   f- ka, it., fr. adu and ~uk-a;
-i,..joint; a condyle.
a da ta ka, n., prob. fr. same root
as itakca; a grandfitther; a grand  ulncle in the male line.
a du tsi di a mnatu", n., lit.~
it 7as yellow) spots; a rattlesnakie.1
129 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
alip
a ipi   du  V t,,sa [+-In-], hum.
adj., fr. alipi and duetsa-  nine.
a  lipi dui e  tsa pi, U. a(j.,f r,
alipi and duetsapi; nineteen.
a lipi ki lin, adIj.,f;r. alipi and
kiliu; fifteen.
a lipi;i pu a, adclj., fr. alipi and
,apua; seventeen.                        d
a  lipi t6 pa, a(j.,fr. alipi and
tol)a; fourteen.
a lift a'V. t., sate as alioa.
ak, v. i., prep.; with; upon; to be
or have with.
ak, a prefix to verbs signifying on
or with.  (.~ 148).
fa ka, prep., ad v.; above; exterior
to; surrounding.
fi ka, it., prob. fr. last word; rinld,
peel; same as adudka.
a ka lipi, v. t.; to cross over; to
step over.
. ka ka L   i, v. t.; to write in char  acters, or in Indian symbols; to
make a pictorial record, but not
to paint for mere  ornament.  fimakaka.i, I write.  adakaliasi,
you write.
a ka ko di.   (T 241).
a kfi ma, num. a7d.i six.
a kLi ma a pi ti ka, nun. adj.;
sixty.
a  ka  ma  he, v. t., 3d pers., Ji.
akamna; to' make or divide into
six.
a kfi ma ke, v. t.; to divide into
six parts; divided into six.
a  ka pe, v. t.; to court, to seek
one of the opposite sex.-mia
alapets, said of the muaD.
a  ka  ski, v. t.; to pull out; to
hola between the fingers.
ai 1a Ira, adv.,fr. aka; up; up)  wards.
a kai ta, ~,.; the palate.
a kta" ta a du hxi rff,~ n., fr.
aklita an(l a(tiduhidlu; the palate  bones.
a kai wva, htum:i alj., same as alat  m.
a  ka  wa  a pi ti La, samte as
akamptapitika.
tt La  za, it, d(inii. of a;  a ten
(ton.
ak' de, r. t., comi. of ak and de;
to takie away with one, to carry
something off. - makmadets, r
carrvy.tway.
aL' hia, v. t., comp. of ak and hu;
to bring, to come and take with.   makrmahbuts, I bring.
fia Li, v. i. and prefix to verbs; on
or with; nearly synonymous with
ak, from which it mnay be derived,
or the latter may be a contrac   tion of aki.
a  ki lii, v. t., fr. aki and elii; to
urinate on; to stain or soil in
this way.
a pki riLa hi, v. i.; to be with; to'
be taken back with.
a ki kLa he, v. t.; to take back
with; to capture and bring home;
to take from and bring away.
ia ii tsa, v. t.; to overshoot; to
miss in throwing.
fa  ko La, adv. fr. ak and oka;
upon, on top of.
a;e   a Li C, r. t.; to support; to hold
in the hand, as a light.
tt  L i C, or ak-u-e, v. t.,fr.
gut; to spit upon.
ak1 tsi  Y, V. t.  to look through
an aperture at something, to look
in or out through a window or
door, to glance through at.
li lbku,.; color; kind, description.
akuto? what kind?
wa Lki, a relative pronoun, prefixed
to vxerbs, forming nouns; it de   notes the subject; with transi
130 
IIIDATSA DICTIONARY.
thouse); a tem p)orary  screen or
shed erected  for cooking pur    poses; a kitchen.
d   ku ma i kfi tsLi, n., fr. aku
antd maikutski; one who copies,
patterns after, follows an exam    ple, or carries out instructions.
aa ku mia  i  Lk(-, n.,fr. aku and
mai,;ke 3 one who commands, di    rects, or sets an example.
At ku ma  ki Lkit a, n., fr. kikua;
a soldier; the Soldier Band of
the Hidatsa; a member of the
Soldier Band.  This band  con    sists of a number of the bravest
and most influential men of the
tribe; it enforces laws, admin    isters punishments, h a s great
power, and may discipline even
the chief of the tribe.  This term
is applied also to white soldiers,
who, for special distinction, are
sometimes called ma,si-akumaki    kua.
a  ku  ma  tse 6 tsi, n., fr. aku
and matseetsi; men belonging to
the class or order of chiefs, men
of consequence in the tribe.
a  ku L   pi zi, n., fr. akui and puzi;
anything striped or spotted, par   ticularly printed fabrics; calico.
See maaiiliipuzi.
a  ku;i' pi;a, n., fr. aku and si   l)isa;  dlark blue  cloth;  black
stroudin g.
a    ku to hi, n.,fr. aku and tohi;
glass beads used in garnishing.
Possibly the beads first intro   duced by the traders were blue,
and hence the name.
A  i nla  [faima, aibwa, ava], n.;
k   the earth; earth, clay; country,
land.
' ina 1l1i  da lia, n., fr. amna and
adalb~; lignlite.
hku
tive, verbs the agenit, with in   transitive verbs the object of the
action; with adjective verbs, it
denotes something of the color,
or kind referred to; it is prefixed
also to nouns used as verbs.
a  Lu ai  lia pe   n.,fr. aku and
aka,tpe; at b)eau, a suitor.
i li-t a ma ol/ ze, n.,fr. amaoze;
a farmuer.
h(i   ho  tski, n t., fr. aku  a      nd
lbatski; giants.
h Lku lit! de, n., fr. aku and htide;
a malker, a manufaceturer of any  tlling.
h klu  h~,i n.,fr. aka and hisi;
red cloth; scarlet shrouding.
a  kfa lia, adv., apparently from
oka and lia; yonder,            o         ff,  in the
dlirection of the more distant         side.
a kfi lii, n.; the human ear; the
pinIIa.-makulii, my ear.
a kull hi a du ho pi, n. (adu  ho)i, a hole); the meatuts audito  rins externits.
a  ku"l lii a  du lia ki6 pi, n.
(aduliakupi, a groove); fossa of
helix of auricle.
ai  tu li6 ta i $/, n., fr. aku and
liotaise; something of a grayish
color; an iron-gray horse.
k -u i di tsi tsa ki, n.. fr. idi  tsitsaki;  scent,  material  f or
scenting.
a kut i;i a, n.,Jr. aku and isia;
a worthless or impecunious per  son; a person not respected.
h liti ki kge, n., fr. aku and ki  kgse; one who fixes, mnends or
arranges.
t ktiu ki ta he, n., fr. aku and
kitahte; a butcher. -
a kLu ma  di he, n., fr. aku and
ma dlihe;  a cook.
a ku  luff di he a ti, ni (ati, a
131 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
area
A  ma  ho  a de, r. i.,fi,. ama ho
antd ade; to feel inlternal l)ain, to
be grip)ed.
A ma  h6 ka, adv., v. i.; within,
inside; to be within.-ati aLLma  hoklia aminamakits, I am sitting in
the house.
a ma  h6  La  ke, r. t.,f-. auma  laoka; to put  into, to  place
within.
ia mla  lia kfi pi, n.,fr. atna and
hakipl)i; furrowed land, a tract
of land containing one or more
ratvines; often used synonymous  lv with amaaduliakupi.
a ma  lift ni [-wi], n.,fr. ama
and  liami; a  mountain-chain;
mountainous country.
A ma  liai mi  [-wi], n.; a tribe
of Indians who  formerly dwelt
in a village of  th se  sanme name on
Knife River. See Ethnography,
ama
a ma  af  da tsa, n., fr. ama and
adatsa; tle high upland, the
of)eLi utninhabited prairie.
a ma  a  da tsa ko a, adv.,fr.
ama'at-di auttsa; o n        the hplands,
awa,y 4irom  the iriver-valleys.
a ma  a du  lia  ku" p i,.,fr.
a ma   and aduliakup i; a        ra vine,
an old water-course.
a ma           a     du ai" pe, n.,fr.              ama
sand adusi)er; "i bad-la    eids".
a ma    a lio  ka, nd.,fr. ama  and
alioka; stra wberries.
a ma dek tsa  ki,  n.,fr. area         amnd
(oalkts paki; a     dee) gull.
a ma  dc ta, n., fr. ana and d           eta;
a bluff;          a   steep   river-sbank; high
steep hills bordering a valley.
a mna di ta ko a, adv., fr. arna  deta; on or at the bluff.
a ma  de ta kd  lia h ii, n. (lialii,
striped); a boluff               of manb-colored,
stratified rocks.
ma  de ta  ku mt      i ku,  n., sfr.
amadeta, aku,  and maku; a high
bluff; a bluff forming the edge
of a  lofty plateau, a s distin  guished from    t      he ba nks              of a
river where               it passes  through its
flood-plain.
A ma de ta ku;i dis, n. See
Local Names.
.i ma de ta ma pa his, n. See
Local Namies.
a ma  di a, it., fr. ama; an Ordi  nary low hill, a prairie knoll.
a  nla  di a di da" zi, n.,?fr.
amadlia; a[ ringworm.
ama,n.; a hoe.
a ma  e a ku tsu" ka, n. (tsuka,
fiat); a spade.
h ma hli tski, n.,fr. ama and
hatski; a long ridge; a *' di  vide ".
ai ma ho, n.; the inside% the in   terior,
~11.
A ma    lia  mi  ko a,  adv., fr.
amaliami;  at the mountains;
said when referring to the PRocky
3Iountain region.
g   ma  lia ti, v. and n.,fr. ama and
liati; to shine; light; light pro  ceeding from an original source,
not reflected.
La  ma  liat  wi; alone and in'its
derivatives' amaliami I is often
thus pronounced.
a nma li6 ta, n.7fr. ama and ]iota;
salt.
ama ic' pu, n., fr. ama and iepu;
a pointed or conical butte or hill;
the point of such a butte; a col  lectioni of such buttes.
a ma ic pu Sia   a [or -;aSe].
See List of Local Names.
a ma i d:.i lii;e, n., fr. ama and
idaliioe; a shovel.
a  makl, v., imperative of amaki;
sit down, be seated.
132 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
anla
ai nla  ka,  n., prob. f-. ama and
ka; a badger.  The  name  may
allude to the proximity of his
body to the earth as he walks,
or to his dwelling.
a  ntla ka, adv.,fr. ama and aka;
overgroun(l; upon                 the laned.
a ma  ka  do  lipa  ka,  nt,. fr.
a'naka and h  olipaka; Indians; a
name of special distinction, used
when dolipaka would be asbig.
llOllS.
oa irai ka noli pa ka, n., same
a     s am      Ckadolipaka.
a ma  ki, v. i., 1rob. fr.        a        m          a and
alii; to sit.
a mnia  hi ke, v. t; to put sitting;
to cause or oblige to sit.
. ma n*a ki mna ka da. See
Local   f  Names.
ma       mfi  ku, n.,Jr. ama aind
mnaku; high ground; a general
namie for a hill or ridge of any
kind.
na i 6 ze,  u. t., fr. a     s  a        and oze;
t     o plant.
h  Elna    ", it.; aLi eagle-trap, a
trap in tlhe ground.  See Eth,nography, ~ 27, Eatgle-Hutnting.
t 1}a ai' I, it., fr. areia and,l i.;ia;
' bad-lands'.
t ilia. pC, n., s8ame (s8 amaadiu  sipe.
.i nia;i pi;a, n. (sipisa, blatck);
a dark miineral pigment, obtained
by these Indians  fronm various
places in the neighborhood of
their village  and used in sym  bolic writing, decorating robes,
etc.  Of -late years, the name has
been also applied to black ink
obtainedl frlom thle wvhites.
h ma ~i ta,?n. (sita, is said to
mlean cold, bu1lt I hav-e never
heardl it, sv u s ed  but in tl.is,
ama 
word); the north, the land nort h'
of the Hidlatsa country.
hi     ma n i ta  ko a, adv.,fr. ama  sita; northward; at the north;
northern; used also as an adjec  tive and noun.
a-ma;i ta" ko a-a mna lia ti,
n., literally, northern lights;  an   rora borealis.  See  apaliiadalia,.
which is the more common name.
A ma i  tai ko a-ma   i, n., lit.,
wvhite men of the north; the white
inhabitants of Hudson's Bay Ter   ritory.
a  ma;6  di;a, n.; the  mud   swallow.
ta  ina  ta, adv.,fr. ama; turned
in the direction of the ground,
facing the earth.
a mfa te, lstpers. indicative of ite,
to aldmire.
a m(t ti, n.; the Mlissouri PRiver.
See Local N\ames.
.a ti", i.,fr. ama and ati; an
earth-covered lodge; a number
of such lo(lges; hence, a permta  nent  village  of  earth-covered
lodges.
a mfi ti a du;a',a;.  See  Lo   cal ~Naies.
, mt ti da  ta Iii  [-natalii],
onepe  oo f the old villages near or
on Knife R-iver.
i  a  mati hlia  n.; another of the
Klni te River villages.
pf ana  ti liht  mi, 5satme as  amaivgn   linti; naLme of bformer tribe and
village.
a  mna  ti La  za, i.; the Little
bMissouri River.  See List of Lo cl    bl tame s.
;i nmi  Isa  Ika"  du  i,  f.,r.
lmatsaki; lbecoming stained wlth
eartlh.
133
i 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
fipi
for embroidering.  This word  is
also used to designate the quills.
a pai di hi', n.,fr. apadi and hi';
t  eporcupine  quills.-apad(li is the
more  usual term.
a  pi)  di  ki~, r. t.,Jf'. apadi; t(z
cause to grow; growin.
i a  pa   I(.  da  pi,  i.,ifr. apa a(ed
he(ldpi)i; thejuncture of the nose
with the forehead.
a pai lii, g.; the skh; cloud(is.
a  pa  lii  i dai la, n.,. apalii
(and 5d(]dlia; the aturora boreatlis.
a  pi lii a  di  i lio"l ta Li,.
(iliotaki i, w(Ihite);  wlwite cIon(Is;
cirrhus clou(ds.
a  pi   Iii a d;It      pi      gi. (,i   pisa, blactk); (lark, heavy cloluds.
a  lpa Iii t[.i tzs, t. (tatsi, thick).a
sky compl)letely overcast  witli
clou(ds.
a pa li[ t6 hi, n. (tohi, bl~(c); the
b)lue sky.
ai ai   ic' pI1, n.,if.  ('I)i( a?d icpu;
the point oi- the nose.
a  pat ka, n.;  mosquito.
fia  pfi  ~fi li, n., fi. Fp,i -tnd (a i,
tlte hantd;  a p)elican (Pec        s
trtachyjrhynchus).   The iname  al   ludes either to the shape of the
bird's bill or to the use whiclh he
makes of it.
fi lilfst E1! k    p      i^  5p(-  and
sakupi;  a  hooked  or  Roman
nose.
i a  pa  tsi tft  ki,  aL.,f. h i)5 (tad
tsitilii; a pug-nose.
ai pi, 2-ep., etc.; with; to be with.
a  pie ti a,. fr. apa antd ictia;
a mule.
ia  pi ka, adv.,.fi-. api; together,
p   togethe r     with.
ai pikle, v. t.,fr. alpi; to p~lace
together.
ai pi.{a, n.; thle liver7.
ai mai tsa ki, aclj., fr. area,x and
tsaki; stained with earth.
.i mni tsa ki he, v. t.; he stains
with earth.
ai mfa  tsa ki ke, v. t.; to stain
with earth; to cause to be soiled
with earth  soiled with earth.
t mna tsi di, it.,Jr. a5ma and tsidi;
a  yellow mineral pigment ob  tained by the Indians; ochre.
.t ma  tsi di o du tsi, n.  See
Local Names.
i ma  tsfi  ka, n., fr. ama and
tsuka; a flat meadow; a bottom.
mi   a   ia ti, n.,fr. amiia and uti;
the skirt or base of a hill; a foot-.
hlill.
;t ma  6 ti ko  a, adv. of place,
fr. amanti.
a  mtiu  zi, n.; beans; any legu  minous plant.
a ma  zi-.si pi ia, g., fr. aila,zi
and sipisa; black beans.  The
name is also sometimes applied
to roasted coffee.
a mpa, n.; the neck.
:i niitsi.  See a'tsi.
a pa, n.; ears, particularly the
ears of the lower animals.
.i p-i, n.; the nose of man and the
lower animals; the bealk of a
bird.
a" pi a   du'h6 pi, n.,fr.,pIA
and aduhopi; nostrils.
a" pt  a  du  i   ka, n.,fr. apa          no
and aduauka; the bridge of the
nose.
ai pa  dka  la, n., diitin. of (tpa,;
ale of nose.
a pai di, v. i.; to sprout and grow,
to increase by growth.
a pa di, n.; the Canadian porcu  pine (Erethitzon dorsatum). Thle
animal is common on the Upper
Miissouri, and its quills are used
134 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY,
api  ati
a pi tsa, i.; sand-bill crane (Gius  a  ta  ka,.; the end or extrem  canadensis).                           ity;-perhaps, also, in the end.
a  pi tsa t6  hi, t.; I)lue heron  a t;i ka dui, n., and adv.,fr. ata  (Ardea Rerodias).                      ka; in or through the end; the
a. pi t*ka, i.; bristles on lips of    terminal portion.
Felidw, etc.                         a tai ka di i, r. i., f,. at,iki and
a p6 ka, i.; a head-dress of any          adlui; bleaching, gradually whit  kind, a hlat or bonnet.                eing. 
a p6 ksa,  t.; a pendant jewel;  a  tia, ia,  (Irl.,fr. ataka; end  aii earjewel.             wiards, towards the end.
a  pi  ti,.,f. (,p(  lnd uti; the  a ta ka ko a, ctadv.; at the end.
upper lip, the entire upper lip. ia t-. ki, a(j.; white; same as ilio  (See ideta).  These Indians seemi   talki.
to regard the upper lip as the  a tLik ie, v. t.,fr.   ataki; tocause
"root of the nose".;  to whiten; whitened, bleached.
ai p(i ti a du lia kil" pi, i,f,r. h ta rlluk, t.; to-morronw; sav:e
aputi andl aduliakupi; the 8stet ts    as ata(duk.
of the upper lip.;   ta, n.,fr. ati; one's own house;
a ri, n.; a trail; same (s1 adi.          a home.
ai rut; alone and in its compounds  a tit zi gi.; out of doors; outside.
adu is often thus pronounced.        a ta zi lia, a(v.,fi-. atazi; toward
a.a di, v. t.; to steal, to take    the outside.
anytlhing illegally or occultly.-  a  tai  zi ko  a, adv.; at the out  adi asadi, "to steal the road", to  side; out of the houses.
run away secretly, to abscond.    ai  te,  n.; a ftlther;  a  father's
.i su, i.; a string or cord; also a       brothers and male cousins.
fishing-line; a snare.               a te, r. i.; to appear, to come in
ia   u ka, n.; testes.                   sight.
a"g auka-mna  tfi, i.; a stallion.-   a  t(  de, v. i.; to be almost in
aguka-desa, a gelding.                 sight, nearly appearing.
a ta, n.; day; daylight.-ata-ka-  a  te  he,  V. t.,fr. ate; to make
dista, sometimes said of early in    appear, to show.
the day.-atats, it is day.           a ti he kaI, r. t., iraper. of atehea ta de, i.; almost day, near day-    ke; show it, let us see it.
lighlt.                              a te he ke, v. t.; to cause to apa ta di, v. i.; to go out of doors;    pear, to hold  Lup to view, to ex   also to menstruate.                    hibit.
a  t-a  di ke, v. t.; to put out of i  tea  ka'ti ti., ft. ate andl ka'ti; a
doors, or out of the house.            true or real father, not a father's
'1 ta duk [-ruk], n.,fr. ata antd    brother.
duk; to-morrow.                      ai til i.; a house of any kind.
a ta duk, adrv.; when to-morrow  a Iti du ti di, n.; the roof of an
comes.                                 earth-covered lodge.
a  ta fi  e, adj.,fr. ata and ise;  a  ii he, r. t.,fr. ati; to make a
bright as day.                         camp.
135 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
azi
.;  a  tskai ksa, v. i., adj., fr. atsla
and kga; habitually cross.
r a  tska  kla ke, v. t.; to render
habitually cross, to sour  orie's
temper.
ak tu, n.; the head.
a  a tfi a de, v. i., conmp. of atu attd
ade; to have headache.
a tufii tsa ti, n., fr. atu and itsa    ti; hair-grease.
a tfi ka, n.; the seat opposite the
door of a lodge; "at the head".
a  tft ti, n.,fr. ati and uti; "the
bottom of the lodge".  In a skin
lodlge, this signifies the space be    tween the poles and the ground,
near where they meet; in an
earth-covered lodge,  thle space
between the short uprights, the
outer wall, and the grouudl.
a tfi ti hia, adv.,fr. aItuti; in the
d  irection of the b)ottom of the
lodge, awvay from tie, fire.
a ti  ti ko a, adv.; at or il I he
bottom of the lodge.
a ti ti ko a-i" ptsa, i.,f-. attu   tikoa (,an(d iptsa; the shorteri up   rights of an earth.covere(l 1lo(lge,
the outer row of supporting    posts.
a tfi ti ko a-i" ptsi, sam)e as last
wordl.
a tfi ti io a-il da", nt. Synon.
atittikoaiiptsa.
fi' zi, it.; a river.
Ia  zi, it.; a horn.
d    zi, n.; a, spoonI or ladle.  The
Hidlatsa  make  their spoons of
horn; hence, perhaps, the name.
a  zi a  du;ia sa, n.,fr. azi coid
adusasa; a branch or fork of a
Iriver.
e  a  zic ti a, n.,fr. azi and ictit(,;
a  the big-horn or Rocky Mountsuin
sheep,7 Ovis montana.
ati
a ti i pki ti, n.,fr. ati and ipliti;
the mixture of white earth and
water which they use in coating
log cabins.  Lately this term has
been applied to whitewash ma((le
of lime.
ai  ti ke, v. t.,fr. ati; to change
into a house; to use for a house.
a ti $i, n.; the hole in the tol) of
the lodge to let out the smoke;
(      recently) a stove-pipe.
a ti  hi a, n., prob. fr. ati and  i; 
heavy, dressed             elk  or buffal o
skin, such as is used in malking
skin lodges.
a ti ts6 hi, n.; sanme as atitsuahe,
but less used.
a ti tsi a he,  n., fr. ati and tsua  he; a skin l odge.   The          name al  ludes to its shape.
a ti tsii ka, n., fr. ati and  tsuka;
the side of the fire, a seat ill the
lodge neither opposite nor next
the door.
ai tsa,prep., ad iv.; near by, close
to;- also htsa.
a" tsi, n., the ammace,; the ud(Ider
of an animal.
a" tsi bi di, n., same as a'tsimidi.
a" tsi hi, v., conmp. of a'tsi and hi;
to suck.
a"/ tsi hi  ke, v. t.; to give to
suick, to nurse, to suckle.
a" tsi ic pu, n.,fr. a'tsi and iepu;
the nipple.
a"l tsi m di n.,fr. altsi  and mi  di; iiilk.
a  tska, a(ij.; cross, fierce,-as  a
dog.
a tsk-.t de, adj.; surlv, almost
fierce.
a tsktai dn i, v. i. bvecomling
fierce.
atskal ke, v. t.,fr. ~tska; to en  rage.
136 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
idali
da, adv., prefix to verbs; denotes,
departure or motion from; as in
dainakoa, I go  away, from  ma  koa, I go.
da' [+ na], probably a form of the
last word, or of de, to go; suffixed
to verbs it makes an imperative
form; —go thou! do thou do it!
da da [nana], v. i.; to shiver, to  tremble.
da di [na-], n.; a party of In  dians travelling with their effects,
a moving camp.
dai dsa, it.; the calf of the leg.
da he, v. t.; to work, to labor at
anything; to make or form.
da he  ka" ti [lahekanti], v.
i.~?fronm dahe and ka'ti; to be
tired.-madahekati, I am tired.
da he  kaLa" ti he, v. t., 3d pers.;
to tire; to fatigue.
da he kla" ti ke, v. t.; to cause
to tire; fatigued.
da he Lku ti di ki, v. t., fr. diki,
to strikerI know not the mean  ing of the rest of the word(; to
strike an enemy first, to " count
first coup ".
d'ai hu  [nahu, lahu], v. i.,fr.
da' and hu; to come away from.  daniahuts, I come  away  from.
dadahuts  [nalahuts], you come
away from.
da lia de [la-], v. t.,fr. lia~d;
to shell with the teeth, as coin.
da li.. lii [na-], n.; theelongaLteld,
vertebral, spinous processes be  tween a-n animnal's shoulders; a
" hump-rib ", a buffalo-hulri)p.
da lia lii ma  ku, n., fr. ldalialii
aitd maku; a high  hump, a buf  -falo-hum~p.
d.'i lia  mi  [-wi], adj., prob.fr.,
liami; fri'nged, having long or —
nlamenltal endsl.9
azi
a zi d6 lii, n., fr. azi au(d delii; a
spoon or ladle made from the
horn of the Ovis miontana.
a zi lia mi, n., fr. azi and( liami;
antlers: animals bearing antlers;
males of the Cervitlte.
a zi lia wi, same as aziliami.
a zi ic' pu1, u.,fr. azi and icpu;
the source or head waters of a
river.
a  zi ic' pu  ko  a, (adv., fr. azi  iCpu.
a zi ic' pu;a;a, n.,fr. aziicpu
and gasa;  the affluents which
join a river near its source.
ai  zi ka za, n., dimin. of azi;    a
creek or rivulet.
.,zi ka zi, nt., samte  as azikaza. 
a zi si pi ~a, n., fr. — azi a,nd         (dI am  ie,,a; a black spoon, one madle of
buffalo-horn.
a  zi f  e tsa, i.; metal spoons,
such as are obtained from the
whites.
a zi fi ti, n,fr. azi and uti; the
itioutih of a river.
b. Words heard as beginning with
the sountn  of b may be found tin  der m.
d, a cotimmonI  abbreviation of the
prleolnins da and di.
da [na, la, ra], pets. proit., sim)t' pule, 2'1 per&.S.; thou, yout, ye.
137'
b.
C.
c is not a initial sound.
d. 
IIIDATSA DICTIONARY.
dali                                  dak
da  lia  pe;i, adj.; steep; per-  da  ip tsi-i tsic pu  [na-I, n.,
perdicular.                         fr. dalipitsi and itsicpu; a bear's
da lia. pi [la-] v. t., fr. lhapi; to    claw.
peel off; to bark a tree.          (da lipi tsi-i tsi ti [na-]n t?.]
da lia pi he  si, same as dalia-    d(tlipitsi and itsiti; a bear's track.
pesi.                               da lipi  tsi-o da hlipi [na-], i.,
da lid;e, v. t.,fr. liese; to tear    ft. dalipitsi (and oditlipi; a bear  with the teeth.                       skin.
da i6 ~i, v., adj.; torn with teeth.  da hlpi ts6 ki [na-], n. (tsoki,
da  li6,  i ke, v. t.; to cause to    har( d); raw-hide, I)pa:cghe".
tear with teeth; torn by teeth.   d(a litsi a, td(j.; samie as daktsia,
da  lii [na-], n.; a dim shadow    which is the more common pro  or shade; hence also a soul or    nunciation.
ghost;  sel(ldom used alone.  See  da liu, v. t., /. liu; to spill, over.
idalii and dokidalii.                 set, or topple.
da  lii lii, nt., prob. fr. dalii; the  da lie e, v. t.; sace as (daliu.
reflection of an object as seen on  da lif pi, v. t., prob. fr. liupi; to
a polished surface; perhaps a    drink  dry, to  drain with the
hypothetical word.  See idaliilii.   mllouth;  also, to  absorb as a
da lii pi, V. t.; to flay.              sponge.  3c pers.
d.a lii se, v. t.; to dash or throw  dak [fnak], a prefix to verbs and
away; to dig or shovel.              verb-roots,  usually  ind(icating)
d(a liki;i [na-], n.; a pillow.        that the action is performed 1)y
da liki si si, n., fr. dalikisi and    a sudden, forcible impulse.   in
isi; a pillow-case.                   the 1st and 2d persons, the' (is
d(a lio, n.; the lungs.                  sometimes dropped.
da  lio ke  [na-],?fr. dlalio; a  d(ik' a [naka], sam,e as  dak, fromn
saddle of any kind.-dalioke-hi-    which it may be derived, or the
du, a bone saddle or horn saddle.    former may be a contraction of
dahoke-mida, a wooden saddle.   d(aka.
See matatsidalioke.                 da ka, a diminutive suffix.
da  li6 ki, v. t.,fr. lioki; 2d and  da Lka, n.; the offspring or young
3d pers.; to row a boat.-malio-    of anything.  See idaka.
ki, I row.                          d;ia ka, v. i.; to remain, to cond.a lipa, v. t.; to place the arms       tinueinoneconditiou unchanged;
around, to enfold in the arms.        to be; to live.
(da lipi [nalipi], n.; a pelt of  d(a ka a dii ni di, 9t., fi. daka,
any kind; a buffalo-robe.             ofsprify, adu and  midi; liqfor
d(a lipi ke [nalipike], it.; the    anlnii.
annual religious ceremony of the  da Lka  dai tka  [-liu-], it.; a
Hidatsa.  See Ethnography, ~ 22.    twin, twins.  They are very rare
da lipi' tsi [nalipitsi]. ni.,jf.    among these Indians.
dalipi and tsi; a bear.            d(a kfi lie, v. t.; to pull toward;
da lipi tsi-a d(i a ma" ki., n,.   to pluck, but not pluck out; to
See Local ~Xames.                   stretch or spread out.
138 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
dak
da  k.i ptsi he, v. t., 3d pers.;
to nick, to cut fine notches, to
leep a record or tally by cutting
~notches.
dak' a ta, v. t., f. daka atd ta;
to smash to pieces by throwing
violently or by hitting.
dhk    a  t.  lii, V. i.; to make a
noise  by  stampinig, pounding,
etc.
dali a  ti, r. i.; to  be stretched
out or shaken out forcibly, as ill
shakidg blankets.
daL- a ti i9 sam)e as dakati.
dak  a  ti he, V. t., 3dl pers.; to
uenfold; unroll: shake out.
daki a ti ke, v.; to cause to un  roll; unrolled; unfolded; shaken
out.
tu b n fc  a to,' ti, r. t., fr. d(kta kand
to"ti; to ruffle or  shalke with
bore  suddenly a,nd briefly ap  l3ied1.
sd  ia   tsa, adj., v., f. V. i. dlaka,
remaining unchanged; alive.
ak a wi di,  satmie (is dakam-idii.
dr lke, a form)i of dlaka; to con  tinue, etc.
deal' ki  [na'ki], g.; a prisoner
of war.
d~..!if v. i.; to squeal as a child.
dzl lii [naki], a band or clan in
a tribe. In the Hidatsa daki, we
have apparently  a modification
of the totem system.
da   ii dfi nmi  [nakiniiwi],.fr.
d~iaki aid dami  or i(lami, i. C,
thr-ee bctands (consolidated) or the
third(l band; one of the  Bidatsa
clans.
da9 ki'.1.; (sc,'e s (lalikigi.
da -i 11i, v. i.,?/). kiti; to close
up1 like a poketle-kunife.
~aa h t6 pn [ha-I lit., foutr
bazct.s or thae fburth banld; the
arms.
da Lak  hi,i, held in the arms.
daik  a lio lii; v. t., fr. dclka a(nd
liolii; to break across with a
blow.
daik a Lki ti [nahk-], v. t.,fr. d.aka 
acnd kliti; to shave or remove
hair; to clear off by blows, as
these Indians  do in removing 
lhair, with a flint or iron scraper,
from a skiin, preparatory  to dress  ig it. 
df'k a ni  di [nakawvidi], v. i.
and t., f't. dJ ka antd miidi;  to
twist by sudden force; said if a 
sadldle turns while a horse is run  ning, etc.
d.k a mi di ke, v.; to cause to
tulrl; turned by sudden torce.
df:k a t     -  tsi [-vitsi9, v. t.,    J;^.
1Sa a)d umltsi; to cut fine  by   f
blows, to mince, to chop into
small fragments.
d't:k a p-    i v. i.; to blossom.
dlaLk a pt ki Lie, v. t.; to cause
to )lossoml. 
da         pC, V. t.'r. kape; to lacer- 
dte with the teetlh.
d a  ki  pi, v. t.  See kidakapi,
which is the mnore common form.           
dak a pi ii, v. t.; to float in air          
or on water; to flap.
d'tEi a p   lii he, v. t.; to float; 
to allow to float.  3d pers. 
dak  a p' lii le, v t.; to cause  d 
to float, to inake float; floated.
dafi   a pfi;i, V. i.; to be puffed
out, inflated.
tiaL  a pI  4i  Le, v. t.; to cause
to increase in diameter; to puff 
out. 
da  k.i pt~i, v. i.,fr. ka.ptsi; to 
be  nicked, to have  numerous              L
small not ches.
139
.dal.
da kit hi 4e, v. t.; to hold in the 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
dam
dak tsi ti, v. t.; to hit hard; to
beat with a stick.
dhk tsfi ti, v. t.; to braid.
dtk gif di, v.; to produce a cur   rent of air by a sudden  motion,
as in i.atining.
dahk   i dsi, v. i. and t.; to oscil  late, to  swing; pronounced so
much  like dakudsi, 2d  pers. of
kudsi, that it is difficult to dis   tinguish.
dahk i liti [hakm], adj.; light, not
heavy.
dak fi liti he, v. t., 3d pers; to
make light.
dak  u  liti klie, v. t.; to make
light; reduced in weight.
da" ku pe  [na-'], n.; a bed-cur  tain.
da mi [nawi], nutmn. a(j.; three.
It is mor e commonly pronounced
nawi, both  alone and in its de  rivatives.
di  min   a pi ti ka [+ na-], hium}.
a(d(Ij.; thirty.
dai mi  de  [+ na-], a(lj., v.; al.
most three, two and a large part
of a third.
dal  mi h( ke [+ na-], v. t.; to
malie into three, to divide into
three; pass. divided into three
parts.
d(' nml ke, v. t.; samie as da,imi  h1eke.
dai mi tsa ko a, adv.; in three
places or directions.
da mln   ti, v. t. fr. mitsi; to chew
fine.
da m6 ki [-wo-], V. i.; to  sink
(own, to ea)b.- kid amoki is the
more comnmon form.
~1~ nn_' [~awuv], aclj., etc.; deep;
,saidl ot w ater.
dfa mXu Eke [nawu.], v. t.; to
dleepen; bjecomue deep.
dak
name of one of the Hidatsa clans,
or bands.
da ko a [na-], v.,fr. da and koa;
to go away troni, to abscond.
damakoa, I go away.
da k6 e [la-], n., a maii's friend
or comirade; a hypothetical word.
See idakoe and madakoe.
dhk;i k. ke, v. t.; to produce a
wound by throwing.
dak;a.  ki, v. i.; wounded by a
milssile.
dak' si, v. t.; to bundle, to wrap
in skins or cloth.
dak;i pi [nak-], adv., v.; after
ini point of time, later, subse  quent to.
dak  ta de, v. t., fr. ktade; to
natil with heavy blows, to drive
a spike.
d.tk  tsai da  ke, v. t. and i.; to
slide or cause to slide with sudden,
forcible impulses, as in skating.
d-'L tsi ki v. t.,fr. d'k and tsa  ki; to chop, to cut with heavy
blows as in cholpping wood.
daL tsa' ti, v. t., fr. dlak and tsa  ti; to thrust into with force sud  denly applied, as in sticking with
a spear.
dak  tsi  a,  v. i, a(dj.; heavy,
weighty.
dak tsi ai diu i, v. i.; gradually
increasing in wveight.
dah   tsi a  ke, v. t.; to make
heavvy.
dii ktsi di, n., fr. daka and tsidi;
a name applied to light-colored
buiffa,lo-calves.
dak tsi ke, v., a(Uj.; to place in a
row; to be in single file; alignedl,
as thle posts of,~ palisadle or the
teeth of a comb.
dak tsfi a [nak-], n.; a min i;;
the Putorius vison. 
140 
IIIDATSA DICTIONARY.
dan
d a nh, same as daqd-t.-midanats,
I shiver.
da p~, v. t.,fr. da and pe; to eat
by tearing, as a dog eats.
da pSii ti, v. t., fr. psu; to shove
out of place; to jog the a)rm.
da;a, v. t.; to lacerate with the
teeth.
dai  i [nasi], i.; a name, a proper
natne; pronounced also dazi.
dit;i e [la-], v. t.; to take off
with the teetlh, as in eating corn
from a cob.
da;i pi  [la-], v. t.,,fr. sipi; to
untie with the teeth.
dai 4ku, v. t., fr. sku; to extract
with the teeth.
da;te6 v. t.; to munch, to chew
fine; also to pound fine.
dai' ta [+ na-] n.; the heart.
This word is also used figura  tively, as in English; and vari  Olls emotions and feelings are
ttributed to conditions of the
heart, as shown  in words which
follow.
da' ta d6 sa [na'tan6;a], v. i.,
adj., fr. dalta and desa, "heart  less "; giddv, foolish, inconsider  ate.
da' ta de;a ke, v. t.,.fr. da'ta  dlega; to cause to be foolish or
inconsiderate.
da' ta dc;e, same as da'tadesa.
da' ta lie pa du i, v. i., fr. da'  taliepi; becoming indolent. 
da' ta hi6 pi, v. i., fr. da'ta and
liepi; to be lazy; indolent.
da' ta li( pi ke, v. t.; to cause
to be lazy.
da' ta i;i a, v. i., fr. da'ta and
-isia,, bad; to be angry, mnoros%,
disagreeable; unhappy or sorry.
da' ta i si a du i, v. i.; becom  ing angry, etc.
dat
da' ta i si a  ke, v. t.; to cause
to be morose  angry, etc.;  an   gered.
da  ta  ki, v. i.; to be hurt, to be
in pain.-midataaki, I am hurt.
da ta pi, v. t., fr. tapi; to hold or
press between the teeth.
da  ta  1i, v. t.; to squeeze with
the teeth.
da' ta tsai ki, v. i.,fr. da'ta and
tsaki, good; to be happy, pleas   ant, agreeable,
da' ta tsa ki ke, v. t.; to make
or cause to be happy.
da' ta ts6 ki, v. t.,fr. dalta and
tsoki, hard; firm,  resolute, self   deny,ing.
da' ta ts6 ki ke, v. t.; to make
resolute, etc.
da'  ti, brotber-in-law;  a hypo   thetical word.  See idati.
da ti pi, n.; a ravine.
da t6' ti, v. t., fr. to'ti; to shake
to and fro in the mouth, as a cat
worries a mnouse.
dai tsa [la-], v. t., fr. tsa; to bite.
da tsai' ti [la-], v. t.,fr. tsati; to
stick the teeth into; to hold in
the teeth for the purpose of cut  ting, as these  Indians do with
meat.
da tsi [la-], v. i., )rob. fr. datsa;
denited.
da  ts! pi, v. t.; to loosen with
the mouth; to lick off with the
tongue.
da tsk. pi [la-], v. t., fr. tska.
pi; to pinch With the teeth; to
nib ble or bite,  but not  to  bite
off.
da tskai ti [la-], v. t, fr. tskati;
to pass or p)ress through a small
opening; to squirt or leak.
da tskif pi, V. t.;~ to pare offJ to
pee1.
141 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
dfk
di6 zi [nezi], it.; the tongue.
de zi a zi; nt. See Local Names.
di, v. t.; to shoot;  to shoot at,
whether you kill or not; also to
hunt.  See kidi.
di, a suffix to adjectives, increas  i n g their force; as in padopi(ldi
and kaustadi.
di [ni], pron.; thoui; thee; thy.
die' ki [nic-], pron. com)p.; thy'2self.
di da  k6 e  [nilakoe], your
friend.  See dakoe and idakoe.
dat
da Iski ti [la-], v. t., fr. tskiti;
to clip, to dock.
da ts6 pe, v. t.; to draw in with
the lips, to smnack.  See kidatso
I)e.
da  tsi ki, v. i.;  to draw  in or
suck with the lips, but  not to
nurse.
da wi, itiUt. adj., samie ats dami;
more commonly pronounced ha
Wi.
da wi tsi, v. t., samte as darnitsi,
atind mnore ca3mmou.
da  vw6 ki.  See damoki.
dai wut, V. i., same as damu; but
more commonly pronounced na
dai zi [nazi], i.; a proper name; 
same as dasi.-dazi taka, or nazi 
takii? whatis his iame?,-manazi,
my name. —dadazi, or nanazi,
your name.
de, v. i.; to go, to depart; gone.  dets, he is gone, departed.
de', a suffix to verbs and adjec  tives, signifying incompleteness,
a degree less than the positive;
almost, nearly.
de lii, v., adj.; clear, transparent;
white, when referring to the tail
of a horse, and some other tpings.
de pa, n.; certain deformities arti  ficially produced.
d(- sa [+ nera], v. i., adv.; no;
there is not; there is none, etc.
de  4a lie, v. t.; to cause  to be
not, to cause to cease or disap  pear; pass. disappeared, extinct,
cured (as a disease).-kidelake
is the more common form. 
de se, same as des:a. 
de  ta, n.; a boundary, edge, or
border.
d6 ta ko  a, ad., fr. deta; at the
edge or border. 
di dla' ti, n.; your brother-in-law.
See ida'ti.
di de, ~ v. i.; to travel, to marchb
di di,  to walk; also said of the
motion of a snake, of swimming,
etc.
di di,  n.; a travelling party,  a
party moving or marching; a
step, a walk.  See matsedidi and
paduidlidi.
di di ki, your leg.  See diki and
ieliki.
idi d 4 si [ni-],, your son.  See di  Ai and idiai.
di do  [ni-], p. prot., 2d pers.,
plur.; ye.
di do  ki [ni-j, pron., fr. dido;
yourselves.
di ha [ni-], v. t. and auxil., 2d
pers., imper.;  do thou do it;
about  t h e same as   da:' but
more emphatic; added to verbs,
it gives one form of the impera  tive.
di ha,? aux. verb, suffixed to form
the secon(d person, future, ind(lic  ative of conjugated verbs.
di lio, your body. See lio and
ilio.
dik~ v. t., imperative of diki; strike.
di ki, v. t.; to strike, to whip; to
;; couut ~ottp ".
142 
tIIDAT,SA DICTIONAPY.
dik                                    d6t
di ki, a hypothetical word; leg;  Idok  i dia lia ti [no -], n.,fr.
lower extremity.                       dokidali and ati; the village of
di pi, v.; to bathe;  to be bath-    the (lead(. the hereafter of the
ing; to bathe one's self.              Iidatsa.
diI pi ke, v. t.; to cause to bathe;  dok i da hi, n., r. dlok andt ida  to clean by bathing; to bathe    lii; a humain shade, a ghost.
another person.
~other p~erson~.            dok i da" lii ta i ko zi, i. lit.
di  ti nli [nitawi], your aunt;    ghost's  whistle;  the  E~quisetu)t
Jr. hypothetical wLor(ld sami.         hye)lale.
di si, n.; a son; probably a hypo-  dok i da  lii ta  ia tsu, n., fr.
thetical word.  See idisi, didisi,    dokidlai,  ita,, an,  matsu. e.,
and Imad,iM. 
andl muadilsi.                         ghost's  cherry;  t h e  Virgini:L
di;I, v. i.; to hasten, to hurry, to    creeper;  the fruit of te Vir             I I ~~~~~~creeper; the fruit of the ~ir.
ble falst.                             ginia creeper or Anpelopsis.
di;i di 4i, ian imperative formn of  dok     a"  ii  a   a tu a, n.;
Al;(Ili;be  hoi i   hate burydok i da"l lii ta mna tsu a,~ n.;
i(lisi; be thou itl haste, hutrry    tlthe Virginia creeper, the entire
up! hurry thyself.
l-lant,.
di'  i ke, v. t.; to cause to hurry; 
'urried.         dok i da  ii ta pa hiS, n.  See
hlurriedl.
hurried.-~ ~Local Names.
di tal [ni-]~ 1)ers. 2ron., 2d pers._
di ta  [i-],pers.pron., d pers   dok pa ka, n., same as dolipaka.
possessive; denotes  transfera            ble possession.          dok  t(, n., fr. dok and te;  a
ble possession.
di ti  du [nitarl], your moth-,   corpse
er's biother.  See itadlu.          dok te o du ~a [nokteoruSa],
di~~~~~~~~~.d~ dota    Cn,dga  place
di t.a mn, e [nitawae], n.,fr.                    lokte and o(lus; a  place
dita and mae; your own,  your    of deposit for the dead, a scaf                                      fold, grave, or graveyard.
p~rop~erty.   
di  ta  m     tsa  [nitawetsaj,  d6 pa [+ nopa], numn. adj.; two.
y-otur brother.  See itamietsa.        Ilii compounds, this is sometimes
pronounced nupa and dupa.
di tsa  ii, v., pron.; you alone;        pronouuce(t nupa and dupa.
you  unaide(d, or by yourself.      d  pa he,. t.,r. dopa; to make
double, to form in two parts.
di tsi [nitsi], v. t.; to massacre.       ole to form i
i ti  ii [+ ni, n.; yor dress  d6 pa he ke, v. t.; to form into
di shirt   S   itu[+ ii.-   y        rtwo parts, to divide in two; di  or shirt. Sree itu~li.I
vided in two.
d6  do   pa  [loropa], n.; the    vie  in two.
cheek.                              d6 pa ke, same as dopaheke.
doli [noli], a prefix limiting a  d6 pa pi [+ no-], num. adj., fr.
noun to the human species; al.,o    dopa eand pi; eight.
pronounced nok and dok.             do  pa pi  ti ka [+ no-], numn.
doli pa  kfa [noli-], n.; living    adj.,f'. dopaand pitika; twenty.
human beings; iformerlyapplied  d6  pa  tsa ko  a, adv.; in two
only to Indians, but n'ow often  places or directions.
used to include all races.  See  d6 ta [iota], n., adv.; near to;
amakadolil)aka.                        the near side; neighborhood or
dok, same as doli.                       proximity.
143
I 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
du~Rl
d   lia, v. t.; to spread, as  bed  tding. -kidulia is the more conm  moii form.
du lit de, v. t.; to collect by
dragging; to rake.
du lii de, v. t.; to shell, as corn.
du li6 nmi, v. i.; said of the set  tling down of a river, the abat  ing of a flood.
d u  lie;e, v. t., f-. hese; to tear
in any way, to tear such articles
as cloth or paper.
du li6 wi, samle as duliemi.
du  li6 lii, v. t.,J-. holii; to break
across by any means; to break
by bending, as in  breaking  a
stick.
du li6 lii ke, v. t.; to cause to
be broken; br,heke.
du li6 ki, v. t., fr. lioki; to sep)a  rate by dragging, as in comb  ing.
dfi ipi, v. t.; to take down some  thing that is hanging on a nail
or peg.
duk  [ruk], an -adverb of future
time;  when-will.    It is also
used to  denote uncertainty or
condition with regard to future
events. It is suffixed.
du ki. pi, v. t.,f-. kapi; to lacer.
ate byv any means; to wound by
tearing.
d-f!ki di~ v. t., fr. kidi; to pull a
skin back  and forth  across  a
rope, as is d o n e in dressing
hiides.
du Li ti, V. t.,fr. kiti; to clear off
by pluckliing, to pluck clean.
du kill ti, v. t.; to pluck.
du nma iii ta, v. i., adv.; back
and forth, going tiom side to
side, changing direction rapidly.
du mni lii ta ti di e, v.; to run
b~acki and forth.
d6t
416 ta du [-ru], atr,I., n., ft. dota;
the near side; at or in the near
side.  See itadotadu.
d6 ta lia [lo-], adv., fr. dota; in
this direction; denoting motion
toward the speaker.
d6  ta ko  a, adv., fr. dota; i          ll
the neighborhood of the speaker;
at a place nearer to the speaker
than some object named; also,
inferior to.
d6 ti [lo-J, n.; the throat.
do tic ti a, n., fr. doti and ictia;
bronchocele,-a disorder not un  common in the village at Fort
Berthold.
du, a hypothetical word.  See idu.
du  [ru], a prefix to verb-roots,
denoting general causation, that
the action is done in some way
not specified. Same as Dakota
'yu'.
ddu [ru], 1)rep.; in, during, at that
time or place. Suffixed to noiuns,
it forms adverbs of time and
I,lace. Suffixed to pronouns, it
forms words which may lie con  sidered as pronouns or adverbs.
du G tsa [+ In-], num. adj.; one.
du 6 tsa ke, v. t.; to cause to be
one; united.
du  e tsa pi [+ nlu-], numn. adj.,
fr. duetsa and pi; nine.
du  6 tsa pi ke, v. t., fr. duetsa  pi;; to divide into nine parts.
du C tsa ta, adj.; only one.
,di 6 tsa ti, v. i., adj.; one here
and there; to be a scattered few.
d-C  ha, v., imtper. and 2d 1)ers. in  die. of duhe; lift.-diduha, lift
thyself, i. e., arise (from sitting).
daf he, v. t.; to lift, to raise up.
diu hi, v.; lifted, raised; aroused.
du hi lke, v. t.; to cause to arise;
to assist in rising or raising.
144 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
dum
du mat ta [ru-, nu-], n.; mi(l   dle, the middle of anything.
du mai ta du [brui, adv., n.; in
or through the middle; the mid   (Ile part of anything.
du ma ta lia, adv.; toward the
middle.
du ma ta ko a, adv.; at the
middle.
du ma  ta ta, adv.; facing the
middle, directed towardi the mi(l  dle.
du  ma  ti tslki, v.,fr. dumata         ti
and itski; tied in the middle;
cut or strangled in the middle.
du mi di, v. t., fr. midi; to twist
or twill in any way.
du  mi  lia [-wi-], v., adv.; to
turn or poin         t out of a straight
line, in an oblique direction;
said of a white  an's tra ck- t    oes
outward,  of the track of it mVan
lost in a storm, etc.
dum    dsi du    [ uwumdsi], v. t., ftr.
tudsi; to roll up;  nearly t   he
satne as pamudsi.
dufi   pi, v. t.;  to break   off a portion.
du ple pai, adj.; capabl e of     stretch  inlg and recoiling, elastic.
du  se [ru-, lu-], v. t.; to    lay
down, t        o relea      se, to deposit.
duma and duaa-diha are impera.
tive forms.
du 4w  pi, v. t.; to lunt ie;   to open
lik     e a sa ck by pulling        the  edges
apart.
daf;ke [ru-], v. t.; to open, as a
door or the lidI of a box. —duska,
inmperative.-dugki, opened.
dgi ]ku, v. t.;,to place an evil
charm on, to bewitch.
dii sa   ki [rum], v. t.,fr. suki;
to erase, to clean by rubbing; to
wash as the face, but not as
clothing.
dut
du  ta, v. i.,fr. ta; to crack; to
go to pieces in ally way.
diu  ta [nut.a, luta], n.; a rib;
ribs.
du tai he, v. t., fr. duta; to cause
to burst, or fly to pieces.
du ti  pi [ru], v. t.,fr. tapi; to
squeeze; to hold and press, as in
shakinig, hands;  to squeeze in
any way.
du  ta  ti, fr. tati; to poke or
punch; to press with the finger   tip.
dufi ti [nuti], v. t.; to chew; to
eat, to partake of solid food.  duti is the form of the 2d and 3d
persons;- njuti, of the 1st per   son. See f 1963.
du  ti, v. t.; to bind, to confine.
In this word, the initial d (or r)
is retained throughout its conju  gation (lst var. IT 195), which
distinguishes it from duti, to eat;
but in the 3d person and in the
infilnitive, these two  verbs are
homonymous.
du  tf ksa, v. t.; to eat constant  ly, hab-)itually.
du t6' ti, v. t.,fr. to'ti; to shake
-s in casting pepper; to dredge
or sprinkle.
dfa tea, simple imperative of dutsi,
take it, get it.
du  ts~a  da, v. t.,fr.  tsada; to
slide or slip in any way.
du ts,  ki, v. t., fr. tsaki; to dis  sever without cutting or  burn  ing; to pull apart.
du  ts.i  ki de, v., adj.; almost
dissevered, torn so as to be held
only by a thread.
du tsa' ti, v. t., fr. tsa'tii; to
stick, thrust  through,  impale;
hold in readiness for cutting by
sticking.
10
I
145 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
dfit
dfi ts6, v. t.; to take hold of; to
obtain; to lift.
du tsi [ru-],v; taken; procured.
du ts! pi, v. t.; to untie.
du tsi ii, v. i.; to spring back, as
somLething bent and released.  kidutsisi is the more'common
foI'm.
du tsi ti, v. t.; to tear asunder;
to tear down, to raze a building.
dlfu tska  v. or adj.; twin.  See
dakadutska.
du tsk.a pi, v. i.,fr. tskal!i; to
pinch with an instrument.
dti tska ti, v. t.,fr~. tskati; to
squeeze, force, or pass through,
by any means.
du tski pi, v. t.; to milk a cow.
This word seems to be from saTne
root as datskipi, but the coninec  tion is not obvious.
du tskl Si, v. t.; to wash; said(
of washing clothing.
diu tski ti, v. t.,fr. tskiti; to en  circle the body, neck, limbs, or
any object, with something which
presses closely; to tie a string
tightly around, to strangle, to
kill by hanging, to tie,a sack in
the middle, etc.
du tskfi pi, v. t.,fr. tskupi; to
bend, to double by pressure or
otherwise; to bend a stick for
setting a spring-trap.
du tsfi ki, v. t.; to knead the ab  domen (kneading the abdomen
is <a common remedy for numer  ous complaints with this people);
to engirdle.
du tf,' ti, v. t.; same as d(Ito'ti.
du wa  Hi ta, v. i.; same as du  d ialtiita.
dun wi di, v. t.; same as dumidi..
F, adv.; yes.
e, v. t.; to keep, to retain.
6 de de, v.; to  bear, t o lay.
C di, n.; the  abdomen.
r   di,  v. t.; to      defecate.
die' ti, V. t., fr.   edi, witth  the
suffx ti; de      noting desire or reatdi  ness.
i e ais  ti a, v. i., fr. edi and ictia;
to  be pregnant.
e di de, comp. v., fr. edi and de.
e du  i, adj.; same as adui; pun  gent, bitter.
hii, v.; to  urinate.
e sien ti, v. i  fa. elii a nd  ti; de  noting desire or readiness.
46 lee, v. t.; to know; to under  stand; to recognize.
e ke  ta', v. t., negative of eke; to
know iiot.-emaketgts is the true
equivalent of I don't know, but
mad,4iigets, I am ignorant, is
more commonly used.
i' lu i, same as eduli and adui; this
pronunciation is quite common.
e pi!, v. t.; to grind or triturate;
samneas pa.
e rip n.; same as edi.
e6 tsa, n., adj.; all, the aggregate
of a number of individuals; not
ordinarily applied to the whole
of one thing. See liakah6ta.
e tsa de, adj.; almost all.
ha, v. and suffix to verbs, 2d pers.
of he; y-ou do; you make.
ha he te, v. I.; to divorce.-ha  heta, 2d pers.
146
hah
C.
. h. 
HIIDATSA DICTIONARY.
hah
ha h(e ti;'divorced.
ha lipi, v. i.; to sneeze.
ha  lipic ti, v. i.,fr. halipi; to
have a desire to sneeze, to be
ready or about to sneeze.
ha  lipi ke, v. t.; to cause to
sneeze to produce sneezing.
ha  ka' la [hakaita], 2d pers.
and. imper. of haka'ti; wait, halt!
ha  ka' ti, v. i.; to stop, cease,
leave off, hlalt.
ha ka' ti he, v. t.; to stop or ar  rest.
ha  kg' ti ke, v. t.; to cause to
stop; stopped.-haka'ti ard its
derivatives are often used with
li as the first letter.  See liaka'ti.
ha  ka  tsi, v. t.; to butcher, to
cut up meat.
ha ke, v.-t.; to gather and hold
up with the hands, as the edgc
of a robe or skirt is held in wad  ing.
ha  ko  ka, adv.; above, over  head, but not ill contact with;
nearly the same as akoka.
ha mni [hawi], v. i.; to sleep.
ha milc' ti, v. i., fr. hami and ti;
to lie sleepy.
ha   ni de, v. i.; almost asleep,
dozing.
ha ml ksa, v. i.; to sleep habit  ually and excessively.
ha o, interj., adv.; a word used to
denote approbation, gratifica  tion, agreement, assent, or greet  ing.  It is common to many In  dian languages. It is usually
written "how " by travellers, and
is often pronounced by Indians
the same as  the English word
howr. It is difficult to determine
the best mode of spelling.  Mr.
Riggs in his Dakota Dictionary
writes it hao and ho, both of
which forms are used here also,
although the -Hidatsa rarely say
ho.
ha  pa, adj.; cold, chilly; refers
to the sensation As experienced
by living animals.
ha  pa  ke,  v.; to make cold;
changed from warm  to cold,
chilledi.
ha' p6  Aa,  v.i., adj.;  dark,  de   void of light.
ha' p6  Aa de,  adj., n.; almost
(lark; twilight.
ha' pb  na du i,v. t.; darken
ing. 
ha' pa na kie,    v. t.; to   darken;
darkened.
ha Aiai, v. i.; to  feel a stinging
or sma,rting sensation.
ha  si  Ai he, v. t.; to sting, to
suaprt.
ha A   i  ke, V. t.; to  ase  tion
sow   Itit; retndered sharply p)aain  ful.
h;i tsa, v. t., ftr. tsa; to clean czar
sepa,rate land scraping.
ha  tsa ke ki,. i.; to hiccough.
hai tsa ke kic ti, v. i.,fr, ha  tsakeki; to have a desire to hie  cough, to be about to hiccough,
to be hiccoughing and likely to
continue.
ha  tsi {e, v. t.; to cook by roast  ing or baking.
ha tskf du i, v. i., fr. hat,zka,;
lengthening gradually.
ha4 tski, adj.; long.
ha  tski de, adj; almost lhmg,
nearly lotng enough.
hai tski ke, v. t.; to make long;
lenlgthene(l.
ha  tski  ksa, v., adj.; continu  ously or excessively long.
la wei to. i.; same as.hami.
her v. t.; to make; to prepare,
I
.i
147
he 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
hbid
hi di,  dem. proit.; this; is used
for person, place, and time.  hidimape, this day, to-day.
hi di ka, adj.,fr. hidi and ka; in
this compass, this  amnount,  so
much. -hidika Or hidikats is said
when exhibiting a quantity, or
givi ng an i(les  of quantity  by
signs8.
hi di ko a, adv.,fr. hidi and koa;
ait this place, here.
hi di mi, adj.,fr. hidi; this many,
so umany.  It is used in much
the same way as hidika, but re  fers to number instead of quan  tity.   It answers  the question
' tiami?' how many?
hi di  W, adv..fr. hidi and ise;
thus, ill thi s  manner.
hi di ta, adv., fr. hidi; in this
way or direction; this part.
hi di wi or hidiwits,  comrmon
itodes of f pronouncing   hidimi.
hi(liwits is the termi na l forim.
hi do, pers. pron., 3d pers., plural.
hi d6, dem. pron.; thiat, that per,son or place.
hi do, adv.; in that place, there.
hi d  ]ia, adv.fr.hido6; in  that
place; by that way; therein.
hi do  ki, comnlp. pers. pron., 3d
person, I)lur., fr. hido; them  selves.
hi du, n.; a mother.
hi alii, n.; bone.
hi du" a du pu pu!ii, n.; carti  lage.
hi  dfi  i mnaol  i a, n.,fr. hidu
and imakia; bones used in gam  ing. The name has been recent  ly applied to dominoes.
hi dut ka, adv., sasne as hidoka;
al1so pronounced hiduka.
hi du si di~ n.; the Assinneboine
Itrdianls.
he
he, an auxiliary verb or suffix to
verbs, forming transitive  from
intransitive v e r b s; 3d pers.;
signifies to make or cause.  (4f
1o0).
h(, da pi, n.; the waist.
:he' duts, same as heide, and ap  parently a contraction.
h46 i de, v. i., or sentence, fr. ide;
"so he says'; "that is what
he says"; said when  quotiing
or repeating, and ordin. rily used
with the terminal ts; thus, hei  dets.
hi, v. t.; to draw into the mouth,
as in smoking or drinking; an
irregular verb.  (~ 210).
hi, v.; to touch, to come in con  tact with.
hi [or i], n.; a sharp point; the
point of an instrument; com  motily suffixed.
hi', n.; a common name for der  n)al.appendages-hair, feathers,
bristles, etc.; commonly used 1as
a suffix, or terminal part of a
(ompound noun.
hi, pers. pron.. 3d pers., singular.
hi ddi, v., adj.,?from hbdi; new,
recently made.
hi da  ka tsa, v. i., fr. daka; it
lives; it continues.
hi da mi  [-wi], v. i., imperf. 3(1
pe'., s ame ( as litmi; he sleeps.
'hi da ni de, v. i., fr. hidami; he
dozes.
hi daf tsa, n.; said to mean " wil  lowus"; the name of one of the old
villages of this tribe on the Knife
River, and the present naime of
the entire tribe.
hi di, v. t.; to make; to form.
hi di', interj.; let me alone! there
nobet Used mostly ba children
whlen beinig teased.
i
148 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
huti
a child to sleep; to drone a lul  laby.
h6 pa, adv.; slowly; tediously,
wearily.
ho  pai, v. i., adj.; to be mysteri  ous;  sacred;  to have curative
powers; to possess a charm; in  comprehensible; spiritual. Sa,me
as Dakota, wakan, but signifies
a.lso the power of curing dis  eases.
ho pa di, n., fr. hlop; mystery;
mn edicine;   incomprehensible
power or inflnence,,etc.
ho' pa du i, v. i., fr. ho'pi andZ
a,diui; becomitg mnore and more
pertforated in different piaces, as
a ta,rget at which marksmen are
shooting.
h6 pa ke, v. t.,fr. hb6pa; to make
slow, to ca-use to be slo-w.
ho  pa; 4e, v. t.; to scare greatly,
to terrify._hop:Alts, terrified.
ho pa ti, n., prob. fr. hupa,; corni
in the ear; roasting ears.
ho pai ti si, n., fr. hopati and si;;
corn-huiilsks.
ho' pi or h6pi, v. i., adj.; bored,
perforated; excavated.
h6' pi de, adj.; almost perforated,
bored nearly through.
h6'  pi  ke, v. t.; to perforate;
bored through; supplied with au
excavation or opening.
hu, v. i.; to come.-hu', impera  tive.
hu, n.; a mother.  This word is
said to be of amaliami origin.
hu a, v. i.; to cough.
hufi a ke, v. t.; to cause to cough.
hu.1 ksa, v. i.;* t,o cough habitu  ally or continuously, as with  a
bad ctold.
hul S ti, v. i.; to have a desire to
cough; to be about to cou-gh.
hik
hi ke, v. t.,fr. hi, to drink; to
cause to drink, as in wa-tering
a horse.
hi sa4  dsi, v. i., adj., fr. hisi; of a
dull  or  doubtful       red color, red
but not scarlet, reddish.
hi sa dsi ke, v. t.; to   n ake of a
red(hlish color; to  dye  reddi   sh.
hi  sfi du i, v. i.; reddening,                be  comin g red.
hi;i, adj.          r         d; red; b right red, sea,r  let.h-bli-de6lii-hii, a light    trans -
parent  r e d.-hisi-:ktiahu-liota,
pink.
hi 4i de,  v. i.,   toI.,fr. hisi; almost
r     ed;  said of a                           in iron or stone
that is  being h        ea   ted.
hi;i he, v. t.;                 to redden.
hi  si ke, v. t.; to dye red; to
make red.
hi si ke,  v.; reddened; dyed
red.
hi;i;a du i, v i.,fr. hisise; as  siiiillg a reddish tinge.
hi;! se, adj., v. i.,fr. hbii and, Tge;
ha,vinig a reddish tinge; said of
northern lights, the morning sky,
et..; —also hls~Si.
hi;if i ke, v. t.; to cause to as  sume a reddish tinge.
lit;fa  a, n.; mint, Mentha cana  densis.
hi ta, a(Ij.; fast, fleet; said of a
good runniier; used also adverb  ially.
hi t* du i, v. i.; becoming fleet,
ini(,reasing in speed.
hi ta ha, adv.; fleetly, rapidly;
a more proper adverbial form
than hits..
hi ta ke, v. t.; to make fleet, to
accelerate motionl.
ho; the word hao (which see) is
sometimes thus pronounced.
ho i kie or howike% v.,~ to hum
149 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
hud     ~                         linik
' lia lia du i, v. i.; becoming very
rough.
liaft  lia dsi, v. i.; roughisb, hav    inag  t h e  appearance of  being
rough.
lia  lii tu a, n.  (Dakota, lialia    tonway);  t h e Chippeway  In.
dians.
lia lifa  tu  a-ma si, n.  (masi,
uwhites); the  R e d  River half    breeds.
] li  lii, v., adj.; striped, marked
with parallel bands or lines.
lia lii he, v. t., 3d pers.; to stripe,
to mark with parallel bands.
lia Hii ke, v. t.; to stripe, to cause
to be striped.
.lia  liu aI, v. i., adj.  to be set
closely together; thickly stud    ded.
Ilia liuf  a ke, v. t.; to cause to
set closely together, to com pel a
large number of Iersons or tbings
to occupy  a small  surface,  to
plant closely, to p)itch camp with
the lodges close together.
lia liuf a ksa, adj.; continuously
or constantly  close, or thickly
set.
liai ka, v. i.; to be rocking, oscil    latinig, shaken, or agitated.
libv  ka, v. i.; to itch; to be af   flicted( withi itching sores, as in
small-pox.
lia La du i, v. i.; becoming itchy
or more itchy.
lig ka he, v. t.,fr. hbka; to rock,
shake, or agitate.
lih ka h6 ta, v., n., adj.; whole,
entire; the entire of one thing.
lih  ka  h6l  ta de,  adj.; almost
enltire.'
Iia ka he( ta le, V. t.; to make
prcly  or entirel;           tompl eted.
I lia ka ke, v7. t.,fr. lialka; to muake
h'ud
hua di Ae du [huriseru], n.,
adv.; yesterday.  See sedu.
fhu  duk, adv.,fir. hu and duk;
when it comes to pass, at a future
time specified.
hu ka h6! interj.; hallo! etc.
hu pa, n.; soup.
hu pa, n.; moccasins.  See itapa.
hit pa, n.; astem or bandle; a
corn-cob; a pipe-stetn, etc.
hu  pa  a  ku i.kf  tski, n.,fr.
aku  and ikrtski; -t                                  ba measuring
worm                                b.
ht t6, n.; a screech-owl.
h-i tsi, n.; wind.
lia, prep.; toward, in the direction
of; suffixed to lnouns, it forms a(d   verbs, which qu.-lifv verbs denot  ing motion.
lia, adj.; co arse, rough,  scaly, etc;
used only           as a fa ctor    of com  poulnd words.
lia bfi a,          same            as liamua..
lia da. liai du  i, v. i.; gro       wing
leanu.
!ii da lii, adj.; learn.
lii da  lii ke, v. t.; to cause to
be lean; to starve; starved, re  dueed to a colndition of leanness.
1   da  lii kla, adj., v.; habitu  ally lea rn; emaciated.
[in da lii kl.a ke, v. t.; to cause
to be emlaciated.
lia de, verbal-root; shell, as corn.
lia d,6, n.; rain.
lia d(6, v.;-to rain.-liadets, it
rains.....
l!a di e, t.; to rain;  same  as
liade.
Iia'!ia~ v. i., fr. liat; very rough,
prickly, echinate.
1,50
R. 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
li.1 pe, } verbal root; denude, relii pi,   move surfi,ce, peel.
lia pi, v. i., adj.; thin, as paper
or ftinely dressed skin.
li.i pi, v. i.; to lie down.-liap,
imperative.
li.i pi, v. i.; to be lost.
lii  pi he', v. t.; to lose; he loses
or losr; they lose.  (11 20").
lia pi  h6 ke, v. t.; to cause to
lose.
li.i pi  h6 ksa, v.; to lose fre.
quently or excessively;  to  be
careless of things; to be in the
habit, of losing.
lia pi ke, v. t., fr. hap)i; to make
thin, to wear thin, to cause to be
thin.
limi  pi   ke,  m a d e'thin, worn
thin.
lie  pike, v. t.,fr. ha pi; to cause
to be l)st, to lose.
li a pi ksa, v. i.; excessively thin;
constantly thin.
li.mi  ta ta ka,        adV.;  rapidly,
lia tatakaha,   iii frequentand
rapidl succession.
hia ta ta.ka du i, v. i., fr. hbta  talki; becoming gradually a-ccel  era,ted in motion.
ali  ta  ta  ki, v. i., adj.; to be
rapl)i(l, to move rapidly.
liia ta ta  ki ke, v. t.; to make
riptlid, to accelerate maotion.
liti ti, verbal root; to brighten or
lighten;   hence,  amalia.ti  and
oliati.
lid wi, same as liami.
lie, adj.,probably a contraction of
liie; old.
lih  mi [-wi], v. i., adj.; lonesome.
io  mi  ke [-wi-], v. t.; to make
aOllesome.
li~ mi ]ksa, v. i.; conltinually
lonesome; melancholy-.
liak
itchy, to produce  an itchy sensa  tion or an itching sore.
Iia kfi' ta, same as lhaka?ta.  In
the dlerivatives of this word also,
li is often substituted for the in  itial ih.
hia  ki  p1, v. i., adj.; hollowed
longitudinally, having a crease
or furrow.
lia lifi pi he, v. t.; to make a
crease or furrow.
lia kfi pi ke, v. t.; to furrow, to
mark with creases or grooves;
grooved.
lid ma  dsi [-wa-], v. i., adj.,fr.
liaiiii; having a, diverging.p  Ipearance.
ha ma  du i [-wa -], v. i.,fr. lia  mi; becomingprogressively more
branched, forked. or diverging.
lii nli [-wi], v. i., adj.; to be
forked; scattering or diverging.
lift mi ke, v. t.,fr. liami; to cause
to diverge or scatter, as in toss  ing the hair.
lia m          aiI  a [-bu-], v. i.,fr. mua;
to make a rouglh           noise, to    rattle.
lifta  pa   du  i,v.  i.,fr.  liapi and
adui; becorning thinner; wear  ing thin.
lia pa tC du i, v. i.,fr. lia.p.ti;
becoming satiated.
li.a pai ti,  v. i.;    to hav e a feeling
of satiety, to have  hunger  or
thirst fully satisfied, to be sa,tis  fied or satiated in any respect.
lia p.i ti de, almost satisfied.
!io pa. ti he, v. t.  to satisfy.
1i:.- p4 ti ke, v. t.; to satist; to
cause to be satisfied, to supply
with food sufficient for satistfIc  tion; satisfied.
ha pfi ti ksa, v. i., adj.; habitu           o
ally satiated; gorgedm satisfied
to disgust.
i5i', 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
~lic'p 
Help
l  pa du i, v. i.,f-. liepi; becom  ing more shallow.
is pi, V. i., adj.; shallow; applied
to water, etc.
il  pi de, v. i.; almost shallow.
lie' pi ke, v. t.; to make shallow,
to b)ail out or drain oat.
li4 pi lie, made shallow, drained
or evaporated to shallowness.
li,6 pi k;a, v. i.; very shallow;
continually shallow.
li( pi ksa ke, v. t., fr. liepiksa.
liK6 e, verbal root; tear through,
separate.
li4 wi, a common pronunciation
of liemi, either when used alone
or in its derivatives.
lii di a, v. i.; to experience an
itchinlg sensation; to feel other
abnlormial or peculiar sensatiol)s.
Ii di a lke, v. t.; to make itchy
orI sensitive.
li di   A lika, v. i.; persistently
or habitually itchy or sensitive.
lii c4, adj.; old, advanced in age;
decrepit as if old; said of organ  ized beings.
lii    kLe, v. t.; to'cause to be old
or decrepit.
lii e  kla,  adj., v.; superannu  ated.
lii pa du i, v. i.,fr. liipi; becom  ing wrinkled, as a person ad  vancing in age.
lii pe, verbal root; skin, flay.
lio, hypothetical word; the body;
the trunk; the entire body.  See
ilio, dilio, and malio.
li6 lii, verbal root; break across,
break by bending.
li6 lio i, v. i.; to experience the
peculiar weak or painful feeling
in the eyes resulting from de  ferred sleep.-mista liolioits, my
eyes are sleepy.
li6 kap  n.; a skunk,, plepthitis nme  _phitica.
ii6 ka di ti, v. t.; to close np by
tying.
li6  ki, verbal root, denotes  the
pulling of a hard instrument
through something that yields,
as in j)ulling a comb through the
hair, an oar through water.
lio pa Ae, v. t., same as hopase.  liopiae is  the more conaion pro  nunliation.
lio pA   i, v.; scared, startled, tor  rifie(l.
lio p.  Ai ke, v. t.; to cause to be
secared.
oi6 ta, adj.; gray; whitish-gray.
li6 ti;a,  adj., fr. hota and i5e;
li6 ti  e, ) gras ish,  i r o n.gr.y;
said in describing horses.
liu, ver bal root; upset, spill, throw
down.
lift a hia, n.,. hypothetical; the
knees.  See ilitualia.
lih  e, v. t. an(d i.; to upset; to
topple over,  as aa s tick set up  right.
lift e de, v. i., fr. liue anid de; to
be almost falling; to stumible.
lift ]in i, same as liolioi.
Iiu pi, verbal root; drain dry;
drink, absorb.  See (laliupi.
liu ti, verbal root, or I msiodified,
fr. liu; to be in a cond(litionl to
tall, placed insecurely.
lifi' ti, n.; gloves; mittens.
i, n.; point, e dge; to oth; same as
hi.
i', ni.; hair of animals; _prob.fr.
hi,.
i or i, n.; the mouth.
i
1,52.
i 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
ida
IC pe, n.; the, tail of a bird.
ic  pu,  n.; point, top, extremity,
small end; same as Dakota ink  pa or inttpa.  For examples, see
amaicpu,,, ziicpu, midaicpu, and
Aakiiepu.
ic  ta  ta  ki,  n.; the  killdeer,
-Egialitis vocifera.
ic ti a, adj.; great, large.
ic ti a  du  i, v. i.,fr. ictia; in  creasing.
ic  ti  a  he,  v. t. and i.; to in  crease.
ic ti a ke, v. t.; to cause to en  plarge  or  increase;  to  change
from small to large.
ic ti a ke, enlarged.
i da, v. i.; to ya,wn.
i dai  lii, n.,fr. dalii; a shade;
its or  h is  shade, shadow,  or
ghost.
i  da  lii lii, n.,fr. daliilii; a re  flection; his, her, or its reflec.
tion.-madaliilii,  nmy  reflection.
(lidaliilii, your reflection.
i d.i lii Ae, n., fr. i and (da.liise; a
shovel; same as amaidahiie.
i da lipi, v. t.; to make an incised
wound.
i da  ka, n., fr, daka; his or her
offspring; their offspring.
i da  ka ki ti, n.fr. dakakiti; a,
role-scraper. The term has been
recently applied to razors.
i  da  ki;a,  n., adj.; left;  left
hand; lett side.
i  dh  ki;a  lio a, adv.; at the
left; to the left.
i da ko a ka de, n.; the part.
ih;g in the centre of hair of head.
i da  k6 e [-ia-] fr. dakoe; his
Iriend, his comrade.
i da- kul dsi~ n.,fr. dakudlsi;- an
swinlg. See maidakudlsi andI m  kiadistaidakiudsi.
i,pers.pron., incorporated, 3d pers.,
mtiase., fem., and neut., sing. and
plur., objective and possessive.
In the objective, it may denote
the combined agent and object
of a reflexive verb.  In the pos  sessive, it usually denotes non  transferable possession.
i, a pI)refix forming, with  verbs,
nouns of the material or instru  ment.  Prefixed to cardinal nutm  bers, it forms ordinals.
i a  lia lia, v. t.; to encircle or
surround; surrounding it.-alia  li.i is perhaps the simple word.
i a lio a, v., reflex ofalioa; also,
ialioe.
i a ka,n.; aman'selderbrother.  miaka, my elder brother.  diaka,
your elder brother.
1 a pa  ti, n.; a stopple of aly
kin([; a cork.
ic kh, n.; a star.
ic ki  dli mi  [-nawiJ,  n.,fr.
icka and dami; the Belt of Orion.
ic k-A d6 lii, n.,fr. icka and delii;
SiIitis.
ic kh lia lib a, n., fr. icka antd
lia.liua; the Pleiades.
ic kh ic ti a, n., fr. icka and ic  tia; Venus and Jupiter.
ic kh sa pu a, n.,fr. icka and
Aapua; Ursa Major.
ic Le, n.; bands, societies, or se  cret orders a,mong the Hidatsa;
each h a v i n g its own  songs,
dances, and ceremonies,  which
are to a certain extent esoteric.
ic ki, comnp. pers. pron.; himself;
herself; itself; themselves.
ic pa, n.; the wing of a. bird.
ic pa ta ki,., fr. icpa and taki;
a species of hawk.
ic pc, n.; a magpAie the Pica hud-.
sonlca.
I
153
i 
HIDATSA I)CTIONARY.
id.
i da. mi [+ -nawi], ord. num.,
fr. dami; third.
i dt mi  de [-ntawi-J, v., adj.;
altmost third.
i'da nmi du [inhwiru], adv.;
thirdly, in  the third order or
place.
i daL mi ke, v. t.; to make third,
to place in the order of third;
made third.
i da pa, n., adj.; right; right
side; right hand.            *
i da pa4 lia, adv.; toward the
right.
i da pi ko a, adv.; at the right.
1 da pu di, adj.; wild or  unman  ageable, as a wild bhrse.
i da spa, n.; shoulder; shoulders.
1i dO  pa ki pe, comp. v.; to carir-y
on the shoulders.
i da' ti, n.; a wife's brother, or a
iinan's sister's husband. —dida'ti,
your  brother-in-law.   mada'ti,       f e
illy brother-in-law.
i da tska ti, n.,fr. i and datska  ti;  a syringe.-maidatskati is
the mtore common form.
i da wi.  See idami and its de  rivatives.
i d6, v. t.; to say; to speak.
i de kla, v. t.; to talk excessive  ly, to say too much; to be ga,r  I ulous or too communicative.
i de ta, n.,Jfr. i, mouth, and deta;
the lips, more properly the mu  cous surface of the lips. —ideta  aku-akoka, upper lip. ideta-aku  iniktakoa, lower lip.  See aputi.
i di, n.; blood.
V di, n.; penis.
i di a lii, v. i.; to sigh.
i di ( or idiets, v. t., 3d pers.;
he3 thin ks, believes, or su pposes.  dadiets, or hadlets, you think.
madiets, or badiets, I think.
idt
i di  hu  v. conmp.,fr. idi and hu;
to bleed.
i dii psa  ki, n.,fr. ipsaki; a
breech cloth.
i di Lka iia, n.,? fr. idiki; popli   teal space.
i di k, di Lia, n., fr. idiki; a
garter, or string for securing the
legging.
i aidi ki, n.; the leg; the entire
lower extremity. -- iadiki, my
leg.
i di Li fi ti, n.,fr. idiki and uti;
head of femur.
i di  ki k i ti o ki, n., fr. idikiuti
and oki; acetabulum.
I di ko a-ma tu", said of a
wouman'ls jealousy.
i  di  paf du i, v. i.,fr. idipi and
adiii; fittteliing.
i di pi, v. adj; fat, fleshy.
i di  pi  ke, v. t.; to make fat;
fattened.
i di pi ksa, adj.; obese.
i di Ai, n..fr. dimi; his or her son;
their sou.
i di tsi, a(7j., V. i.; to have a scent
or  smell, agreeable o r disa greea -.
ble.
i    S    i d   tsi i  a, v. t., fr. iditsi and
iaia; to smnell disa,greeablv, to
stink.
i di tsi i siai ke, v. t.; to cause
to smell badly; chang ed from an
agreeable t o   a  disagreeable odor.
The intensive form is more com  monly used.
i di tsi ke, v. t.; to supply with
an odor, to cause to smell.
i di tsi tsf.i ki, v. i., fr. iditsi and
tsaki; smelling sweetly, sweet  seent ertd.
i di tsi tsa ki lke, v. t.; to cause
to- smell sweetly, to put scenlt
upou, to remuove a disagreea~ble
II
I
i
154 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
illio
i hl4  ko a, adv.,.fr. iha; in an  other,iirection or place.
i ha'  ta ha, v.; take care, get
out of the way, make room.
i h(h, interj.; there now! what do
you thlink of that I
i hi $a dsi ke, n.,fr. hisadsike;
material to dye reddish.
i hi  i keL, n.,fr. hlsike; red dye  stuff.
i lia, n.,?fr. lia, rough, etc.; dust,
solid dirt; the dirt on a floor or
dish, but liot soils onl clothing.
i lia tsa ki, adj.,fr. ilia; to be
covered with dirt, (lirty.
i lia tsa ki ke, v. t.; to cover
with dirt; to throw dirt on.
i lii, n.; the forehead.
i lii, n.; braided hair; woven fab  ric. See maaiilii.
i lii,.; the omentum, the crop of
a fowl. This word and the onie
immediately preceding are per  haps. but different applications
of one term.
i lio, n., fr. hypoth. word  lio; a
body;  his or her body; their
bodies.-malio, my body. dilio,
your body.
i li6 a de, v. i., comp. ft. ilio and
ade; to be sick, to have general
disea,e.-mali6adets, I am  sick.
i lio ra, it.; a fox.
i lio ka da ka, n.,fr. ihoka and
daka,; a tox-cub.
i lio ka ic ke, n., fr. ihoka and
icke; the Fox Band,  a secret
degree or order among the men
of this tribe.
i lio ka i ti pe, n., fr. ilioka and
itipe; a little fall-tral) such a,s
boys make for catchling foxes.
i" lio ka mni a 1C ke, n.,fr. iho  ka, mia, and icke; the Fox-wo.
gman Band, a secret degree or
id6
odor; sweetly scented. See kii  ditsitsakike, which is the more
commoni form.
i d6 pa [+ -nopa], ord. nuinm.,fr.
dopa; second.
i d6 pa du  [in6paru], adv.;
secondly, in the second place.
i d6 pa  du ke, v. t.; to put in
the second place or order.
i d6  pa  ke, v. t.,fr. idopa; to
~ place second, to make second.
i dui, n.; a woman's elder sister;
her or their elder sister. See
madu and didu.
i dut hi, v. reflex.,fr. duhi; to lift
one's self up, to stand up; to
arise from sitting, but not from
lying.-diduh,, lift thyself, i.e.,
arise!
i du  lia, n.; meat of any kind,
particularly dried meat.
i du  ksI ti, n.; fresh  meat;
flesh.
i du kst ti i ini di ti, n.; fry  ing-pan.  See imiditi.
i du  p" pi, n.,fr. dupupi; elas  tic band or web.
i dfi ti, n., fr. duti, to bind; any
thing used to bind, especially a
bridle, or a raw-hide or rope tied
around a. horse's jaw as a,t bridle.
See uetsa iduti. ~
i dfi tsi, n.,fr. dutsi; an instru  ment for taking up or lifting, as
a fork.
i ha, v. i., adj.; to differ, to be dif  ferent; other, of another kiind-].
i hia di, v. t.; to set out food, to
l)ut a feast before a guest; lately
al)plied to setting a table.
i h.' du, adv.,fr. ihat; in another
place.
i ha ke, v. t.,fr. iha; to cause to
b~e different, to change, to alter;~
cha~nged.
il
155 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY
iki
i ka  Li, n.,fr. kaki; a wheel; a
rollinig vehicle.
i kia  ti pe, n.,fr. katipe; a but  ton.  See maIikatipe, whicll is
more conmmonly used.
i ka tsui  ti, v. reflex.; to scarify
one's self; to cut the flesh in
mourning.  Scarifying the flesh
is a common method of showing
sorrow for the dead.
lii, n.; a whip.
il ki, n.; beard.
i hi da ka pu Ai, n., fr. kidaka.
ilusi; something used to inflate,
or fill out. See madaahapi —iki  dak'al)ugi.
i ki da ku di, n., fr. kidaku(di;
a ftiin. inaikidakudi is the more
conmmon form.
i ki da ts6 pe, n..fr. i', mouth,
ancld ki(latsope; a kiss.
i ki da ts6 Pe, V. t., comlp.; to
kiss the mouth, to kiss.-imaki  datsope, I kiss.  idatkidatsop)e
y,yu kiss.
i ki du tia ta, n.; an opeln space
in a solid coverilg, as the foita  nels of a1i inifanut head.  This
word and the word midiikiduta  ta (which  see) are apparently
from a verb''? kid utata 11, which,
however, I have never heard ex  cept in these words.
i ki ki Aki, i., fr. kikiaki; an in  strument for measuring or deter  mining any quality.
i ki pa ml di [ikipawidi], v.
reflex.,fr. kipamiidi; to turn one's
self around, to look behind.
i ki pa ta Li, i., fr. kipataki; a
bolt or bar for a door; accent
also onl p~enult,.
i  ki pa t6' ti, V. reftex.,fr. kipa.
tolti; to shake oites selu; said of
a bird shaking its plumnag%7 of
ifio
order among the females; its
members are usually iromi fifteen
to twenty years ol(l.
i lio ka  ta  ki, n.; Artemizisia
ludoviciana, or smnall " salge " of
the northern plains.
i lio La ta ki-a ku Si pi;a,
n.; lit. blac7c sage; Artemiiia bi  ennits.
i lio ki, n.,fr. lioki; an oar.
i lio ta kLit du i, v. i., f. iliota  ki; bleachling, becoming  white.
i lio ta kf;  dsi, v. i., adj.; whlit  ish, havring a white apl)ear,-m(ce.
i lio ta lki, adj., v.; white; to be
white.
i li6 ta ki de, adj.; almost wlhite.
i li6  ta ki he,  v. i. and t.; to
whiten; to bleach.
i li6 taki ke  v. t.; to cause to
be whlite, to  bleach,  to wash
white, to- change from dark to
white.
i liu a  lia, in., fr. liuhlia; the
knee or knees; his or her knee
or knees.-maliualia, my  linee.
dilifalia, your knee.
ii  ti pe, n., fr. i', moutl, and iti  pe; a, lid, the lid of a pot or ket  tle.
i i psa ki, n.,fr. ipsaki; a screen;
a (-covering.
i ka, n.; the chin.
i Lka', n.; mother; my mother; a
mother's  sisters. -ika. is the
common form of address.
i L;ai, n., fr. ka; his, her, or their
daughter.-malik, my daughter.
nik'd, your daughter,
i ka, v. t.; to see; he or she sees.  diiaka, I see. ddaka, you see.
i La  lii, v. t., reflex.; to lean
Lagainst.
ika 1ka, v. t.; red. of ikal; look,
behold.!
156 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
ipa
i ma  lipi de,  v., adv.; almost
setting; near the time of setting.
i ma   lipi  du   [iwi'ipiru],
adv.; at the time of setting.
i ma  lipi duk [iwalipiruk],
adv. of future time; when it will
set.
i  mii lipi ~e  du,  adv. of past
time; when it did set, at last
time of setting.
i  mak i [ivaki], n.,?fr. maki;
the chest, the sternal region.
.makd   i e ke, n.,fr. i and maki;
gaiming  ilaterials; cards.
i mak i du, a contraction of ima  kihidu, and more commonly used
than the latter.
i mak i hi"l du, n., fr. im aki and
hidu; the breastbone, the ster  ntU,.
i mak i ka ti- pe, n., fr. imaki,
the chest, and ikatipe, or fr. i,
maki, and katipe; buttons which
join a garment in front.
i mak si di, n., lit. tawuny breast;
the wester n meadow-lark, Stur  nella neglects.
i ma Ai, n.; I)riee, value.
i mi a [iwia], v. i.; to weep; to
cr.vy -and weep).
I mi  a lie, v. t.; to cause to cry.
1 mi di pi ke, n.,fr. midipi; a
Slpo!ge. 
mi  di tit n.,fr. miditi; a fry  in-})an.
i o pe, n. fr. ope; a receptacle, a
box.
i 6 ki, n.,fr. oki; a receptacle
which closely surrounds or encir  cles, as a candlestick, a socket.
i 6 ptsa ti, n., f-. optsati; nearly
synonymous with ioki.  See sa kioptsati.
i pa lka dle, n, fr. i and p~akade;
a fork.
iki
an animal drying itself by shak  ilT-; also ikipato'ti.
i ki pi, n.; a pipe.
i ki pi hu pa, n.; a pipe-si em.
i ki pkli ti, n., fr. kipkiti; a sad  iron.
i ki 4i, n.; a nest, a bird's ntest.
i lii tsa  ti ke, n:.,fr. kitsatike;
polish, varnish, etc.
i ko  ki, v. t.; to hang up on a
l'eg or nail.
i lt6r pa, n., fr. ko'pa; her friend
or comrade. —mak6'pa, my friend.
i ko zi, n.,fr. kozi; a whistle.
i' ko  zi, v. i., fr. i' and kozi; to
whistle with the mouth.
-ksi a, v. i.; stuck or stranded, as
a vessel.
i k.s.i ki  v.; to dash or splash;
to d.ash on.
i ktsfi ti, v. t.,?fr. kitsati; tobe  laubil; to apply any soft sut)  statnce, as mud or molasses.
i kl, n.; agrandmother; a grand  tmiotler's sisters.
i ki p.a, v. t.; to accomipany, to
go with.
i kl pa, adv.; with, along with.
ifu' pa, v. t.; to hate; he hlates.  amaku'l)a, I hate. adaku'pa, you
hate.
i klu' pa dsi, v. t.,fr. ikfi'pa and
adsi; to dislike very much.
i ki  ti, n.; the wrist; his or her
wrist.
i ku ti a du su ka, n., fr. ikuti
and adusuka;  t h e wrist, the
wristjoint.
i klu tski, n., fr. kutski; a meas- 
uring-stick; a pattern.  See mai- 
kutski, which is more commonly
usedl.                             I
I ma lipi [iw(ilipi], v. i. and re   I.
odes.; to set; said of heafenly           o
bsodies.                           I
157 
HIDATSA DICT1IONARY.
ipa
i pa Aa ki, n., fr. i and pasaki; a
belt; same as maipasaki.
i pa  ta ki, v. i.,fr. pataki; to
come iII contact; to'lean against.
i pa  tsa' ti, n., fr. patsa'ti; a
skewer or fork.
i plio ki, n.; a species of eagle.
i pi, v. t.; to cohabit.
i pi ta, n.; behind, the rear, the
b;ick part of anything.
i pi ta du, adv.,fr. ipita; in the
rear, in the back part; after, fol  lowing.
i pi  ta  la, adv.;  toward  the
rear, ba ck ward.
i pi ta ko a, adv.; at the rear,
belxind.
i pkli ti, v. t.; to smooth out; to
slread smoothly; to co a t or
cover smoothly, as in spreading
1)utter or mnortar.
i p.a ki, v. t.; to conceal, screen,
hlide from view.
I ptsa, n.; an upright, a support  ing-post or pillar.
I ptse, v. t.; to garnish, to em  broid(ler with b)eads.
i s-, n.; tooth; teeth.
i $a4 adv., suf. to verbs, etc.; alike,
resembling; nearly resembling.
isa, adv.; thus, in this manner.
I /a, conj.; and, also.
i s-i ki, n.,fr. saki; his or her
ha-;nd. See Aaki.-magaki, my
hand.  disaki, your hand.
i.sa ki a du tsa-mi he.  See
Sa-,kiadutsamihe.
i sa ki Ic pu.  See sakiicpu.
i a  mi  [isfiwi], n.; an aunt;
his or her aunt; a father's but
not a mother's sisters.-masami,
or masawi~, my annt. cdilami, or
iiisawis, your aunt.
i sp  mi  geo v.i.; said of yotung
sprouts growing from a stump.
i sa tsa, adv.; gratuitously, with  out reward.
I  sa, same as isa; alike, resembling.
I  iS  n.; a vessel, box, sack, cover,
or receptacle of any kind.
i Ai a, v., adj.; bad.
i si a du i, v. i.,fr. isia and adui;
deteriorating.
i st a lie, v. t.; to make bad, to
spoil. damage, ruin.
i si a ke, damaged, ruiined.
i si ta, n.; thle back; his or her
back.-masita, myback.   disita,
your back.
i  i i si, n.; a brother-in-law, a,
wolnan's husband's brother; his
or her brother-in.law.-misikisi,
mybrother-in-law.  disiki.i, your
brother-in-law.
i si pi he, n.,fr. i, mouqt7,, and si  pilie; Mouth Blackeners, an or  der or degree among the Hidats.
men.
i i      pi  sa ke, n.,fr. sipisake;
dye-stuff for coloring black.
i ske', v. t.; to command  or di  rect.-amaske, I direct.
i sp.i lii, n.,?fr. I)alii; the elbow;
his or her elbow.-misp.alii, my
elbow. dispa.lii, your elbow.
i sta or 1 sla, n.; an eye; eyes.
i  sta da lipi, n., fr. ista and da  lipi; the eyelids.
i sta du i li6 ta ki, n., fr. ista,
adu, and iliotaki; the white of
the eye.
i sta du  si pi sa, n.,.fr. ista, adu,
and gipiaa; tihe pupil.
i ita dfi la, v., adj., prob. fr. iata
and duti, to bind; squint-eyed.
i 4ta lif!ii, v. i.; to wink.
msta mi  di [-bidi], n.,fr. ist,a
and midi;  t ears.
i sta o ze, n., fr. ista and oze; a~n
eye. water.
158 
HIDAiTSA DICTIONARY.
I  ta d6  ta ko a, adv., fr. dot,a  koa; "at this side of it", at a
point  nearer than some  given
point whose name is the anteced   ent of ita.
i tai du [-ru], n.; a mother's bro  ther, his or her mother's brother,
uncles in the female line.-mat. -
adu or mnatdrus, my uncle.  dit-,
du or nitdru, your uncle.
I ta du lia, n.,fr. midulia; one's
own  gun  or bow.-matad ulia,
iasmy  own  gun.   ditadulia, your
own gun.
i   ta df  Iia ke, n., fr. miduliake;
one's own pol)-gun.
i     ta du  li. pi, n.,fr. aduliapi;
one's own bed.-mataduliapi, my
own bed.
i tai dsi, n.; leggings; his or her
legginigs.- matadsi, my leggings.
dita(dsi, your leggings.
I  tai dsi-6 da ka pi hii, n., fr.
itadsi and odakapilii; the flap or
fringe worn on the outer seam of
the legging.
i ta hai tski, 2.,fr. ita and hat  ski, lit., Long Arrows; the Da   kota In(ia,,ns.
i ta   i', n., fr. ita and hi'; an ar   row-point.
i ta' hu, n.; a mouse.
i  ta hu ic ti a, n., fr. itahu and
ictia;,t rat.
i tIt i A't, n., fr. it,4 and isu; the
quills at the base of an arrow,
arrow-directors.
i tai lka, n.; an aged' man;  a,
venerable person.
i  tai ka lie or itaikaliie, n.,fr.
ita-ka and lie; a very old man.
i ta ka t6 tars prop. n., fr. itak.q,
te, and t', lit., Old Man Immortal;
one of the lidatsa names for a
Deity.
i;ta pC  di, n.,,fr. ista and pedi;
purulent or mucous matter ad  hering to the eyelids.
i sta4 pi, n.; eyelashes.
I;u, n.; quills; primary feathers
of wings of large birds, particu
larly of eagles' wings.
i'su a ti;i al n., fr. i~n and ati  sia; a bat.
1,u sI sa, n.; a species of king  bird, Tyrannus verticalis.
i sfi ti, n.; the lap.
i su t[ psa ki, n., fr. isuti and
ipsaki; an apron.
i ta, n.,fr. i and ta; an arrow, lit.,
an instrument of death.   See
maita.
I ta or i ta, coinp. _pers. pro%,, 3d
pers., sing. and plutr., possessive, 
and used for all genders; de  notes principally acquired or
transferable possession.  ita (or
its equivalents in the fi-;st and
second person,-mat. and dita)
is pre ixed to nouns, forming
compounds which often differ so
much from the original nouns in
sense or sound that they are to
be regarded as distinct words.
A few examples tollow.  ( 5 1[ 58  f)l1). 
i tai da mi a [itarawia], n.,fr.
mia; a wife; a betrothed wife;
a wi'e's sister.
I ta d6 lipa, n.; the navel.
I ta do lipa ka, n.,fr. ita and
dolipaka; one's own people, re  lations, kindred.
I ta  d6  ta du  [-lotaru], n.,
adv.,fr. ita and dotati; this sid e
of it; a place nearer than some
given point; used also in com  parison of adjectives to denote, a
less degree, or inleriority. ([
233).
159
iAt
ita 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
ita
i ta!Lii, n.,fr. i, hair, and taki,'
white;  t h e jackass rabbit, or
Lepus  canmpestris, which  turns
white in winter.
i ta ki da ki: he, n., fr. kidaka  he; a spani the outstretch of the
hand, the measure of a s'pan.
See Aakiitakidakahe.
i ta ki'a, n.; a sister; a man's
younger sister. — matakiga, my,,
sister.  nitakiaa your sister.
i ta kli pi 4a, n.,fr. itaki and
sipisa; the s m a ll rabbit, the
"1 woo(I-rabbit 11, Lepus sylvatidus
var. nuttalli.
i tfi  ku, n.; a woman's younger
sister; her younger sister.-ma  taliu, my  sister.  ditaku, your
sister.
i ta!;fi pe, n.; an owl, particu  larly the great horned owl, Bubo
virginitanus.
]' [#ma, n.,fr. ita and ama; one's
own country, the proper hunt  ing-ground of any tribe.
i ta  mii  e, n.,Jfr. ita and ma,e;
one's o w n property;  his own
property. —natamae, my own.
ditamae, your own.  (f[ 122).
1 ta ma pl;a, n.; grandchild;
his or her grandchild.
i ta mla;i, n.; a servant; used
wlhen spe.aking of white men.
1 ta ma;f ka, n.; his dog.
ita tma ta, adj., adv.,.fr. ite,
ama, and ta; face downward;
with the face to the ground.
it a m6, tsa [-wetsa], n.,?fr.
imatse; a brother; brethren (in
the widest sense); thlis is also
the  only term for a woman's
elder brother.-matametsa, my
brother.
i ta mni a [-w~ia], n., ft. ita and
mia; a mlan's elder sister. -ma
it~
tamia, my sister. ditamia, your
sister.
i ta 6 l;a du, adv.,fr. ita and
okadu; the other side of it, on
the other side of it, in a place
further off than some object men  tioned.  This word and the next
following are commonly used in
comparison of qualities to de-;
note supl)eriority,-the anteced  ent of ita being the inferior.
(IT233).
iI ta 6 lka ko a, adv., fr. ita and
okakoa; at the other side of it,
beyond some object mentioned.
ita 6 ki ko a, a rare pronunci  ation of the word immediately
preceding.
I ta pa, n.,fr. ita and hupa; moc  casons; his or her moccasons.  matapa-, my moccasons.
i ta Ai, n., fr. itt and masi; his or
her own robe or blanket. —mata  Ai, my robe.
i ta  Ai i ptsi, n., fr. itasi and
iptsi (see ma4iiptsi); the gar  nishing of bisor her robe.
i ta su, n., contraction of itaisu.
i  tfi   u slia, n., fr. ita and itsua  suka or suka; one's own horse.  mat.isuka, my horse.
i ta;u pu  zi, n., fr. itasu and
puzi, lit., Spotted Ar)row-quills;
the Cheyenlne I(lians.
i tia tsu, n.,fr. ita and tsu; the
lhalf'of anything.
i ta tsu he, v.t.,fr. itfitsu; to
divide into its halves; also used
as a noun or adjective, signifying
half or halved.
I ta wg tsa, n., same as itametsa.
i ta wi a, n., same as itamia.
i t6, v. t.; to admire; to be fond
of.-amatets, I admire.  adatets,
you admire.
160 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
ite
i te or ite, n.; the face.
i te a  ka  ta, adv.,same as ita  kata.
ite     i ma  ta, adv., same as ita  mata.
i te lia, adv.,fr. ite; toward the
face or front, forward.
i te i;i a, v. i., adj.,fr. ite and
iaia; to be ill-favored; ugly.
i te ko a, adv.,fr. ite; at or to
the front or face, in front.
i te ko a hi, adv. of time,fr. ite  koa; soon, presently, at a future
time not very distant.
i te Lo a hi duli, adv. of time,
fr. itekoahi; soon, in a little
while; when, or if, a future time
not very distant arrives.
i te ma  tse e" tsis, n.  See Lo  cal Names.
i te ta, adv. and n.; on the face;
the cheek.
i te ta a du ho pi, n.; a dim  ple.
i te tsa ki, v. i., adj.,fr. ite and
tsaki; possessed of a handsome
face, pretty.
i te fi i, n., fr. ite and ni; vermil  ion or other pigmenit used in
painting the face.
i ti pe, n.,fr. i and tipe; some  thing which closes or covers, as
a lid, a fall-trap, etc.  See mai  tipe.
i t6  di,  v. i.,?reflex.;  to be
ashamed of. to feel shame.
i to di ke, v. t.; to cause to be
ashamed, to shame.
i t6 hi lie, n.,fr. tohike; dye  stuff for coloring blue.
i t6  hi si ke, n.,fr. tohisike;
material for dyeing  bluish or
green.
i to  pa,  ord.  htum., fr. t o paJ
fourth.
its
i t6 pa du, adv.,fr. itopa; fourth  ly,   in the fourth place or or  der.
i t6 pa du ke, v. t., fr. itopadu;
to put in the fourth place or or  der.
f  tsa Lki, v. comp., often used as
prono.un, ft. i and tsaki; he, she,
or it alone; he by himself, un  aided.-mitsaki, I alone.  ditsa  ki, you alone.
i tsai ti, n., fr. i and tsati; oil or
other material used to render a
surface smooth.
i tsf' ti, n.; the Isanti or Santee
Dakotas.  This word is simply
the Hidatsa pronunciation of the
Dakota word.
i tsa 6 zi e, v. t.,fr. uzie; to
meet another person face to face,
to meet in coming from opposite
direction s.
i ts6, v.,? reflex.; to waken up, to
arouse one's self.
i tsi. See itsfl.
i tsi, v. i.; to be awake.
tsi, n.; the human foot; the
claws of a fowl; the hind paws
of a quadruped.-matsi, my foot.
ditsi,yourfoot. itsi, his foot. See
tsi.
t   tsi a du tsa mi he [-wihe],
n.; the toes.
i tsic pu, n., fr. itsi and  icpu;
the toe nails.
i tsi di kLe, n.,fr. i and tsidike;
yellow dye-stuff, a lichen found
by the Indians on dead pine-trees
in the mountains. The name has
been recently applied to turme  ric and other yellow dyes ob  tained from the whites.
g   tsi he, v. t., fr. itsi; to arouse
another per        son.
i Its/i, v. i. and adj.. to be strong;
11
161 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kad
brother.   ditsuka, or  nitsuka,
your brother.
i tsu  a su ka.  See itsuasuka,
which is sometimes pronounced
thus.
i tu di, v. i., adj.; containing pas,
purulent, suppurating.
i tfi ii, n.; a dress, coat, or shirt;
one's own dress. -  matulii, my
coat. dituii, your coat.
i tfI ka, same as itekoa.
i tu pa, n.; any wild feline, par  ticularly the Canada lynx, Lynn
canaden.sis.
i tu pa ic ti a, n.,fr. itupa and
ictia; the puma, Felis concolor.
i tu  pa  pu  zi, n.,fr. itupa and
puzi; the red lynx, Lynx rufus.
wa ki, same as imaki.
physically strong; said of organ  ized beings.
i tsi i ke, v. t.; to strengthen;
strengthened.
i tsi ka, adv. and adj.; first, fore-.
most.
i tsi ka ko a, adv.,fr. itsika;
formerly, in the beginning, very
long ago; used in reference to
very remote past time.
i tsi ka ma  hi die, n., fr. itsi  ka, ma, and hbdi; one of the Hi  datsa names for their Deity, or
object of greatest veneration.
I tsi $i pi 4a, n., fr. itsi and Ai  pisa; the Blackfoot Indians.
i tsi ti, n., fr. itsi; a foot-prin t, a
track; his, her, or its foot-print.
i tsi tsa du i, v. i.,fr. itsitsi; be  coming very bright.
i tst tsi, v. i., adj.; very bright,
gleaming, resplendent.
i tsi tsi ke, v. t.; to cause to
brighten; made bright.
i tski, v. i.; to be large enough
for a purpose, to contain, to ac  commodate; said if it is desired
to cut a pair of moccasins out of
a piece of buckskin, and, on lay  ing on the pattern, the piece is
found to be large enough, etc.  itskitats, it is not large enough.
i tski ti, n.,fr. i and tskiti; an
instrument for shearing off, or
cutting close, as a scissors. See
maitskiti.
i tsfi  a  Si' ka, n.,fr. suka; a
horse.  The meaning of the first
three syllables is not now known.
Some of the tribe think that the
word was originally itsimasuka,
the' strong dog' or' strong beast
of burden'.
i tsii ka, n.; a man's or woman's
younger brother. —matsuka, m~y
ka, prep.;  at; in;  suffixed to
nouns, it forms adverbs of place.
fka, hypothetical word for daugh  ter. See ikd.
ka, an  adjective, or  qualifying
suffix, denoting  quantity.-tua  ka, how much?  hidika (or hidi  kats), this much, so much.
ka, 2d pers. of ke, an auxiliary
suffix; to make; to cause.
kIa', v. i.; to laugh.
ka da, v. i.; to flee from, to run
away.
ka  da   iia, v.  t.,prob. fr. ki and
adlalia; to kindle.
k.a da mi  [-wi], v. t.; to remem  ber, to recollect.
ka. da ml  ke, v. t.; to cause to
rememberll, to  rem ind.
ka da.1 tsi, v. i.; to be willing.
ka  da  tsi ke, v. t.; to cause to
be willing, to persuade or induce.
162
Its
k. 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kad
ka d6, [kar], v.; to vomit.
ka de ti, v. i.; to have a desire
to vomit, to ifeel nausea.
ka de ksa,  to vomit  excessively
or continuously.
Lai di, v. t.;                to ask for a gift, to
beg.
Ika dic  ka  [-ri c-], n.; light  ning.
ka di kia, v. t.,rt. kadi;                to beg
excessively, habitually, shame  lessly.
Ika di Eta  [-ri-], adj.; small;
refirs to size, not qu         an tity or
number.
ka di 4tfa du  i, v. i.,fr. kadit ta;
decreasing gradually in size.
ka di 4ta de, adj.; almost small;
almost small enough.
ka di  Lta  di, adj.; very small.
La dei ta ke, v. t.; to cause to
be small; decreas ed, diminished.
ka di dta ksa, adj.; constantly
small.
ka d i tska [-ri-], adj.; to glisten,
to shin     e  br ightl y by  reflected
light.
ka di tska pa [-ri-], v. i.; to
stick; to adhere, as a glued or
pasted surface.
ka  di tska  pa  he,  v. t.; to
stick, to place in contact with an
adhesive surface.
ka di tska pa ke, v. t.; to
cause to adhere, to apply an ad  hesive substance.
kfL dse, v. i. and t.; to blow with
the mouth; to blow away.
ka dfi, n.; a season of the year,
a period of time marked by some
natural phenomenon.
ka dfl du, adv.; during the sea  son.
]kf du lie, n.; all old woman.
tie is an adjective signifying old,
kar
and  kadu is, I doubt not, the
original noun; but I have never
heard it without the adjective
suffixed.  See itaka and itakalie.
ka en, v. t.; to scratch with the
nails.
kti he, v. t.; synon. dakihe.
lka he, v. t.; to set free, to liber  ate.
lta' ke, v. t.,fr. ka'; to cause to
laugh. - ka'ike, it makes him
laugh.
ka  ke' ki, v. i.; to make a loud
rattling or stamping noise.
kfi kLi, v. i.; to roll, as a wheel.
ka ki Iii, adj.; round, circular.
ka ki lii de, adj.; almost circu  lar; irregularly circular.
ka kLI  ii ke, v. t.; to make cir  cular; to cause to be circular.
kit kTa, n.; any large tuber, as
the potato, wild artichoke, etc.
kIs'  ksa, v. i.,fr. ka'; to laugh
excessively.
ka kfi i, n.; a squash.
kta mi [-wi], same as komi, which
is mnore common.
ka mic La, adj.; tough, hard,
and elastic.
ka mic ki Au, adj.,fr. kamicka
and isu; the name of a water  fowl, which sheds its quills on
lakes.  The quills are collected
by the Indians on the leeward
shores, split, dyed, and used in
embroidery like porcupine quills.
The name applies to both bird
and quills.
kfi mi he, same as komihe.
lkea  pe, or kapi, verbal root;
scratch, lacerate.  See adakapi,
dukpi, e           tc.
lkfi ptsi, verbalroot; nick, notch.
!~a rat, same as kada.
Ika r.~ tsi~ same as kada.tsi,
163 
HIIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kar
ka ri sta. See kadiata and its
derivatives.
k.i  ta ke, v. t.; to turn inside
out; to roll up the sleeves.
ka' ti, adj. and adv.; true, real;
truly, really; exceedingly.
ka ti a, adj.; extended, as the
arms in yawning, as the bands
outspread.
ka  ti he, v. t.; to extend,  to
stretch out.
ka ti ke, v. t.; to change, or
pour, from one vessel to another.
katika.
ka. tsi, v.; to make a buffalo-sur  round.
ka. tsi, v. i., adj.; to be  extin  guished, as a light or  a fire; t o
beticooled by being blown  on
with      the  mouth,         or by bei          ng
taken f rom              the   fire and set aside
to cool.
ka tsi he    i, v. i., 3d pers.; to cool
by blowing, etc.; to extinguis h
a light or a fire. -katsi eats, I
extinguish. ka atsidats k you  ex  tinguish.
ka tsf  ka, adj.; to be swollen
and hardened, as a diseased
joint, or a cicatrix on a tree.
ka ft;ta, adj.; small in quantity
or number.
sa ifi ta —ali" pi, it., adj., fr.
kauata and alipi; a small part
or portion; fractional.
ka  fit ta de, adj.; almost too
few.
ka fit ta di, adj.; very few; a
very small quantity.
ka fit  ta du i, v. i.; decreasing
in number or quantity.
ka fi sta ke, v. t.; to cause to
decrease in number or quanltity;
reduced in numbers.
lka wic ka, adj., same as kamic
kia
ka, and a more common pronun   ciation than the latter.
ka wic ki;u, n., same as kamic   kigu.
ka  za, a diminutive of limited
use applied to a b o u t twenty
words of the language.
kIt zi, same as kaza.
ke, v. t.; to give away, to present.
ke, v. t.; to scratch, as in reliev  ing an itchy sensation;  synol.
with kae, of which it may be a
contraction.
ke, a suffix to verbs, adjectives,
etc., or a v e r b auxiliary; to
make, to cause; to change con  dition; to use as. Where ke is
suffixed, ki is commonly prefixed.
In the sense of " to use as", it is
added to nouns; and the words
thus formed  m ay be used as
nouns; as, makadistake, a doll,
from makadiata, a child; midu  liake, a pop-gun, from midulia, a
gun.
ki, v. t.; to bear on the back; to
carry a heavy load.
ki, an intensifying prefix to verbs
denoting that the action is done
forcibly, completely, frequently,
under circumstances ofdifficulty,
etc.  ki often merely strength  ens without altering the mean  ing-the intensified word requir  ing no separate definition; but
in other cases it totally changes
the significance.
ki, an interjection, u s e d when
something  false or absurd  is
heard.
ki a a  ti, v. t., fr. aati; to hit
severely with a missile.
ki a da  du i, v. i.,fr. adadui;
becoming rapidly and  exceed  ingly painful.
164 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
ki, i
ki a  da  lia, v. i., fr. adalia; to
be burned up, consumed by fire.
ki a da lia ke, v. t.; to cause to
b    e consumed by fir    e;        to burn up,
to reduce to ashes.
ki  a  da lii pe, v. t., fr. adaita  pe; to kick severely.
ki a da li6 lie, v. t.,fr. adalielie;
to hold securely.
ki a da  lik  Pe, v. t.,fr. adaieae;
to t       ear to pieces with t he f oot.
ki  a dt si nii, intensive forw  of
adaliolii.
ki a da lipi k-e, synon. with
adal.ipike.
ki a da kliI e, v. t., fr. adaliu;                     to
overthrow completely,                       or by
kicking violently.
ki a da ki pe, v. t., fr. adaka. pe;
to scratch  vig     orous ly with the
paws; said w h e n an animal
tears up the               ground by scratch  ing,
ki a da 1i   de,  q.    t., ft. dakide;
to plush coipletely way  with
the foo;.
Iki a  da  ki ti, v. i., fr. adakiti;
said of a wide  str                      etch of coun  try, that has been thoroughly
cleared by fire.
ki a da mi di,  v. t., iaatensive of
adamidi.
ki a  da  pa  pi du  i, v. i.,fr.
adapal)i; becomling rapidly          and
extensively scorched.
ki a da pak pi, intensive of adla  papi.
ki a dh pa4 pi ke, v. t.; to cause
to be extensively scorched or
chapped.
ki  2 da  pe, v. t.,fr. adape; to
kick angrily or repeateclly.
Iki a da ~(! ki, v. t.,'J?. adasukii;
to complet-ely erase with the
foot.
kil
ki a dh to4 pi, v. t., fr. adatapi;
to squeeze severely under foot.
ki a da te, v. i., intensivre form of
adate.
ki a da t6 he, v. t.,fr. adatehe;
to kill a number by trampling,
to kill a brood of young  birds
by  accidentally  stepping  on
them, to trample a number of
insects to death.
ki a da t6' ti, v. t., fr. adat6'ti;
to shake vigorously or entirely
with the foot.
ki a da tsi. ki, v. t., ftr. adatsa.
ki; to divide a thick body rap  idly by fire.
oki a da  tska pi, v. i., intensive
forme of adatskapi.
ki a da tsku a du i, vr. i.,fr.
adlatskuadui;  becoming  wet
throughout.
ki a  da  tsku i,  v. i., f  r.  ada  tskui; entirely wet, etc.
ki a  da  tsku i  ke, v. t.; to
moisten thoroughly or rapidly.
ki a  deti,.fr. ade; to  pain ex  ceedinglv.
ki a d6 a  du i, v. i.; becoming
very sultry.
ki a d6 he, v. t.; to be very an  gry;  to become suddenly very
angry.
kii a d, kIe, v. t.; to make ex  ceedingly painful, etc.
ki a de tsi, adj.; to be possessed
of admirable qualities, to be
brave, skilful, intelligent, inge   nious, enduring, etc.; to be
skilled in any particular art or
calling.
ki a de tsi ke, v. t.; to cause to
be brave, enduring, or skilful;
to instruct thoroughlly in an y
art.
ki h dia sa dsi tze, v. t.,fr. adi
165 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kin
aaadsike; to impoverish greatly,
to render destitute.
ki a di i t           du i, v. t.,fr. adiiti;
becoming ravenously hungry.
ki a di i ti, v., intensive of adiiti.
ki a di i {i ke, v. t.; to starve,
to deprive of food.
ki a dOu a dii i, v. i., fr. aduadui;
becoming entirely or excessively
bitter.
ki a du i, v. i., fr. adui; entirely
bitter.
ki Ai du i ke, v. t.; to render
completely or exceedingly bitter
or pungent.
ki a hfi  le, v. t., fr. ahuke; to
multiply  rapidly,  to  increase
largely and rapidly; to increase
every one of a -number of ob.
jects.
ki a li6 e, v. t.,fr. alioe; to con  ceal carefully or completely; to
conceal all.
ki a k.4 Bipi, v. t.,fr. akalipi; to
s t e p  completely over  a wide
space; to cross a chasm success  fully but with difficulty.
Iki a lkt ma he, v. t., intensive
form of akamahe.
ki a ka ma  he ke, v. t.; to di  vide completely into six equal
parts.
ki a kf ma ke, divided into six
equal parts. 
ki a  ka pe, v. t.,fr.   akape; to
court assiduously.
ki ak' de, v. t.,fr. akde; to               seize
and bear off; to carry to a dis  tance; to carry the entire of any  thing away.
ki ak/ hu, v. t.,fr. akhu; to bring
with difficulty,y or from a dis  tance; to bring all.
saidi ki ka he, v. t.w,fr. akikahe;
said when something is captured
kia
and brought from a distance; as
when a war-party brings home a
prize in haste and danger, but in
triumph.
ki a4  ki tsa, v. t., fr. akitsa; to
miss widely; to miss at every
trial.
ki i ak' si e, v. t.,fr. alksie; to
hold firmly.
ki ak' su e, v. t.,fr. aksue; to
spit on repeatedly.
ki ak' tsi se, v. t.,fr. aktsis&; to
look  1 o n g  or  scrultinizingly
through a door or window.
ki a ma  h6 ka, v. i.,fr. amaho  ka; to be far within; deep un   der ground.
ki a  ina  h6 ka  ke, v. t.; to
place far within; to put all in.
ki ama ki, v. i.; to remain sit   ting long or steadily.
ki a ma  Lii ke, v. t., fr. ama   kike.
ki a   nlita  tsa ki, v. i., intensive
form of am atsaki.
ki a nma  tsa ki ke, v. t.; to
soil entirely with earth; to soil
all of a number of objects with
earth.
ki ai pai di, v. i.,fr. a,padi; to
grow vigorously.
ki a pa di ke., v. t.; to cause to
grow vigorously; to cause all to
grow.
kLi a  pi ke, v. t.,fr. apike; to
place together closely or contin  uously.
ki. tfi di, v. i., fr. atadi; to go
out and remain out; said. too,
when a number of individuals go
out from a house.
wi i a t~1 di  Le, v. t.; to cause to
go out,          etc.
Iii a t.~ ki lee, v. t., ft. at.~kike,
to render completely white.
I
166 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kia
ki a tfi zi ko a, v. i., intentsive
of atazikoa.
Jki a t6, v. i., fr. ate; to come into
full view; to come suddenly into
full view.
ki a t6 he, v. t.; to present im  mediately to full view.
ki a te he ke, v. t.; to cause to
appear entirely; to exhibit all of
a number of objects.
ki a tska, intenseivef)rmn of atskS.
ki  a tska du  i, v. i., fr. atsk'  dui; becomingrapidly very fierce.
ki  A  tska  ke, v.t.; to persist  ently aggravate to fierceness.
ki da, n.; a husband.
ki da he, v. t.,fr. kida and he;
to marry; said of the woman, if
the  marriage   is  informal  or
against parental consent.
ki  da  h6,  v., same as kiduhe,
which is more common.
ki da he kai' ti ke, v. t., inten  siveform of daheka'tike.
ki da lia pe 4i, v. i., fr. daliape  si; to rise perpendicularly to a
great height; to extend perpen  dicularly to a great length.
ki da lia pe si ke, v. t.; to
cause to be rprpendicular  to a
great height or length.
ki da lia pi, v. t., ft. daliapi; to
peel  entirely,  to strip  a tree
bare.
ki da lic;i, v. i.,fr. daliesi; torn 
to shreds with teeth.
ki da liC $i ke, v. t.; to cause to
be torn to shreds with teeth.
ki da lii;e, v. t., prob fr. ki and
adaliiie; to forget. —makidqlii  sets, I forget. dakidSaiigets, you
forget.  kidaliisets, it is forgot  ten.
ki da lii pi, v. i., iyntensive forrn
of daliipi.
kid'
ki da  lipa,v.  t.,fr. dalipa; to
embrace, to hug.
ki da lifi e, v. t.,fr. daliue; to
spill or overset completely  and
forcibly.
ki da liu pi, v. t., fr. daliupi; to
drink or absorb a large amount
completely and rapidly.
ki da k-a he, v. t.,fr. dakahe; to
stretch      completely  out.
Iki da kfi hi si, v. t., fr. dakahi.
Ai; to  carry  in the  a rms;  to hold
long in the arms.
ki dak a  li6  ii, v. t.,fr. daka  liolii; to break  completely across
with a blow; to  break  some  thing  large, or to break a num  ber of objects across with a
blow.
ki dak a ki  ti, v. t., ft. dakaki  ti; to scrape the hair entirely
away.
ki dak a  pni di, v. t., ft. daka.
midi; to   turn complete   ly  by
force; to twill tightly by sudden
force.
ki dik a      mi di ke, yv. t.; to
cause to turn completely by sud  den force.
ki dhk a ml  tsi, v. t., fr. daka  mitsi; to mince completely, to
chop fine all that is given to be
chopped.
ki daik a  pa ki, v.  i.,fr. daka  ) pa. ki;        l; tobloofull; toexpand
numerous blossoms.
ki da k.4 pe, v. t., intensivefornm
of dakape.
kIi da kti pi, v. t.; to pick out, to
cull, to separate; to pick grain
from chaff, stones from  coftee,
etc.
ki da lka pi'!ii, v.,fr. dakapilii;
to float well or continuously.
ki da ka pl lii ke, v. t.; to
167 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kid
ti; to impale securely or  fre  quently.
iki  dak  tsi, v. i.?fr.  daktsia;
to settle as water; also kidak  tsio.
pki dak tsi a dii i, v. i.; increas  ing rapidly and greatlyin weight.
ki dak  tsi a  ke, v. t., intensive
Jorm of daktsiake.
ki dak  tsi ke, v.,fr. daktsike;
to continue, remain, or follow one
another, in single file; said  of
the motion of t flock of wild  geese, or of a band of antelope
running after their leader.
ki dak tsfli ti, v. t., fr. d,ktsuti;
to braid completely.
ki dak ii di, v. t., fr. dckudi; to
fan; a form more commonly em   ployed than dakudi.
]ii dii uf dsi, v. t.,.fr. dakudsi;
to swing vigorously or continu  ously.
ki dak -i dsi ke, v. t.; to cause
to oscillate continuously.
ki dak  fi liti, i?tensive form of
clakulit,i.
ki dak u tliti lee, v. t.; to de  crease  greatly or  rapidly  in
weiglht.
ki da mni h6 ke [+ kinawi  heke], v. t.,fr. damiheke; to
(livi(le completely into  three
equal parts; divided equally in
three.
ki dai mi  ke, same as kidami   heke.
ki da mi tsi, v. t., intensiveformr
of damitsi.
ki da mo ki, v. i.; to ebb away,
to sink down to fall as a river.
ki    da mu ke [ki na wuke]e
v.,fr. damulke; to ('eepen great   l~y~ rapidly, or throughout.
ki d~t pe, v. t., fr. dape; ro de
kid
cause to float continuously; to
cause all to float.
ki da ka. ptsi, v. i.,fr. dak aptsi;
covered wi th ni                       cks or tallies.
ki da  ka  pti Ai, v. t.,.fr. daka  pusi; greatly inflated; perma  nently inflated.
ki daka  pfi si ke, v..;  to in  flate ex tensively or permanently.
ki dak' a ta, v. t., fr. daka ta;             to
smash completely; to sm ash and
resmash.
ki dak  a  tp!ii v. i., intens       ive
form                  of dakatalii.
ki  da-ka  ti, n.,fr.  kidla and
ka'ti; a first husbandl.
ki dak a t6' ti, v. t.,fr. dak a,  to'ti; to shake repeatedly or con  tinuously with  -fore suddenly
applied.
ki dhk a wi di, sam)te as kidS ka  midi.
ki dak a wi tsi, sane as kida  kamitsi.
ki da  ki ti, v. i., fr. dakiti and
nearly synonymous with it, but
more commonly used.
ki dak        k. ki, v. t., fr. d~k,.aki;
to wound repeatedly or severelv
by throwing missiles.
ki -dhk' 4i, v. t.; to bundle se  curtely or completely.
ki dhk  si pi, v. i., intensive form
of dAki-ipi.
ki dak.si pi ke, v. t.; to cause
to be much later.
ki dak tat de, v. t., fr. drktade;
to drive hard; to nail securely
or completely.
ki dhk tsai da Ike, v. t.; synon.
with daktsadake.
ki dhk tsa~ ki, v. t.,fr. d~kts~a  k;; to chop all up; to chop into
numerous pieces.
1i dak tsa li, v. t., fr. daktsa
168 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kid'
vours   btrg oe ma ki da'  ta ts6 ki ke, v. t.; to
with tetethandvor    r        ender very resolute; to inspire
all with resolution.
kofdapsuti.                L~ki da t1' ti, v.  t., fr.  dato'ti; to
~~Li'.t,fr a   oct     skake vigorously in the mouth;
to worry to death by shaki   ng in
the mouth.
L   ki da tsa, v. t., fr. datsa; to bite
severely or    repeatedly  ki da tsa ti, v. t.,fr. datsati, and
nearly or quite   synonymous.
ki da tsi pi, v. t.,fr.  datsipi; to
lick repeatedly and continuous     ly; to lick all over.
ki  da  tska pi, r. t., intensive
of datskapi.
ki da tska ti, v. t., fr. datskati;
to leak through a large orifice;
to leak rapidly or entirely away.
ki da ts6 pe, v., fr. datsope; to
kiss.-[-akidatsope, I kiss.  da     kidatsope, you kiss.  See ikida     tsope.
ki da tsu ki, v. t., intersive form
of datsuki.
k-i ('a w6 ki, sam)e as kidamoki.
ki (le, verbal root; push; trans     fix, impale.
ki d(6, v. i., 9fr. (le; to fly.
.  Ii d(, ak  de, v. t., comp. of kide
atd akde; tofly off with; to bear
off flying, as an eagle with its
prey.
ki  d6 e, v. i., same as kide; to fly.
ki d(6  a, v. i., intensiveformn of
clesa.
Li dfe  af dsi, v. t., fr. kidesi and
adsi; to like very much; to love,
but not dearly.
ki d(6 sa ke [kinesake], v. t.,
fr. desAake; to destroy, extermini     nate, banish, annul, abrogate;
to cure a disease completely, etc.
kLi d( si, v. t.; to love; said of
the affection existing between
kid
.our by te  aring, t                   ttear  mea t
with the teeth and devourit.
ki da pcfi ti, v. t., intencsie form
of daptktii.
Li dai;a, v. t., fr.  da ta;   to cut
extensively or    severelv with the
teeth.
Iki da ti pi, V. t.,fr. dasipi; to
untie completely with the          tee th.
ki dfa s~ku, v. t.,fr. dakua; to
take o[t with the teeth some  thing difficult to extract.
k-i dai.te, v. t.,fr. daate; to com  minute completely.
ki da' ta d,6;a, v. i.,fr. da'ta  dega; to be completely inconsid  erate, etc.
ki da' ta d;a $ke, v. t.; to
cause to be inconsiderate, etc.
L-i da' ta!i6 pi, v. i.,fr. da'ta  liepi; to be thoroughly lazy, or
always lazy.
ki da' ta li46 pi ke, v. t.;to
cause to be lazy.
ki da' ta i;i a, v. i.,.fr. d-,i?tai,ia; to b)e miserable or despond   ent; to be continually unhappy,
sorry or ill-tempered; said too of
a num ber of individluals who are
unhappy.
ki da'lta i*i fid tin, v. i.; be   COming very unhappy, ilisera   ble, etc.
ki da' ta i ~i a ke, v. t.; to
make constantly- unhappy, etc.
ki da t-.1 pi, v. t., iinte~si~vefo), 
of dat.ap)i.
ki d a' ta ts~a ki, v. i.,fr. dalta   tsaki; to be very happy; con   stantly happy.
ki da' ita ts~a ki ki, v. t.;- to
render very happy; to make all
ha~ppy.
form of da'tatsoki.
1691 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kid
ki du lift de, v. t.; to rake; to
clean thoroughly by raking.
ki du lil de, v. t., intensive form
of duliade.
ki du lie mi, v. i., to settle down,
as a river; to dry up; to become
shallow.
ki du  lic se, v. t.,fr. duliese; to
tear to pieces.
ki du lic wi, same as kiduliemi.
ki du li6!ii, v.,fr. duliolii; to
break, or to be broken complete  ly across.
ki du li6 hii ke, v. t.; to cause
to be completely broken.
ki du li6 ki, v. t.,fr. dulioki; to
comb out, to comb completely or
thoroughly.
ki dfi lipi, V. t.,fr. dulipi; to
take down  something  that is
hanging high.
ki du k.i pi, v. t., fr. dukapi; to
lacerate extensively or severely.
ki du ki ti, v. t., ii,tensive of du  kiti.
ki du kit  ti, v. t.; pluck out ex  tensively.
ki duma lii ta, v. i., fr. duma  liita; to ride or move repeatedly
and rapidly back and forth.
ki du mg lii ta-ti di e, v.; to
run or ride back and forth, as is
done when one man alone makes
a war-signal.
ki diu  mi   [+-wi], v. t.; to
count.
ki du mi di, v. t., fr. dumidi; to
twill thoroughly.
ki du mni lia [-wilia], intensive
form of dumilia.
ki du sa, v. t.,fr. dusa; to place
in security, to store or put away
with  care.
Iki du si pi, v. t.,fr. dusipi; to
open widely or completely.
kid
parent and child, husband and
wife.
ki de ta, v. t.; to fancy, to ad  mire.
ki de ta dsi, v. t., to admire, but
not greatly.
ki di, v. t.,?fr. di; to search for
any person or thing, to go for
game, to pursue, to seek.  kiki  di is more commonly used.
1ki di e, v.; to mount a horse; to
ride on horseback.
ki di 6, v. i.; to be greatly terri  fied.
ki di ki, v. t., fr. diki; to strike
repeatedly.
]ki di Ai, v. i., fr. disi; to dance.
ki do pa he ke, v. t., fr. dopa  heke; to divide completely into
two equal parts; divided equally
in two.
ki d6 pa ke, v. t., synon. kido  paheke.
ki du c tsa pike, v. t., fr. due  tsapike; to divide into nine equal
parts.
ki du hai, imperative of kiduhe;
arise; said if the person is re  cumbent, not sitting. See duha
and duhe.
ki du ha ku te, a., adv.,fr. ki  duha; early mornidg, time to
rise.
:ki du ha ku te du, adv., fr. ki  duihakute; during  the early
morning.
ki du  he, v. t.; to arise from a
recumbent posture; to lift out of.
ki dil hi, v. i.; arisen; standing.
ki du  hi ke, v. t.; to cause or
assist to arise from a recumbent
posture.
ki du lia, v. t.; to spread out on
the        ground; to spread to dry;
to spread bedding.
170 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kih
to  wash  thoroughly, to wash
clean; to wash  all that is given
to be washed.
ki du tski ti, v. t., intensive form
of dutskiti.
ki du  tsku pi, v. t.,fr. dutsku  pi; to bend in several places; to
fold repeatedly.
ki du  tsufi  ki, v. t.,fr. dutsuki;
to knead the abdomen long and
vigorously.
ki  du  wa  Iii ta, v. i., same as
kidumaliita.
ki du wi di, v. t., same as kidu  midi.
!ii e, v. t.; to fear.
L-i ha h46 ta, v. t., intensive of ha.
heta.
Ibi ha  lipi, v. i.,fr. halipi; to
sneeze repeatedly.
ki hai lipi Le, v. t.; to cause to
sneeze hard or repeatedly.
dIi ha  ka' ti ke, v. t.,fr. haka'  tike; to completely and sudden  lyv, arrest progress.
ki hfi  ka  tsi, v. t.,fr. hakatsi;
to butcher completelv, to cut up
all the meat killed.
ki  ha  pla  ke, v. t.,fr. hapake;
to render very cold, or cold
throughout; chilled, frozen.
ki ha' p4 sa  du i, v. i., intensive
form of hlalpesadui.
ki ha' pc 4e, v. i.,fr. ha'pese;
cornpletely dark.
thLi ha' pi 4e Le, v. t.; to com  lyletely exclude lig ht.
Iki ha  -s  4i, v. i.,fr. haaisi; to
smart severely.
ki ha;i;i lke, v. t.; to cause to
smart extensively or severely.
ki ha tsi te, v. t., intensive formn
of hatsite.
kii ha tskai du i, v. i. fr. hatska  duli  increasing rapidly in length.
kid
ki dfiu ske, v. t.,fr. duske; to
open a door or lidl widely.
ki du sfi ki, v. t.,fr. duiaki; to
wash entirely or thoroughly by
rubbing.
ki du tii, v.,fr. duta; to burst
violently, to fly to pieces.
ki du  ta pi, v. t., fr. duta.pi; to
squeeze long and hard.
Iki du t.4 ti, v. t., intensive of
dutati.
ki dfi ti, v. t., ft. duti; to eat tip;
to devour, to eat all; said also if
you speak of eating an animal
still living, conveying the i(lea
that you will both kill and eat.
ki du t6' ti, v. t.,fr. duto'ti; to
cover by sprinkling; to exhaust
by dre(l,ging or sprinkling.
ki du tsaf da, v.,fr. dutsada; to
slide far  or rapidly.
ki du tsa ki, v. t.,fr. dutsaki; to
dissever completely and repeat  edly.
ki du tsat ti,fr. dutsati; to im  pale securely.
ki di tse, v. t.,fr. dutse; to take
off under difficulties; to take
and hold securely.
ki du tsi pi, v. t.,fr. dutsipi; to
completely  untie anything se  cured by hard and numerous
knots.
ki du tsi $i, v. t.,fr. dutsisi; to
sprink back, to regain suddenly
and completely the original posi  tion when released from a bend  ing pressure.
Ii du tsi ti, v. t., fr. dutsiti; to
raze to the ground, to completely
destroy a building.
ki du  tska. pi, v. t., Jr. dutsk.a  pi; to pinch severely or repeat  e                             dly.
lri Adu tsk~ ~i, v. t., Jr. dultskiisi;,
171. 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kih
ki hai tski ke, v. t.; to lengthen
rapidly and greatly;  greatly
lengthened.
ki hi ke, v.,fr. hike; entirely
drunk up.
ki hi sa dsi, v. i., fr. hisadsi2 to
be completely reddish.
ki hi  ai dsi ke, v. t.; to dye
throughout of a dull red color.
ki hi si ke, v. t., fr. disike; to
dye red; to dve the entire of
anything red.
ki hi Ai sa  du i, v. t., intensive
of hisisadui.
ki hi's Ai ke, v. t.; to cause to
assume a reddish hue rapidly or
throughout.
ki hi ta du i, v. i., fr. hitadui;
rapidly increasing in speed.
ki hi ta ke, v. t.,fr. hita,ke; to
accelerate motion greatly; to in  crease the speed of a number of
objects.
ki ho' paf du i, v. i., intensive
forn of ho'padui; more common  ly used than the simple form).
ki ho pa 4e, v. t., fr. hopase; to
horrify; to horrify all.
ki h6' pi ke, v. t.,fr. holpike;
to riddle. to perforate in many
places.
ki hfl, v. t., copl). of ki and hu;
to come with a load; to come
bearing on the back.
Li hfi a, v. i.,fr. hua; to cough
repeatedly or severely.
ki hi  a ke, v. t.; to cause to
cough repeatedly.
ki lia, n.; the paunch, the stom.
ach or stomachs of an animal.
ki lia a du pi da lipa, n.,fr.
kili%s adu, and pidalipa; the ru  men or first stomach of a rumi  nant.
ki!iai da lii ke, v. t., ft. ]iada
kili
liike; to starve completely, to
make very lean; to make a num  ber lean.
ki lia ida   i  ksa   ke, v. t., i n  teonsivefor; i of hedaliikgake.
ki lia lia du i, v. i., fr. liaiadui;
becoming completely rough.
ki hlii  i    pi, v.  i. fr. lialii; to been  tiretlv or complete ly striped.
ki  lia  ii ke, v. t.; to cover with
parallel b a n d s; completely
striped.
ki lia lip  a ke, v. t., intensive of
lialiuake.
ki lia k-; du i, v. t.; used the
same as liakadui, but more com  moDly; said of a healing sore,
etc.
ki lii ka  h6 ta, v. i., intensive
form of liakaheta.
ki lift ka fee, v. t.,fr. liaka  ke; to render  a large surface
itchy.
ki lia kfi pa du i, v. i.; becom  ing extensively furrowed.
k-i lia i/f! pi, v. i.,fr. liakupi;
extensively furrowed, furrowed
over the entire surfate.
ki lia kfi pi khe, v. t.; to mark
the entire surface with furrows;
completely furrowed.
ki liat  ma dsi ke, v. t.,fr. ha  madsi; to cause to appear much
branched; to depict as very
branching.
k-i lia mni ke, v. t.,.fr. liamike;
to make entirely diverging or
scattering.
ki lift pa dui, v. i.,fr. liapadui;
wearing thin throughout, or in
numerous places.
lki lio p$& ti, v. i., intensive of li~a.
lki lia p.A ii he, v. i.; to eat to
complete satiety.
172: 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kili
ki hia  p4; ti ksa, v. i.; synon
with liapatikaa.
ki lia pa  ti ksa ke, v. t.; ta
gorge, to glut; to feed a number
of persons to excess.
ki li.4 pi he, v. t., fr. liapihe; to
lose hopelessly; to lose all.
ki hi pi ke, v. t., Jr. liapike; ta
scrape or wear thin throughout.
ki lia' pi  ke, v. t.; hopelessly
lost; all lost.
ki lial pi ksa. See liapikaa.
ki lii. pi ksa, synon. with liapi  ksa.
ki iiai pi kna ke, v. t.; to scrape
wear, or rub to thinness the en
tire of a skin or other such arti  cle.
ki lih  ta t a ki, fr. liatataki, and
nearly or quite synonymous.
ki lii ta ta  ki  ke, intensive
forem of liatatakike.
ki liat tsa, n., ft. kilia and itsa,
lit., They Refused the Paunch; the
Crow Indians. Lewis and Clarke
.spell this " kee-heet-sas" on their
map, and speak of a portion of
the Crows as "' Paunch Indians 77.
(See Lewis and Clarke, p. 96).
For the origin of this name see
a preceding page of this work.
Iki lia twi ke, same as kiliamike.
!ii li6 mi mke, v. t., intensive ot
liemike, but  m o r e COmmonIly
used.
kLi lih   mi Lka ke, v. t., fr. lie.
mikaa; to cause to be constantly
very lonesome or melancholy; to
make a number lonesome.
ki li(6 pi, v. i.,fr. liepi; entirely
shallow.
tki!i pir e, v. t.; to leake en  tirely shallow, to leave no deep
Li li( wi ke, same as kiliemike.
ki lii di a du i, v. i.,fr. hiidia;
becoming rapidly or extensively
itchy or sensitive.
ki lii di a ke, v. t.; to cause to
be entirely or extensively sensi   tive or itchy.
ki lii di.; kla, v. i.; denoting
itching, constant or excessive,
over the entire surface or afflict   ing a number.
ki  lii di  ai kLa  kc, v.  t.; to
-    cause  constant  extensive itch   ing, etc.
ki lii C ke, v. t., intensive of lii   eke.
ki lii pi, v. i., fr. liipi; entirely
wrinkled.
Li lii pi  ke, v. t.; to make en   tirely wrinkled.
ki  io6 ka  di  ti, intensive (and
com mon ) form of liokaditi.
I   ki lio pa.  e, v. t.,fr. liopfie; to
occasion general terror.
ki  Ho pa  $i ke, v. t.; to cause
general or continued alarm.
ki  lio ta kai dsi ke, v. t.,fr.
iliotakadsi; to change to a whit   ish color.
kLi lio ta kat du i, v. i.,fr. ilio   takadti; whitening throughout.
ki lio ta  ki ke, v. t., fr. iliota   kike; to bleach  uniformly
throughout;  to paint entirely
white; w)hitened, bleached.
ki lin,i htumi. adj.; five.
l i lifi a he, v. t.; to make five;
made into five.
ki lih   a  he  ke, v. t.; to divide
into five parts; divided into five
parts.
ki Ltif a kce  v. t., synon. with ki  rLiuahtaeke.
ki ic ti a~ v. i.fr. ictia (intensive
form)l.
part; dried or drained to shallowness.
173
kii 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kii
ki i li6 a de ke, v. t.; to make
sick; sickened.
ki i ko  ki, v. t.,fr. ikoki; to
hang up high or securely.
ki i kfi  pa, v. t.,fr. ikupa; to
accompany closely or continu  ally.
ki i lii' pa, v. t., intensivefo)rm
of lkil'pa.
ki i kni'  pa  dsi, v., intensive
of ikfi'padsi.
ki i ku'  paE dsi ke, v. t.; to
cause to dislike.
ki i ku' pa ke, v. t.; to cause
to hate.
ki i mna  lipi, v. i., fr. imalipi;
set completely.
ki  i nli a, v. i., fr. imia; to cry
long or frequently; to mourn by
cr,ving.
ki  i mi a ke, v. t.; to cause to
,cry long, etc.
ki I psa  ki, v. t., fr. ipsaki; to
conceal or screen completely.
ki i si a, v. i., intensiveform of
i.ia.
ki i si  i du i, v. i.; deteriorat  ing greatly.
ki i si a du i ke, v. t.; to cause
a  rapid progressive  deteriora  tion.
ki i 4i a ke, v. t.; to'make bad,
to change from good to bad;
greatly damaged; all damaged.
ki i t6 di  ke, intensive of ito  dike.
ki i t6 pa du ke, ~ v. t.; to place
ki i t6 pa ke,         fourth;  to
cause to be fourth. See itopake.
ki i tsi i ke, v. t., fr. itsiike; to
strengthen comnpletely.
ki i tsi k;a ke, v. t.,fr. itsika; to
cause to be first; placed first.
ki i tsi tsi, v. i.7 intensive of itsi  tsi; gleaming continuously.
ki ic ti A du i, v. i.; increasing
rapidly or greatly.
k-i ic ti a ke, v. t.; to cause to
be enlarged greatly or through  out; to increase several objects.
ki i da4  mi ke [-nawi-], v. t.,
fr. idamike, and of similar mean  ing.
ki  i di a lii, v. i.,fr. idialii; to
sigh repeatedly.
ki  i di pat du i, v. i.,fr. idipa  dui, and used synonymously.
ki i di pi, v. i., intensive form of
idipi.
ki  i di pi ke, v. t.,fr. idipike;
to fatten rapidly; to fatten a
number.
ki i di pi kIa  ke,  v. t.; to make
constantly fat. -
ki i di tsi i;i a ke, v. t. See
iditsiiaiake.
ki i di tsi ke, v. t., intensive of
iditsike; nearly or quite similar
in meaning to the simple form.
ki i di tsi tsa ki ke, v. t. See
iditsitsakike.
ki i d6 pa du  ke, v. t.,fr. ido  paduke; to change to the second
order or position, to change from
some other position and place
second.
ki i d6 pake, v. t.; to make sec  ond; to change to second.
ki  i ha  ke, v. t.,fr. ihake; to
make entirely different, to change
all attributes.
ki i lia tsa ki, v. i.,fr. iliatsaki;
stained extensively with dirt.
ki i lia tsa ki ke, v. t.; to stain
completely or extensively with
dirt.
ki i li6 a de, v. i., fr. ilioade; to
be severely sick; said, too, of a
number                               -tsfeering from an epi  demic.
174
kii 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kik
ki ka ki liat du i, v. i.,fr. kaki  lii; assuming a circular form.
ki ka  ki lii ke, v. t.; to cause
to be entirely or permanently
circular.
ki ka  ta ki, v. t.; to turn corn
lletely inside out.
ki ka t he, v. t., intensive of ka   tihe.
ki ka  ti ke, v. i., fr. katike; to
pour all from one vessel to an  other, to empty one vessel into
,another or others.
ki k.4 tsi, v. i.,fr. katsi; com  pletely cooled;  said, too, of a
number of objects which have
been cooled or extinguished.
ki ki tsi kLe, v. t.;        to cool com.
pletely; to cool a number.
ki ka tsfit ka,  v.  i., intensive oj
katsuka.
ki ka  tsfi tka ke, v. t.; to cause
to be swelled and   h  ardened.
ki ka  iu  ta du  i, v. i.,fr. kau  stadui;         decr eas ing gr eatly and
rapidly in  number or quantity.
ki ka u;ta ke, nearly synony  mous with kauatake, but more
commonly used.
ki kV, v. t.; to resemble.
ki k4, v. t.,fr. ke; to scratch
back and forth; to scratch re  peatedly or severely.
ki ki di, v. t., fr. kidi; to hunt,
to seek and pursue.
ki ki lif a he ke, v. t.,fr. ki  liuaheke; to divide completely
into five equal parts; divided
into five.
ki ki lifu a ke, v. t.; to cause to
be divided into five parts; di  vided by five.
Iki kl sli, v. t.; to determine
quantity or quality in any way;
to taste, measure, or gauge with
kii
ki i tsi tsi ke, v. t.; to cause to
gleam.
ki i tski ke, v. t., fr. itski; to
make large enough.
ki i tufi di, v. i.,fr. itudi; suppu  rating extensively; said of large
or numerous abscesses.
ki i tfi di ke,. t.; to cause ex  tensive suppuration.
ki ka da  mi, v. t.,fr. kadami;
to remembe                       r after having long
forgotten;                          to remember  com  pletely.
ki ka  da tsi ke, v. t., fr. kad.a  tsi;       to ca us e       to be willing.
ki ka de, v. t.,        intens ive of kade;
to vomit all up.
ki ka  d L ke,   v. t.;  to cause    to
vomit.
ki ka  di,  v.  t., fr.  kadi;  t o b eg
repeatedly,           to impo    rtune; to beg
all away.
ki  ka   di ata, v..,            intensive o f
kadiata.
ki Lka di  itei du  iL v. i.; dwin  dling rapidly.
ki ka di;ta ke, v. t.; synon.
with kadistake, and more com  monly used.
ki ka d' tska, v. i., fr. kaditska;
to glisten continuously or over
an  extensive surface.
k-i ka di tska ke, v. t.; to cause
to glisten; made to glisten.
ki ka di tska pa, v. i.,fr. kadi  tskapa; to adhere firmly over a
large surface.
ki ka di tska pa  ke, v. t.; to
cause to adhere, etc.
ki kfi dse, intensive of kadse.
ki ka ki' k-i, v. i.,fr. kakelki;
to male a continuous rattling
noise.
ki kai ki, v. t.; to sew; to join
by sewing.
175 
1IDATSA DICTIONARY.
kik
a view to determining quality or
quantity; to sound a person's
tfeelings or opinions.
Li  k6  mi  [wi], synon. with
komi.
Li k6 mi  he, i. t., fr. komihe;
to complete or finish perfectly;
to finish all.
ki k6 mil ke, v. t.; to cause to
be concluded, terminated, or ex  hansted; concluded, finished, etc.
ki k6 wi he, same as kikomihe.
ki k6 wi ke, same as kikomike.
kLi ka, imperative of kikse.
ki kLe, v. t.; to arrange; to re  pair, to mend, to "fix ".
Li ki, v. t., fr. ku; to give back,
to restore.
ki kfi a, v. t.; to listen; to hear;
to pay attention to.
kii ku hia, v. t.; tfo send for a per  son, to invite.
ki ma  a zi, v. i.,fr. maazi; to
be full to overflowing; to be all
full-if a number of vessels are
referred to.
ki ma  a  zi le, v. t.; to cause
to be filled.
ki mni di he, v. t., fr. madihe;
to cook all the food on hand; to
complete the cooking.
ki ma du li pa ke, v. t.,fr. ma  dul.iapake; to set beastly drunk;
to set all drunk.
Lki ma diu lita du  i, v. i.,fr.
madutitadui; becoming  very
foolish.
ki ma  du  lita ke, v. t.; to
make quite foolish.
ki mak' i a, v. t., fr. makia; to
fight; to battle.
Li miak i ma La da ha ti di
e", v. i.; synonymous with mak  imakadahatidie, but more com  monly used.
ki6
ki mak  4e  ai du i, v. i., used
in nearly or quite the same sense
as makseaadui.
ki mnak  6e se ke, v. t.,fr. mak  seseke; to cause two things to
resemble each other in every re  spect; to cause several things to
resemble one another.
ki m    kali s  a  ka, v. i.,fr. mak  bsi,,ka; to be of the same size in
all dimensions.
ki rnak ti a  ka  kee,  v. t.; to
cause two  or more things to be
of the same  size in  all t heir di  mensions.
ki mat hu ke, v. t., intensive of
makuke, and more commonly
used.
ki m6  [-we], v. t.; to tell, to re  late;   to d   isclose a secret.
ki ini. ti ke, v. t.; synony  mous with miatike.
hi mi de di, v. t.,.fr. midedi; to
come in and sit down; to pay a
long visit; to visit frequently.
ki mi  i     i   ke, v. t.,  fr. midike; to
liquefy co mpletely.
ki mi dfi e, v. i.,fr. midue; to
boil vigorously.
ki mi df e ke, v. t., synony  mous with mlidueke.
kIi 6 da pi, v. t.,fr. odapi; to
find o,lI, to make a complete dis  covery.
hi 6 hi, v. t., intensive of ohi.
ki 6 hi ke, v. t.; to cause to be
attached, to treat with kindness
and foster attachment.
kIi 6 lia ta du i, v. i., fr. oliata   dui; becoming white through   out.
ki 6 lia ti, v. i., fi'. oliati; to be
entirely white or pale.
ki 6 lia {ikle, v. t.;to render
entirely pale.
176 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
ki6
ki 6  ka  ta, v. t.,fr. okata; to
l)ut all on, to dress completely.
kt  6  ki, v. t., fr. oki; to hold
firmly; to hold all.
ki 6 ti, V. t.,fr. oti; to be cookedL
or ripened throughout; all rip   ened.
ki 6 ti lie, V. t.  to cause to be
entirely ripened.
ki 6 tsli.a mli [-wvi], v. i., inten   si;ve of otsliami.
li 6 ze9 v. t.,fr. oze; to plant all
the seed or all of a field, to finish
planting.
ki pa, v. t., fr. pa; to powder or
grind completely.
kIii pa d6 pa du i, v. i., fr. pado   padui; becoming rapidly low in
stature.
ki pa d6 pi ke, v. t.; to shorten
ini stature.
ki pa  du i ke, v. t.,fr. padui   ke; to diminish in length; short  ened.
ki pa  hi, v. i., fr. pahi; to sing
loudly or continuously; to sing
a song.
ki pa ha du i, v. i.,fr. paliadui;
becoming extensively chafed.
ki pa litu e, v. t.; to scratch or
rub w i t h t h e finger-tips or
knuckles; to rub the hair loose
with the fingers; to rub the eyes
in sleepiness.
ki pa;i ia  e, v. t.,fr. paliue; to
spill all out, to empty.
ki pa ka de, v. t.,fr. p.kade; to
stick in numerous places.
ki pa ka; pi, v. i., fr. pakapi; to
be torn extensively or severely.
iki pa  ki di, v. t., fr. pakidi; to
push hard; to shove comp~letel y
away.
ki p.~ li i, v. t.,fr. p.ki2i; to
rub back and forth as in scour      12
kip
ing, or  as in drying  wilh  a to wel;
to dry by rubb)ing.
ki pa mi tsi [-wi-], v. t.,fi'.
pamitsi; to cut all up finely.
kIi pa mnfi dsi [-wu-], v. t., fr.
pamudsi; to roll up completely,
to make au entire piece into a
roll.
ki pa  at ki, v. t., fr. pasaki; to
engirdle completely; to put on
a belt outside of the robe and
all the clothing.
hki pa Skil, v. t.,fr. pasku; to
shove completely through.'
ki pa t. ki, iv. t., fr. pataki; to
shut as a door or a box- lid, to
close up as a book. etc.-mide ki   patd.k, shut the door.
ki pa t6, v. t.,~fr. pate; to turn
completely over.
ki pa  ti, v. i.,fr. pati; to fall
from a great height.
ki pa. ti he, v. t.; to throw down
from a great height.
ki pa ti ke, v. t.; to cause to fall
firom a great height; to shoot a
biid sitting in a tree-top and,
thereby, cause it to fall to the
ground.
Iki pa t6' ti, v. t.,fr. patolti;
to shake  repeatedly or vigor  ously.
ki pa  tsa ti, v. t.,fr. patsati;
to puncture repeatedly.
pIi pa tsk-i pi, v. t.,fr. patsku  pi; to fold several times; to fold
into a small bundle.
ki pa tskfi pi ke, v. t.; to cause
to fold up.
ki p6, v. t., fr. pe; to swallow all,
to devour completely.
ki pe, v. t.,fr. pe; to triturate
finely; same as kipa.
ki  pliu ti, v. t.~ fr. pliuti; to
squeeze completely out; to pro
I
177 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kip
trude by squeezing or pressing;
to eject metallic cartridges.
ki pi, v. t.,fr. pi; to deck or tat  too the body extensively.
ki pi di e ke, v. t.,fr. pidie; to
flute or ruffle, to ornamaient with
ruffles.
ki pk' di, v. t., intensive of pa kidi.
ki pki ti, v. t., fr. pkiti; to iron
clothes; to smooth completely
out.
ki p6 a du i, v. t.,fr. poadui; to
make completely globular.
ki  p6  pi, v. i.; worn out, as old
clothing.
ki  pSUi  li, v. i., fr. psuki; to
belch;  to b e l c h  repeatedly;
much less used than the simple
form.
ki psiu ti, v. t., fr. psuti; to dis  locate, to put out of joint.
ki ptsu ti, v. t.,fr. ptsuti;  to
thrust forward.-deai [nesi] ki  ptsuti, to stick out the tongue.
ki pu  a  du  i, v. i., fr. puadui;
becoming rapidly or extensively
swollen.
ki pui  a Lke, v. t., fr. puake; to
cause to be greatly or extensively
swollen.
ki  pu  dsi, v. t.,fr. pudsi;  to
mark, sew or wrap extensively
or completely.
ki pu- dsi Lke, v. t.; to cause to
be finely marked or wrapped.
ki pfiu lii, v. i., intensive of pulii; 
to foam.
ki pu  lii ke, v. t.; to cause to
f o a m greatly; to cover with
foam.
ki pu  zi ke, v. t., fr. puzike; to
cover wvith spots or figures.
Li sa pu a he ke, v. t.,fr. sapu  aheke; to                divide into seven equal
parts.
ki s;  pu a Lie, divided into seven
parts.
Li;a;fi li ke, v. t.; to cause
to be compl)letely  dull; dulled
throug,hout.
hLi;i di  ke, v. t.,fr. sidike; to
render tawny; to smoke a skin
until it assumes a tawny hue.
ki.si di;i, v. i., intensive of Aidisi.
ki;i di si ke, v. t.; to cause to
hasten.
ki si ki a ke, v. t.,fr. sikia,; to
cause to curl or tangle; tangled.
ki 1i ki he, v. t., intensive olf si  kihe.
ki si pi sa dsi ke, v. t.; to d(ae
blackish.
ki Si pi rai du i, v. i.; darken.
ing throughout.
ki si pi sa ke, v. t.,fr. sipiake;
to dye black uniformly   through.
olt.
ki ski, v. t.; synornymous with
kikieki, bat rarely u     sed.
kti s6 ki  ke,  v. t.,fr. A  oki; to
widen, to make broad or blunt.
fi   i  ta  du  i, v. i.,fr. tua; de  creasing in speed.
ki cI a  ke, v. t.; to ca use  to b e
slow, to  change from a rapid to a
slow motion.
ki tat, intensive of ta; killed.
Li tai di, v. t.,fr. tadi; to cross
complete]y, as w h e n a large
party with all its effects crosses
a stream.
ki ta h,, v. t., fr. tahe; to mur. der, to slaughter.
ki ta mu e, v. t., fr. tamue; to
ring long and loudly.
ki ta m6i hi  ke, v. t.,fr. tamu  lii; to cause to be minute, to
change from coarse to fine.
ki t,a tsai du i, v. i.,fr. t~atsa  dui; thickiening throughout.
1 78
kit 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kit
ki tA' tsi ke, v. t.; to make tlhick
in every part; to thicken all.
ki t6, v. i.,fr. te; to be all dead;
said if a number of individuals
are referred to.
ki te, verbal root; clear off, make
smooth (shave, pluck, etc.).
ki ti, verbal root; same as kite.
ki ti di e, v.  i.,fr. tidie; to run
far or long; to run away.
ki ti di e ke, v. t.; to cause to
run far.
ki ti pi a tsa ki, v. i.,fr. tipia  tsQaki; cotnipletely soiled with
mu(ld.
ki ti pi a tsa ki ke, v. t.; to
soil completely with mud.
ki ti;a  ke, v. t., fr. tisa; to 
cause to be distant, to remove
far away.
ki ti tsh du i, v. i.,ft. titsadui;
tlhickening rapidly or along the
entire length.
ki ti tsi ke, v. i., fr. titsike; to
thicken throughout.'
ki to ha  dsa du i, v. i., fr. to  haclsadui;  becoming  bluish
throughout.
ki to ha  dsi ke, v. t., fr. toha  dsike; to dye or color bluish
throughout.
ki to ha  du  i, v. i.; assuming
a pure -)lue color throughout.
ki t6 hi ke, v. t.,fr. tohike; to
(lye or color all a pure blue.
ki t6 ki;i ke, v. t., intensive of
tolhiikei
ki t6 pa he, v. t., fr. topahe; to
divide iixto four completely.
ki to pa h( ke, v. t.,fr. topahe  kle;  to divide completely into
four equal parts; dividled into
four equal parts.
ki t6 pa ke, v. t.; synonymous
with kitopaheke.
ki  ts-i da  lie, v. t., intetsire of
tsadake.
ki tsa dai tsa ki lie, v. t.,fr.
tsadatsakike;  to soil all over
with grease.
ki tsa  kai dsi lie, v. t.,fr. tsa kadsi; to improve  all moder  ately.
ki tsa ki ke, v. t.,.fr. tslakike;
to completely cure, improve, or
mend;. mended, restored, per.
fected.
ki tsa m6  a  te, v. i., fr. tsame  tite; to perspire freely, or from
the  whole  surface.
ki tsa mG he, v. t.,fr. tsamehe;
to heat thoroughly.
ki tsa m(6 le, heated through  out; changerd  fom very cold  to
very hot.
ki tsa mu tsa du i, v. i.;
straightening along the entire
length.
ki tsa mt   tsi ke, v. t., fr. tsa  mutsike; to  straighten   com  pletely.
eLi tsia ti  ke, v. t., fr. tsati; to
rende r  smooth  and glossy; to
oil l s,  polish, o r varnish.
ki tsa tsu lki Ire, v. t.,.fr. tsa  tsukike; to render completely
hard by drying, baking, or oth  erwise.
ki tsi dat dsi ke, v. t., fr. tsida.
dsi; to dye of a color allied to
yellow.
ki tsi dai du i, v. i.; becoming
yellow throughout.
ki tsi di e ke, v. t.,fr. tsidie; to
cause to be cold; reduced in tem  perature.
kIi tsi di  ke, v. t.,fr. tsidike;
dlyed all yellow.
ki tsi ks6 a, v. i., fr. tsikoa; thor.
oughly7 sweet.
179
li. it 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
kfia
k6 e, v. i.; to leave, depart, go
from.-mak6emits, I will leave  a common equivalent for good  bye.
!k6 ha ti, n.; corn, maize.
k6 ha ti a, n.; a corn-stalk, the
stalk or the entire plant.
k6 ha ti i 4i, n.,fr. kohati and
iis; a bag  for containing corn.
Caches are sometimes called ko  hatiisi.
k6  ha  ti pi,  n.; coarse corn  meal, such as is m a d e in a
wooden mortar.
ik 6 ha ti ta pa, n.  (tapa, soft);
flour.
ko  ka, v. t.; to cease to act, to
stop, to discontinue; commonly
used imperatively.-kok.ts, it is
done.
k6 mi, v. i.; to be finished, ex  hausted, expended, or completed.
It   mli he, v. t.; to finish, to ex  haust, to complete.
-6  wi, a common pronunciation
of koiii.
ko wi he, same as komihe.
LnL   zi, v. i.; to make a whistling
sound.
li.a, an adverbial suffix, denoting
that an action or quality is con  s  t a n t, habitual, or excessive.
See q 1[ 163 and 231.
kta de, v. t.; to secure or join
with nails or rivets.
ku, v. t.; to give, to present.
kui, demonst. -ronoun, referring to
something pointed out, obvious
or previously described;  that,
that one.  Most of the following
words beginning with' ku' are
more  or  less directly derived
f ro m this pronoun.
kut a, adv.; in that way or place,
just so.
kit
ki tsi lco a du i, v. i.; becom  ing sweet throughout.
ki tsi lk6 a ke, v. t.; to make
entirely or thoroughly sweet.
ki ts! pi, v. i., fr. tsipi; to sink
entirely, to be lost completely in
the water.
ii ts! pi  ke, v. t.,. tsipike; to
cause  to sink tootally.
li tsi ps ti, v. i., intenstiveform
of tsipiti.
ki tsi p       ti i  Lke, v. t.;   to mlace the
wlole in a conditi  on        to s ink; to
upset all on the water.
Li tso ka   du  i, v. i.,fr. tsoka  (Li; beco ming    entirely  hard.
ki ts6 ki, v. i., intensive of tsoki.
ki tsa lci ke,.v. t.; to make en  tirely or permanently hard.
lii tsu tsf lii, v. i.,fr. tsutsulii;
to make a continuous rattling or
stamping noise.
ki tsu tsu ti,,v. i.,fr. tsutsuti;
to  be entirely smooth; uniformly
soft.
ki tsu tsu ti ke, v. t.; to make
entirely or uniformly smooth.
ki -t a, v. t.,fr. un; to envy con  tinually or maliciously.
ki u a he, v. t., intensive of uahe.
kinu a lipi, v. t.,fr. ualipi; to
smash to pieces by shooting.
kiu fa ti, v. t.,fr. uati; to ridi  cule continuously or severely.
ki u dsai du i, v. i.,fr. udsadui;
becoming uniformly dry.
ki u dsi, v. i.,fr. uclsi; to be
dried completely.
ki fi dsi Ike, v. t.; to dry com  pletely.
ki u zi a, v. t., intezsive of uzia.
]ki Ilr, v. t.; to tell; same as
kime.
ko~ a, p~rep.; at; in;~ suffixed to
nouns to form adverbs.
180 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY
kua
k-iu a du, adv.,fr. ku and adu; in
that very place, right there.
kfi a ru, same as kuadu.
kfi dsi, v. t.; to take back some  thing given.
kft i;a, adj., adv.,fr. ku and isa;
like that, just like that.
ku i;a dsi, adj., adv.,fr. kuisa
and adsi; much like that, re  sembling that closely.
ki i iai dsi ke, v. t.; to cause
to resemble imperfectly some>  thing previously mentioned or
pointed out.
kfi  i  a ke, v. t., fr. kuis,,; to
cause to resemble something pre  viouslv demonstated or defined.
kfi plie da, adv.' opposite or
facing so m e t h i n g previously
named or pointed out.
kfi pi, v. i., adj.; to smell like, to
have the same odor as something
previously mentioned and com  pared.
k-f ta, adv., fr. ku and ta; there  at, therein.
kit ta pa, interrog. pron. or sen  tence,fr. ku and tapa,; what is
that, what is the nature of- the
thing named or pointed out.
kuf ti, adj.; dirty. seedy, shabby;
said of old clothes, etc.
kuts, v.; here, take it.  This word
is perhaps a form of the verb ku,
and may mean "it is given to
you"; but is used when com  manding a person to accept
something offered..
kfi tsa ki, pron. (?), fr. ku and
tsaki; that one alone, that by
itself.
kfi  tski, v. i.; to be like, to ac  cord;  to be measured, regaulatede
or shaped a~ccording to a stand  ard or pattern.
1. Words heard to begin with the"
sound of I may be found under
d. See 11 IT 6, 20, and 22.
m, a common contracted form of
the simple  personal  pronouns
of the first person.  (11 ~ 105,
112).
ma,  pers. pron., 1st pers., sing.
and plur., simple, incorporated,
anominative and possessive;  I;
we; my; our.  (I ~ 58, 81, and
105-108, inclusive.)
ma, a prefix to verbs of all classes
forming nouns; a prefix to nouns
slightly limiting their meanings;
to  be carefully  distinguished
from the pronoun I ma', which
is often used as the first syllable
of a word. (f1 f1 53-56).
nmlln n.; sniow.
ma a, n.,fr. a; the entire I)lant;
the body or chief portion of a
plant or tree as distinguished
from any of its parts.
ma a da lia, n., fr. adalia; cof  fee in the grain; parched coffee;
but not the infusion or decoction.
See midigipia.
nma  a da. lipi, n.,fr. ad(alipi; a,
single part or portion.
ma  a da i du ti, synonymous
with qdaldtiti.
ma a da i ki d(i lio ii, n.,fr.
ada alnd ikidtiliok i; a, comb.
cma a  de, n., fr. (ide(; a warm
season, a  sultry tiade.
mna  a  (ln  5i d-i  pa  pi, n.,fr.
181,.
maa
1.
M. 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
mnfid
something  understood  or  not
specified.
ma a klu ma  di he, n.,fr. aku   madihe; a cook, one who cooks
anything.
na  ia pi, n        it.; a necklace.
na  ti po k',a. n.; a house-fly.
na-ia  pu zi,a, t.,f. puzi; a meat   fly.
na a sii di,  n.fr. adadi; a  stolen
article;        a    theft.
ma   ia  tsi, n., lit., yellow  tree;
pine.
a imma  a   i,. i.; to be full.
Ina ai zi he, v. t.; to   fill full.
ma  ai zi ke, v. t.; to cause  to be
tull; filled.
nla bui a, sanme as mamua.
met da [-ra], n.; winter; a year.
mi g      da  da  ka n, n.vfr.  mada  ad
daka; snow-bi  rd, Lapland br Int   ing, (Plectrophanes sp.).
mai da du [-rn], adv.,fr. mada;
during the winter.
ma da duk [-ruk], n., adv.,fr.
inada; next winter; during next
winter.
ma  d.- lia pi, n.; bread.
ma da lia pi h6' pi, n.,J'r. ho'  pi; light bread.
ma d. lia pi-i ki da ka pfi
;i, n.; saleratus or other letv  ening  material.   See  -idaka.  pusi.
nma da, lia pi tso" ki, n., fr.
tsoki; hard-bread]-, crackers.
nla da ka pi lii, i., ft. dakapi  lii; a flag, a banner.
ma  dti ki, v.; to p)aint, to dira,vw;
to ornament with drawings.
ma da k e' [malakoe, bala  koe, barakoeJ, n.,,fr. dakoe
or idakoe; n~y fi'iend, myj com  rade.
mna da ~e dun, 21., adv.,fr. mada
v,
maa
adapapi; a scorched or sun   burnt spot.
ma  a du hi da", n., fr. aduhi   da; anything new or recently
made; an unworn garment.
ma  a  du  h6' pi, same as-adu
hopi.
n.a                     a du lia kfi pi, n.,fr. adu  liakupi; a crease or groove in
anything.
ma  a du lia pi, n.,fr. aduliapi;
a bed, any one's bed; commonly
applied to a permanent bed with
bedstead.
ma  a du lie pi, n.,fr. a duliepi;
a shallow spot.
ma  a  du  i da  ki;a, n.,fr.
aduidakisa; a left-handed per  son.
ma  a du i di tsi, n.,fr..duidi  tsi; a particular odor.
ma  a du i di tsi i 4i" a.  See
aduiditsiiaia.
ma a du i di tsi tsa" ki.  See
aduiditsitsaki.
ma  a du i 4i a, n.,fr. aduisia;
a worthless person; an inferior
thing.
ma  a du i ti pe, n.; a fall-trap.
ma a du ki a de tsi,fr. aduki  adetsi; a brave man.
ma  a du ki du sa, n.,fr. adu  fiduaa; a place where anything
may  be stored, or where only
certain things are stored which
it is not necessary to specify.
ma  a du 6 ki pa di, n.,fr. oki  1adi; a scion, a sapling.
ma a lii dfi lia, n.; large beads,
such as are used in necklaces;
a necklace of such beads.
ma  a.ka kaa ~i, n.,fr. akakali;
a wrktinug, a.r   uins-riptron.e
ma a ku kfi k~c, n.,fr. akukli  kse; one who arranges or mnendls
I
182 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
mad
anal, sedu; last winter;  duling
last winter.
ma  da  4ki he  [-la-], n.; un  r-il)e corn prepared for keeping.
sl,i,da' ti, i.; my  brother-in  l;ik*. See iddlti.
l:X  di, adj.; cooked.
mn  di di, n.; meat dried in
b:oad thin layers.
ma  di e  [badiets], v. t.;  I
tlhink, I suppose, I believe.  See
ildie.
ma  di he, v. t.; to cook, to pre  pare food.
ma  di'  i, n.,fr. disi; a dance;
syVnonymous with makidigi.
ma  di' i, n.; my son.  See idisi.
nia d6 lia, n.; gypsum.  These
Indians burn gypsum and use it
as a pigment,.
ma  d6 ka, n.; an elk.
ma  d6 ka o da" lipi, n.; an
elk-skin.
ma d6 ti ka de, n.; a gall or
swelling on a plant caused by
an insect laying its egg.
ma du  lia.  pa, adj.; crazy, in  sane; drunk.
ma  du  lia. pa  dsi, adj.; ap  pearing as if drunk; acting
crazily.
ma    du li i         du i, v.i.; be-.
coming drunk.
ma  du lit pa ke, v. t.; to cause
to be crazy; to set drunk.
ma dfi lii, n.; ice.
ma du lii ic' pu, n.,fr. madulii
and iepu; an icicle.
ma difi lita, n.; a foolish or silly
l)erso:i a, fool; a harlot.
ma dfi lita, adj.; foolish, silly.
ma du lira du i, n.; becoming
foolish.
nla dui fita Ike, v. t.; to cause
to boe foolish.
mah
ma du sk. pi, n.; urethritis.
ma  dii ti [maruti], n., fr. du  ti; food, particularly solid food.
ma du" ti a du  ki du s.i, n;
a place for storing food.
ma du ti ki di ti, v. i.; to be
surfeited, to be sick from eqat  ing.
mbt e tt.,fr. e; private property,
anything retained in possession.
See itamae.
ma  C pa  ka, n.,fr. maepe and
aka; the club or pestle used
witlh the  wooden m or t a r for
grinding corn, meat. etc.; more
commonly pronounced mepaka.
ma V pe, n.,fr. 6pe; a wooden
mortar used by these Indians for
pounding corn, dried meat, and
other articles of food.
ma  6 tsi [baetsi], n.; a knife.
ma 6, tsi-a du ki da ki ti, n.;
a pocket-knife.
ma  e tsi a zis, n.  See Local
Names.
ma e6 tsi ha" tski, n., lit., Long
Ktnives; synonymous with mae  tsiictia, which is the more cornm  mont expression.
ma  6e tsi ic ti" a, n., lit., Big
Knives; the inhabitants of the
United States.   This word is
probably  translated  from the
language of some tribe farther
east.
ma 6 tsi i Ai, n., fr. maetsi and
isi; a knife-case.
mat ha, n.; a swamp; a spring.
The sp r in g s of the Hidatsa
country are swampy, not clear
and bubbliii g; hence, the double
mfeaninsg of this word.
m~a ha ka k' Ski, n.; meat cut
inl long strips andl driedl.
mfi he, v. t. See maihe.
183 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
mah
ma hi si, n.,fr. hisi; the, bull    berry or buffalo-berry.
Ina  hi  si a, n.; the bull-berry
tree, Shepherdia argetdtea.
nla ho  pa, n., samie as inahupa:
which is more comnmon.
Ina  ho  pai,  n.,fr. hopa; medi   cine; a charm, a spell.
mia ho pai  li a, n., samne as ma   hopamiis.
ma ho pai mi a i ta ma" tsu,
n.  (matsu, cherry); the fruit of
the Virginia creeper.  See doki   daliitarnatsu.
mna ho pai mi a i ta lina" tsu
a, n.; the Virginia creeper, Am)   pelopsis.
Inla ho pa mi i; [-wii;], n.; a
fabulous old woman (some think
there are more than one), who
dwells in the woods and delights
in doing evil. She is supposed
to  strangle such  children  as,
through  parentl ignorance or
carelessness, are smothered in
bed.
mIia lihi pa, n.; the stemn or haln  dle of anything; a corn-cob.
mia  lia  lia, n.,fr. lialia; Cyno  glossun Jliorrisonii.
ma  lia kla, n.,fr. liaka; small  pox.
Imai lio, n.,fr. lio or ilio; my
body.
ma  li6 ki, v. t.; I row.  See da  lioki.
ma  lifi a lia, nt., fr. iliualia; my
knee.
tna  lib  lii sa, n; tree-willow,a
Sali.v lucida.
ma  i a lIa la si, n., fr.  kakakE  si; a penl or pencil.
ma  I a pa tl,'Un. same as iapati.
ma  ic ti a, n.fJr. ictia; a boy or
girl nearly or quite full grownl
mail
said in contradistinction to ma    kadista.
ma  i dak  ts.i da  ke, n.,.fr.
daktsadalie; skates.
n ma  i dak ui dsi, n.,fr. dakli    dsi; a swing; a swinging cra-(le,
such as these Inidians use to irock
their children.
tna  t da tska ti, n., fr. datska    ti; a syringe.
n,ia I di  k6 di ksa, n.; straps
or bands for supporting the leg    gings; garters.
ma i di' tisi, n., fr. iditsi; mate    rilal for scenting.
ma  i duii tsa da, n.,fr. dutsada;
a sled.
ma  i du  Isi, n.; synonymous
with idutsi; a fork of any  de   scriltion.
tma  i du tska pi, n.,fJr. dutska   pi; a pincers; a clothes-pin.  In
the latter sense, maitulii-idutska   pi is preferable.
ma  i diu tsku pi, n.  See mua   idutskupi.
nma i ha4, n.,fr. ilia; an enemly,
an inimical tribe.
ma i lhi di, t., fr. ihadi; food
set out, a meal, a feast.
ma i ha lipi, n., fr. halipi; an
errhine,  a  plant  obtained  by
these Inidians on the prairies,
powdered and used as snuff in
cases of catarrh; name recently
applied to snuff.
ma  i hai  ni a, n., fr. maiha, cand
nmia; a member of the ELnemy  wonmani Band.
ma  i ha  mi a ic ke, n.; the
Enemy-woman Bandc one ofI lie
orders or degrees among the EIi  datsa              h     iomen.
tuna ilhe, v. t.; to try, to en  deavor.-maihe, he tries. ma
184 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
mai                                   Inat
dahe, you try.  mamahe [wawa-    tike; any material used in pol  hets], I try.  Possibly m,ahe is    ishing.
the true radical form, but it is  ma  i ki tso ki, n.,fr. kitsoki;
never heard.  (IT 199).               material used to render anything
ma  i hu [ba-, wa-], to trade,    hard, as starclh.
to buy.  (~1 199).                  ma  i kta de  n.; a nail, peg, or
ma  i lia ka, n., fr. liaka-allud-    spike, anything driven in for the
ing to effects upon the skin; poi-   purpose of securing.
son  vines, Rlhus  toxicodendrov, n1a  i kfi tski, n.,fr. ikutski;
and Rhus radicans.                    anything copied or taken from
ma  i ka di tska pa, n., fr. ka-    some model or used as a modelr
ditskapa;  adhesive  material,    a pattern for a garment, a model
paste, mucilage.                      of an  instrument  or utensil;
ma i ka ti pe, n.,fr. ikatipe; a    sometimes applied to a mea,sur  button of any kind.                   ing tape or stick.
111a i ki da ku di, n., fr. kida-  ma  i kfi  tski kSa, n.,fr. ku  kudi; a fan.  The Hidatsa corn-    tski; an initator, a mimic, one
minonly maklie fans from wings of    who frequently imitates the man  birds.                                ners of others for the amusemai ki da ku dsi, n.,fr. kida-    meut of spectators
kudsi; same as naidakudsi.          ma i ma  da ki, n.,fr. madakli;
11a  i lIi di Li.  See makidiklli,       a pencil, brush, or prepared stick
which is more commonily used.         used in painting pictures.
ta i Lii dii lia di, n., fr. kidu-  ma  i mak  i e ke,  n.; playing  liadi; a rake.                        cards.  See imakieke.
ma i ki du  lio!ii nI.; synony-  n1a i nii di ti.  See iduksitii  mous witth  i(iaada,ikidulioki.       miditi.
na  i i iL ka, n.,fr. ika; glass;  rma  i pa lia de, n.,fr. ipakade;
a window.                             a fork, a table-fork.
Ina  i ki l1a ki, in.,fr. kikaki;  ma  i pa sa ki, n.,fr. ipasaki;
thread.                               the belt worn around the waist,
11a i ki ki ski, n.,fr. kikiaki;    outside of the dress or shirt
a weight; a measuring vessel.         the girdle.
nia  i  Li  ku,  n.;  a  spring-  il1a i pa tsati, n.; synonymous
trap.                                 with ipatsati.
11a i ki pa ki  )i, n., fr. kipaki-  ma i ptsa, n.,?fr. iptsa; an axe.
si; a cloth for wilping or rubbing,  mna i ptsa da kai  n., diminutive
a towel.                              of mnaiptsa; a hatchet.
ma 1i ki pa  s'a ki,.,fr. kipa-  1mai $i, n.,fr. isi; a covering;
saki; a belt worn outside of all    corn-husks.
the clothing, around the robe or  n1a  i;ke, n.,fr. iske; one corm  blanket.!   manded, one obeying.
n1a i ki pLi ti, n., fr. kipkiti; a! ma  i.;pa du nli di, n.; a snail.
sad iron.                           113 a  i nu, n.,?ft. isu; the war"1113  kLi  sa ti Le, 2w., fi-. hitsa- teagle, Aquila chrysactus.
18,5 
IIIDATSA DICTIONARY.
mak
ma lia  di toIa nml  a, t. (mia, a
4cone an);  a     younlg g irl.
m       a a di ta ti,.i. See Local
Names.
msl' lIa  ili ta ii C    [-wi], n.;
hail.
ma li.m ptsi,k v. t., 1st l?ers. of da  kas.  ptsi.
ma ha  ta, it.; large    fruit, par  ticularly  plums.
anr.li,  v. i.. and adverbial pre  iix, sam)i e as nak.
maauk i a, v. i.,fr. maki; to COD  test, to oppose t o    struggle w ith
one another; to play a game in
which opposite sides are taken.
nmak i a p6,, adj.; checkeredc
cross-barred.
maak i a p46 ke, v. t.; to checker,
to ornament with intersecting
lines.
n.ak i fi ti di e", v. i.,fr. tidic;
to ruin a contested race.
m~ak i a ti di e" ke, v. t.,fi-.
tidieke; to cause to run in con  test, i. e., to race horses, to have
a borse-race.
mak i da  ksi, n.,fr. kidaksi; a
very young child, one tied up in
a buindle (as these Indians usual  ly carry children until they are
about six months old); the bun  dle'and child together.
nla ki d46 ksa, n.,fr. kideksa;
an excessive vomiting; a sick  ness characterized by prolonged
or excessive vomiting.
ma  ki di ki, n.,fr. kidiki; a
hammer.
ma   ki dif;i, n.,fr. kidiai; a
dance.
ma 1ki dn msi [+-wi], n., fr.
kiidumi; a numeral.
ma lki dul tski/,si, n., fr. kidu  tskisi; a lot of wvashed clothes.
mal
ma  i;u i kil" 4i, n.  See Local
Names.
ma  i;u ti psa ki, n.,fr. isuti
and ipsaki; an apron.
ma  i ta, n.; an arrow; syn. it(.
ma  i tai hi, n.  See itahi.
ma  i ta i su, n., fr. itaisu, and
of similar meaning.
ma  i ta nmu a, n., fr. tamua; a
bell; also maltatuna.
ma  i te i du;u ki, n., lit., ma  terial for washing the face; soap.
ma  i te i ki pa ki ~i, n.,fr.
ite, i, and kip4akiAi; a towel. (IT
44).
ma  i ti du;u  ki, n., a con.
tracted.formi of inaiteiduguki com  monly used.
ma  i'ti pc, n., fr. itipe; a fill  trap).
ma  i tsi mu  a, n.,fr. tsimua;
ornamental metallic pendants.
mna  i tski ti, n.,fr. itskiti; a
scissors.
mna  i tu lii i ki pki ti,fr. itu  lii and maikipkiti, and synony  mous with the latter.
mnak  [wakL], a prefix to verbs
denoting opposition, reciprocity,
etc. See maki and IT 153.
ma  ka, n.; my daughter (form
of address).
Ina  ka di sta [-ri-], n.,.fr. ka.
dista; a child, a young person.
ma  ka di sta i" d.tk u dsi, n.,
fr. makadista and dakud~i; a
childIs swing, orswinging cradle;
an arrangement, for rocking chil  dren, made of ropes and blankets
and suspended from a beam.
See mai(lakudsi.
ma  ka  di ~ta ke, U.; a doll.
See ke.
ma  ka di,ta ma tse, U. (ma  tse, aman); a younlg boy.
186 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
mfik
close together; to shut anything
when two sides are moved in the
act, as in closing a book or a
covered mirror.
ma. k6'  pa,  n.; my comrade;
said by one female to another.
See ikolpa.
mak  4   ki, v. t.; lstlperson of
dkalaki.
mak se sa, same as maksese.
mak k.{a dsi, adj., fr. makse  se; seeming to resemble one an  other.
mali.;s~5  a du i, v. i.; becom  ing mnore and more alike.
mia    e,    e [+wvak.], v. i., adj.,
fr. sese;  mutually resembling
.one another,,alike.
ina1k -.q 6,e de, adj.; closely but
not exactly resembling one an  otlier.
ma?k ~;;e ke, v. t.; to cause to
resemble one another, to make
alike.
msak   i a, adj.,fr. mak and sia;
nearly the same as maksese.
Inal,i;i a de, adj.; much alike.
mak;i a ka, adj.,fr. miak,sia and
ka; of the same size or length as
one another; nearly synonymous
with siaka, and seka.-maksia. o
kats% they are of equal size.
mak  4i a ka dsi, adj.; appar  ently alike in size or length.
mak;i a lia kle, v. t.; to in  crease or reduce in size so as to
make two things of equal length
or size.
nmak  tsa  ki, v. t., lst person of
d'ktsaki.
mia kIu, n.; the cottonwood tree;
perhaps so called in allusion to
its  useight.
mfi lku~ n.; night. The word is
also used to denote the astro
inak
maf. i    lke, v. i. and t.: to con  test, or cause to contest; us       ed  in
much  th e same sense as makia.
mak i hi, v. i.; to st     and mutu ally
in contact, as tw        o  sticks placed
so as       to support one another.
I.ak i hi taI, negative of  maikihi;'
to ble    separa ted mutually.
mak  i i d6,  v.        t.,fr.   maki and
idle; to interchange speech, to
hold a dialogue.
mnak  i i ki' pa, v. t.,fr. maki
and ikumpa;  to       hate on   e another.
mak i  i, n., fr. maki and ii,  so called  bec ause  the covers or
flaps  close    from  o ppos ite  dire  tions; a meat-ca,se or parfstche
caLse,         which is an arrangement
made of decorated - raw-hide for
holding dried mea,t and other
articles.
mak  i ki d4 6i, v. t., fr. ma.ki
and kideai; to love one another.
mna  lii kuf  a, n.,fr. kikua; a
soldier; one of the Soldier Band
of' the tribe.
mal. i ma  ka da ha, v.; to
pass and repass one another coin  ing from opposite directions.
mak i ma  lii da h-a ti di 4,
v. (tidie, to run); to run or ride
rapidly, passing a,lnd repassing
one another, coming from oppo  site directions; as when two per  sons, on foot or mounted, make
a var-signal.
mnak i lnik i a [baliiwakia],
n.,fr. kim.akia; a battle, a fight.
lna ki pa, n., fr. kipa; hominy.
ma kIi pai hi, it., fr. kipahi; a
song.-maliirpaihi mukl give (us)
.a song — a, common mode of ask  inlg a person to sing.
m.ak i pa la~ ksi, v. t.,fir. m~.ki
((Znd pata.ki; to shut together, to
187 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
matk
homical day or cycle of twenty   four  hours, and  sometimes to
denote a year.
nm;  Lu, adj.; tall, lofty.
man ku a du o" ki pa di, n.;
you iig cottonwood shrubs grow   ing at the base of a tree. See
aduokipadi.
nlma kui du, adv.,.fr. maku; dur.   img the night.
ma;i kui  dik, adv.; during the
coming night.
Imat Lf fia za, n., same as next
w.aord,, but less in use.
nma   iku ka  zi, n., diminutive of
maku;  a  youlln g cottonwood
tree.
mnia  k-u  hle, v. t.,fr. mnaku; to
mnake tall; miade tall.
mua  ku  mi  di [-bidi], n.,fr.
maku, night, and midi; tle moon.
In[i mla, v.; a word used impera  tively when trying to get an in  frant to drink or nurse.
n'i mta  da ki, n.,fr. madaki; a
picture, a painting; a book.
ma  ma   i (i klie, n.,fr. makieke;
a gamet in which opposite sides
are ta, ken.
ma  mfi a, n.; haw; haws.
ia   111 mi a a,  n.; haw-tree; a,
species of Cratxgqus growing in
Northlern Dakota.
mia  0 d6 sa [-nesa], n.,fr. desa,
? lit., a thiny tw 7ich is not; a thing
of imaginary existence, a ground  less storyv etc.
nma  o  de  sa a zis, n.  See Lo  cal -Names.
ina pa  si pi sa, n.; sunflower
seeds,-used as food  by these
Indianls.
ma  pa  tslka  ki di ti, n.; a
wasp.
ma p~ or ma  pc, n; day, d           ay.
I'lla4
time;  a period of twenty-four
hours. —hidi-inap6, to-day.
ma  pe du, adv.,fr. mape; dur   ing the day.
ma pe he pa it.,, fr. mape and
hopa; any day observed as sa   cred )by white  men, as Sund(ay
and Christmas.
mat pem   n1 i di [-bidia   li.,fr.
mape and  imidi; the  s un.
ma  api  di lipa, n.,fr. pidaulipa;
ribbon.
ma  po s,    n.; anw v animal or
animals offensive to the  sigh t of
these Indians or unfit for food,
a s  insects,  worno s, snakes  etc.
ma p6;a,  n.; a te  rm a ppli ede  to
flies.and insects less offensi v e to
the sight a   than te iapoka.
ma po;a lIi dif ti, n.; an aDt.
ma pi dsi ke, n.,fr. ptidsik-e;
a cord of buckskin or other ma  terial having porcupine quills or
other  ornamen,tal  trilling
wrapped around it.
ina ro ka, n., same as madoka.
ma  rfi lita, n., same,(ts madu.
lita.
ina,a mi, tn.; miy aunt.  See
ma;a wi;, i iaami and disami.
ma.i, n.;  a buffalo-robe;  a
blanket worn as a robe.
ma 4i, n.; a white man. The
word was originally applied only
to the French  and  Canadians,
who are now sometimes desig  nated as maaika'ti, the t r u e
whites.
ma,,~i a de, v.; to dream.-n-a inaaiade. I dream. mada,~iade,
you dream.
ma.i a lia, v.; to sweep oult
dirt, to clean b)y sweep~ing wvith
a~broomn.
ma ~i a ila  n.,/,. magialia; a
188 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
ma;
biroomd. The position of the par  ticle' i' in this word is unique.
ma  si da. lia nl,  t.,fr. masi
and (laliain i; a shawl.
ma,si i hii, n.,fr. nim,isi and ilii;
dry-goods of any description.
ma    i i lii  liht pi,  n. (liapi,
thin); light cottonI goods; mus  lin.
nta,i i lii puf  zi, n. (puzi, spot  ted); c,ilico prinits.
ma:i I 1   ta   tsi, n. (tatsi,
thick;); cloth; woolen goodls.
ina   i i ptse, n.,fr. m,sii and
iptse; a wide, embroidered band
in thecentre of a robe or bl,anket.
ma  si" i ta da lipi tsi, n., lit.,
wchite man's bear; a hog.
ma;i" i ta da  lipi tsi;u ii,
,. (sui, fact); bacon.
ma si i ta i mak i e ke, n.,
lit., white man's gamning materials;
cards.
ma;i i ta mi te [-wite], n.,
lit., white mant's buffalo, or cow;
domestic cattle.
ma;i" i ta tsa  *ai ka, n., lit.,
white man's bird; the domestic
cock.
nma si ka, n.; chewing-gum.
ma   i pi a, a.?fr. s;ipiga; grapes;
raisins.
ma;i pi;a a  kuL  du" ti, n.,
lit., gratpe-eater; the cedar-bird,
Amtpelis cedrorum.  (IT 51).
nla    i pi p;a, n., fr. masi and
Aipiga; the negro.
ma;i ta, n.; Imy back;  from
iaita or the hypothetical word
sita.
ma.~i ta lia  liku, n., lit., whitec
mnan's tuber; the potato.
ma,i ta  ra lipi' tsi, same as
masii taLda      atipitsi.
mna sfi a ka za; n., dimintnutive
of   na suka;  a puppy;  willow
catkins are also so called.
ma sfi ka, n.,fr. Auka; a dog.
ma su ka ak  $u4 n.,f-. masu  ka and?akkue; the coral-berry
or wolf-berry, Syrnphoricarpus.
na su k.a a;k su a ma $i~",
it. See Local Names.
ma;u  ka  ic Le, n., lit., Dog
Band; one of the orders or so  cieties among the men  of the
tribe.
ma  gu  la  ka di;ta, n., lit.,
Little Dogs; an order or society
of the men.
ma;u ka  ma  dat Li, n.; an  other of the bands or orders of
the Hidatsa men.
ma  ta, n., prob. fr. ta, to kill;
autuinrn.
ma  ta du, adv.,fr. rnata; dur  inig the autumn.
ma.ta  duk,  n., adv.,.fr. mata;
next autumn; during next au  tumn.
ma ta!ii, nt.; a turtle.
ma  ta liii i;a, lit.,resemblinq a
turtle; a padlock.
ma  ti lipi, n.; a heavy cord, a
rope;       a  lariat.
ma  taL ki, n; a plate;  a shallow
disl.
mna  ta ki  a du ki du;a, n.; a
cup-board. See adukiduaa.
ma   tat ki   a zi,  n. See Local
Nfames. -
ma  ta ko a, atdv., same as ma,te  koa.
ma tii Sit,.; my robe or blanket.
See itaai.
ma ta tsi dat lio ke, n., fr. ta.
tsi and dalioke; -ati Indian pad.
sadldle.
ma ta tsi mi lio ke, sabme as
last wcord.
189
mat 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
mat
ma  tC, i., adv., fr. te or tie; long
ago; a long time; the last vowel
is often lengthened to indicate
very distant past time.
ma  t6 ko a  adv., fr. mate; at a
distant time in the past.
nla  ti, n.; a boat.-hutsi-mati
(wind-boat), a sail-boat.  mida  mati, a wooden boat.
mia ti si;a, n.; a steam-boat.
ma  t6 ke, n.; a clam.
mna  tsa nli di [-bidi], n.; a
bowl or basin.
ma  tsa mi di ka zi, n., dimin  utive of matsamidi; a small bowl
or basin.
-ma ts6 [watse, batse], n.; a
mall.
ma  tse di di, n.,fr. miatse and
didi; a war-party.
ma  tse 6 tsi, n.; a chief; a per  son of prominence.
ma  tslio ki, n.; eagle tail-feath  ers.
ma  tsi, n., contraction of maatsi.
ma  tsi, n.; my fool.  See itsi.
ma  tsi k6  a, n.,fJr. tsikoa; su  gar; a sweetened drink.
mna tsi k6 a a ku ti" du e, n.;
molasses,
ma  tsi k6 a ha" tski  n. (ha  tski, long); candy.
ma  tsi ko  a pu" zi, n. (puzi,
striped); candy.
ma  tsi ta hi du,  n., fr. tsita
and hidu; the coccyx.
ma  tsi to, n.; a needle or awl.
ma  tsi to ic ti" a, n. (ictia,
large); an awl.
mfa  tsi to-u" ti po a du  i, n.
(uti and poadui); a pin.
!na tsu, n.; small fruit, part~icu  larly cherries.
mia tsu a, n.; a cherry-tree.
ma tslt a, n.; fibrous tissue from
lne
the back of the buffalo, elk, deer,
etc.  It is dried and split into
finue threads for sewing, and is
commonly  called sinew by the
whites.
nma  tsI a  pa  ki  i, n., fr. ma  tsua and p.kiMi; "; sinew " twilled
by  rubbing, as it is fixed  pre  paratory to being used in sew  ing.
ma tsu.4 tsa, n.; fragrant
grass.
ma   tsu  a  zi*, n.  See Local
Names.
ma  tsu, ka,  n.;  my  younger
brother. See itsuka.
mea tsu o tak a, n.; the smaller
dogwood, Cornus stolonifera.
mat tsu o taak i, n.,.fr. inatsu
and taki; the berries of Corus
stolonifera.
mat tsu ta pa, n., fr. mnatsu and
ta.pa; the service-berry- Aoelan  chier canadensis.
ona  tsu tm a  pt a,  n.; the serv  ice-berry tree, shad-bush.
ma tfi, v.; there are; there is; he
has; they have, etc.; opposite
of deaa.
ma tf a, n.; green corn, roast  itig ears.
ma  tu  ii, n.; my dress or shirt.
See ituii.
ma u pqa hi, n.; a mallet.
ma  fit p.a ki hu" pa i ~is.  See
Local Names.
ma  u ta pi, n.,?fr. tapa; a ball
of buck-skin or elk-skini stuffed
with hair, and used by women
in t hei r games;   a       ga me played
with such a ball.
ntlt wa dal ki, samee as mama  d)aki.
ma zi, n.; a!egend, a tale.
ne, n.; a louse.
190 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
trip                  mll
n' pa ha, n., contraction of ma e-   nic li, co})I. I)ers. pron., lst per  pakai, but more common.               son; I, myself.  (~ 117).
'le' pi, n., contraction of maepi,  mi  da [wi-, bi-], i.; a wild  much used.                           goose.
nli' [li'], n.; a rock.               lni da  F+bidal, n.;  wood;  a
nil  [wi, wits], prob. auxiliary    tree; a forest.
verb, suffixed to denote 1st per-  nliI da a lu du ti, n., lit., wood  son, future.  (11 167).              eaters; caterpillarswhich liveon
nil, simple pers. pron., 1st pers.,    trees.
used independently or incorpo-  mi  da a  pa,., fr. mida and
rated, nominative and objective,    apa; leaves of any kind; tea.
usually singular, but when in-  mi da du e tsa,n.,fr. midaand
corporated may  refer  to more    duetsa; awoodencanoe,"dug  than one.  (~ I  109, 110. 172,    out".
205).                              ml da ha, n.; fire.
nmi  [wi, wits], a suffix inidicat-  mi  da  hat dsi, n.; willows; a
ing number.  See tuami and hi-    name applied to all shrub wil  dimi.                                lows.
nli, a syllable or prefix of uacer-  ini da hai dsi hi si, n.; red
tain  significance, beg i n n in g    willow.
many  nouns in the language;  nli da  ha i du ka pi, n.; a
often pronoiunced bi, sometimes    friction-match.
I.    a h A   a Y     embers.
wi.
mi a [wia, bia], n.; a woman.
nli  a d6 ka  ta [-no-], n.; a
harlot.  This is the proper word; 
but m a d u li t a, fool, is often
used.
mi  a ka za, n., fr. mia and ka  za; a young woman.
mi a ti, n.,fr. mia; a man who
dresses in woman's clothes and
performs the duties usually al  lotted to females in an Indian
camp.  Such are called by the
French Canadians "berdaches";
and by most whites are incor  rectly supposed to be lherm,a  phrodites.
nli iia ti he, v. t.; to become a
miati; said of a man who as  sumes the dress and tasks of a
woman.
mi ai tike, v. t.; to cause to be
a muiati.
191
mid
nic lii, comIpi. liers. pron., lst per  son; I, myself.  (1 117).
mi da  [wi-, bi-], i.; a wild:
goose.
ini dai [+bida], n.;  wood; a
tree; -i forest.
nmi da a lcu dfi ti, n., lit., wood  eaters; caterpillars which live on
trees.'
mi da a pa, it., fr. mida and
apa; leaves of any kind; tea.
mi da du 6, tsa, n.,fr. mida and
duetsa; a wooden canoe, a"dug  out " 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
mid
ml 4a ii  ma  lia ti-i o" ki, 
mi  la i a ma  ia ti-i o" pe, I
mi da i a ma lia ti-i o" 
ptsati,n.; acandlestick. See
oki, ope, and optsati.
mi da i.i pi, n.; a spool.
mi  da  ic lie, n.,fr. mida and
icke; the Goose Band, one of
the orders among the women of
the tribe.
mi da ic pa ti, n.; sunken tree
or snag in a river.
mi da  i ka ki, n. (kaki, roll);
a wagon.
nlii da i 6 pe, n.,fr. mida and
iope; a box of any kind, partic  ularly a, wooden box.
ml  da  I si, n.,fr. mida and isi;
bark.
ml da  ka  mic lia, n. (kamic  ka, tough); oak.
ml  da  ka za, n., diminutive of
mida; a stiek, a switch.
mi dai ki, n.; a shield.
mi  da  k i, n.; a palisade or
stockade; a skillet or pan; so
called perhaps  because like  a
palisaded enclosure.
mi da lu C tsa, same as midadu  etsa.
mi da ma i du tsa da, n.; a
.wooden sled. See nmaidutsada.
mi  da  mia  ti, n.,fr. mida and
mati; a yawl or skiff.
mi dai pa, a contraction of mida  apa, often heard.
mi da pa, n.; beaver.
nli  da  tsa pi, n.; ashes; gun!)owder; dust.
mii da tsa pi a zi, n.  See Lo.
cal Names.
mi da tsa pi i $i, n.; a powder  horn.
mi da  tsfi  ka, n.,fr. mida and
tsuka; boards; a floor.
mid
mi do6, n.; a door; a door-way.
mi dd di, v. t.; to come through
a door-way, to enter a house; to
pay a visit.
mi d, ko a, n.; at or near the
door; the seat around the fire
nearest to the door.
nil di [bidi, mini],  n.; water.
The latter pronunciation, corre  sponding  with the Dakota, is
most  commonly used in com  pound words.
mi di, n.; a name given to both
sun and mroon; it may be trans  lated luminary or great luminary.
iWhen there is danger of ambi  guity they are distinguished as
mape-midi (day  luminary) and
oktsi-midi or maku-midi  (night
1lumin-ary).
mi di [widi], verbal root; turn,
twist. See pamidi, dumidi, etc.
nli  di  a  p6  LIa, n., lit., water
head dress; a rainbow.
mi di a t~, adv., n.,fi'. midi and
ate;  when the sun  (or moon)
rises; sunrise.
mi di a tc de, adv.; near sun  rise, just before sunrise.
nmi di a tc du, adv.; at sunrise,
during the time the sun is rising.
mni di a t6 duk, adv.; when the
sun shall next rise.
mni di a  te 6 dak Ai pi,  adv.;
after sunrise. See daksipi.
midi d-a lii Ai, n., fr. midi and
da~his'e; a wave, a billow.
mi di d6 ta, n., fr. iiiidi, water,
and deta; the bank of a river;
the shore of a lake.
mi.   di di di [-niri], v., fr. midi
and dim i; to swip n.
mi di ho pa,~ n. See Ljocal
~ames.
mi di i a p~a ti, n.; a saw.
192 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
mih
nii di ma  p6 duii pa hi-dak
si pi, n.; synonymous with ]last
wor(l.
mi di ma p( du pa hi de, n.;
nearl, noon.
mi    di  mi  ta lia hlie, n.; the
MIandd;a mvdicilie-ark.
mi di pi, v.; to enter the water,
i. e.,,t6 ba,ithie one's self.
mi  di sa, v., adj.; turbid; said
of water.
mi  di sa  a  zig.   See  Local
Names.
Ini di;a lie, v. t.,fr. micdia; to
ma,ke turbid; roiled.
mi  di si, n., contraction of mida  iM.
mi  di si pi sa, n.,fr. midi and
Aipiga; coffee, the inifusion or
decoction.
mi  di  ta di  [minitari],'u.,
comp. v.,fr. midi and tadi; to
cross water, to go across a streim.
Thc Hidatsa Indians; so called
by the Mandans.
mi  di ti, v. t.; to cook by fry  ing.
ml di tsi, adj.; of a watery con  sistency.
nlil do, pers. pron., plural; we;
uS.
ml  do ki, pers. pron., compound,
plural; we, ourselves.
mi du  e, v. i.,fr. midi and ue;
to bubble; to boil as water.
mi dfl e he, v. t.; to boil water.
mi  di  e lie, v. t.; to cause to
boil, to set to boil; boiled.
mi    dufi  lia [bi-], n.; a gun or
bow.
mi dfl lia lke, n.,fr. midulia; a
popP-gun.
mxi e, n.; woman, same as mia,
mi lia ka, nl.; a generic name
!br (lucks.
mid
mi di i da liu pi, n., fr. midi, i,
and daliupi; a sponge.
mi di i hi' ke, n.,fr. midi, i,
and hike; a' drinking-vessel, a
cup.
mi  di i ki ki ski, n.,fr. mi(i
and ikikiski; a watch or clock.'
mi  di i ma  lipi [-wfl-], n.,
adv.,fr. midi and imnilipi; sun  set.
mi di i ma lipi de, adv.; neaer
sunset.
mi di  i nma  lipi du, adv.; at
sunset.
mi di  i ma  lipi dulS, adv.;
when the sun shall next set.
nli di i ma lipi se du, adv.;
when the sun did last set.
mi  di i ta tsu, n.,fr. midi and
itatsu; the half-moon.
mi  di ka, adv., fr. midi, water;
in or by the water.
nli  di  ka  Li  ii, n.,fr. midi,
moon, and kakilii; the full-nioon.
ml di ka kI lii de, n.; the gib  bous moon.
mi di ka 6 ze [mini-], n., fr.
imjidika and oze, lit., They Plant
by, or in, the Water; a band of
the Teton Dakotas.
mi di ke, v. t., fr. mide and ke;
to liquefy, melt.
nil di ki da he, fr. midi, moon,
and kidahe; the new moon, the
crescent.
mi  di ki dak tsi e, n.; clear
water, water allowed to settle.
ml di 6 pe, contraction of mida  iope.
mi di ma  pC' du pa hi [bidi  wap46rupahi], n., fr. midi,
mape, and dopahe, lit., the sun      1
divides the day in two; noon.
mi di ma p6 du pa hi-dak
a-mi di, n.; afternoon.
13
193 
HIDATSA DICTIO,ARY.
mit
mi' Ima fi p?  lii, n., fr. tni' and
m,upl)aki; at stole-ljea(led m.lilet,
such -is is ordinarily mlad.1e, by?
these; Indiadns.
mi spa  [bispaj, n.; the ash  tree.
mi  ta  pa   [witapa,  wita  pats], v. i.; to lie, to decesive.
mi ta pa  dsi,,t. i.,fr. mital)a;
to equivocaite.
mi   ta p4 ksa, v. i.,Jfr. mita  pa; to lie frequently or hbabitu  ally.
ml  t6,, n.; a buffalo-cow; the
word is also used generically.
ml t6 a ka zi, n., diminutive of
nmite; a biff,alo.calf.
mi te a ta di ke  [bitcatiri  ke], n.; the box-elder, Negundo
aceroides.
mi  t6 a ta ki, n.,fr. mnite and
ataki; an albino buffalo, whi;  I)uffa-lo.
mi t,6 a ta ki ic ke, n.; the
White  Buffalo Band, a secret
degree or order among women
of the tribe.
ml  t6, ktsa tsa, n; the black
curran t.
mi  te6 ktsa tsa a, n.; the cur  rant-bush.
mi   t6 o da  lipi, n.; a buff,tlo  hide.
mi' 1i, v. i.; to creep, as a hunter
approaching game.
nli tsa ki, v.; I alone; I un  aided.
mi tsi, n.; a wedge for splitting
wood.
mi' tsi, verbal root; mince; com  minute finely.
ml'  tsi  a  da  zi.  See  Local
wl    ames.
mi tsi i ta mi dqLasi. See
Loea,! l/ames.
mi' i, n.; a stone or rock, same as
mi'.
mni' i da' ta, n., lit., stone heart;
a geode.
mi I ptsa, n.,fr. mi' and iptsap,;
an axe, particularly a stone axe.
See maiptsa.
nli i ptsa da' ka, n., diminutive
of miiptsa; a tomahawk or
hatchet,  particularlyv  a  stone
hatchet. See maiptsadaka.
mi ka, n.; a mare; as a suffix
it indicates the female of all
lower animals except bufilto.
mi  ka',  n.; grass; sedge; all
grass-like plants.
mi ka' i du tsi, n.,fr. mika' and
dutsi; a pitchfork.
mi  ka' ki ksa, n., lit., Grass fixers; an order ordegree among
women.
nmi  ka' t6 hi sa, adj.,fr. mika'
and tohisa; green.
mi  ka'  tsa. ki, n.; a name
sometimes applied to fragrant
grass.
mi ka' fi dsi, n.,7it., dry grass;
hay.
mi  ka' fi ta  Iku du ti, n.,fr.
mika'uti and aktuduti; a cater  pillar that eats onions.
mi ka' u ti, n.,fr. mika' and uti;
onions; wild garlic.
mil' ka za, n., diminutive of mi';
gravel, pebbles.
lni klta [wi-], n.; the bottom,
the lower part or surface of any  thing.
mi  ktaf  ka  [wi-], adv.,fr. mi  kta; at the lower part; below.
nli kta  ko  a, adv.,fr. mikta;
near or at the bottom; under.
mi kt'i ta, adv.,fr. mikta; down  ward, iu t he directioh of tho b   ot  tom.
194
n'ti9 
HIDATSA DICT'IONARY.
mit
mi tska pa, n.; the fruit of the
rose; it is eaten by Indians.
mi  tska  pa  a, n.;  a  rose  bush.
mi tslka pa 6 ddik a pa ki,
n; rose-blossom. See odaka  pq.ki.
m6 tsa, n.; a coyot6 (Canis lat  rans).
nm6 tsa i ta ma  ka ta, n., lit.,
coyote's plum; the fruit of Astra  galus caryocarpus.
mri, verbal root. See mua.
mui a, v. or verbal root; to soun(l,
to make a noise.  See liamua,
tamnua, tsimua, etc.
mfia [bua], n.; generic na,me for
fish.
nu a da ki, v. i.; to bark as a
wolf or dog; to imitate the howl
of a, wolf, as Indian hunters com  monly do when calling to each
other in the woods. ~
inu a i du  tsku pi, n.; a fish  hook.
mu a pa d( lii, n.,fr. mua, ap,                   p
and delii; sturgeon.
mu  a pa ha tski,fr. mua, apa,
and hatski; gar-pike (?).
inu  a  tsfi ka, n. (tsuka,flat);
sun-fish.
mu  dsi [wudsi], verbal root;
roll up, fold by rolling.
mu pi [wuipi], v. t.; to smell.
mfi ti, v. t., 1st pers. of duti; I
eat.
o, adv.   much;  used in com  pounds; synonymous with ahu,
which may be derived from o.
o, a prefix to verbs forming nouns
which are names of places and
actions; often synonymnous with
a(]a. (11 ff 49, 50).
o, a i)retfix of undetermined mean  i,og to verbal roots.  In the 1st
and  2d  persons, it commonly
takes m and d as pronouns, pre  ceded by a. (IT 197).
6 da [-ra], v. t.; to pass another
person on  the  road either by
overtaking or mneeting him.
Oo  da  lipi [-nalipi, -ralipi],
n., fr. dalipi; the hide of an an  imal, the entire hide.
6 dak a pa ki, n.,fr. dalkapaki;
a flower, a blossom; sometimes
accented on penultimate.
6 dak a pit ii, n., fr. dakapilii;
an ornaimental flap on a gar  ment; also odakal)llii.
6 da ki, v. i.; to chirp, to make
a stridulous sound.
6 dak sa ki, n.,fr. daksaki; a
contused wound; the act of giv  ing a contused wound.
6 dlik si pi, n.,fr. dakaipi; a.
subsequent time. a time after
some other time nentioned.
0 da mu, n.,fr. damt; a deep
spot in a stream; the channel of
a river.
6 da pi [-ra-], v. t.; to find, to
make an original discovery; not
to recover something lost.
6 da sa' ti [ona-], n.; a name,
a  designation; not a proper
name.
n. Words heardl to begin with
the sound of n may be found
under d; n and d being inter  changeable letters.  (1I I1 20 and
21.)
195
6da
0.
n. 
IIIDATSA DICTIONARY.
6da
6 da sa' ti, v. t.; to name, to
speak of or call by name. Iu
the conjugation of this word, o is
not preceded bv a, as in other
verbs beginning with' o'. —oma  dasa'ti, I name. odadasa'ti [ola  nasa'ti], you name.
o di di, n.,fr.didi; gait, walk.  odidi i,i a, said of a lame per  son.
o dui  se, n.,fr. duse; a place of
deposi t.
o du ska ska  pka, n.; spruce
gum, such as the In(liaiis them  selves gather. That obtained
from the traders is called ma  ika.
o dfi tsi, n.,fr. duttsi; a mine; a
llace where anything may be
obtained with certainty.
6 hi, v. t.; to be fond of; said of
the affection of pets for their
owners.
6 lia ta dui, v. i.; becoming
pale.
6  lia ti, adj.,fr. liati; white,
bright, clear, or pale; often
used synonymously with  ilio  taki.
6 lia ti ke, v. t.; to make pale,
to bleach or whiten.
6 lia ti ksa, adj.; continually or
habitually pale.
6 La, n., adv.; yonder, over there.
6 ka du, adv.; in a distant place
(pointed to), yondo'r; beyond.
6 ka  ko  a, adv.; at a distant
place, at yon place; at the other
side.
6 kLa ta, v. t.; to put on an arti  cle of clothing, to dress.
6 Li, v. t.; to surround the base,
to        surro        udn one endg of an ob  ject; to maintain ill Imsition or
supoport by thlus surroun~dinlg, —
Oph
as a candle is held in a catndle  stick, as the teeth are held in
the gums.
6 ki, n.; a plume, a feather, some  thing plumose.
o  Li ic pu, n., fr. oki and icpu;
a tassel.
6 ki pa di, v. t., fr. oki and apa  di; to grow up around; said of
oiiyoung saplings or twigs growing
around a parenit tree.
6ii pa. pi, V1. t.; to find, to re  cover something lost.   See   [
197.
kLtsi, n.,?fr. katsi; darkness;
hencee, one of the  names  for
night.-hidi oktsi, this night.
ktsi a  de,  n., adv.; almost
night; almost dark; after sun  set.
o ktsi a du [-rvi], adv.; during
the niglht.
o l tsi a duk [-rilk], n., adv.;
next night; duringtbe approach  iDg [night.
o ktsi se du, n., adv.; last night;
during last night (I 1 256,257).  oktsisedu itaokakoa, before last
night.
o lhti se ru, same as last word.
o nai wu, same as odranu.
6O pa, n.; evening, near sunset.
6' pa de, n., adv.; near evening,
late in the afternoon.
6' pa du, adv.; during the eve —
illg.
6o pa duk, adv.; during the conm  ing evening.
6 pa pe, v. t.; to bedaub slightly,
to bespatter, to stick on in sall
quantities.
O pa ~a,? n.; a tucekinlg.
oo    pa sa kli, n., fr. ol)aa and ku;
r to give a tucking, i. e. to tuck
ini the edges of bedding.
196 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
opa
6 pa 4e, v. t.; to tuck bedding.
pc, v. t.; to contain to holdl, as
a box or vessel.
O pV, n.; tobacco.  This name is
often applied to articles mixed       o
withli, or used in place of, tobacco,
as bark of Cornus or leaves of
uva ursi.
6 pe ha Aa or op(hasa, n.; the
barlk of Cornus stolonifera, or
Cornus sericea(, d(ried an(l pre  pared for  smoking,  "kinneke  nick ".
6 pe hi, v. t., conmp. of ope and hi;
to smoke tobacco or any substi  tute for tobacco.
6 pe i Ai, n., fr. ope and isi; a to  bacco-bag.
6 pe pa Ini tsi, n.,fr. ope and
pamitsi; a board on which to  bacco is cut.  This word is not
formed  according  to ordinary
etymological rules; it was prob  ably originally opeipamitsi.
6 psa 4a, v. t.; to stop, to jar, to
arrest motion; said of an object
against which a person stumbles
in walking.
6 ptsa ti, v. t., to encircle or sur  round closely; to hold by sur  rounding  closely; often used
synoti,y,tiiously with oki.
6 ti, V. i., adj.; cooked; ripened;
scalded.
6 ti he, v. t.; to scald or cook.
6 ti ke, v. t.; to cause to cook or
riplen; to put fruit away to ripton.
6  tslia mi  [-wil, v. i., adj.;
lulUb; paralyzed;.said of the
feeling in the limbs produced by
pressure, and commonly called
" sleep-iness ". —matsi otsliaw its,
my foot is asleep.
6  tslia  mlii ke, v. t.; to make
numb, or "sleepy ".
pout
o  ze, n., f;. thte verb; a drink, a
cpl) of water or other fluid.
6 ze, v. t.; to pour into, to fill or
partly fill a vessel; also to plant
or sow seed.
pa, v. t.; to reduce to powder by
grinding or pounding.
pa, a prefix to verbs, commonly
signifying that the action is per  formed by the hands or is capa  ble of beiDg performed by  the
hands. (f[ 154).
pa d6 pi, adj.,?fr. padui; short
in stature, low-sized.
pa d6 pi di, adj.; very. short.
pa  du  a  du  i, v.,fr. padui;
shortening; decreasingin length.
phi du i, adj.; short.
po i du i di di, n.,fr. padui and
didi; ceremonial processions per  formed by hands or secret orders
of the tribe, in which the per  formers follow one another in a
circle, taking very short steps
and singing as they move. These
processions are commonly called
"iu e d i c i n e  lances" by the
whites; but the Hidatsa apply
a different term to -t dance.
pa  du  i ke, v. t.; to shorten;
shortened.
ph du i ksa, v., adj.; constantly
and excessively short.
pa hi, v.; to sing.
pa  lia du  i, v. i.; becoming
chafed or blistered.
pa li6 hi, v. t.,?fr. liolii; said of
ice when it begins to break in
the spring.
pk liu, v. t.; to spill; imperative,,
form.
197
P. 
HIDATSA DICTlONARY.
pali
pa  liu e, v. t., fr. liu or liue; to
spill out, to pour; to empty by
pouring.
pa ka  d46, v. t.; to stick into or
thrust through, to impale.
pa k.a pi, v. i.,fr. kapi; to be
torn, as in walking through rose   bushes.
pa. ki di, v. t.;      to  push, to sho  ve
away     with  the  hand.
pa  ki Ai, v. t.;       to rub gently in
one  direction with the hand, as
in smoothing the hair or strok   ing a cat.
pa  ki ti, v. t.,[fr. kiti;         to   press
to   sm  oothness,      to make smooth
by pressure with the hands.
pa mi di, v. t.,fr. midi; to twist
with - be hand.
pa mi tsi [-w         i tsi], v. t.,       fr. pni   tsi;  t    o  cut fine b3p  pressing on
with   a knif  e he ld in the h  and, as
in  c      utting up   tob acco or other
m aterial on      a     booard preparatory
to smoki                         ng.
pa m i dsi [-wudsi], v. t.; to
roll utp  with the hands, to roll as
a long strip of cloth or carpet or
bandage is rolled; to fold or
pack by rolling.
pa sa. ki, v. t.; to engirdle or
cover, as with a belt.
pa sA ki, v. t.; to love or like;
possibly a figurative application
of paaaki, to engirdle.
.pa ikfi, v. t.,fr. Aku; to extract
by pushing with the hand. to
shove a cork into a bottle, to
Touslh a bullet out of a wound.
pa' t1, imperative of pa'te.
pa  t,. ii v. t.; to place in con  tact. Seze ipat~aki, kipat~aki, and
m.kipat~aki.
pai' ten v. t.; to turn ovter; to tum  ble over.         
pat
p.i ti, v. i.; to fall down off of, to
drop from a height.
p4. ti he, v. t.; to throw or knock
down; to throw down from.
pa ti ke, v. t.; to cause to fall, to
throw down, to remove a support
and aillow to fall.
pa  t6' ti, v. t., fr. to'ti; to wave
or agitate back afnd forth;  to
wave with the hand; to make a
signal by waving.
pa  tsa li, V. t.,fr. tsake; to cut;
to cut withi  a knlife or instru  nient held in the hland.-patsak,
imperative.
pa tsa' ti, v. t.,fr. tsati; to punc   ture.
pa tsa ti, n.; the west, the land
to the west of the Hidatsa.
phi tsa ti hia, adv.; westward.
pAi o   tsa ti Loa, adv.; at or in the
west.
p4.  tska, adj.; flattened, having
one or more plane surfaces.
pa  tskl. pi, v. t.,fr. tskapi; to
prick with a pin; to stick with
an  instrument  held  in  the
hand.
pa tska., n. proper.   See Local
Naames.
pa tski di a, n., fr. p.tska; cac  tus, particularly  the  different
species of Opuntia or prickly
pear.
pa  tski di  a  6 lia, n., fr. p.a  tskidiaoki and a; the round ca1c  tus of the Upper Missouri, which
bears a pleasant edible fruit.
pa tski di a 6 ki, n.,fr. patski  dia and oki (alluding to the waty
in which the fruit grows on the
plant); the fruit of the round
cactus or  Mammillaria.   Tihe
name ha~s recentltly beenl applied
to figs.
198 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
pat                                  pua
pa tskfiu pi, v. t.,fr. tskupi; to  pi di e, v., adj.; ruffled or frilled,
fold up as a blanket or robe is    ornamented with a ruffled bor  folded.                              der.
pa wi di, same as pamidi.            pi e, v., adj.; smoky; said of atpe, v. t.; to swallow; to take a    mosphere rendered disagreeable
meal in which both liquid and    by smoke.
solid food are served.             pi  C ksa, adj.; constantly and
pe, v. t.; to grind, as coffee in a    disagreeably smoky.
mnlill.                            pi ta kic ti a, adj.  See pitikicpe da  kLu din  ti, n.,fr. pedi,    tia.
aku, and duti; a vulgar name  pi ti ka, num. adj.; ten.
sometimes applied to dogs; of- pi ti kic ti a, num. adj.,fr. piti  fensive epithet applied to per-    ka and ictia; one hundred.
sons whom they wish to liken to  pi ti kic ti a-a ka ko di, numn.
dogs.                                adj.; one thousand.
pe da ku pa' te, n.,fr. pedi,  pli ti, v. t.,fr. kiti or I)akiti; to
aku, and pa'te; a species of bee-    smooth out; to iron clothes.  tle.                                 inapkiti, I smooth. dapkiti [na.],
pe de tska, n.; the large crow    you smooth.   The word  pLkii
or raven.                            alone is rarely heard; for in the
p6 de tska i ta lii" pi Aa, n.;    third person the intensive form,
Phlox aristata.                      kipkiti, is used.
pe de tski;ta p6 di, n.,fr. pe-  p6 a du a dsi, adj.,fr. pI)oadui;
detska and istapedi; a sort of    of a hemispherical or somewh-at
sott hail or snow falling iII glob.    spherical appearance.
ular flakes," mountin snow ".    p6 a du i, adj.; globular, bemip6' di, n.; any offensive matter or    spheric.al, or nodular.
excretion, dregs, ordure.          p6 a du  i ke, v. t.; to make
pli6 ta, n.; nasal mucus.              globular.
pliC6 ta i si, n.; a pocket-hand-  psu,  verbal  root; dislocate;
kerchief.                            knoc(k out of line.
pliu,  verbal  root, or?J?-. liu;  psu li, v. i.; to belch.-mapsuki,
squeeze out and let fall.            I belcl.  (lapsuki, you belch.
pliu ti, v. or verbal root?jfr. pliu  psu kic ti, v. i,.,.fr. psuki; de  or liu; squeeze forward, squeeze    noting desire or readiness.
out.  See kipliuti.                p(ii ti, v. t.,fr. p5u; todislocate.pi, v. t.; to tattoo.                   kipsuti is the more common
pi, verbal root; pene'rate.  As a,   Ioiill.
verb, often used synonymously  ptsfi li, v. t.; to shove or thrust
with ipi.-rnapi, dapi.               forward, to protrude.  See  kipi a, v. i.; crepitate.                ptsuti, which is the form most
pi a ti, v. i.,fr. pia; denoting de-    commonly used.
sire or readiness.                 pu  a, v. i., adj.; to swell; to be
pi da  lipa, v., adj.; light and    swollen, as a bruise; also to rot
thin, as silken goods.               or become putrid.
199 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
pua
pfi a de, v. i., adj.; to be tainted
or sour, but not decidedly rotten.
pu a du i, v. i.; becoming swol  ]en, swelling gradually and con  stantly.
pufi a ke, v.  t.; to cause  to swell,
to iniflict an injury which pro  duces swelling; swollen.
pu  a  Lia,  v. i.;  constantly
swollen.
pu  dsi, v. t.; to mark with fine
indentations closely set; to sew
with fine stit:ches; to wrap fine
thread closely around; to wind
colored horsehairs or porcupine
quills closely around a buckskin
string for ornament.  The object
of this verb is the name of the
material used in wrapping or
marking.
pu  dsi ke, v. t.; to cause to be
finely sewed, indented, or en  wrapped. The object of this verb
is the name of the article on
which the marking or wrapping
is done.
pu e6, n.; visible vapor from warm
water; mist, fog.
pu  c, v. i.; to steam  (said of
water); misty.
pu lia ki, n.; sand.
pu" lia kLi a  t6e, n.,fr. puliaki
and ate; a sand-bar appearing
above the surface of the water;
a sandy island.
pu lii, n.; foam or lather.
pu lii, adj.; freckled, blotched.
pufi lii, v. i.; to foam.
pufi lii ke, v. t.; to causelto foam,
to agitate until a foam is pro  (lucel.
pip pu, t.; a tall species of grass,
the Dakota cedi.       
pfl zi, adj.; spotted, figured, or
striped.                              tl
kah
pit zi ken v. t. to mark or orna  ment with spots or figures; spot  ted.
pfi zi ke, n.; the domestic cat,
an animal not long known to
this tribe. The name is said to
come from  puzi;  but  it was
probably, to some extent, sug  geste.d by  the  Eniglishi termn
pussy-cat.-puzike sounds just
as  the  Hidatsa would be Ioost
likely to corrupt or mispronounce
pussy-cat.,
pfi zi ke da ka, n.; a kitten.
r.  Words heard to begin with the
sound of r mnay be found under
d, these letters being interchange  able. See IT f[ 19, 20, 22.
s.  Words heard to begin with the
sound of s may be found in this
dictionary with ts for their first
letters. See It 17.
ia, n.; same as Aada.
Aa a  ka, n.;. a frog.
49 da, n.; pudendum muliebre.
$a he, n.; the  Cree or  Knisti  neaux Indianils.  Assineboine
"sba-i-yc".  Other tribesof this
region call the Crees by names
wh ich  sound  much like v ahe or
shaiye. There are various ex  planations of the derivations, but
they are all doubtful.
i
200
r.
S. 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
sak
sa ka, n., same as Aaaka; a fiog.
In the first syllable, the vowel is
prolonged or pronounced as if
douibled.
4a lia du sfn ki, n.,fr. Aaki and
aduauki; the knuckles.
sa  ka  pi, adj.; tepid, luke  warlli.
sa ka pi he, v. t.; to make tel)id.
$A. ki, n.; the human hand;
somnetimes  applied to the fore  pIaws of brutes. —aki, a,lone and
in derivatives beginning with it,
is cotnmonly preceded by  the
!~rotiouns. See i.aki.
Aa ki a du tsa mi he, n.; fin  gers.
ia ki do ma ta du, n., fr. Aaki
and duinatadu; the middle fin  ger.
sa ki i 6 ptsa ti, n., fr. saki and
ioptsa-ti; a finger-ring.
sai ki ta ki da ka" he, n.,fr.
saki and  itakidakahe; a span;
a span measure.
isa Ii Lia zi, n., diminutive of sa  ki; the little finger.
ia ki la zi fi ti du, n.; the
third finger. See utidu.
sa ki 6 ptsa ti, a contraction of
&a,kiioptsati.
s;a ki ta, n.; the thumb.
sa kufi pa du i, v. i.; becoming
crooked, warping.
sa lik  pi, adj.; crooked.
sa kfi pi he, v. t.; to distort; to
bend.
a  kai  pi  ke, v. t.; to make
crooked.
sa mi, hypothetical word; aunt.
See isami.
sa pu a, nuni. adj.; seven.
sa pu  a he, v. t.; to make into
seven                           t     -rms  or parts.s.'a pu a he lke, v. t.; to cause to
bet
make into seven; nearly synony  mous with Aapuake.
isa  pu a  ke, v. t.; to separate
into seven parts, to divide into
sevenths; divided into sevenths.
sa pi a pi  ti ka, num. adj.;
sevenity.
$sa sa, v., adj.; to fork or divide;
forked, branched.
sa sa  ka du i v. i.; becoming
dull or blunt.
sa sAa ki, adj.; dull, as an edge  tool.
sa sfa ki he, v. t.; to tickle.-ni  asisukim,wits, I s ill tickle you.
;a  sfi ki Ike, v. t.; to cause to be
dull.
ase, demonst. pron.; that one, that
tlithing.-sets, that is he, th.at is
the very one.
i6, du, adv., fr. ~e and du; there;
then; at that very time or place.
As a suffix, this word is used to
denote time, as the English last
or ago. (If 255).
s6, i Ake, adv., fr. Ae and iske;
just as directed, just as ordered.
6 L  ka, adj., fr. se and ka; of the
same size as something  previ  ously described.
s6 lio a, adv., fr. Se and koa;
there, at that very place.
$6 ru, adv., same as sedu.
cs  sa, adj., adv., fr. se and isa or
ise; same as Aege.
s sc, adj., adv.; resembling some  thing previously described, "just
like that ".
s6e sets, a foim of the last word
used when it is desired to agree
with some particular version of
a story; "it is just as you say ".
s6 ta, adv.,';not the samle as
that 7t ";not just that "'. —et'~ts.
$~ tsa ki, verbl or phrase usedl as
201 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
Aia
a, pronoun; that alone; he or
she unaided or unaccompanied.
si a, synonymous with se.  Possi  bly the latter is a contraction.
Ai a ka.  See Aeka, siakats.
Ai di, adj.; tawny, dull yellow.
Ai di lie, v. t.; to make tawny, to
color a dull yellow.
Ai di Ai, v. i.,f. disi; to hasten,
to be in a hurry.-disidisi, hurry
thou.
Ai di si ke, v. t.; to cause to
hurry, to make hasten.
~i k.La ka, n.; a young man.
Ai ki a, adj.; curly, as the hair
of a t)bufftlo; said also of tangled
underwood.
;I ki he, v. t.; to curl.
%I pa, n.; the bowels.
Ai pe, adv.; tangled, hard to pen  etratte; said of bad-lands, dense
woods, etc.
i pi, adj.; black, pure black.
;i pi he, v. t.; to blacken; to ap  l)ly powdered charcoal.
4i pi;a, adj., fr. sipi and isa;
blackish; of a very dark blue,
brown, or other color scarcel s
distinguishable from black; of  ten applied to pure black.
Ai pi;a de, adj.; almost black,
distinguishable from black, but
approa,ching it.
Ai pi sa dsa du i, v. i.; becom  ing dark, -,s the face from expos  ure to weather.
4i pi sa  dsi, adj.; resembling
black, seeming to be blackish.
;i pi sa dsi he, v. t.; to darken,
to deepen or darken the color.
Ai pi sa dsi ke, v. t.; to dye of
a darkish color.
si pi sa du i, v. i.; darkening,
be         coolin blaidkish  (ras irou                    (21  lowved to cool); said wheu re
p)orting the progress of an oper  ation  for dyeing of a blackish
color.
Ai pi;a lie, v. t.; to niake very
dark; to        e        n eusything of a black
or blackish color.
i ta, hl)o           ypothetic(a l. See  isita.
tke, v.;  commaandd; direct.
sku, verbal ioot; fource       through,
e xtract.
s6 ki, adj.; baroad; often used for
dull.  See  Atguki.
;-j a, adj, adv.; slow; slowly.
sfu a ha, adv.; slowly.
sfi a  ke, v. t.; to cause to move
slowlb', to retard motion.
su e, v. t.; to spit.
su i, n.; unmelted fat, adipose
tissue.
si lia, perhaps  hypothetical; a
dog, a beast of burden; same as
Dakota,  Aunka; found in  the
words itsuaunka, itaauka, niaau  ka,, etc.
su l-i adj.; same as Aoki.
ta, adv.; only, but;  commonly
pronounced as if suffixed.
th or ta', an adverb and adverb  ial suffix denoting negation; not.
As it conimonly terminates a
sentence, it is often beard pro  nounced tats. Ex.-itskits, it is
-large enough. itskitats, it is not
large enough. (IT 260).
ta, a suffix to nouns and pronouns
denoting possession, particularly
acquired  or transferable posses  sioux. (1T 85).
ta, prep.; toward, in the direction
of, etc.; suffixed to nouns, it
forms adverbs. (f[ 261).
202
ta
t. 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
tip
ta  pa  ta, adv.; in what  direc  tion,  whlither.- tapata  daide,
where are,y ou going?
ta p6,, interrog. pron.; who.
ta p   tI lta, interrog. poss. pron.;
whose.
ta p46 ta, same as tapeita.
ta pi, verbal root; press, squeeze.
See dutal)i, etc.
ta ta, adv.; referring to past time
not very distant; a short time
ago, some time ago.
ta ta ko a, adv.; at or during a
past period not very distant.
ta tsa dsi, adj.,fr. tatsi; thick  ish. appearing to be thick.
ta tsa du i, v.; thickening.
t. tsi, adj.; thick, as cloth, etc.;
also used to express  total ob.
scurity of the sky.  See  apalii  tatsi.
t.  tsi  ke, v.  t.;  to  thicken;
thickened.
ta wi fii, same as tamulii.
te, v., ad(j.; dead.- tets, he is dead.
te du  ti [-ruti], n.; a prairie
terrace; a low open plain.
t6  he,  v.; to die.-temats, I am
diyinig. temamits, I will die.
ti, a suffix to verbs denoting read  iness or desire to pertform an ac  tion; to be about to
ti a, adv., same as tie.
ti di a, v. i.; to run.
ti di e ke, v. t.; to cause to run;
to race a horse.
ti e, n., adv.; a long time; long
continuing.
ti e duk [-ruk], adv.; referring
to distant futurity.
ti e hi  duk,  adv.; when a dis  ralnt future time~ shall arrive.
ti pi a, n.; mludl.
ti pi a da zi.  See Local Names.
ti pi  a  tsa ki, v. adj.,fr. tipia
ta
ta, v. i. and t.; to kill; to be
killed.
ta. da to di [-la-], to discharge
a gun.
ta d6, v.i.; almost killed; nearly
dead.
ta di [-ri], v. t.; to cross over, to
go from one side to the other;
to row or swim across a stream.
td du, hypothetical.  See italdu.
ta h6, v. t.,fr. ta; to kill; he
kills.-tamats, I kill.  tadats,
you kill. tahets, lie kills.
ta hfiu', 21., v.; thunder; to thun  der.  Like most other tribes of
the plains the Hidatsat attribute
thunder to the movements of a
great bird.
ta hfi i da k a, n., fr. tahu' and
idaka; low rumblings of thun  d(ler following a loud )peal.
ta, hfi i ki sis, n. See Local
Names.
t'd  ka,  intertrog. pron.;  what;
which.
ta ha dgt [-ra], what do you
say.
ts ia ta, inter. adv.,fr. talla; in
what direction, whither.-tai)ata
and  t6ta are synonyms more
commonly emplloyed.
t. ki, adj.; white.  See ataki and
ili6taki.
ta mu  a [tabua], v., fr. niua;
to make a loud ringing sound, to
be ringing, to ring.
la mfi lii, adj.; very fine, mi  nute.
ta mn fihi di, adj.; exceedingly
fine, very miniute.
ta, pa, interrog. pron.; what?
what is it                                                    a.
ta pta, adj.; soft, easily brokeni or
yie!(ilint,.
t? pgt i, adj,~ same as t~apt~.
203 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
tip
and tsaki; soiled with imiud, be  spattered with mutd.
ti pi ai  tsa ki  Le, v. t.; to
cause to be soiled withl muud.
ti Aa or ti Ae, adj., adv.; Iar, dis.
taut; to a distance.
ti tsa du i, v. i.,fr. titsi  thlick  ening, increasing ill diatme  ter.
ti tsi, adj.; thick, as a fat or
swollen limb or the truiik of.  large tree; refers to ditLmeters
of cylindrical bodlies.
ti tsi ke, v. t.; to thicken, to in
crease in diameter; thickened.
ti tsi ksa, adj.; thick excessive  ly and habitually, as a perroa  n,.ntly swollen limb.
to, ijterrog. adv. -nd pron.; what t
place? what person? what kind
or colo      r?
t6 du [-ru], adv.,fr. to and du;
in what place? wherein? where
tsa
ability or uncertainty; hence, it
is often used interrogatively and
i s  frequently fotllowea d by tmadi  etsr I suppose.
t6 ka, adv., fr. to  and ka; where   -
to  we thre,? whiither g
t6 La ta or   t6 kta, synoyrimous
with  toka.-t6katadade  [tokta  rorble, toktalale], wh ere     are you
going?
16 pa, tum. adj.; four.
be c   t            t to   pa he, v.. and t.;    to part in
l'oui-.
to  pa he   ke, v. t.; to cause  t  o
pa,rt in lour.
t6 pa  lie, v. t.; to divside into
fotur  i)arts;  divided  into  four
parts.
to pbra    i ti ka,  n., adj., f. to pa
and           t)itika;  f si ty.
t6;a, interrog. adv., fr. to; how
in what mnainner?
to;, interroq. adv.; whly? where  tore?
t6 ta, intert-og. adv.,fr. to; in
whatt  direction? toward what
pla.ee? —t6tat(lade [totarade, to  talale], in what direction are you
going?
to' ti, verb)al root; implying sud  den, repeated reversion of mo  tionI. See datolti, duto'ti, patol  ti, etc.
tsa, adj.; raw, uncooked.
tsa, verbal root; separate, divide.
tsat da, n.; grealse, oil.
tsai da, v. or verbal root; slide,
rnove smoothly.
tsa  da  ke, v. t.; to make slide,
to cause to assist to slide.
tsa dfi tsa ki, adj.,fr. tsada,
grea~se, a~nd tsaki; soiled with
grease.
tsa hi du mni di,- v. i.,fr. dumi  di; to sufl~r irom vertigo.
at!
to ha dsa du i, v. i.,fr. tohadsi;
assuming a bluish hue.
t6 ha dsi, adj.; having a bluish
or implure blue color.
t6 ha dsi ke, v. t.; to dye aii im  pure blue color.
16  ha  du  i, v. i.; assuming a
blue color.
t6 hi, adj.; blue; denotes pure or
positive blues, sky-blue, ultra  iiiarivhe.
t6 hi ke, v. t.; to dye anything
a pure blue.
t6 hi Aa, adj.,fr. tohi and iba; of
a color  allied                     to blue; green.
See mikaltohiaa.
t6 hi Aa ke, v. t.; to dye ally  thing green or other color allied
to blue.
tok, adv.; it is used after sen  tences and verbs to denote prob
204 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
tsa  kin, n.; something inferior
or worthless, a nuisance.
tsa mak, a form of tsame, us      ed
iii the sense of a noun.-tsamak
isiats, its being    hot is ba(ld   i. e.,
th     e he at is oppressive.
tsa me'         [-we] adj.; hot, very
warn.-tsaw6ts, i  t is p hot.
tsa md  a te [-we-], v. i.,   r.
mtsaane and ate; to p erspire.
tsa ma he, v7. t.; to heat.
tsa  t4 lie, v. t., to make  hot, to
chsi.ige from hot to cold; heated.
wtsa  mt    kta, adj.; constantly
warm; very wa,rm.
tsa  mi  tsa dsi  [-Wu-], adj.,
Jr. ir d utsamuti; straightish, nearly
s t r a  i g 1 t or a.ppearing to be
straight.
tsa mu  tsa du i, v. i.; straight'
ecuing.
tsa mu tsi [-wu-], adj.;
straight.
tsa  muf  tsi  de, adj.; almost
st,raight.
tsa mfi tsi he, v. t.; to straighteu.
tsa muf tsi lie, v. t.; to straight.
eii; straightened(.
tsat pi, adj.; puckered, wrinkled.
tsa ti, v., arIj.; smoothed; oiled;
l)olishe(l.
tsa' ti, verbal root, or fr. tsa;
stick, impale.
tsi ti ke, v. t.,fr. tsati; to pol  ish.
tsa tse or tsfitsi or saitsi, n.;
a species of go.shawk or talcon,
known oii the Upper  Missouri
as thie " spotted eagle ".
tsa tit i  ta  ma  pa, n.; the
pasque flower or l)ulsatilla.
tsa  tsfu kii adj., fr. tsuki  and
~. tsa; hard to b~rea~k, not brittle.
tsa tsuJ ki ke, v. t.; to render
hard; hardeneed.
tsa ka  dsi, adj.,fr. ts,aki; mnod- 
erately good; rather pretty.
tsa  ka  dsi ke, v. t.; to make
moderately good.
tsa  ka  du i, v. i.; improving,
becoming good. 
tsa kak', interj.; an expression                             D
of contempt or disapprobation.
tsa kLa Lka, n.; a bird.
tsa ka ka da  lia, n.; an egg;
eggs.
tsa ka ka hi, n.,fr. tsakaka and
hi; feathiers, any portion of a
bird's plumage.
tsa ka k a i         ki Ai, n.; a bird's
nest.
tsa ke or tsakLi, modified verbal
root; to cause to be divided.
tsa li, v. i., adj.; to be stalined
with -; to be rendered offeni  sive; suffixed to nouns it forms
adjectives; as amatsaki, tsadat  saki., et al.
isa  ki  or tsakits or sakits,
adj.; good;  I)retty; often ac  centell o(  last syllable.
ts.i ki, v.; alone, by itself; used
only with pronouns.  See itsaki
mitsaki and Aetsa.ki.
tsa  kic ti, adj.,fr. tsalii; very
good; very beautiful.-tsakicti  dIi dlenotes a still higher degree
of excellence than tsakicti.
tsa lii hai, adv.; quiet, quietly.
tsa ki ha  mak,  v. comp., im-.
perative,fr. tsa.iiha and amak;
sit quietly, stay quiet.
tsa lIi he, v., adv.,fr. tsaki; well,
in a satisfactory manner; to act
well.
tsa ki ke, v. t.,fr. tsaki; to im  prove    to make  ood, to cure a
disease; imuprovfed, cured, re  stored. —kits~akike is more: fre  quently emiployed.
205
tsa
tsa 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
hsi k6 a  ke, v. t.; to sweeten;
sweetened.
tsi mu  a [-bua], v. i. and 4.,fr.
mua; to jingle, as metallic pend  ants, steel chains, etc.
tsi pa, i.; a marmot; a prairie  dlog.
tsi pa lu su ti, n.; the burrow  i ng owl, which dwells along with
the prairie-dog.
tsi pa  tso pe, n.,fr. tsipa and
. tsope; the stril)ed marmiot, Sper  mophilus tridecem-lineatus.
tsi pi, v. i.; to sink, to sink in
water.
tss  pi  de, v. i.; almost sunken,
sinking but rescued in time.
tsi pi ke, v. t.; to cause to sink;
to scuttle, overload, or upset  a
boat and make it sink.
tsi pi  ti, v..,fr. tslpi; to be in
a condition to sink, or ready to
sink; said if something falls on
the surface of the water, and it
is yet uncertain whether it will
sink or not; said of a river-bank
which is being gradually washed
away.
tsi pi ti de, v., adj.; nearly in at
position to fall upon water; said
of portions of a river bluff that
are cracked off and ready to top  ple, or of anything in danger of
falling on water.
tsi pil ti ke, v. t.; to cause to
fall upon water; to place in a
condition favorable to sinking.
tsi ta, n.; the tail of a quadru  ped.
tsi ta si pi sa, n.,fr. tsita and
gipiga; the black tailed deer, Cer  vus macrotis.
tsi ta ta ki, n., fr. tsita and ta  ki; the white-tailed deer, Cervus
virgini~anus.
tsi, n., hypothetical word; foot;
hind paw.  See itsi, ditsi, and
matsi.
tsi, a prefix to verbs denoting
a low or jingling sound.  See
tsimua and tsitside.
tsi.  See tsidi.
tsi dfa dsi, adj.,fr. tsidi; yellow  ish; orange-colored.
tsi dfai du i, v. i.; becoming yel  low.
tsi di, adj.;  yellow.   In  com  pound words, this is often repre.
sented by its first syllable' tsi',
which may be a word wherefrom
tsidi is derived.
tsi di a, same as tsidie.
tsi di ai  du  i, v. i.; becoming
cold.
tsi di e or tsi di  ets, adj.;
cold; refers chiefly to reduction
of temperature in inorganic
bodies.
tsi di e,,; cold weather; winter
is sometimes so called.
tsi di e ke, v. t.; to cause to be
cold; chilled.
tsi di ke, v. t.,.fr. tsidi; to dye
of a yellow color.
tsi di se p, adj.,fr. tsidi and
sipi; bay; said in describing
horses.
tsi k6 a, adj.; having a marked
but not unpleasant taste, sweet,
salty, savory.
tsi k6 a de, adj.; almost salty,
having a slight saline taste; said
of such " alkali springs" and
creeks as have water not very
strong or unpalatable.
tsi klo a dsi, adj.; sweetish.
tsi ko  ai du i, v.i.; becoming
sweet; said  of coffee wh ich        is
being alter na[tely sweetened
and tasted.
206
tsi
tsi 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
tsi
tsi tsi de, v. i., fr. tsi and ide;
to whisper.
tsi tska, n.; the' prairie-hen"
of Western Dakota-the sharp  ta;iled grouse, Pedio,ecetes phasia  nellus var. columbianus.
tsi tsh-a do ipa  ka, n.,.f,. tsi  tska and dolipaka; the Prairie  hen People, one of the heredi  tary bands or totems of the Hi  datsa tribe.
tsi tska ic ti a, n.,fr. tsitska
and i -tia; the sage-hen, Centtro  cercus urophasianus.
tsi tii ki, adj.; turned up, pugged.
tsk.i pi,  verbal root;  denotes
pressure  on  a small surface;
pinch, squeeze, poke.
tskat ti, verbal root; pass or force
through an aperture.
tski  ti,  verbal root;  denotes
pressure on a small surface from
different directions; strangle,
shear, etc.
tskli pi, verbal root; bend, fold,
double. See datskupi and pa  tskupi.
ts6 hi, adj.; pointed, tapering.
ts6 hi ke, v. t.; to point, to taper.
ts6 ka du i, v. i., fr. tsoki; be  coming  hard, soliditfying, con  gealing.
ts6  ki,  adj.;  hard;  resisting
pressure,  but not  necessarily
hard to break.
ts6 ki he, v. i. and t.; to harden.
ts6  ki  ke, v. t.; to harden by
baling or otherwise; hardened
by any obvious cause or process.
ts6 pe, v. i.; to make a chirping
or smacking sound.
tsu,  n.; half;  side;  division;
coin partinent.
tsu, adj. (radicle); smooth, flat.
tsiI a, adj.; narrow.
as&i
tsui a  de,  adj.; almost narrow
enough.
tsu af dsi, adj.; narrowish, seem  ingly narrow.
tsu a he, adj.,?fr. tsua  synony  mous with tsohi, which may be
a contraction of tsuahe.
tsu a ke, v. t.; to tnake nairow.
tsu.  tia, n.; brains.
tsu he, v. t.,fr. tsu; to divide
into two parts; to halve.
tsui i ta do ta du, n., adv.,.fr.
itadotadu; bottom-land on the
near side of a river; in the bot  tom lan.ud, etc.
tsu i ta d6 ta ko a [-Iota-],
adv.; at or on the portionl (f
bottom-land or flood-plaiu on the
near side of the river, ion the
point this side ".
tsu i ta 6 ka du [-ru], n., adv.,
p r. itaokadu; the part of the bot  tom-land beyond a river; on the
opposite side of the river in the
bottom.
tsu i ta 6 ka  klio a, adv.; at or
in the bottom  on the opposite
side   of  a river.
tsuf lia, adj.;  fiat,  as l ow ground.
tsfi li a, adv.; at or in the bottom  land.
tsfu ki, adj., same as tsoki.
ts-t ta, n., adv.; a half; the side
of a house; an apartment; in
an apartment.
tsft ta he, v. t.; to break into
halves.
tsui ta ka, adv.; within a, half or
portion; in one side.
tsfl ta ta, adv.; toward one side;
toward one half or portion.
tsu tsft!i, q. i.; to rattle or
stamp loudly.
ash tsu te, adj.; smooth to the
touch~, soft; also tsutsulti.
207 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
filii
u a.ka,  n.,?fr. ua and ika; a
man's brotherfs wife.
nI a ki, n.; tanything used as bed  dinig, except a pillow;  a  mat  tress, sheet,  blanket, robe, or
skini used as bedding.
u   a  ki  ta tsi, n.,fr. unaki and
tatsi; a mattress; a tick.
u  a skSa, v. i. and t.,fr. na; to
envy habitually, to be of an en   vious disposition.
u ai ti, v. t.; to ridicule.
u ta  ti kla, v. t.; to ridicule nn.
reasonably or habitually.
u  dsa du i, v. i.; drying, becom.
ing dry.
ut  dsi, adj.; dry, devoid of moist   ure; thirsty.
u  dsi de, adj.; nearly dry.
u(  dsi  ke,  to cause to  dry, to
pla(e before a fire to dry; dried.
u  e, v. i.; to boil.  See mnidlue.
fi e he, v. t.; to boil i be boils.
fi e tsa, n.; metal of any  kind;
coin; recently applied to money
of any descriptionl and to the
unit of our money, a dollar.   uetsa duetsa [luetsa], one dollar.
uetsa topa, four dollars.  utetsa
itatsuhe, half a dollar.
fi e  tsa hi;i" si, n. (hisisi, red.
dish); copper.
u e tsa i du  ti, n.,f. uetsa and
iduti; a bridle-bit.
u e tsa kla' ti, n. (kw'ti, true);
gold.
u e tsa ma i kta de", n.,fr.
uetsa and maikta(le; a nail.
u e tsa si di, n. (Aidi, tawny);
brass.
u  e  tsa  Si pi sa,  n. (sipis,a,
black);    irou.
ulii, n.; Amlerican antelope.
u ii ma du ti, n., lit., antelope
food; the prairie ssags, Artemisia.
t.'d $e, 2.; the large wolf.
tse sa do  lipa ka [-no-], n.,
lit., Wo~' People; the Pawnee
fIndians.
t$C'.sa  ma  ai, n., fr. tAeA, and
masi; a gray blanket.
ti a, interrog. adv.; nearly syn  onymous with to.
tui a ka, itterrog. adj.,fr. tua;
how much? how many?
ta a ka duk, adv., fr. tuaka and
duk;  how  long  hence?  how
ma.ny days or nights hence?
tia a ka ruk, adv., same as tua  kaduik.
ta a Ira se du [-ru], interrog.
adv.,fr. tuaka and Aedu; how
loig Iago? how many days ago?
tufi  a  kats, when tuaka stands
alone as atni interrogative it takes
this form.
t-l a  mi, interrog. adv.,fr. tua
and mi; how many                         I
ti a  wits, same as tuami, with
terminal' ts 7.
it, v.; to wound; to be wounded.
u  ai  v. t.; to envy; he envies.  amlts, I envy. admits, you envy.
unats, he envies.
u  a, n.; a wife, a wife by actual
marriage; not perfectly synony  mous with itadamia.
a a he, v. t.; to marry.  (~[ 203).
u  a  h,6  4e, v. t.; to cause to
marry, to give or take in mar  riage; said usually of the female.
a  ke, v. t.; to cause to be a
wife; married.
u a lipi, v. t.; to smash by shoot  ing.
208
tA,6
U. 
HIDATSA DICTIONARY.
U i, n.; paint for the face, rouge,
vermilion. 
U I Ai, n.,fr. ui and isi; a paint  bag, a small embroidered bag for
holding vermilion or other paint
for the face.
fi ka ki, v. i.,?fr. kaki; to roll,
as a horse rolls himself on the
ground.
U  lka ta ka-zi, n.  See Local
Names.
fi ka ta ki, n., fr. uki and ataki;
a white earth which these In  dians use  in decorating their
bodies.
fi ki, n.; indurated clay, compact
earth of uniform appearance.
ki-a ta ki, same as ukataki.
ai ma  ta,  n.; the south, land
south of the Hidatsa hunting  grounds.
ta ma  ta lia, adv.; toward the
south.
ma  ta ko  a, ad?.; at the
south.
ii ma  ta ta, adv.; southward,
looking or moving south.
a;a ti, n.; east, land east of the
Hidatsa country.
a  Aa ti lia, adv.; eastward, to  ward the east.
fi sa ti ko a, adv.; at the east,
in the east.
14
h 4a ti ta, adv.; facing the
east.
4 si, n.; the anal region.
ti, n.; base, bottom; root or
larger extremity.
fi ti lia, adv.; toward the base or
bottom; qualifies verbs denoting
motion.
g   ti dui, adv.; in the base, bot  tom, or root.
fa ti ko a, adv.; at the base.  uti  koa and utidu are often used in
the sense of near, beside, or ad joining.
t tsi tsa, n.; a variety of change  able weasel, or so-called a er  mine ".
ft zi a, v. t.; to pay a visit; to
meet, to encounter.
w.  Words he   ard to   begin with
the sound of w may be found
under m. (f[ IT 5, 20, 21).
209
if, i
z
W.
Z.
z. No words have been noted as
beginning with z. 
LOCAL NAMES.
The names of some localities known to the tribe are here given to
gether for convenience of reference.
a di sa i ta pa" his,fr. adisa,
ita, and pahi; Song of the -Ravens
or Singing-place of the Ravens; a
high butte situated between the
Missouri an d Little Missouri
Rivers, west of Fort Berthold.
a ma  de ta ku si" dis,fr. ama  deta, akui a nd AidiA;: Tawny
Bluff; a prominent river bluff on
the south side of the Missouri,
about  fifteen miles below  the
mouth of the Yellowstone.
a ma de ta ma pa" his,fr.
amadeta and mapahi; Song Bluoff;
a prominent point on the Mis  souri, below the last.
a ma ic pu tsa sas,fi. amaicpu
and Aasa; Forked Hill-top; a high
butte south of the Missouri in
the neighborhood of the upper
Great Bend.
a ma mak i mna ka da, Lands
Crossing One Another; the lower
Great Bend of the Missouri, near
Fort Thompson. The derivation
is indicated in the word maki  makadaha, which see.
a  ma  ti, The Missouri River.
Some of the tribe say that the
name comes from ama, earth  and
alludes to its muddiness; others
think it is from matr, a boat, and
alludes to its navigability.
a ma" ti a du sa sas,fr. amati
and adu2 a~a; Fork of the Mlis  souri; Milk River is sometimes
so called.
210
a mai ti ka za,fr. amati and
kaza; Little llissouri River. The
English name is a literal transla  tion of the HIidatsa.
a  ma  ti pa" du is,fr. amati
and padui; Short  1iissouri;  a
small stream entering the Mis  souri from the south, above Fort
Berthold.
a nma  tsi di o du tsi [-tsis],
fr. amatsidi and odutsi; Ochre
lMine; a place southeast of the
mouth of the Yellowstone, where
a yellow mineral pigment is ob  tained.
a pa di a zis, fr. apadi and azi;
Porcupine River; a stream enter ing the Missouri in Montana Ter  ritory.
dh lipi tsa" tu a du a ma  kis
[na-],fr. dalipitsi, atu, ad(u, and
amaki; Place WVhere the Beards
Head Sits; a high hill rising from
the  plateau, southeast of Fort Bu  ford and north of the Little Mis  souri.
da lips tsi a du a ma" kis,
fr. dalipitsi, adu, and amaki;
Place lVhere the Bear Sits; the
termination of a  mountainous
ridge, immediately opposite the
mouth of Milk River, Montana.
da lipi tsi a zis,; Bear River;
Milk River, Montana.
da'i ta a  zi [-zisj],fr. da'ta and
azi; Heart River;  the Heart
River, which  enters the  Mis
The translations are in italics. 
NAM ES.
ma  o  de  Aa a  zi [-ne-], fr.
maodesa and azi; Nothing River
or Nameless River; an affluent of
the Little Missouri, entering the
latter about one hundred miles
above its mouth.
ma p6 ]ksa a ti, fr. mapokra
and ati; Snake House; a cave
near the Missouri River, on the
north or left bank, close to Snake
Creek.  It is said, at some sea   sons, to swarm with serpents.
ma  p6 ksa a  ti a  zi [-zi4],
Snake House River.  So called
by these Indians; but Lewis and
Clarke have given the name as
"Snake Creek ", and it has been
thus known to the whites ever
since. It enters the Missouri
five miles east of Fort Steven   son, Dakota Territory.
ma Au" ka ak Au a ma ii;, fr.
magukaakgu and amagi; Earth.
trap, or Eagle-trap, of Coral Ber  ry; a point on the left bank of
the Missouri, immediately below
the upper Great Bend.
mn   ta ki a  zi4, Dish River;
Platte River, Nebraska.         /
Tma  tsu a  zi [-zis],fr. matsu
and azi; Cherry River; a stream
which enters the Little Missouri
from the east, above the maode  gaazig.
ma u" pa ki hfi pa i ki4,fr.
maupnaki, hupa, and isis; Like
the Handle of a Mallet; a promi  nent bluff on the south side of
the Missouri, nearly opposite the
mouth of upper Knife River.
mi  da i Ai a zis,fr. midaisi and
azi; Bark River; a stream which
enters  the  Missouri from  the
south above the Yellowstonle.
mi   d.  tsa pi a zis,fr. mida tsapi and azi; Powder River or
LOCAL
souri from the west, above Fort
Rice.
d6 zi a zi [neziazi;],fr. dezi
and azi; Tongue River; the
Tongue River, a branch of the
Yellowstone.
do ki da lii ta pa hi; [Dno-],
fr. dokidalii, ita, and pahi; Sing   ing of the Ghosts, or WTiere the
Ghosts Sing; a high pinnacle of
red rocks about mid-way between
the Little Missouri and Yellow  stone Rivers near the point of
greatest proximity of the two
streams.
hi da tsa, formerly the principal
village of this tribe when they
dwelt on Knife River.
hi da tsa ti,fr. hidatsa and ati;
Dwelling of the Hidatsa Indians;
the present village of the tribe
at Fort Berthold.
lia lia" tu a a du ta hes,fr.
lialiatua, adlu, and tahe; Whtere
the Chippeway was Killed; a lo  cality near the foot of the upper
Great Bend of the Missouri.
i liic ti" a a du ta lie,  Whtere
Big Forehead was Killed;  the
Tobacco Garden bottom, at the
mouth of Tobacco Garden Creek.
i te ma tse e tsi;,fr. ite and ma  tseetsi; Face of the Chief; the
Black Hills of Dakota.
ma e tsi;a zi;,fr. maetsi and
azi; Knife River; a name ap  plied to two streams, one of
which enters the Missouri from
the north, above Fort Berthold,
and the other from the south, be low    that place.
ma ka di sta ti, fr. makadista
and ati; House of the Infants, a
cavern near the old villages on
Knifb River, supposed to be in habited by mysterious infants.
211 
NAMES.
n mli tsi a da zi [mitsianazi],
prob. fr. mi', tsi or tsidi, and azi;
the Yellowstone River.
mi tsi X ta mi da ksik, fr.
mitsi, ita, and midaksi; Pali  sade of the Wedge; a high coni  cal hill in the valley of the Lit  tle Missouri, some eighty miles
southeast of the mouth of the
Ye]lowstone; a prominent land   mark.
pa tska.,fr. patska,; the Coteau
of the Missouri.
pe de tski" lii i ta a ma Ai;,
Eagle-trap of Crow-(Crop) Breast;
the bottom-land in the neighbor  hood of Dry Fork, on the road
between Forts Buford and Ste   venson.
ta hu i lki 4i4,fr. tahu and iki  asi; Nest of the Thunder; a prom  inent flat-topped hill lying south
of the -lissouri, near the anmaic.
pusasaA.
ti pi a a  zis, or tipianazis,
M ud  River;  the  Big Muddy
River, a stream flowing from the
north and entering the Missouri
about twenty miles west of Fort
Buford.
ci ka ta kam zis, fr. ukiataki and
azi;  White-earth  River.   The
White. Earth  River enters the
Missouri from the north in W.
long. 1020 30' (nearly); it was
formerly  the extreme  western
boundary of  Minnesota Terri   tory.
Dust River; the branch of the
Yellowstone now known as Pow  der River.
ml  di ho pa  [bidi-],fr. midi
and hopa; Sacred, Medicine, or
Mysterious Water; the Minne  wakan or Devil's Lake, in north  ern Dakota.
ni di o da mu a ziA [bidio  nawuazi], fr. miqai, odamu,
and azi; River waith Deep Spot or
Channel.   Som e say that this
name signifies the River  that
Rises, or River that Deepens, and
such may be liberal translations
of the word; hence the English
names of Rising-water and Tide  water Creek, and the French
L'eau-qui-mont.  This stream en  ters the Missouri from the north,
about twenty-five miles west of
the Grosventre village.
mi dl.i a zi4, fr. midi, isia, and
azi;  Bad  WTVater  River;  the
Muddy, a stream flowing from
the north and entering the Mis  souri about twenty-five miles
east of Fort Buford.
nli di t6 hi a zi;, fr. midi, tohi~
and azi; Blue Water River; a
creek near Fort Berthold to the
west.
mit e a {i di ke a zi;,fr. mi  teatadike and azi; Box Elder
River;  a stream entering the
Missouri from the south, about
thirty miles below the mouth of
the Yellowstone.
212 
0
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
213-214  
ENGLISH-IIIDATSA VOCABULARY.
ANUS.
AFRAID, adv., kie, kiets.
AFTER, adj., ipita, ipitakoa.
AFTERNOON, n., midimapedupahi.
daksipi.
AFTERWARDS, adv., ipitadu.
AGITATE, V. t., liakahe.
AGo, adv., sedu, tata, tatakoa. See
How andI LONG.
AHEAD, adv., itekoa, itsika.
ALIKE, adv., maksese, maksesadsi,
makkeia.  See EQUAL.
ALIVE, adj., t6tats, hidakatsa.
ALL, a(c., etsa, liakaheta.
ALOFT, adv., hakoka.
ALONE, adv., itsaki, mitsaki, Aetsa.
ki, etc.
ALSO, adv., isa.
ALTER V. t.`, kiihake, ihake.
A3MERICAN, n., maetsiietia.
AMIDST, prep., dumatadu [nuwa.
taru].
A-PLE, adj., itski, itskits.
ANECDOTE, n., mazi.
ANGEr~, v. t., adeheke, da'ta isiake.
ANGLE, n., adupaii.
ANGLE, V. i., muakikidi, muadutsi.
ANGRY, adj., adehe, kiadehe.
ANNIHILATE, V. t., kidesake.
ANOTHER, n., iha, aduihd.
ANT, it., maposakiditi.
ANTELOPE, n., ulii.
ANTIQUATE, v. t., liieke, kiliieke.
ANTLER, n., aziliami.
ANUS, n., uzi.
ABASE, V. t., isiake.
ABASH, V. t., itodike, kiitodike.
AB.ATING, pvar-., kadiatadui.
ABDOMiEN, n1., edi.
ABED, adv., maadluliapikoa.
ABJECT, adj., adiaaadsi kalti.
ABOARD, adv., matikoa, mati ama  hoka.
ABODE, n., ati, atike.
ABOLISH, V. t., kidesake.
ABOVE, pr., adv., aka, akoka.
ABRIDGE, V. t., kipaduike.
ABSORB, V. t., daliupi, liupi, kida  liupe.
ACCELERATE, V. t., kihitake.
ACCELERATING, par., hitadui.
AC,EPT, v. t., dutse.
ACCOMPANY, v. t., ikupa, ikupa de.
ACCOMPLISHED, par., komi, kiko  mike.
ACETABULUM, n., idikiutioki.
ACHE, V. i., ade, kiadA.
ADD, V. t., ikupake.
ADHERE, V. i., kaditskapa.
ADJUST, V. t., kikaa.
ADMIIRE, V. t., kideta, kidetadsi,
ite.
ADULTR, n., maictia.
ADVANCE, V. t., kiitsikake.
AFLOAT, adv., dakapilii.
NOTE.-There are some Hidatsa words in this section which are not contained in the
Dictionary proper. In such words, the accent is indicated; in the others, as a rule, it
is not.
215
ABASE.
A. 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
APART.
APART, adj., ihadu, ih4koa, maki  hita.
APEX, n., icpu, aduicpu.
APPEAR, V. i., ate, kiate.
APPROACH, V. t., kiatseke.
APRON,  n.,  isutip.aki,  maisuti  paaki.
AQUEOUS, adj., miditsi.
ARE, V., matu.
ARICKAREE  INDIANS,  n., adaka  daho.
ARISE, V. i., iduhi, kidulha, kiduhe.
ARISEN, part., kiduhi.
ARM, n., ada, adaaduictia.
AROUND, adv., ialialia.
AROUSE, V. t., itsihe.
ARRANGE, V. t., kiksa.
ARROW, n., ita, maita.
ARROW-CASE, n., maitaisi.
ARROW-HEAD, n., itahi', maitahi'.
ARROW-QUILLS, n., itaisu, maita  iu. 
ARTEMISIA  n., iliokataki-akusipi  Aa. See SAGE.
ARTICHOKE, n., kaksa.
ASH, n., mispa. 
ASHAMED, adj., itodi, itodike.
ASHES, n., midatsapi.
ASLEEP, adj., hidami.
ASSINNEBOINE INDIANS, i., hidu  idi. 
AT, prep., ka, koa.
ATTEMPT, V. t., maihe waihe.
AUGER, i., mida-ikih6pike.
AUNT, n., isami, ika, masawis.
AURICLE, n., akulii, apa.
AURORA BOREALIS, n., apaliiada  lia, amasitakoa-amaliati.
AUTUMN, n., mata.   NEXT -, ma  taduk.
AUTUMNAL, adj., matadu.
AWAKE, adj., itsi, hidamitats.
AWL, n., matsito, matsitoictia.
AXE, n., maiptsa, miiptsa.
BABY, n., makadista, makidak gi.
BACK, n., isita. — adv., ipita,
ipitadu.  -  AND FORTH, duma  liita.
BACKBONE, n., isitahidu.
BACKWARD, adv., ipitakoa, ipitalia,
isitakoa, iaitalia.
BACON, n., masiitadalipitsisui, sui.
BAD, adj., idia.
BAD-LANDS, n., amasia, amagipe,
etc.
BADGER, n., 4;maka.
BAG, n., isi.
BAKER, n., mad.liapi-akuhidi.
BALD, adj., ada deaa.
BALL, n.. mautapi.
BAND, n., icke, daki.
BANK, n., amadeta, midideta.
BANNER, n., madakapilii.
BARGE, n., midamati.
BARK, 7., midaisi, midiai [bidisi].
-  v. i., muadaki.   - v.  t., dati.
.1pi.
BARREr, n., midiope-kakiii.
BARTER, V. t., maihu [baihu, wa  ihu].
BASE, n., uti, adufiti. — adj., iaia.
BASIN. n., maatsamidIi.
BASKET,  n., mid aliasi  [bid.aliasi].
BAT, n., isuatiaia.
BATHE, V., midipi, midipike [bi  dipi], dipi dipike.
BATTLEi n., makima.kia.
BAY, adj., tsidisipi.
BEADS, n., akutohi, maaliidulia.
BEAK, n., tsakaka apa.
BEAN, n., amazi.
BEAR, n., dalipitsi. - SKIN, dati  pitsiodalipi. BEARDS CLAW, dali
pitsiiepu. -a uB, dalipitsidaka.
TRACK, dalipitsiti.
216
B F, A P..
B. 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
BEAR.
BEAR, V. t., ki; edede.
BEARD, n., iki.
BEAT, V.t., diki.
BEAUTIFUL, adj., tsaki [sa kits], ite  tsaki.
BEAVER, n., midapa, [bidapa, mira  PA].
BED, n., adutiliapi, itaduliapi, maa.dulia.pi. BEDDING~ uaki.
BEEF, n., mnit6-iduksiti.
BEETLE, n., pe(lakupa'te.
BEFOOL, V. t., kimadulitake, ma  dulitake.
BEFORE, _pep., adv., itekoa, itsika.
BEG, V. t., kadi.
BEGGAR, n., akukadiksa.
BEHIND, adv., ipitadu, ipitakoa.
BEDOLD, V. t., ika, ikada', ikaka.
BELCH, V. i., kipsuki, psuki.
BELIEVE, V. t., idie.
BELL, n., maitamua.
BELOW, prep., adv., miktata, mIik  takoa, utikoa.
BELT, n., maiplasaki, maikipasaki.
BEND, V. t., dutskupi, kip)atskupi,
kipatskupike,  patskupi,  saku  pike.
BENT, part., kipatskupike.
BENUM3, V. t., otsliamike. 
BERDACHE, t., miati.
BESIDE, adv., utikoa.
BESPATTER, V. t., opape.
BEWITCH, V. t., dusku.i
BEYOND,  prep., itaokadu, itaoka  koa, oka, okadul, okakoa.
BID, V. t., iske.
BIG, adj., ictia.
BIGGER, adj., ictia itaokakoa.
BIG-HORN, n,, azictia.
BILLOW, n., mididalii.i.
BIND, v. t., duti.
BIRD, n., tsakaka.
BISECT, v. t., dopahe, dopaheke.
BISON, n., mite, kedapi.
BIT, n., kausta alipi, uetsa iduti.
BONE.
BITE, n., aduda'tsa.  - v. t., dat  sa, datapi [latapi].
BITTER,  adj., adui [elui].
BLACK, adj., sipi, Aipiga.  -PAINT,
amasipisa.
BLACK-BIRb, n., tsakaka sipisa,.
BLACK-DYE-STUFF, n., isipisake.
BLACKEN,  v.  t., s      ipiahe, ipiake.
BLACKENING, part., Aipigadui, ki  Aipigadui.
BLACKFEET INDIANS, t., itsisihi —
.ae.
BLACKING, n., midahupa-ikitsatike.
BLACKISH, adj., sipisadsi.
BLADDER,  n., figikadaHi.
BLANKET, n., itasi, masi, uaki.
BLEACH, V. t., iliotakike, kiataakike.
BLEACHING, part., atahadui, ilio  takadui.
BLEED, V. i., i(lihu.
BLIND, adj.? ista deaa.
BLOOD, n., idi.
BLOODY, adj., iditsaki.
BLOSSO.ll, n., odakap.lki. - v. i.,.
dakap.ki, kidakap.a.ki.
BLOTCHED, adj., pulii.
BLOW, v. t., kadse, katsi.
BLUE; a(dj., tohi. - DYE-STUFF, n.r
itohike, ikitohike.
BLUIISH, adj., tohadsi, tohiga.
BLUFF, n., amadeta, amadetaku  maku, amadetakulialii.
BLUNT, adj., gaauki.
BOAR, n., magiitadalipitsi-kedapi.
BOARD, n1.. midatsIka.
BOAT, n., mati. SAIL-BOAT, hut  simati.
BODKIN n., mat,sitoka.
BODY, n., i:lo (lio, dilio, malio).
BOIL, n., aduitfi(i, adupiia.
BOIL, v. i., midue [bidue]. -,v. t.r,
miduehe, midueke, kimidueke.
BOLD, adj., kiadetsi.
BOLT, it., ikipataki, maikipataki.
BONE, n., hidu.
217 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
CANDLESTICK.
BROTHER, n., iaka (miaka, diaka),
itadu (matadu, ditadu), itametsa
(matametsa, ditametsa), itsuka
(matsuka, ditsuka). -IN-LAW,
ida* ti,  * i,ikii.
BRUISE, n., odaksaki.  - V. t., dak.aki, kidakg.aki.
BucK, n., tsitataki kedapi.
BUCKET, n., midalia.
BUCKSKIN,  U., tsitataki-oddlipi, a  tisia.
BUFFALO, n. See BISON.
BUFFALO-BERRY,  n., mahisi.  -
TREE, mahiaia.
BUFFALO-ROBE,  n., dalipi, itasi,
masi, mite-odalipi [bite-oralipi].
BULKY, adj., titsi.
BULL, n., kedapi.
BULLET, n., adupoadui.
BUNDLE, n., makidaksi.  - v. t. ki  dakoi.
BURN, V. t., adalia, adakiti, ada.
papi.
BURST, V. i., kiduta.
BUTCH1ER, n., akukitahe, -v.,
bak.atsi, kihak.atsi.
BUTTER, n., d'tsimidi-tsida.
BUTTON,,., ikatipe, iwakikatipe,
maikatipe. - v. t., katipe.
Buy, v. t., maihu.
BONNET.
BONNET, n., apoka, mia-apoka.
BooM, n., ammadaki.
BOOT, n., midah,upa  [bidahupa].
BORDERa d,, deta, adudeta.
BosoM,  n., it      m.aki.
BOTTLE,  n., midiaduiiai [bidielui-].
BOTTOM,    n., mikta, uti;  tsuka,
tsuitaokadu, tsuitadotadu, etc.
Bow, n., itadulia, midulia.
BOWELS, n., sipa.
BOWL, n., matsamidikaza.
Box, n., iope, maiope, midaiope,
midiope [bidiope].
BOX-ELDER, n., miteatadike.
Boy, n., makadiatamatse.
BRED, n., adaiduti.    v.  t., dak  tsuti.
BRAIN, n. tsua.ta.
BRANCH, n., adusa         Aa.
BRASS n., uetsa aidi.
BRAVE, n., maadukiadetsi.
BRAVE, adj., kiadetsi.
BREAD,    mada., ihapi, madaliapi
hopi, madaliapitsoki.
BR EAK, V. t., adalioii, daliolii, da
kEIitisk,  Viaitkk.                    CAKE  U. 7aaip-ska
kalioii, liolii, dulioii, paliolii [na  kaliolii, ruiolii], kiadalol ii, kida  kaliolii,  kiduliolii,  kidulioliike,
dakata  [nakata], dupi.
BREAST  n., imaki, a'tsi.
BREECH-CLOTH~,., idiipsaki.
BRETHREN, n., itametsa.
BRIDLE, n., iduti.
BRIGHT, adj., itsitsi, kaditska,
ataise.
BRIGHTEN, V., itsitsike, kaditskake,
kiitsitsike, kikaditskake.
BRING, V. t,  alkhu, iiakhuS  aki  kahe.
BRISTLE, n., hi.
BRITTLE, adj., tapa, tapai.
BROAI) adj., soki, sasuki.
BPWooK, n., azikaza.
[BRoo~, n., masiailia.
BROTH, n., hupa.
218
C.
CACHE, n., amaisi, kohatiiai.
CACTUS, n., patskidia, p.tskidiaoka.
CAKE, n,, mad.iliapi-tsik6a.
CALF, n., daktsidi [naktsidi], mite.
idaka, mitekaza.
CALICO, n., akupuzi, maaiiliipuzi.
CAMBRIC, n., maiiiliiliapi.
CAiP, n., ati, adati.
CANDLE, n., midaiamaliati.
CANDLESTICK,  n.,  nidaiamaliati  io'ki, midaimaliatiioptsati. 
ENGLISHII-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
CA   iOMPANION.
CHIRP, v. i., odaki.
CHOKE, V. t., dota dutskiti, dutapi.
CHOP, v. t.,  dakitsaki [naktsiaki],
dakamitsi, kidaktsaki.
CIRCLE, gi., adukakilii.
CIRCULAR, adj., kakilii.
CLANI, n., matoke.
CLAN n., daki.
CLARIFYr, V. t., dehike, kideliike.
CLAW, nt., tsakaka itsi.
CLAY, it., area: uki.
CLEAN, V. t., duauki, dutskisi hat  sa, ilia kideaa-ke.
CLEAR, adj., delii, oliati.
CLIFF, it., arua daliapeai.
CLIP, V. t., datskiti.
CLOCK, n., inidiik-ikiaki ictia.
CLt,SE, V. t., nm.kipataki.
CLOSE, adj., atse.
CLOTH, 2l., n),a siilitatsi.
CLOTHE T. t., olkata, itulii oklata.
CLOTHES, 91., ilioisi.
CLOTHES-PIN, it.,   maidutskapi,
Iijaituliii-dutska. pi.
CLOIJD, n., apalii, atpalii-adusipisa.
CLOYED, aIdj., liapati, liapatikaa.
CLUB,?I., midakaza-titsi.
COALI n., amaadalia.
COAT, 21., itulii, mats6-itulii.
COBit n., hupa, k6hati-hupa.
COCHINEAL, it., il1i;ike.
CoCK, n., magtiitatsakaka.
COFFEE, it., amazigipiga, maadaha;
midiaipia [.iiinigipiga], matsikoa.
COHERE, V. i., rnakikaditskapa.
COLD, (((Ij., akhapa, hapa, tsidia.
CosIB, It., ikiduliokir inaadaikidu  lioki, maikiidtiolki.     v. t., du  lioki, hidulioki.
COmIBATi n., malimakta.
CO3IE, v. i., hu, aite.
CO'OAZAND, V. t., iskie, ske.
CO,MPANIONr n., idakoe (madakoe,
dlidalkoe), iko'pa (malko'pa, di  ko'pa).:
CANDY.
CANDY,?., imatsikoa-hatski, matsi  koa-puzi.
CANNON, n., inidufilia-aduh6pi-ictia.
CANOE, n., midaduetsa [bidaluetsa].
CAP, n., apoka.
CAPTIVE, n., da'ki.
CAPTURE, v. t., akikabhe, kiakikahe,
dutse, kidutse.
CARESS, V. t., kidalipa.
CARRY, V. a., ki.
CART, n., lialia'tua-midiikaki.
CAT, n., puzikle, itupa.
CATERPILLAR, n., n)idakuduti.
CATKIN, n., masuakaza.
CAVE, n., ama-aduh6pi.
CEASE, V., haka'ta, kilhaka'take.
CEDAR, n., midahopa.
CEMETERY, n., dokteodusa.
CENTRAL, adj., dumatakoa.
CENTRE, n., durpaata ka'ti.
CEREMONY, n., dalipike, paduididi.
CERTAIN, adj., ka'ti, ka'timats.
CHAIR, n., midaiakaki.
CHANGE, V. t., ihake, kiihake, ka  tika.
CHANNEL, U., odamu [onawu].
CHAP, V., adapapihe kiadlapapike.
CHARM, n., hopa, mahopa.
CHEAP, adj., inmasi-kafista.
CHEC(K, V. t., kiliaka'take.
CHECKER, V. t., mnakiapeke.
CHECKERED, adj., m.akiape.
CHEEK, n. dodopa.
CHERRY, I,., matsu.  - TREE, mat  sua.
CHEW, V. t., dasa, duti [ruti].
CHEYENNE INDIANS, n., itasupuzi.
CHICKEN, U., tsitska, masiitatsa  kaka-idaka.
CHIEF, it., mats(etsi.
CHILD, i., daka, idaka, makadista.
CHILL, V. t., hapake, kihapake.
CH/IMNEY,'i., atisi, aduue.
CHIN, U., ika.
CHIPPEWAY INDIANS, U., lialiatua.
219
. - I 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
DAMIAGE.
COWARDLY, adj., kuadetsitats.
COYOTE, n., motsa [lootsa].
CRACK, V. i., duta.
CRACKERS, n., madaliapitsoki.
CROADLEA, n., maidakudsi, maikida  kudsi, makadistaidakudsi.
CRANE, n., apitsa.
CRAZE, V. t., kimadaliapake, mada  Cai,pa     ke.
CRAZY, atDj., madaliapa.
CREASE, n., adulakupi, maadulia  kuipi.
CREEK, n., azik,aza.
CREEP, V. i., miti.
CREE INDIANS, n., sahe.
CRESCEqNT, n., midikidahe.
CIM,VSON, adj.,  hiaadsi.  -  DYai  STUFf, n., ihisakdsike.
CROOKED, adj., sakupi.
CROOKEN, V. t., kiaakupike, ~aku  pihe, saktipike.
CROP, n., ilii.
CROSS, adj., atska.    v. t., ak.alipi~
tadli.
CRow, n., pedetska.
CROwD, v. t., lialiuake, kilialiuake.
CROW INDIANS, n., kiliatsa.
CRY, V. i., inia. To CAUSE TO —J
imiake, kiimiake.
CUB, n., idaka.
Cupr n.?, midiihike.
CUPBOARD, n.? matakiadukiduga.
CURE, V. t., deaake, kideaake, kit  sa.kike, tsakike.
CURLY, adj., gikia.
CURRANT,'n., mitektsatsa.
CUT, V. t., daktsaki, datskiti, idali  pi, pamitsi, patsaki, kidaktsakiJ
kidatskiti, etc.
D.
DAKOTA INDIANS, n., itahatski.
DAM~AGE~ V. t., isiake, kiisiake.
COMPLETE.
COMKPLETE, V. t., kikomihe, kiko   mike.
COMPLETED, part., komi, kowits.
COMIRADE, n.  See COMPANION.
CONFIrm,, n., adudeta, deta. -
v. t., duti.
CONICAL, adj., tsohi, tsuahe.
CONSUHE, V. t., kiadaliake, kiada   kiti, pe.
CONSUMED, part., kiadalia.
CONTAIN, V. t., itski, matu.
CONTEST, V., muakia, makieke.
CONTINUE, V. i., daka, hidakatsa.
CONTRACT, V. t., kikadistake, ki   kaustake.
CONVERSE,  V. t., ikupa-ide, ma   kiide.
CoNvEx, adj., poaduadsi.
CooK, n., akumadihe, maakuma   dihe. - v. t., madihe, otihe,
otike.
COOKED, part., oti.
COOL, v. t., kbatsihe, tsidiake, etc.
COPPER, n., letsahisisi.
COPSE, n., mida-sikia,, mida-sipa.
COPY? v. t., kutski.
CORAL-BERRY,  n., masukaaksu.
-- usi, masukaaikua.
CORD,., asu, matalipi.
CORN, n., hopati, kohati, madaskihe,
matua.  -COB, hupa. -HUSK,
hopatiai. - STALE, lkoh atia. --
MEAL, kohatipi.
CORPSE, n., dokte [nokte],
CORPULENT, adj., idipi.
COST, n., imasi.
COSTLY, adj., imaai-ahfi.
COTTONWOOD,  n., makau  mnaku   kazi.
COUGH, v. i., hua, huaksa.
COUNT, v. t., kidumi.
COUNTRY, n., ama, itama.
COURT, v. t., akape, mia akape.
COVER,n., iitipe, isi, maisi.
Cow, U., mite, masitamite.
220
.. I         )... 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
DAIP.
DAmP, adj., adatskui.
DANCE,  n., makidisi,  paduididi.
- v. i., kidiai.
DARK, adj., ha'pesa, sipisadsi.
DARKEN, V. t., ha'peaeke, kihalpe  seke, aduoktsihe, Aipisadsihe.
DARKENING, part., ha'pesadui, ki  ha'pesadui.
DARKNESS, n., aduoktsi.
DAUB, V. t., ipkiti, opape.
DAUGHTER, n., ika (ka, maka, di  ka).
D)AWN,  n., ata,  atade,  kiduha  kute.
DAY,  n., mape.  BY DAY, mape:
du.
DEAD, adj., te, tets.
DEAF, adj., akulii desa.
DEBASE, V. t., kiisiake.
DECEITFUL, adj., mitapaksa.
DECEIVE, V. t., mitapa  [witapa],
mitapadsi.
DECREASE, V. t., ka(ditake, kau  gtake, kikadiatake, -kikauatake.
DECREASING,  part.,  kadistadui,
kauatadui, kikadiatadui, kikau  Atadui.
DEEP, adj., damu [nawuts].
DEEPEN, V. t., damuke, kidamuke.
DEER, n., tsitasipisa, tsitataki.
DEGENERATING, part., isiadui, kii  siadui.
DEITY, it., itakatetas, itsikamahi  di. 
DELIRIOUS, adj., madaliapa.
DENUDE, V. t., adaliape.
DEPOSIT, V. t., duse, kidusa.
DERIDE, V. t., uati.
DESCEND, V. i., miktata de.
DESERT, n., amaisia.
DESTROY, V. t., kidesake, kitahe.
DETER, V. t., kihaka'take.
DEVOUR, V. t., kiduti [kiruti].
DIE, V. i., te, ta, tehe.
DIFFERENT, adj., iha.
DOWN.
DIRT, )., ama, ilia.
DIRTY, a dj., amatsaki, iliatsaki,
tsadatsaki, kiamatsaki, kiiliatsa
ki.
DIRTY, V. t., amatsakike, iliatsaki  ke, tsadatsakike, kiamatsakike,
etc.
DISCOVER, v. t., odapi, kiodapi.
DISEASE, n., ilioade, mailioade.
DISH, n., matlaki.
DISHONEST, adj., asadikga.
DISLIKE, V. t., ikuipade, iku'padsi,
kidesitats, kiikulpade.
DISLOCATE, V. t., kipguti, pgati.
DISPLEASE,  v. t., dataisiake [nal  taigiake].
DISREGARD, V. t, ikatats.
DISSIPATED, V. t., maduli.pakaa.
DISTANT, adj., tisa.
DISTEND, V. t., dakapuii, kidaka  1)usi.
DISTRESS, V. t., kida'taisiake.
DIVIDE, V. t. — IN TWO, dopake
[nopake]. - IN THREE, damike
[tna.t,Nike]. - IN FOUR, topake,
kitopaheke, kitopake.  -, v. j.,
sasa.
DIVERGE? V. i., liami [1iawi].
DIVORCE, V. t., haheta, hahetake.
DizzY, adj., tsahidumidi.
Do, v., ha, he.
DOE, n., tsitataki mika.
DOG, n., maauka, pedakuduti.
DOG BAND, n., maauka icke.
DOGWOOD, n., matsuotaka.
)COLL, n., makadiatake.
DOLLAR, n., uetsa-duetsa [luetsa].
DOMINOES, n., hiduimakia.
DONE, part., komi [kowi, kowits].
DOOR, n., mide [bide].
DOUBLE, V. t., patskupi.
DOUGH, n., madd.liapi-tsa.
DOVE, n., midaitakupeicetki.
DOwN, adv., miktddu.  [wiktaru],
miktakoa [wiktakoa]~ utikoa.
221 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
DOWNWARD.
DOWNWARD, adv., miktata [wikta  ta], utilia. 
DOZE, v. i., hami(le, hidamide.
DRAG, V. t., duliade.
DRAIN, V. t., daliupi, kidlaliupi.
DREAM, V. i., Inasiade.
DREDGE, V., duto'ti.
DREGS, it., pedi.
DRESS, n., ilioisi.  -  v. t., okata.
DRIED, part., kiudsike.
DRINK7,., Oze.  -  V. t., hi, midihi.
DROP, V. i., pa%ti, kipati.  -  V. t.,
patihe, patike, kipatike.
DROWNED,I) part., tsipak tets. See
tsipi. 
DROWSY, adj., hamicti, hidamicti.
DRUMI,  n., midalia.  -  STICK, mi  daliidiki.
DRUNK, adj., nmadai.apa.
DRY, adj., udsi.  -v. i., udsike,
kiudsike.  -ING, part., udsadui.
ta.
EAST, it., usati.  -  ERN, adv., usa  tikoa.  -  WARD,  u,sitilia, usa  tita.
EAT, v. t., duti, kiduti, pe.
EATER, it., akudfiti.
EBB, V. i., kidamoki, kiduliemi.
EDGE, n., aduaptsa, adudeta, deta.
EGG, n., tsakakadaka.
EIGHT, adIj., dopapi [nopapi].
EIGsT HT, adj., idopapi.
EIGHTHL  Y, adv., idopapidu.
E IGHTEEN,  adj., alipidopa.
EIGHTYp   adj., dopapitika.
ELASTIC, adj., dupupi.   - GUM, n.
idupupi.
ELBOW, n., isp.alii, (mispqabii, di,.pai).
ELEVEN, adj., alipiduetsa [alipi  luetsa].
ELK, n., madoka [maroka].
ELM, n., midai.
ELSEWHIERE, adv., ihadu, ihakoa.
EMACIATEDD adj., liadaliikaa.
EMBERS, n., midahapokga.
E'BRACE, V. t., kidalipa.
EMiBROIDERY, n., adupfidsike, ma  Aiiptse.
E-ERGEI V. i., ate, atehe.
EMETIC  n.: maikad6.
E3IPTY, v. t., kidaliupi, kipaliue.
ENCxAP, V. i., atihe.
ENCHANT, v. t., dugku.
ENcIRCLE, v..t., dutskiti, ialialia.
DUCK, n., miliaka.
DULL, adj., sasuki, soki.  - v. t.,
kisokike.
DUNG, n., aduedi, p)edi.
DURING, adv., du, sedu. -  THE
AUTUIIN, matadu.  - THE COM-        dp
ING ATTUMN, mataduk.  - THE
DAY, mapedu. -  THE NIGHT,
makudu, oktsiadu.  - THE SEA  soN, kadudu.  -  THE SUMMIER,
adedu.  -  THE WINTER, mada  du.
DUSK, n., oktsiade.
DUST, n., midatsapi.
DWELL, V. i., amaki, amakadaki.
DYE, V. t.  — BLACK  sipisake.  -
BLACKISS, sipisadsike, kisipiaad  sike.  -BLUE, tohike, kitohike.
- BLUISH, kitohadsike, kitohisi  ke.  - RED, hisike, kihisike.  -
YELLOW, tsidike, kitsidike.
DYE-STUFF, n.  See names'of differ  ent colors.
DYINOG, art., tade, tadets.
222
ENcinCLF,.
E.
EAGLE, iplioki, i-naiau, tsatsi.
EAR, n., akulii, apa. - OF CO-R-N,
I hopati.
EARLY, adv,, itsikakoa7kidiihaku,  tedu.
EARTH, n., aina.
EARTHWARD, adv., amakoa, ama 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
FINE.
FALL,  n. See  AUTUHN.  -- v.i.
liue, pati, kipati.
FAN,  n.,  maikidlakudi.  -  v.  t.,
dakudi, kidakadi.
FAR,a   adv., tiaa, oka tiAa.
FARee, m'a?., adukati.   - V.  t., ama.
oze.
FAR.IER, it., akuamaoze.
FAST, adj.. hita,  tsoki.
FASTEN, V. t., duti, kitsokike.
FAT, n., sui, tsada. - adj., idipi.
FATHER, t., ate, tatia.
FATIGUE, V. t., daheka'tike, kidahe  kaltike.
FATIGUED, adj., dahekati.
FATTEN, V. t., idipike, kiidipike.
FATTENING, part., idipadui, kiidi  pa dui.
FAWN, n., tsitata.ki idaka.
FEAR, V. t., kie.
FEAST, n., maihadi.
FEATHER, n., hi, tsakakahi. See
QUILLS.
FEED, V. t., kidutike, madutiku.
FEaIALEm, n., adumika, mia, mika,
miikats.
FE:IUR, n.. i(likihidu.
FEW, adj., kauata.
FIBROUS TISSUE, n., matsua, mat.
suapqakiai.
FIELD, n., adukati.
FIERCE, adj., atska, atskakga.
FIFTEEN, adj., alipikiliu.
FIFTEENTH, adj., ialipikiliu.
FIFTH, adj., ikiliu.
FIFTHLY, adv., ikiliudu.
FIFTY, adj., kiluapitika.
FIGHT, n. See BATTLE.    - V. t.,
kiamakia [kiwakia].
FIGURED, adj., puzi.
FILL, V. t., kimaazike, maazihe,
oze.
FIND, V. t., odapi, okipapi.
FINE, adj., tamutii [tawulii], tamu!iidi.,
END.
END, n., ataka, iepu.  At END,.  takakoa.
ENEMY, n., maiha.
ENEMY-WOMAN  BAND, n., maiha  miaicke. 
ENLARGE, V. t., ictiake, kiictiake.
ENOUGH, adv., ahu, komi.
ENRAGE, V. t., kiadeheke.
ENTER, V. t., midedi [bidedi], pi.
ENTIRE, adj., liakaheta.
ENVY, v. t., u,b, uaksa, kind.
EQUAL, adj., maksia,  maksiaka,
Ae,ka. -  NEARLY,   makaiade,
maksiakadsi.  See ALIKE.
EQUALIZE, V. t., kimakseseke, ma.k  seseke, mikaiakake, etc.
ERASE, V. t., adasuki, dusuki, kia  daauke.
ERIINE, n., utsitsa.
EVENING, n., oktsiade, o'pa.. NEXT
-, o'paduk.
EXAMINE. V. t., kikiski.
EXCAVATE, V. t., ho'pike, kiholpike.
EXHAUST,  V. t., kidaliupi, kiko  mike.
EXHIBIT, V. t.,  atehe, ateheke.
EXPOSE, v. t.  kiateheq kiateheke.
EXTEND, V. t., kidakahe.
EXTERMINATE, V. t., kidesake, etsa
kidesake.
EXTERNAL, adj., atasikoa.
EXTINGUISH, V. t., katsi.
EXTRACT,  V. t., dasku, duska,
pasku.
EYE,. n., iSta.  -  LASH, istapi. -
LID, istadalipi.  - WASH, istaoze.
-, WHITE OF, istaduiliotaki.
FACE, n., ite.
FACING,  adv.,  ta.  See  iteakata
and iteamata.
FAIP, adj., lelii, oliati.
223
0
F. 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
FUTURE.
FOOD,  n., maduti.
FOOL, n., madulita.
FOOT, n., itsi. -   PRINT, itsiti.
FOREHEAD,  n., i           liA.
FORENOONN n., midimapedupabide.
FOREST, n., mida. 
FORGET, v. t., kidaliisae.
FORK,    n.,  adu,;taa, aziiepu,aoa,
malipatsati, mika'idutsi, maip.  kade.
FORKED, ac7j., Aasa.
FORMERLY, adv., itsikadii.
FORT,. n., akumakikua ati.
FORTY, aGGj., topapitika.
FORWARD, aidj., adv., itelia, itekoa.
FOUR, num. adj., topa.
FOURTH, num. adj., itopa.
FOURTEEN, htm. adj., alipitopa.
Fox, n., iliolka. - BAND, n., ilioka  icke.     CuB,   iliokadaka.
TRAP, iliokaitipe.
FRAOILE, adj., pidalipa, tapai.
FRAGRANT, adj., iditsitslaki.
GRASS, matsuatsa.
FRECKLED, adj., pulii.
FRENCat-AN, n., masi, masi-kai.
FREsh, adj., tsa.
FRIEND, n., See COMRADE.
FRILL, V. t.. pidieke, kipidieke.
FRILLED, adj., pilie.
FRINGED, adj., daliami.
FROG, n., saaka, saka.
FRUIT, n., makata, matsu.
FRY, v. t., miditi.
FRYING-PAN, n., maimiditi, iduksi.
-tiomsiditi.
FULL, adj., maazi, kimaazi.
FuR? n., aduhi, hi, i.
FURROW, n., aduliatkupi..-  v. t.,
liakupihe, kiliakupike.
FURROWED, adj., liakupi.
FURTHER, adv., itaokadu, okadu~
okak~oa.
FUTURE. See duk, itakuahiduk,
tieduk.
FINGER.
FINGER, n., Aakiadutsamihe, isaki  adutsamihe.  - NAIL, gakiicpu,
isakiicpu.  -  RING, saklrioptsati.
LITTLE -, sakikazi.   MIDDLE
-,  Aakidumatadu.   RING,
sakikazi-utidu.
FINISH, V. t., komihe [kowihe], ki  koomihe.
FIRE, n., midiah,a. - PLACE, aduue.
FIRST, adj., itsika.
FIRSTLY, adv., itsikadu.
FISH, n., mnua.  - v. See ANGLE.
-HOOK, maidutskupi, muaiduts  kupi.  - LINE, muaidutsi.
FIT, V. t., itski.
FIVE, num. adj., kiliu.
FIx,  V. t., kikse.  -  ER., n., akuki  kse.
FLAGOT,                                                 n., madakapilii.
FLAP, n., odakapilii, etadsiodaka  pilii.
FLAT, n., amatsuka.   - adj., tsuka.
FLAY, V. t., daliipi.
FLEE, V. i., kada Lkara].
FLEET, adj., hita, hitats.
FLEETLY, aav., hita, hitaha.
FLESH, n., iduksiti.
FLOAT, v. t., dakapiliike, kidaka  pihike.  - v. i.; dakapilii, kida  kapilii.
FLOOR, U., midatsuka.
FLOUR, n., kohatitapa.
FLOWER, n. and v. i.  See BLOS  SOM.
FLY, n., maapoksa, maapuzi.
FLY, V. i.7 kada, kide, kideakde.
FOAM, n., pulii.  To CAUSE TO  puliike, kipuliike.
FOG, n., pue.
FOGGY, adj., pue, pueksa.
FOLD, V. t., kipamudsi, pamudsi,
patskupi, kidutskupi.
FOND, adj., ohi.
FON1TANEL, n., ikidutata, maikidu  teta.
I
224 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
HALT.
GOOSE, n., mida.  - BAND,  mida   icke.
GOSLING, midaidaka.
GRANDCHILD, n., itamapisa (mata   mapisa, ditamapisa).
GRANDFATHER, n., adutaka.
GRANDMOTHERa n., iku.
GRAPE, n., maVipisa.   -VINE,     ma   sipisaa.
GRASP, n., adalieii.
GRASS, n., mikap [bika'], matsuatsa.
GRATIS adv., isatsa.
GRAVE,  n., dokteoduaa amakoa.
GRAVEL, It., mi'kaza.
GRAY, adj., liota. - ish, ]ioti   sa,.  -  BLANKET,  n., tsesa-ma   si. - HORSE, aku-hotaise.
GREASE, n., tsada. - v., kitsa  datsakike.
GREASY, adj., tsadatsaki.
GREEN, adj., mika'tohisa.
GRIND, V. t., pa, pi, kipa,.
GROOVE, n., aduliakupi.
GROUND, 21., area.
GROUSE, n., tsitska [sitska]. -
GROW, v. i., apadi. - v. t., apa  dike, kiapadike, okipadi.
GROWN, part., apadike.
GULLY, Il., amadakts.aki.
Gui, n., masika,, oduskagkapka.
GUN, n., midulia [bidulia]. - POW.
DER, midatsapi [bidatsapi].
GYpsum, n., madolia.
GAIT, n., odidi.
GANDER, U., mida-k6dapi.
GARLIC, n., mika'uti. 
GARHENT, n, itulii.
GARNISH, V. t., iptsi.
GAR-PIKE, n., muapahatski.
GARRULOUS, adj., idekaa.
GATHER, V. t., hake.
GARTER, n., idikediksa, maidike   diksa.
GAZE, V. i., ika ka'ti.
GET, V. t., dutsi.
GHOST,  n., dokidalii  [nokidalii],
ida,lii.
GIANT, n., akuhatski.
GIRDLE, n., maipasaki.  - v., ki   pasaki, pasaki.
GIRL, I., makadistamia, miakaza.
GIVE, V. t., ku, muk.  -  BACK, ki   ku.
GLAD, adj., da'tatsaki.  - v. t., ki   daltatsakike.
GLASS, n., maikika.
GLEAM, V. i., itsitsi.  - TO CAUSE
TO, V. t., itsitsike, kiitsitsike.
GLISTEN, V. i., kaditska.
GLOBULAR, adj., poaduadsi, poa  dui.
GLOOMY, adj., apaliitatsi.
GLOVE, n., huki.
GLUE, n., maikaditskapa.  -  v.,
kikaditskapake.
GLUTTON, n., akudfitiksa.
Go  V., dakoa, de, koe, kada.  -
OUT, atadi, kiatadi.
GOITRE, n., dotictia [lotictia].
GOLD, n., uetsa, uetsaka'ti.
GONE, part., dets.
GOOD, adj., tsaki, tsakicti, tsakits
[sakits].
GOODISH, adj., tsakadsi.
15
HACK, V. t., dakaptsi.
HAIL, n., mak.alpiptami.
HAIR, n., ada, hi, i.  — Om,  atui  tsati.
HALF, n., adj., itatsu, itatsuhe, tsu%
tsuta.
HALT V. i., hakalti. -imper., lia.
ka'ta. — v. t., kiliaka'tike.
225
GAIT.
G.
H. 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
INCLOSE.
HIT, V. t., diki; aate, kiaate.
HOE, n., am ee.    [-OF BONE, hidta  mae.  - OF IRON, fietsa-amae.
HOG n,  -maiitadal-pitsi.
HOLD, V. t., adalielii,.aki, ki.akie,
optsati, oki.
HOLE, n., aduhopi, maaduhopi.
HOLLOW, adj., hopi, holpits.
HOMrINY, n., makipa.
HORN, n., azi, azilami.
HORSEF, n., itsuaguka, itaguka.
HOT, adj., tsame [tsawets], tsame  ksa.
HOUSE, n., ati.
How, adv., toge. — LOTG AGO,
tuakisedu. -LONG HENCE, tua  kaduk.  --  3ANY, tuami.  -
,quCH, tuaka.
HOWL, V. i., muadaki.
HuH, v. i., hoike.
HUNDRED, adj., pitikictia.
HUNGRY, adj., adiiti.
HUNT, 7. t., kidi, kikidi.
HURRY, v. i., S(di$.
HURT, V., dataki.,
HUSBAND, n., kida, kidag.
HUSK-7 n., hopatiiai, maisi.
HALVE.
HALVE, V. i., kidopake, tsutahe.
HAMmER, n., makidiki.
HAND, n., isaki, saki.
HANDKERCHIEF, n., plietaisi.
HANDLE, n., hupa.
HANG, V. t., ikoki, kiikoki.
HAPPY, adj., da'ta-tsaki.
HARD, adj., tsatsuki, tsoki.
HARDEN, V. t., tsatsukihe, tsatsu  kike, tsokike, kitsokike.
HARDENING, part., tsokadui, kitso  kadui.
HARE, n., itaki, itaksipiga. 
HAS, v., matu.
HASTEN, V. i.; sidisi. -v. t., sidisi  ke? kisidisike.
HAT, n., apoka.
HATCHET, n., maiptsadaka.
HATE,' V. t., iku'pa.H
HAW, n., mamua [mabua]. -TREE,
mamuaa.
HAY, n., mika'udsi.
HE, -pron., i, se.
HEAD,  n.,' atu.  -  ACHE, atuade.
-  DRESS, apoka.
HEAL, V. t., kitsakike.
HEAR, V. t., kikua.
HEART, n., da'ta [nata].
HEAT, n., maade, tsamak.  - v. t.,
tsamehe  [tsawehe], kitsameke,
etc.
HEAVENS, n., apalii.
HEAVY, adj., daktsia [naktsiats].
HEIGHTEN, V. t., makuke, kima  kuke.
H,R_pron., i, ita.  HERS, itamae.
HERON, n., apitsatohi.
HICCOUGH, V. i., hatsakeki.
HIDE, V. t., alioa, ialioe.  - n., oda   lipi.
HIGH, adj., maku.
HILL,  U., amadia, a madeta, ama-.
maku.
HIM, p1ron., i.  - SELF, icki.
HIS, pro., ita, ita-mae.
226
1.
I, pron., ma, mi [wa, ba, wi, bi3.
IcE, n., madulii.
ICICLE, n., imaCduli-icpu.
IGNORANT, adj., v. i., adaliiae.
ILLUmINATE, V. t., kiamaliatike.
IMITATE, V. t.,7 kutski, ikutski.
IMITATOR, n.; maikutskiaa.
IIPorTITNE, v. t., kadiksa, kikadi.
IMPOVEERISH, V. t., kiadiasadsike.
IMPROVE, V. t., kitsakike, tsakike.
IN, prep., amahoka, ka.
INCISE, v. t., idalipi.
INCISION, n., aduidalipi.
INCLOSE, V7. t., kiamah6kake. 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
INCREASE.
INCREASE, V. t., kiahuke, kiictiake.
INDENT, V. t., datapi [latapi].
INDIAN, n., amakadolipaka [ama  kanolipaka]., 
INFERIOR, adj., isia itaokadu.
INFIRM, adj., itsiitats.
INFLATE, V. t., dakapusike [naka  puike], kidakapusike.   -  ED,
dakapuse.
INGENIOUS, adj., kiadetsi.
INHALE, V. t., hli.
INK, n., amasipisa.
INSECT, n., mapoksa.
INSIDE, n., amaho.  -  adj., ama  hoka.
INTERSECT, V. t., dumatitski.
INTOXICATE, V. t., maduliapake.
INVITE, V. t., kikuha.
IRON, n., uetsa, uetsasipisaA.
IT, pron., i, se.
ITCHY, adj., liaka, lidia.  -  TO
MAKE  V. t., liakake, kiliakake,
kiliidiake.
ITSELF, pron., icki.
L.
LACERATE  V. t., adakape, dukapi,
kiadakape.
LADLE, n., azi, azidelie.
LAKE, n., midiictia.
LAME, adj., odidi iia. 
LAND, n., ama.
LAND- SLIDE,   n.,  amadta-tsipiti,
/ima-tsipiti.
LANGUAGE, n., aduiE  de, ide.
LAP, n., isuti.
LARDER, n., madfiti-adukidu.
LARGE, adj., ictia,
LARIAT, n., iduti, matalipi.
LARK, n., im.akaidi [iwaklidi].
LAST, adj., ipita, ipita.du. - FALL,
n., matdaedu.      NIG-HT, oktsi  sedu. --  SUmER; adesedu.
WrNTER madasedu.
LATELY, adv., tata, tatakoa.
JAR, v. t., opsasa.
JEALOUS, adj., idikoamatu, miali  teksa [wialiteksa].
JEWEL, n., apoksa. 
JINGLE, V. i., tsimua.  - v. t., kit  simuake.
JOG, V. t., dapsuti [napsauti].
JOIST, n., adusuka.
JOURNEY, n., didi.
JUICE, n., adumidi.
227
LATELY.
KEY, n., middidugka, midi6peidu  Aka.
KICK, v. t., adaliape, adape, kiada.
liape.
KIDNEY, n., alioka.
KILL, V. t., ta, tahe, kitahe.
KiIND, n., ak u.  WHAT  -? akn  to?
KINDLE, V. t., kadalia.
KINDRED, n., itadolpaka.
KISS, n., ikidatsope, maikidatso.
pe. - V. t., ikidatsope, kidatso
pe.
KITCHEN., n., akumadiheati.
KITTEN, n., puzikedaka.
KNEAD, V. t., dutsuki, kidutsuki.
KNEE, n., tiuaia, ilualia.
KNIFE, n., maetsi [baetsi].
KNIFE-CASE, n.? maetsiiai.
KNOCK, v. t., daktsuti.
KNow, v. t., eke.  See f1 198.
KNUCKLE, n., sakadusuki.
J.
K.
KEEP, V. t., e. I
wits.
KETTLE, n., mida.lia
WILL -, md-. 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
LATHER. 
LATHER, n.  See FOAIM.
LAUGH, V. i. ka', ka'ksa.
LAY, V. t., duma, edede, iiapihe.
LAZY, adj., da'taliepi [na'taliepi].
LEAF, n., midaapa, midapa  [bida
MARRY.
LIVER, n., api     ta.
Lo, t t., ika  ikaka.
LOCK, n., mat.aliii. — v. t., kitso,
kike.
LODGE, n., amate', ati, atitsuahe.
LONESOME, adj., liemi  [liewi], lie  miksa.
LONG, adj., hatski. - AGO, itsika  koa, mate, matekoa. - TILSE
tia, tie.
LOOK, v. t., ika.   BEHIND, ikipa  midi.  - THROUGE, aktseaa, ki  aktsisa.
LOOKING-GLASS, n., maikika.
LOOSEN, v. t., datsipi [latsipi], du.
Aipi.
LosE, V. t., liapihe, liapihekaa.
LOST, part., liapi, liapits.
LOVE, V. t., kidesi, kideta, ohi,
ite...
Low, adj., padopi, padopidi.
LUKEWARH, adj., Aakapi.
LUNGS, n., dalio [nalio].
LYNX, n., itupa, itupapuzi.
pa].
LEAK, V. i., datskati [latskati].
LEAN, adj., liadalii.  - v. i., ikalie,
ipataki.
LEFT, adj., idakisa.  -  SIDE, n.,
aduidakiaa.
LEFT-HANDED PERSON, n., maadu   idakisa.
LEG, n., idiki.  FORE-LEG, ada.
LEGEND, n., mazi.
LEGGINGS, n., itadsi.
LENGTHEN, V. t., hatskike, kihats   kike, kimakuke.  - ING, part.,
hatskadui, kihatskadui.
LESS, adv., itadotadu.
LEVEL, adj., tsuka.
LIAR7 n., akumftapaksa. 
LIBERATE, V. t., kahe.
LICK, V. t., datsipi [latsipi].L
LID, fl., iitipe.
LIE, V. i.,  See DECEIVE.  -DOWN,
.liapi.
LIFT, v. t., duhi.
LIGHT, n., amaliati.  - adj., dakuli   ti, pidalipa.
LIGHTEN, V. t., dakulitike [nakuh   tike], kidakulitike.
LIGHTNING  n., kadicka [karicka].
LIGNITE, n., amaadalia.
LIKE, V. t., ite, kideta, kidesadsi.
LIKE, adj., adv., kuisa, kuisadsi,
kupi, maksese, sese.  To MAKE 
-, v. t., kimakae,eke, kuisake,
etc.
LIP, n., aputi, ideta.
LIQUEFY, v. t., midike, kimidike.
LIQuID adj., miditsi [biditsi].
LIQUOR AMNII, n., dakaadumidi.
LITTLE,  adj., kadista  [karista],
kadistadi, kausta, kaustaalipi.
MAGIC,  it.  See MYSTERY.
MAGPIE,- n. iepe.
MAIDE:N, i., adukidadesa.
MAIZE, n., kohati.
MAKE, V. t., he, hidi, kikaa.
MAIAEtR, n., akuhidi.
MALE, adj., adumats6, adukedapi.
MALLET, n., maupaki, mi'maupa  ki.
MAMMIARY GLAND, n., a'tsi, antsi.
MAN, n., matse, itaka, sikaka.
5]AINDAN INDIANS, n., adalipakoa.
MANEIrNDi n., dolipaka [nolipaka].
-/IANY, adj., ahu.
MARE, n., miika, mikats.
MARIRY) V. t., uahe, uaheke, kida  he.
228
M. 
1MOW, V. t., itskiti.
MUCH, adj., ahu.  So —, hidika.
Mucus,  n., plieta.
MUD, n., tipia.
MUDDY, a., tipiatsaki.
MULE, n., apictia.
NIULTIPLY, V. t., alhuke, kiahuke.
MUSLIN, n., maaiiliiliapi.
MY, _pron., ma, mata.
MYSELF, pron., micki.
M1YSTERIOUS, adj., hopa.
MYSTERY, n., hopadi, mahopa.
ksal.
MIELT, V. t., kimidike, midike.
MEND, V. t., kiksa, kitsakike.
MENDER, n., akukikse.
METAL, n., uetsa.
METEOR, n., icka-p6ti.
MIDDLE, it., dumnata.  - adj., adv.,
dumnatadu.  TOWARD THE -, di  matakoa, dumatatia, dumatata.
MILK, i., a'tsimidi [a'tsibidi].  -
v. t., dutskipi. 
MIMIC,  n.? maikutskiksa.
MINCE, V. t., dakamitsi,  kidaka  mitsi, kipamitsi, pamitsi.
MINE, n., odutsi.  -_pron., mata  mae.
MIINK, n., daktsua [naktsua].
MINNECONJOU INDIANS., midi-                   
kaoze.
MINT, n., hisua.
MINUTE, adj., tamulii [tawulii], ta  muliidi.
MISS, V. t., akitsa, kiakitsa.
MITTEN, n., liuti.
MOCCASIN, n., hupa, itapa.
MODEL, n., ikutski, maikutski.
MOIST, adj., adatskui, adatskuide.
MIOLASSES, n., matsik6a-akutidue.
MONEY, n., uetsa.
MAIOON,., midi [bidi], makumidi,
6ktsimidi.  - FULL, midikakilii.
N.
NAIL, it., uetsa-maictade, i.aakicpu,
,gakiiepu, itsiiepu.     v. t., dak  tade.
NA-IE, it., dazi [nazi], od~'ati.
NARROW, adj., tsua, t-suadsi.    v.
t., kitsuake, tsuake.
N AUSEATE, V. t., kikadeke.
NAUSEATED, adlj., kade, kadeti.
NAVEL, n., itadelipa.
NEAR, adv., atsa, dota, utikoa.
NEARER, adv., dota,dii [lotaru], ita.
dotadu, itadotakoa.
NEARLY, adv. (suffix), de.
NECK~ n., ampa. - LACE, maapi,
maaliidulia. 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
NEEDLE.
'NEEDLE, n., matsito, adupatskada   mi.
NEGRO, n., maMisipisa.
NEST, n., ikisi, tsakakaikisi.
NEW, adj., hida.  A  - THING, n.,
aduhida, maaduhida.
NEXT  adj.  s- sUMMER, n., ade   duk. - WINTER, madaduk.
NIBBLE, V. t., datskapi [latskapi].
NICK, n., adudakaptsi.   -  v. t.,
dakaptsi.
NIGHT, n., maku, oktsi.
NIGHTLY, adv., makudu, oktsiadu.
NINE, num. adj., duetsapi.
NINTH, num. adj., iduetsapi.
NINETEEN, num. adj., alipiduetsa   pi [alipiluetsapi].
NINETY, num. adj., duetsapiapiti   ka.
NIPPLE, n., a'tsiicpu.
No, adv., desa [nesats].
NooN, n., midimapedupahi.
NORTH, n., adj., adv., amnasita, ama   Aitakoa.
NORTHER-N-LIGHT, n., apaliiadalia.
NOSE, n., apa. - BRIDGE OF, apa  adusuka.  - ROOT OF, apaheda   pi.  -WING OF, apadaka.
NOSTRIL, n., apaaduhopi.
NOT,'adv., ta, tats.
NOTCH, n., V.  See NICK.
NOTHING, n., desa, maodesa.
NUMB, adj., otsliami.
NUMERAL, n., makidumi.
NUMERALS.  See page -.
NURSE, V. i. and t., a'tsihi, a'tsi  hike.
OAR, n., ilioki.
OBESE, adj., idipikaa.
OBLIQUELY, adv., dumilia.
OBTAIN, V.-t.7 dutse [rutse], dutsi.
OCHRE, n., amatsidi.
ODOR,  n., aduiditsi, maaduiditsi,
maiditsi.
ODORATE, V. t., iditsike, kiiditsike.
ODOPROUS  adj., iditsi, iditsi matu.
OFFICER,  n., akumakikfia-matse  6tsi.
OIL, n., tsada. - v. t., kiitsatike.
OLD, adj., lie, liie. - MAN, n., ita  kalie.
0N, prep', adv., aka.
ONCE, adv., idu6tsadu.
O.NE, n., adj., duetsa [luetsa].
ONION, n., inika'uti [bika'uti].
ONLY, adii., ta, ta-ts.
OPEN, V. t., dugipi, duske, kidusi
pi.
OPPOSE, v. t., mlakia, kimakia.
OPPOSITE, adv., kuplieda.
ORANGE-COLORED, adj., tsidadsi.
ORDER, v. t., iske.
ORDURE; V., aduedi, pedi.
ORION, n., ickadami.
ORNAXENT, V. t., kipudsi, kipud  sike, kipuzike, mamadaki, pudsi,
pudsike.       -
OTHER, adj., iha, ihats.
OTTER, n., midap6ka [bidapoka].
OUR,  pron., mata.   OuRts, mata  mae.
OURSELVES, _pron., midoki [wiro  ki].
OUT, adv., atazikoa.  To  GO
v., atadi.
OUTSIDE, n., atazi.
OUTWARD, adv., atazilia.
OVER, prep., adv., akoka, hakoka.
OVERTURN, V. t.: kipa'te, pa'te.
OWL, n., hute, itdSkupe.
OWN, adj., mae, itamae.
midakamicka  [bidaka-.
230
OWN.
0.
0, int., u.
OAX, n.,
wicka]. 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
POKE.
PERFORATED, adj., ho'pi, hopits.
PERFUME, n., aduiditsitsaki, maa  duiditsitsaki.
PERSPIRE, V. i., tsamneate (tsawea  tels.)
PERSUADE, V. t., ka(latsike (kara tsike), kikadatsike.
PESTLE, n., maepa ka,  mepaka.
PETRIFY, V. t., kinukke.
PHLOXd n., pedetskaitaaipi-a.
PHAYSICIANS qt., maLi-hopa, matse.
hopa.
PICKe  v. t., kidakapi.
PICTURE i.,    nmamadaki. [mawa  daki.]
PIECE? 1.7 adalpi.
P[LLOWV, n., dalikisi, 6daksisi.
PILLOW-CASE, n., dalikisisi [naliki
PIN, n., matsito-utipoadui.
PINCERS, n.,   U.aidutskapi.
PINCIH V. t., datskapi~ dutskapi.
PINE] n., maatsi, matsi.
PINK, adj., hisi-.mahu-liota.
PIPE, n.~ ikipi.  — STEM, ikipihu  pa.
PITCHFORK,  n., mikaiduTsi.
PLACE it., kuadu, Aedlu (IT 11 47,
50).   -.  t., kiamahokake, ki  duaa, pataki.
PLAIN, n,., teduti [terfitis].
PLANT, V.  t., amaoze. — n., a,
maa.
PLATE~ n., mataki.
PLAY, V. i,., mnakia, midaliaticke.
PLAYINCG-CARDS, n., maim.akieke
ma,iitaim.akieke.
PLEIADES, 1.7 ickalialiua.
PLUC,K7 V. t., dukiti, kidukiti.
PLUT, it., makata.  — TREE, man
kataa.
PLUME, n., mnatslioki, oki.
POINT, nt., icpu.
POISON-VINE, n.~ mailiaka.
POKE, V. t., dutati.
PADLOCK, n., mataliiisa.
PAD-SADDLE, n., matatsidalioke.
PAIN, V. i., ade.  -v. t., adeke,
kiadeke.
PAINT, n., ui.  - v. t., madaki.
PAINTING, n., mamadaki.
PALATE, n., akata;.
PALE, adj., iliotaki, oliati.
PALISADE, n., midaksi.
PAN, n., midakai.  See FRYING  PAN.
PANTALOONS, n., itadsi, masiitad
PARCH, V. t., adaliake, kiadaliake,
kiadapapike.
PARCHED, part., adalia.
PARE, V. t., datskipi [latskipi].
PARFLCHE, it., dalipitsoki.
PARFLPCHE-CASE, n., makiisi.
PART, n., adalipi, kaustaalipi, maa  dalpi, tsu, tsuta, tsutaka.
PAss, v. t., itsauzie,  makiniakada  ha, makimakadahatidie, oda.
PASTE, n., maikaditskapa. - v. t.,
kikaditskapake.
PATH, n., adi [ari].
PAUNCH, n., kilia.
PAWNEE INDIANS, n., tsesadolipa  ka.
PEA, n., amazi.
PEBBLE, n., mi'kaza.
PEG, n., miaictade.
PELICAN, n., apasaki.
PELT, n., dalipi, odalipi.
PEN, n., ufietsa-maiakakasi.
PENCIL, n., maiakakasi, maimada
ki.
PENDANT, n., maitsimua.
PEOPLE, n., dolipaka.
PERFPORATE,  V. t., hopike, kiho  pike.
231
PADLOCK.
P.
Si. 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
POLISH.
POLISH, V. t., kitsatike, tsatike. --
n., maikitsatike.
POHME-BLANCHE, n., ahi'.
PooR, adj., adiasadsi, liadalii.
POPGUN, n., miduliake.
POPLAR, n., midahbadsi-pakp.ksi.
POPLITEAL SPACES n., idikalia.        Q        
PORCUPINE, n., apadi.  - QUILLS,
apadihi. 
POST, n., atutikoaiptsa, aduiptsi,
iptsa, iptsi.
POT, n., midalia [bidalia].
POTATO, n., kaksa, maiitakaksa.
POUCH, n., isi, opeisi.
POUR, V. t., paliue, katike.
POWDER, n., midatsapi.  - HORN,
midatsapiigi.
PRAIRIE, n., amaadatsa, teduti.
PRAIRIE-HEN, n., tsitska [sitska].
PREGNANT, adj., edi-ictia.
PRESENTLY, adV., itekoahi, itekoa  hiduk.
PRESS, V. t., datati, dutapi, duts  kapi.
PRETTY, adj., ite, tsaki.
PRICE, n., imasi.
PRICKLY, adj., lialia.
PRICKLY PEAR, n., patskidia.
PROTRUDE, V. t., kiptsuti, ptsuti.
PSORALEA, n., ahi', ahi'mika.
PULL, V. t., dukidi.
PUMA,   itupaictia.
PUMIPKIN, n., kakui-ictia.
PUNCH, V. t., patskapi.
PUNCTURE, V. t., kipakade, pakade.
PUPIL, n., ista-adusipisa.
PuP, n., masuakaza.
PURULENT, adj., itudi.
PUSH, V. t., adakide, pakide, kia  dakide.
REED.
QUARTER, n., adukitopake. -v.
t., kitopaheke, topaheke, to  pake.
QUENCH, V. t., katsi.
QIJICK, adj.,' liatataki, sidisi.
QUICKEN, V. t., sidisike.
QUIET, V., tsakihamak.
QUILL, n., apadi, apadihi, isu, ka  mic[iau, matslioki, oki.
QUIVER, n., maitaigi.
RABBIT, n., itaki, itaksipisa.
RACE, v. t., tidieke, makiatidieke.
RAID n.I, v p., liade, liadets.
RAINBOW, n., midiapoka.
RAISEl V. t. duhi, kidubi.
RAISIN, n., masipisa.
RAKE,  n., maikiduliadi.  -v. t.,
ki(lutade.
RANCID, adj., puade.
RAPID, adj., liatataki.
RAPIDLY, adv., liatataka,  liatata  kaha.
RAT, n., itahuictia.
RATTLE, v. i., liamua [habua]. -
v. t., liamuake, kiliamuake.
RATTLIESNAKE, n., adutsidiamatu.
RAVEN, n., adiaa, pedetska.
RAVINE,'i.7 amadaktsaki, amaadu  liakupi, datipi.
RAw,  adj., tsa. -   HIDE, it.  See
PARFLCOHE.
RAZE, V. t., dutsiti [rutsiti], kidu  tsiti.
RAZOR, n., maidakakiti.
RECEPTACLE, n., ioki, iope isi, ma  ioki, maiope, maiai.
RED, adj., hisi.
REDDISE, adj., hiaadsi, hisisi.
REDDEN, V. t., hisike, kihisike.
REDDENING: part., kihigiaadui.
REED, n., pupu.
QUADRANGLE, n., adupalii-topa.
232
R.
Q. 
ENGILISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
REFLECTION.
REFLECTION, I., idallili.
REFUSE, V. t., itsa.
RELATION, n., itadolipaka.
RELEASE, V. t., dusa, duse, kahe.
REMEMBER, V. i., kadami, kikada  mi.
RErMIND, V. t., kadamike  kik.da   mike.
REPTILE, n., mapoksa.
RESE,MBLE, V. t., kike.  See ALIKE.
RESOLUTEF, adj., da'tatsoki (na'ta  tsoki).
RETURN V. t., kiku.
RIB, n., duta.
RIBBON, n., mapidalipa.
RIDDLE, V. t., kiho'pike.
RIDE, V. t., kidie, kidumahitatidie.
RIDICULE, V. t.? uati, uatiksa.
RIiGHT, n., idapa.  - adv., idapalia,
idapakoa.
RIND, n., aduaka, aduisi.          i
RING, n.  See FINGER.-RING.   -          -
v. i., tamua.
RIPE, adj., oti.  -- V. t., kiotike, 
otihe, otike.
RISE, V. i., ate, iduhi. 
RIVER, n., azi.  See MOUTH and 
SOURCE.
ROAD, n., adi.
ROAST, V. t., hatsite.
ROBE, i., dalipi, itasi, masi, miteo  dalipi.
RocK, n., mi'.
ROcK, v. t., dakudsi, liakahe kida  kudsi. 
ROIL, V. t., midisake. 
ROLL, V. t., dumudsi, pamudsi; ka- 
ki; ukaki. 
RooF, n., atidutidu.
ROOT, n., uti.ti
RoPE, n., asu, matalipi.
ROSE, n., mitskapa.        BUSH, mi  tskapaa.  -  FLOWER,  mitska  paodakapaki.,
ROT1EN, ad;., pua, puats.
SCORCH.
ROUGE n., iteui.
ROUND, adj., kakilii.        NEARLY,
kakihiide.  -  TO  MAKE       V., ka  kiliike, kikakiliike.
ROUSE, V. t., itsihe.
Row, v. i., lioki (malioki, dalioki).
Row, n. IN A -, daktsike, ki  daktsike.
RUB, v. t., kipakigi, kipatitue.
RUFFLE,? n., adupidie. — adj., pi  die. — v. t., pidieke, kipidieke.
RU-ENl n., kiliaadupidalipa.
RUN, v. i., tidie, makiatidie.
SACRED,  adj., hopa, hopdlats.
SAD, adj., liemikga.
SADDLE, n., dalioke. *
SAGE, n., ilioksttaki, uliimaduti.
SAGE-HENI  n., tsitskaictia.
SALEPRATUS, n., madaliapiikida
kapuai.
SALT, n., amaliota.
SAND, n,, puliaki.       BAR, puliaki  ate.
SAPLING, n., aduokipadi.
SATIATE, V. t.,  l iapatike,  kiliapa.
SATISFY, V. t.,'tike.
SATIATED  liapq.ti, liap.atikma.
SATURATE, V. t., kiad.atskuike.
SAW, n., mnidiial.ati.
SA~V, V. t., ide, heduts, heidekime.
SCABBARD, n., imidiisii.
SCALD~ V. t., otihe.
SCALDED, part., oti, otits.
SCA~, n., adueta [erueta].
SCARED, adj., liopaMi.
SCARLET, adj., hi;i, higi-k,4'ti.
SEENT n., aduiditsi, aduiditsitsaki,
akuiditsitsaki.      v.  t., iditsike,
iditsitsaakike kiiditsitsakike.
SCISSORS, n., maitskiti.
ScoRac, v. t., adapapi, adapapike.
233
S. 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
SLOW.
SHORT, adj., padui, padopi, pado.
pidi.
SHORTEN, V. t., paduike, kipaduike.
SHORTENING, part., paduadui, ki  padopadui.
SHOT, it., adup6adui-kadita.
SHOULDER, n., ida.pa.
SHOULDER, V. i., idagpakipe.
SHOVE,  V.  t., kipkidi,  kiptsuti,
pakidi.
SHOVEL, n. amaid.aliiae.
SHOW, V. t,. atehe, ateheke.
SHUT, V. t., kipataki, makipataki.
SICK7 adj., ilioade.
SIDE, n., adup.tska, tsu, tsuta.
SIGH, V. i., idialii, kiidialii.
SILVER, n., uetsailidtaki.
SINEW,  n., matsua, matsuapakisi.
SINGY V. i., pahi, kipahi.
SINKy V. i., tsipi.    v. t., tsipike,
kitsipike.
SmRIUS, n., iekadehi.
SISTER, n., idu, iku itakisa, itaku,
itamia. - IN-LAW, uaka.
SIT, le. i., amakil kiamaki.
SIx, num. adj., akama.
SIXTH, iakama.
SIXTEEN, adj., alipiakama.
SIXTY, adj., akamaapitika.
SKATE, n., maidaktsadake. —,.
i., daktsadake.
SKEWER, n., maipatsalti.
SKIFF, n., midamati.
SKIN, n.  See PELT and ROBE.
SKULL, n., atfihidu.
SKUNK, n., lioka.
SKY, n., apalii.
SLED, n., maidutsada, midamaidu  tsada.
SLEEP, V. t., hamiy hamiksa, hi  dami.
SLEEPY, adj.,y hamicti, hidamicti,
lioloi.
SLIDE, V. i., dutsada~ kidutsada.
SLOW7 adj., /ma.
SCRAPE.
SCRAPE, v. t., hatsa, kidakakiti.
SCRATCH, V. t., kae, ke, kike; ada  kapi.
SF,AM, n., adukikaki.
SEASON, n., kadu.  IN A, adv.,
kadudu.
SEAT, V. t., amakike, kiamakike.
SECOND, adj., idopa.
SECONDLY, adv., idopadu.
SEE, V. t., ika (1l 201),.kktsisa-.
SEED, n., adutsua.
SEEK, V. t., kidi, kikidi.
SEIZE, V. t., adalieii.
SERVICE-BERRY, n., matsutapa.
SET, V. i., imalipi.
SEVEN, adj., sapua.  -  TH, isapua.
SEVENTEEN, adj., alipisapua.
SEVENTY, adj., gapuapitika.
SEVER, V. t., adatsaki, dutsaki.
SEW, V. t., llkaki.
SHABBY, adj., kuti.
SHAD-BUSH, n., 7  atsutapaa.
SHADE,  n., dalii, daliilii.  -v.,
aduoktsihe.
SHADOW, n., aduoktsi.
SHAKE,  V.  t., liakahe;  adato'ti,
dakato'ti,'kiadato'ti, kipato'ti,
etc. 
SHALLOW, adj., liepi, liepiksa.
SHAME, V. t., itadike, kiitodike.
SHARP, adj., sptse.
SHAVE, V. t., dakakiti, kidakakiti.
SHAWL, n., masid.aliami.
SHE, pron., i, se.
SHEAR, V. t., datskiti.
SHELL, V. t., dasie, daliade.
SHEEP, n.  See BIGHORN.
SHIELD, n., midaki.
SHINE, V. i., amaliati, kaditska.
SHIRT, n.: matse-itulii.
SHIVER, V. i., dada.
SHOAL, n., aduliepi, maaduliepi.
SHOE, n., hupa, itapa.
SHOOT, V., di, tadatodi, ualipi.
SHORE, U., midideta.
234 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
STOIMACH.
SPAN,  n., itakidakahe, sakiitakida  kahe.
SPAN, V. t., kidakahe.
SPILL, V. t., adaliu, liu, paliue.
SPIRIT, n., dalii, idalii, dokidalii.
SPIT, V., akaue, kiakaue, sue.
SPOILING, part., isiadui, kiisiadui.
SPONGE, n., mulidiidaliupi, maimidi  -pike.
SPOOL, 1t., nidaiapi.
SPOON, n., azi, azidelii, azisipisa,
aziuetsa.
SPOTTED, adj., puzi.
SPRNEAD  t, v. t.a, dakahe, kidulia.
SPRING, 2i., maha.
SPaING, V. i., dutsiki, kidatsii.
SPRINKLE, V. t., dutoiti, kidutoti.
SPROUT,  n., aduigamike. -v.  i.,
apadi, iaamike.
SQUARE, 9., adupaliitopa.
SQUAW   n,  miia, amakadolipdka  mia.
SQUEAL~ V. i. daki [naki].
SQUEEZE, V. t., datati, datapi,
dutsklapi, dutskati, kidatati, ki  (latapi, kidutsati.
8QUINT-EYED, adj., igtaduta.
SQUIRT, r. t., datskati.
STAIN~ r. t. See SOIL.
STAR, it., icka.
STARVE, v. t., kiadiitike, kiliada.
liike, kiliadaliikgake,.
STEAL, V. t., agadi.
STEAM, V. i., pue. - BOAT, mati.
*i.a.
STEEP, adj., daia.pegi.
STE3I, It., aduhfipa, hupa.
STENCH, n., aduiditsiigia.
STERNUAI, n., ima.kidu.
STIC(K, It., midakaza. - v. t., da  tsalti, kidatsa'ti, kip.lkade, paka.
de, patsantA. See ADHERE.
STING, v. t., hasisike, kihasiske.
S~NK, v. i., iditsiisia.
STOmIAChYi n., kilia.
SLOWLY.
SLOWLY, adv., hopa, sua, sLiaha.
SMACK, V., datsope.
SMALL.  See LITTLE.  - Pox, ma  liaka.
SMART, V. i., hasisi, kihasisi.
SMASH, V. t., dakata [nakata], ua  lipA.
S~ELL, nl., maaduiditsi, maiditsi.
- v. t., mupi.  - v. i., iditsi.
SMOKE, n., v. i., pie, pieksa.  - v.
t., opehi.               -
SIOOTH, adj., tsutsute.  -  V. t.,
kipkite, kitsutsutike, pakiti.
SMOOTHIING-IRON,  i., maikipkiti,
maituliiikipkiti.
SNAG, ni., midaicpati.
SNAIL, n., maispadurnidi.
SNAKE, it., mapoksa.
SNAP) V. i., adatalipe.
SNEEZE, V. i., ha-ilipi, kihalipi.
SNOw, n., malp~detskistapedi.
v. i., ma'pi, ma'pits.
SNOW-BIRD, I., madadaka.
SNUFF, n., maihalipi.
SOAP, n., maitiduauki [maitiru  suki.]
SOCKET, n., ioki, mai6ki.
SOFT, adj., tapa.
SOFTEN, V. t., tap)ake.
SOIL, V. t., kiawatsakike, kiiliatsa  kike, kitsadatsakike? etc.
SOILED, adj.  See DIRTY. 
SOLDIER, n., akumakikua, masi"  akumakikfia.
SoN, n., idisi.
SONG, n., makipahi.
SOON, adv., itekoahiduk.
SORE.  See  SCAR.  - -v. i., ade,
hasisi.
SouP, n., hupa.
SOUR, adj., adui.  -v. t., aduike.
SOURCE, n., aziiepu.
SOUTH, n., adv., umata, umatalia,
umatakoa, umatata.
Sow, v. t., amaoze.,
i
I
235 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
STONE.
STONE, n., mi', mi'kaza.
STOP, V., haka'ta, liaka'tihe, kilia  ka'tike, opsas,a.
STOPPLE, n., iapati, maiapati.
STOVE, n., uetsa-aduua.
STORE, V. t., kidusa.
STORE-ROOM,  n., adukidusa,  ma  adukidusa.
STRAIGHT, adj., tsamutsi [tsawu  tsi].
STRAIGHTEN, V. t., tsamutsike, tsa  mutsihe, kitsamutsike.  - ING,
part., tsamutsadui.
STRANGLE, V. t., dutskiti.
STRAWBERRY, n., amaalioka.
STRENGTHEN,  V. t., itsiike, kiitsi  ike.
STRIKE, V. t., diki.
STRIPE, V. t., lialiike, kilialiike, ki  puzike, puzike.
STRIPED, adj., puzi.
STRONG, adj., itsii, itsiits.
STROUDING, n., akuhisi.
STURGEON, i., m uapadelii.
SUBORDINATE, n., maiske.
SUCK, V. t., a'tsihi, datsuki.
SUCKLE, V. t., a7tsihike.
SUGAR, n., matsikoa (fr. tsikoa).
SULTRY, adj., adeksa.
SUMMER, n., ade, maade.
SUN,  n., midi  [bidi], mapemidi.
-  RISE, midiate.  -  SET, mIidii  malipi.
SUNDAY, n., mapehopa.
SUNFISH, n., muatsukkl.
SUPPORT, V. t., aksie, kiaksie, oki.
SURFEIT, V. t., kiliapatike, kiliapa  tikaake.
SURROUND, V. t., ialialia, oki, op  tsati.
SURVEY, V. t., ama kikiski.
SWALLOW, n., amasodisa.
SWALLOW, V. t.,, kipe, pe.
SWEEP, V. t., masialia.
SWEET, adj., tsikoa.
TAIL, n., iepe, tsita.
TAINTED, adj., puade.
TAKE, V. t., dutse, kidutse, kuts.
-   BACK,  kudsi.  -  DOWN, du  aipi kidulipi.
TALE, n., m azi.
TALK, it., aduide, ide. -- v. i., ide.
TALL, adj., hatski, maku.
TALLY, V. i., dakaptsihe [nakaptsi de].
TANGLED,  adj., Aikia, Aipe.
TAPrE,I,G, adj., tsobi, tshuahe.
TASSEL, n., okiiepu.
TASTE, V. t., kikiaki.
TATTOO, V. t., pi, kipi.
TATTOOING, n., pi, adupi.
TAWNY, adj, sidi. — TO MAKE, V.
t., sidike, kisidike.
TEA, n., midapa [bidapa].
TEAP, v. t., adalieae, dalieae [la-],
dutlieae dukapi, kiadaliege, kidu  lieae, etc.
TEARS, n., istamida.
TEDIOUSLY, adv., hopa.
TELL, V. t., kime.
TEMIPLE, n., atihopi.
TEN, num. adj., pitika. TENTH, ipi  tika.
236
TEN.
SWr,,ETEN7 V. t.7 ketsikoake, tsiko  ake.
SWELL, V.- i., kipuake, puadui.
SWELL7 TO CAUSE T07 v. kipu  ake, puake.
SWELLING, n., adupua. part.,
kipuadui, puadui.
Swim,'-v. i., midididi [bidiniri].
SWING, n., maikidakudsi. - v. t.,
dakudsi, k-Ldakudsi.
SWOLLEN, adj., pua, puats, katsuka.
SWORD n., midiigi.
SYRINGF., n., maidatskat-i.
T. 
THERE, adv., hiduka, kuadu, sedu,
Aekoa.  -  AREI V., matu.
THICK, adj., tatsi, titsi, titsiksa.
THICKEN, V. t., tatsike, titsike, ki.
tatsike, kititsike.
THICKENING, part., tatsadui, titsa   dui, kitatsadui, kititsadui.
THICKISH, adj., tatsadsi.
THIN, adj., liapi; liadalii.
THINK, V. i. and t., idie.
THIRD, num. adj., idami [inawi].
THIRSTY, adj., udsi.
THIRTY, nhnm. ad'., damiapitika.
THIRTEEN, num. adj., alipidami.
THIS, pron., hidi.  -  MUCH,  adv.,
hidika, hidikats.  - PLACE, hi  dikoa.
THOU, pron., da? di.
THOUSAND,  numn. adj.,  pitikictia  akakodi.
THREAD, n., maikikaki.
THREE, numn. adj., dami [nawi].
THROAT, n., doti [loti].
THROUGH, prep., adv., dumatadu.
THROW, V. t., ise, kipatike, patihe.
THUMB, n., sakita.
THUNDER, n., tahu, tahuidaka.
THUS, adv., hidise, kua.
TICK, n., uakitatsi.
TICKLE, V. t., sasukihe.
ToP, n., icpu.
TORNN, part., dahesi, duil6e, paka
p6.
Toss, v. t., liamike, ki
TOTEM, i., daki.
TOUGH, adj., kamicka
TOWNVARD, 1prep., lia, to
TOWEL, n., maikipakii
TRADE, V. i. See Buv
TR ADER,  n., akumnaihl
TRAIL,;i., adi.
TRAMP, v. i., dakatalii
TRALUPLE, V. t., adatal
TRANSPARENT, adj., d
TRAP, n., itine, maitip
TRAVELLING-PARTY,
TRE31BLE, V. i. See S
TRIANGLE, n., adupa.
TRULY, adv., kalti.
TRy, v. t., maihe [wait
T,UBER, n., kakaa.
Tuci, v. t., opaaa, opa
TumoR,?t., adupua.
TURBID, adcj., midiaa.
TURN, v. t., dumidi,
take.
TURNIP, it., ahi'.
TURTLE, n., mat.aii.
TWTLVE, num. adj., al
TWENTY~ unm. adj., d(
dumilia, ks 
ENGLISH-HIDA SA VOCABULARY.
WHISKEY.
VOMIT, v. i., kalde.
VORPACIOUS, adj., adiitikaa.
TwICE.
TWICE, adv., dopa, dopatsakoa.
TWILIGHT, n., ha'pesede.
TWINKLE, V. i., kaditska.
TWIN, n., dakadutska [nakalu-].
TWIST, V. t., adamidi, dumidi, ki  dumidi, pamidi.
Two,  u. adj., do)pa [n6pats].
WAGON, n., midaikaki.
WAIST, i., hedapi.
WVAIT, v. i., haka'ta.
WAKEN, V. t., itsihe.
WALK, V. i. dide. See GAIT.
WAR,  n., makuakia.ia.
WAR., adj., ade, tsame.
WAUR-PARTY n., n. matsedidi.
WARPING, part., ki.akupadui, ~a.
kup adui.
WAELRIOR, n., akumakikua.
W.sE,  V. t., duauki, dutskisi, kidu  suke, kidutskisi.
WASHING,   n., makidutskiai.
WASP, n., ma.,atskakiditi.
WATCh, it., midiikikiaki [bidi-].
WATER, n., midi.           v.t., midihike.
WATERY, adj., miditsi.
WAVE, n., mididdhiai [bidida.isig].
WAVE, V. I., pato'ti.
WE, pron.,-ma, mi, mido, midoki.
WEARILY, adv., hopa.
WEASEL, it., utsitsa.
WrED, v. t., uahe.
WEDGGE, n., mitsi.
WEEP, v. i., imia, iatamidi p.ti.
WEIGH, V. t., kikiski.
WEIGET, n., maikikiaki.
WELL, adv., tsakihe.
WEST, n., adj., adv., patsati, patsa  tikoa. - WArnD) patsatilia.
WET, adj., adatskui.  - v. t., ad.a  tskuike, kiadatskuike.
WHArT~pron., tapa, taka, takada, to.
WHEN, adv., tuakaduk, tuakasedu.
WHERE, adv., to, todu [toru], toka.,
WHICH, pron., tapa, tape.
WuIP, n., iki.  - v., diki.
WHISKEY, n., midiadai [bidialui].
UDDER, n., a'tsi.
UGLY, adj., isia, iteisia.
UNCLE, n., ate, itadu.
UNDER, prep., miktakoa [wikta-J.
UNDERSTAND, V. t., eke.
UNFOLD, V. t., dakatihe.
UNITE,  V.  t., kiikupake, kidue  tsake.
UNTIE, V. t., (ldaipi, dusipi, dutsipi,
kidutsipi.
UPLAND, n., amaadatsa.
UPON, prep. adv., akoka.
UPRIGHT, n., aduiptgi.
UPSET, V. t., adaliue, liue.
URSA MAJOR,   n., icka i.apua.
Us, pron., mido rmiro, wido].
VALLEY, U., amaliakupi.
VALUE, n., imasi.
VAPOR, n., pue.
VARNISH, n., maikitsatike.
VENISON, n., tsitataki iduksiti.
VENUS, n., ickaictia.
VERMILION, U., ui, iteui.
VERY, adv., ka'ti.
VEST, n., mapat6pe.
VILLAGE, n., ati, ati ahu.
VINE, % magipiaaa.
VIOLIN, n., maaiitamakipahi.
VIRGINIA  CREEPER, n., mahopa  miaitamatsua.
VISIT, v. t., uzie kiuzie, midedi.
i
I
i
238
W.
U.
V. 
ENGLISH-HIDATSA VOCABULARY.
YOURSELVES.
WORSE, adj., isia-ita6kakoa.
WOUND, n., aduu, aduaksaki, oda  ksake.  - v. t. u, daksaki, duka  pi, idalipi, kidakaaki,  kidukapi.
WRAP, V. t., pudsike.
WRINKLE3,,. t., liipike, kiliipike.
WRINKLED, adj., liipi, liipits.
WRIST, n., ikuti.
WRITE, V. i., akakaMi.
WRITING, n., maakaka.i.
WHISPER.
WHISPER, V. i., tsitside.
WHISTLE, n., ikozi. - v. kozi.
WHITE, adj., ataki, ihotaki, oliati.
-- IAN, n., masi.
WHITEN, V. t., iliotakike, kiataki  ke, etc.
WHITE-WASH, n., atiipkiti.
WHITHER adv., tapata, toka, tokta,
tota.
WHO, pron., tape.
WHOLE, adj., liakaheta.
WHOSE, pron.  tapeta, tapeita, ta  peitamae.
WHY, adv., tose.
WIDE, adj., soki.
WIFE, n., itadamia, ua.
WILD, adj., idapudi.
WILLOW, n., mnaliuliisa, midahadsi.
WIND, n., hutsi.
WINDOW,,~., maikika.
WING, n., icpa.
WINK, V. i., istaliulii.
WINTER,  n.,  mada,  tsidie.  Nee
LAST and NEXT.
WITH, prep., api, apika, ikupa.
WOLF, n., mnotsa [botsa], tsesa.
WOLF-BERRY, n., masukaaksu.
WOMAN, n., mia, imiakaza.
WOOD, n., mida [bida].
WORK, V., dahe, kiksa.
WORM, n., hupaakuikutski, mapo  ksa.
WORMWOOD,  n., iliokatlki-akusi  piaa.
YARDSTICK, n., maikutski.
YAWL, n., milamati.
YAWN V. i., ida.
YE, pron., dido [niro].
YEAR, n., mada.  See WNT~ER.
YEAST, n., maahapiikidakapuai.
YELLOW, adj., tsi, tsidi.  -   isi[,
tsidadsi. - DYE, n., itsidike.
-TO MAIK:E, V., kitsidike, tsidi  ke. -TURNING TO, tsidadui.
YES, adv., e, hao.
YESTERDAY, n., hfidisedu.
YONDER, adv., oka.
You, pron., da, di [na, ni].
YOuNG, n., daka, idaka.  -  MAN,
sikaka. -- WOMAN, miakaza.
YOUR,.Pron. di, dita.
YOURS, pron.- ditamae [nitawaets].
YOURSELF, pron., dicki.
YOURSELVES, pron., didoki.
THE END.
239
V.